Easy Dinner Recipes That Anyone Can Cook - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/dinner/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Tue, 03 Feb 2026 21:40:29 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png Easy Dinner Recipes That Anyone Can Cook - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/dinner/ 32 32 25 Date Night Recipes For A Romantic Dinner https://foolproofliving.com/date-night-recipes/ https://foolproofliving.com/date-night-recipes/#respond Tue, 03 Feb 2026 21:22:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85888 I’ve curated these husband-approved favorites, ranging from quick 30-minute dinners to impressive showstoppers, with menu ideas for a classic steakhouse…]]>

I’ve curated these husband-approved favorites, ranging from quick 30-minute dinners to impressive showstoppers, with menu ideas for a classic steakhouse night or an authentic Mediterranean feast.

Whatever your skill level or your schedule, these foolproof, beginner-friendly ideas will help you stop stressing and start celebrating.

How to Choose the Perfect Recipe (My Date Night Philosophy)

Aysegul and her husband from the front view under a tree.

Before we dive into the recipes, I want to share a little secret I’ve learned after 15 years of marriage (and many years of dating before we said “I do”):

A successful date night isn’t actually about the most expensive ingredients or the most elaborate dish. It’s about energy. 

If you spend four hours stressed out over a chicken recipe and end up too tired to even talk to your partner, the recipe failed even if it tasted great.

That is why, below, I’ve curated the lists based on your skill level, dietary restrictions, and time commitment.

To make sure your night is a total success, here are a few rules for a stress-free romantic dinner:

Read the recipe from start to finish first: This is the #1 reason recipes fail! Check dietary requirements and cooking time before you start. I’ve included step-by-step photos and a “how-to” video for each recipe, so take a moment to review them carefully so you know exactly what to expect.

And remember, if you’re a beginner, a “30-minute” meal might take you 45. Give yourself that buffer so you aren’t scrambling.

The “Empty Dishwasher” Rule: It sounds unromantic, but trust me: empty the dishwasher before you start. It’s the best gift you can give yourself because, let’s face it, no one wants a sink full of dirty dishes staring them in the face before the next (fun) part of the night starts!

Match the Meal to Your Day: Be realistic about your energy. If you’ve had a 10-hour workday, don’t pick an “Anniversary Showstopper.” Pick a quicker dinner recipe from the “Weeknight Spark” section instead. Remember, the best recipe is the one that allows you to actually be present with your partner.

Set the Mood: I probably don’t need to say this, but grab some fresh flowers and unscented candles (you want to smell the food, not the wax!). Put on a good playlist. We want the whole vibe, not just the good food.

The First Date Favorites: Impressive Meals with Low-Stakes

These are the low-stress date night recipes I reach for when I want dinner to feel impressive and special without having to spend the entire evening in the kitchen.

If you are nervous about that first date, these recipes are beginner-friendly, ready in less than an hour, and more importantly, designed to help you put an impressive dinner on the table, even if cooking is not your strongest pursuit.

A skillet filled with juicy shrimp, lemon slices, and fresh parsley. This date night food is quick and easy to prepare.

Shrimp Scampi (No Alcohol)

5 from 7 votes
Dietary: Egg-free | Time: 20 mins | Difficulty: Easy
This is one of those dinner date recipes that looks restaurant-level but comes together fast, with minimal prep, and with just one skillet to clean. The classic shrimp scampi recipe is made with wine, but my version uses no alcohol to make it friendly for everyone.
Pro Tip: The key is to prep everything before the shrimp hits the pan, since it cooks in minutes and is best served straight from the skillet while the garlic-lemon butter sauce is fresh.
Try This Recipe

Doner Kebab

4.60 from 5 votes
Dietary: Gluten-free, Egg-free | Time: 35 mins | Difficulty: Intermediate
If you love a fun cooking session with your partner, then this doner kebab recipe is the recipe you need for a hands-on dinner date. It is a great way to take the pressure off and make cooking part of the experience.
That said, you can make it ahead and pop it in the oven right before you are ready to eat. Once it is out of the oven, make the 2-minute tomato butter sauce, drizzle it over the kebab, and enjoy.
Try This Recipe
A large salmon fillet topped with lemon slices and fresh dill, baked in foil for easy cleanup. Great for an easy romantic dinner date.

Oven Baked Sockeye Salmon

5 from 5 votes
Dietary: Dairy-free, Gluten-free, Egg-free | Time: 20 mins | Difficulty: Easy
This baked salmon recipe is a great choice when you want something special that doesn't require constant attention in the kitchen, making it ideal for a relaxed date at home.
The secret is a gentle oven and slightly undercooking the salmon, then letting it rest while you set the table or pour a drink so it stays moist. Serve it with a side of green salad for a quick, easy dinner any seafood lover will enjoy.
Try This Recipe
Grilled chicken breasts topped with thick slices of fresh mozzarella, tomatoes, and basil.

Grilled Caprese Chicken

5 from 1 vote
Dietary: Gluten-free, Egg-free | Time: 35 mins | Difficulty: Easy
This grilled Caprese chicken is my go-to summer date night dinner recipe when I want to please my cheese-loving husband with a quick chicken dinner. I usually marinate the chicken overnight so I can assemble it in minutes while the grill is heating.
It pairs well with a side of pasta or rice, but no matter what you serve it with, be sure to finish it with a lot of torn basil.
Try This Recipe
Cheesy baked ziti with meat sauce in a casserole dish, one of many fun dinner ideas for couples.

Baked Ziti with Ground Beef Sauce

5 from 11 votes
Dietary: Egg-free | Time: 1 hour | Difficulty: Intermediate
This baked ziti is a simple, comforting pasta dish made by layering cooked pasta with ricotta, mozzarella, and a quick ground-beef and tomato sauce, then baking it in the oven. It is fantastic for a pasta lover.
Pro Tip: If time allows, let the meat sauce simmer a little longer to deepen the flavor, then let the oven handle the rest while you set the table and enjoy the moment.
Try This Recipe

Baked Chicken Parm

4.95 from 19 votes
Time: 50 mins | Difficulty: Intermediate
An elevated take on classic chicken Parmesan, skipping the frying yet still delivering crisp, golden chicken with far less mess and cleanup. This is one of my favorite “cooking date” ideas as it is a great recipe to make together.
Pro tip: Set up your breading station before you start so everything flows smoothly. Once the chicken is in the oven, most of the work is done, and you're free to focus on the rest of the dinner date night.
Try This Recipe

Roasted Herb Crusted Rack of Lamb

5 from 5 votes
Dietary: Dairy-free, Gluten-free, Egg-free | Time: 55 mins | Difficulty: Intermediate
If you want a true showstopper that looks far more impressive than the effort it takes, this roasted rack of lamb delivers with just 15-20 minutes of hands-on time.
Made with a handful of simple ingredients, it can be served as a dinner with a side salad or rice or as an appetizer with a glass of wine.
Try This Recipe

French Vegetable Stew – Ratatouille

5 from 2 votes
Dietary: Vegan, Gluten-free| Time: 40 mins | Difficulty: Easy
If you're cooking for non-meat eaters or just want a lighter, veggie-packed date-night meal, the classic French ratatouille is a great option that still feels special.
I love that everything comes together in one pot, and once the veggies are cut up, the rest is pretty much hands-off.
Try This Recipe

The Anniversary Menu: High-Reward Showstoppers

If you prefer date-night cooking ideas that are a little more involved but worth the extra time, this section is for you.

But make no mistake, I made sure to cover all the steps and techniques with beginner-friendly instructions so you can succeed even if it is your first time making the recipe.

Reverse Seared Filet Mignon

No ratings yet
Dietary: Gluten-free, Egg-free | Time: 1h 7 mins | Difficulty: Intermediate
If you're cooking for a meat lover, this is the special anniversary dinner that truly delivers, with tender, evenly cooked steak that feels straight out of a steakhouse.
If achieving the perfect doneness level feels intimidating, let me assure you that reverse searing is a foolproof approach, even if you have never cooked a steak before.
Try This Recipe

Chicken Fricassee

4.97 from 26 votes
Dietary: Egg-free | Time: 50 mins | Difficulty: Intermediate
This one-pan chicken dinner is classic French comfort food made with chicken breasts, mushrooms, and a few other simple everyday ingredients.
You can make it on the day off or a day in advance, then heat it for 10 minutes before serving. Serve it with rice, quinoa, or roasted vegetables for an easy date night meal guaranteed to impress.
Try This Recipe
A close-up of a short rib being drizzled with savory pan sauce, served in a blue bowl over mashed vegetables.

Beer Braised Short Ribs

5 from 2 votes
Dietary: Dairy-free, Egg-free | Time: 3 hours | Difficulty: Advanced
If you are looking for a restaurant-quality dinner, I think this short rib dinner is the best dinner to make for a date. Most versions of this recipe sear the meat in a skillet first, which creates a lot of mess. My version here sears the meat in the oven, then cooks everything in a Dutch oven.
All you need is 20 minutes of hands-on cooking and a bit of know-how for fall-off-the-bone short ribs every single time.
Try This Recipe

Houston’s Copycat Steak Noodle Salad

5 from 7 votes
Dietary: Dairy-free, Egg-free | Time: 6 hours 50 mins | Difficulty: Advanced
Don't let the long total time scare you; there's only about 30 minutes of active prep, and most of it is hands-off marinating that you can easily do the night before.
That head start means all that's left at serving time is a bit of chopping and tossing, giving you a next-level steak salad with tons of crunch and almost no last-minute stress.
Try This Recipe

Whole Roasted Chicken with Potatoes

5 from 12 votes
Dietary: Gluten-free, Dairy-free, Egg-free | Time: 2 hours 15 mins | Difficulty: Intermediate
If you're looking for a simpler yet special chicken dinner, this one-pan roasted herb chicken is a great choice made with just seven ingredients and minimal hands-on time.
Everything cooks together in one pan, so once it's in the oven, the hard work is done, leaving you with extra time for making a quick side dish to turn it into an impressive meal.
Try This Recipe

Roasted Blood Orange Chicken with Fennel

4.94 from 16 votes
Dietary: Dairy-free, Egg-free | Time: 1 hour | Difficulty: Easy
If your partner considers themselves a foodie and you need a next-level anniversary meal, you found the best chicken recipe for a special dinner.
The good news is that you marinate the meat a day in advance, then transfer it to a casserole dish and bake it in the oven. That's it.
Try This Recipe

Zucchini Lasagna

5 from 3 votes
Dietary: Vegetarian, Egg-free | Time: 1 hour 15 mins | Difficulty: Intermediate
This zucchini lasagna swaps pasta for zucchini “noodles,” making it a lighter yet still satisfying dinner that feels thoughtful for a romantic meal.
It is also a great make-ahead option that can easily be made vegan and pairs well with a simple salad, crusty bread, or your favorite protein to round out the meal.
Try This Recipe
Baked ziti with roasted eggplant, a vegetarian-friendly date food option.

Eggplant Baked Ziti

5 from 2 votes
Dietary: Vegetarian, Egg-free | Time: 50 mins | Difficulty: Easy
If your idea of a good meal for a date night is a veggie-packed, cheesy pasta, this eggplant baked ziti delivers just that; it's comfort food at its finest.
This is also a great make-ahead dinner, so you can assemble it earlier in the day and simply bake when you're ready, leaving you more time to prep everything else.
Try This Recipe

Spaghetti Bolognese

4.95 from 17 votes
Dietary: Egg-free | Time: 45 mins | Difficulty: Easy
Who doesn't love a bowl of spaghetti with a saucy meat piled on top, especially when you don't have to spend hours waiting by the stove for it to come together? Serve with garlic bread and a glass of wine, and accept the compliments.
Try This Recipe

The 30-Minute Romantic Meals

These recipes are for those nights when you want to cook something special but don’t have much time to work with.

The date night dinner recipes in this section are all designed to feel intentional while still coming together in about 30 minutes, so you can enjoy a romantic dinner without turning it into a big production.

Marry Me Chicken

5 from 2 votes
Dietary: Egg-free | Time: 30 mins | Difficulty: Easy
This social media viral creamy chicken dinner is popular for a reason. It is creamy, cheesy, and umami-packed thanks to sun-dried tomatoes.
This one-pot, beginner-friendly chicken recipe uses chicken cutlets to reduce prep time. It comes together fast, so make sure to have all the ingredients ready before you start.
Try This Recipe
A bowl of rice topped with sesame-crusted salmon, avocado, edamame, and pickled onions.

Sesame Crusted Salmon Bowl

5 from 3 votes
Dietary: Dairy-free, Egg-free | Time: 30 mins | Difficulty: Easy
This sesame-crusted salmon bowl is a unique date-night dinner idea, especially if your lover is a fan of Asian flavors. Cubed sesame-crusted salmon, seared in a skillet and served over rice with edamame, pickled ginger, and avocado.
Pro tip: To achieve the perfect sear, ensure your skillet is hot before adding the salmon so the sesame seeds toast without overcooking the fish.
Try This Recipe

Hamburger Stroganoff Recipe

5 from 2 votes
Time: 30 mins | Difficulty: Easy
The classic beef stroganoff is time-consuming, but this shortcut version uses ground beef to deliver the same flavor profile on a weeknight. I use fresh mushrooms instead of canned soup to make a homemade, processed-food-free meal.
Try This Recipe

Chicken Pita Wraps

5 from 11 votes
Dietary: Egg-free | Time: 30 mins | Difficulty: Easy
When you are short on time but still want something satisfying, these chicken pita wraps are a quick dinner that feels thoughtful without being too complicated.
Simply roast chicken thighs with a can of drained chickpeas, then serve them on pita bread drizzled with homemade tzatziki sauce.
Try This Recipe
Sliced homemade Caprese pizza, a fun date night recipe to make together.

Caprese Pizza

5 from 10 votes
Dietary: Dairy-free, Egg-free | Time: 29 mins | Difficulty: Easy
If you're cooking for someone who loves Italian food, this Caprese pizza is a classic that feels elevated with just a few simple ingredients and a glass of wine on the side.
Don't even worry about using a pizza stone; I cook it on a regular baking sheet, and it works perfectly.
Try This Recipe
Bow tie pasta topped with spiced ground meat, creamy yogurt, and chili oil drizzled over the top.

Anna Paul’s Turkish Pasta

5 from 11 votes
Dietary: Egg-free | Time: 30 mins | Difficulty: Easy
If you like a little heat, this viral Turkish pasta is one dish I'd recommend making. The spicy butter drizzle is a total “wow” factor that you can easily adjust to your partner's spice tolerance. It is a great date dinner idea if you are serving someone who loves Mediterranean food.
Try This Recipe

Lamb Meatballs

5 from 1 vote
Time: 32 mins | Difficulty: Intermediate
Some people serve these lamb meatballs as an appetizer, but I usually turn them into a meal with rice, a green salad, and some tzatziki on the side.
The good news is that you can make them ahead, pop them in the oven, and enjoy them warm in minutes.
Try This Recipe

Curated Date Night Menus (The Full Experience)

I thought it would be helpful to take the guesswork out of your date night by sharing a few curated menus I have refined in my own kitchen over the last 15 years.

I paired these recipes specifically for how their flavors work together and, more importantly, how the timing flows so you aren’t stuck at the stove while your date is at the table.

The Steakhouse Classic (For the Meat Lovers)

If you’re cooking for a true meat lover, this menu delivers everything you’d expect from a steakhouse dinner at home. 

A collage of four dishes as a part of the steakhouse date night dinner menu.
  • Starter – Caesar Salad: Prep all the salad components ahead of time, but toss the salad with the dressing right before serving so the romaine stays crisp and fresh. Assemble it while the steak is resting.
  • Main – Reverse Sear Filet Mignon: This is the main dish and requires the most time, so start here and let the oven do most of the work. The resting time gives you a window to dress the salad and warm the sides, so everything is ready at the same time.
  • Side – Gold Mashed Potatoes: You can’t have a steak house-style date night dinner without mashed potatoes, and this recipe is my favorite one. You can prepare it while the meat is cooking, so it is nice and creamy when you are ready to serve.
  • Dessert – Almond Chocolate Cake: This is my favorite gluten-free chocolate cake sweetened with maple syrup. Since it needs to cool down, I recommend baking it a day ahead and serving it at room temperature with fresh strawberries on the side.
  • The Wine Pairing: My favorite pairing with steak is a bold Pinot Noir, but a nice Malbec also works beautifully.

The Beginner-Friendly Bistro Menu

This menu is designed for nights when you want everything to feel effortless but still thoughtful. This beginner-friendly menu features recipes that come together quickly and look elegant on the table.

Images of a bistro-style date night dinner menu dishes, ideal for beginner-level cooks.
  • Starter- Burrata Caprese: This is one of those starters that feels luxurious with almost no effort. Slice and assemble tomatoes and tear the burrata into large chunks right before serving so the cheese stays creamy and the tomatoes stay juicy and fresh.
  • Main – Marry Me Chicken: This creamy one-pan chicken dish comes together quickly, so prep your ingredients before you start. Once the seared chicken and the cream mixture are simmering, you can step away and start setting the table. 
  • Dessert – Almond Flour Brownies with Maple Syrup: These brownies are a great gluten and refined sugar-free chocolate dessert that you can bake earlier in the day (or even the day before).  Serve them by themselves or with fresh berries on the side.
  • The Pairing: I would pair this menu with a crisp and zesty Sauvignon Blanc or a full-bodied, buttery Chardonnay.

A Mediterranean-Inspired Date Night Dinner Menu

Growing up in the Mediterranean, we prepared this kind of meal when we wanted a slow dinner we could enjoy at our own pace. It is light yet built around simple, high-quality ingredients, making it a fun, relaxed date night. 

A collage of photos of date night food ideas with Mediterranean dishes.
  • Starter – Mediterranean-Style Hummus: Starting with a shared plate instantly sets the mood, the Mediterranean Style. Make the hummus in advance and serve it with warm pita for a casual start.
  • Main – Lemon Chicken: This is a classic Mediterranean chicken dish with aromatic flavors from plenty of fresh lemon juice and thyme. Once the chicken thighs are seared on the stovetop, add the potatoes, olives, and lemon slices to the pan, then place it in the oven. While that is cooking, you can set the table.
  • Side – Tabbouleh: You can easily make this classic bulgur salad while the chicken is cooking, but if you can plan ahead, I highly recommend making it a day before and serving it chilled with your chicken.
  • Dessert – Mascarpone Stuffed Dates: This is probably the easiest dessert you can make in minutes. Simply stuff a few dates with creamy mascarpone cheese and dip them in chopped pistachios for a colorful finish.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/date-night-recipes/feed/ 0
Smoked Salmon Platter https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-platter/ https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-platter/#respond Wed, 17 Dec 2025 18:10:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85332 Ingredients You’ll Need for a Smoked Salmon Board Most of the ingredients for this platter are easy to find, and…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Whenever I am entertaining friends, I like having a few reliable dishes that don’t require planning ahead or a long list of ingredients. My only rule is that they should offer a nice mix of textures and tastes, like something creamy, something tangy, something fresh, and a little crunch in there too.

Oh, and the food photographer in me wants it to be as colorful as possible.

This simple smoked salmon board checks all those boxes. It is less about exact measurements and more about how you place each ingredient so the whole board feels balanced. Over the years of working with food, I have learned that a few small choices can make something simple look thoughtful on the table. 

My hope is that this guide gives you enough structure to feel confident, while still letting you make it your own.

Ingredients You’ll Need for a Smoked Salmon Board

Most of the ingredients for this platter are easy to find, and you may already have a few of them in your fridge. The goal here isn’t to follow a strict list but to bring together a mix of textures and colors that complement the main ingredient, smoked salmon. 

I’ll walk you through what I used, along with a few substitution ideas, so you can build a board that fits your taste, budget, and whatever is available at your grocery store:

Ingredients in small portions from the top view.

Smoked Salmon

My top choice for this platter is cold-smoked wild salmon, but farm-raised smoked salmon would also work.

While you are in the smoked salmon aisle, you might also see other packaged salmon labeled as lox, gravlax, or even hot-smoked salmon. I’ve also seen flavored options, where smoked salmon is coated with flavorings like mustard, dill, or other fresh herbs.

How are smoked salmon, lox, and gravlax different from each other?

Smoked salmon is cured and then smoked, giving it a gentle smoky taste, whereas lox is cured with salt and not smoked, with a mild, briny taste. Gravlax is similar to lox but cured with dill, sugar, and salt, offering a more herbal taste.

You can use all of those as you are setting up your smoked salmon board. Each kind will offer a slightly different taste and texture, but all of them would work.

How much smoked salmon per person? I usually plan for about 3 ounces (85g) per person. You can always serve less or more, depending on your guests.

What to look for at the store: Use a brand you trust and pay attention to a few qualities:

  • The salmon should have a light natural shine, but it shouldn’t look overly oily. Too much oil often means it wasn’t cured properly.
  • Check the ingredient list. The highest quality smoked salmon will often list only salmon, salt, and smoke. Avoid brands with added colorings, oils, or long lists of hard-to-pronounce preservatives.

Fresh Produce & Vegetables

For the vegetables, I like to keep things simple and easy to find. The goal is to add color, freshness, and a bit of crunch to balance the salmon.

For this smoked salmon tray, I used sliced Persian cucumbers, cherry tomatoes cut in half, and thinly sliced radishes.

While I personally suggest these everyday vegetables, please keep in mind that there is no set rule here. Feel free to use whatever looks good at the store or what you already have in your fridge.

I also like to use fresh herbs to complement the vegetables and add a pop of fresh color to my smoked seafood platter.

Fresh dill is usually the classic pairing with salmon, but chives or parsley work just as well. Just a small handful scattered around the board is more than enough.

Cheese & Eggs

I like adding a soft, creamy element to my smoked salmon board, like soft cheese and eggs, because their textures and flavors pair well with the salmon’s smoky flavors.

Cheese: When it comes to cheese, I prefer soft varieties like cream cheese, feta, and labneh as they are easier to spread on bread or crackers. 

As you can see in the photos, I served my smoked salmon platter with whipped cream cheese, as it is widely available and easy to just scoop into a small bowl. If you want a more flavorful soft cheese, you can pick up a tub of Boursin. 

If you are serving this as an appetizer during the holidays, creme fraiche or mascarpone can be a luxurious addition to your board.

Alternatively, if you want to take things up a notch, you can whip up a batch of my Whipped Feta or even my copycat version of CAVA’s Feta Dip.

Eggs: Hard-boiled eggs are traditional, but soft-boiled eggs work just as well if you like a creamier center. I like to cut them in half, but you can also slice them depending on how you plan to arrange them on your board.

Pickled & Briny Add-Ons

I always include at least one pickled or briny element on my smoked salmon board. The acidity helps cut through the richness of smoked salmon and cream cheese, offering yet another layer of texture and flavor.

  • Capers, pickled onions, olives, or marinated artichokes: Any of these will work. Capers are the classic choice, but pickled red onions add a pretty color, and marinated artichokes bring a Mediterranean touch that pairs surprisingly well with salmon. You can pick one or mix a couple together, depending on what you have on hand.
  • Red onion: Thinly sliced red onion is a common pairing with salmon, but if you don’t love raw onion, you can place scallions in a small bowl or leave them out completely.

Breads & Crackers

I like offering a mix of breads and crackers so guests can build their bites however they like. Feel free to choose two or three options that you enjoy. Really, anything sturdy enough to spread with whipped cream cheese and hold the salmon and toppings will work.

You don’t need a large variety, but having a few different textures makes the board feel more elevated.

  • Bagels and bread: Mini bagels are always a hit, especially when you include plain, everything, or sesame. Thinly sliced and lightly toasted French baguette or rye bread are great options as well.
  • Crackers: I usually include a few types. Bagel chips (I love the ones from Stacy’s), assorted crackers, or even pita chips work well. If you or your guests need gluten-free options, my Homemade Seed Crackers are a perfect choice, or get your favorite gluten-free cracker from the store.

Drinks & Wine Pairings (Optional)

I think we can all agree that you can’t serve a smoked fish platter like this without serving some drinks. It is optional, but below are a few of my favorites:

  • Dry white wine: A chilled Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Grigio works beautifully. Both cut through the richness of the salmon without overpowering it.
  • Sparkling wine: Prosecco or Champagne are great options for a celebratory Mother’s Day brunch or a Christmas holiday gathering.
  • Non-alcoholic: Sparkling water with a slice of lemon or lime is my go-to, but any citrusy or herbal sparkling drink works well here.

How to Assemble a Smoked Salmon Platter

Think of these steps as a little guidance rather than strict rules. There is no right or wrong way here; these steps are mainly to help you keep everything looking balanced.

Here’s how I usually put the platter together so it feels thoughtfully arranged:

Steps showing how to arrange cream cheese, capers, and smoked salmon on a platter.

Step 1 – Start with the bowls: Begin by placing the whipped cream cheese in a medium bowl and the capers in a small one, then set them on your platter. I like to place the smaller bowl just to the right and slightly under the cream cheese, so it doesn’t feel crowded. 

Starting with the bowls will give you anchor points, which makes it easier to fill in the rest of the platter without everything sliding around. It also adds height, making the board feel more styled and intentional.

Step 2 – Add the salmon: Arrange the salmon in loose folds or ribbons on each side of the bowls, slightly off-center. I like to set them so that each piece is visible (rather than on top of each other), so your guests can easily serve themselves.

Keep in mind that we are not aiming for perfection here. Try to leave a little space around the edges to make room for the vegetables and keep the platter from looking too packed. 

A collage of images showing how to make a smoked salmon platter appetizer.

Step 3 – Layer in the vegetables: Tuck the cucumber slices, cherry tomatoes, radishes, olives, and red onions around the salmon. Think about color as you go. If you place two vegetables of the same color side by side, swap one with something with a different color or texture.

This simple trick keeps the platter from looking flat and makes it feel brighter without needing more ingredients. 

Step 4 – Add the eggs: Scatter the halved eggs on both ends of the platter. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with Everything but the Bagel seasoning (or simple salt and black pepper) so that they are properly seasoned.

Smoked salmon appetizer platter arranged with vegetables and cheese from the top view.

Step 5 – Finish with lemon and herbs and serve: Tuck in a few lemon wedges and sprigs of fresh dill to complete the whole platter. Lastly, serve the platter with toasted baguette slices or your favorite crackers on the side so everyone can build their own bites.

Expert Tips for Success

Color and texture balance: Spread out the colorful ingredients for visual appeal. I also like mixing different textures. So doing something crisp, something creamy, something briny, so every bite feels interesting.

Use small bowls: There is no set rule here, but I like to place creamy and liquid-y items like cheese and sauces (if using) in small bowls on the plate. However, as you are choosing your bowls, keep the size of your platter in mind. You do not want them to take over the whole platter.

Don’t forget utensils for serving: Be sure to place a butter knife next to the cream cheese for spreading and a small serving tong (or a small fork) by the smoked salmon so people can help themselves.

Serve with small plates: This makes it easier for guests to build their own bites and keeps the platter looking tidy for longer.

Have extra vegetables ready: If you’re hosting a larger group, keep a small stash of sliced cucumbers, tomatoes, or radishes in the fridge. You can quickly replenish the platter without stopping to prep more food.

Keep food safety in mind: Because smoked salmon is a perishable protein, I try not to leave it out at room temperature for more than 2 hours. If you’re serving this outdoors or in warm weather, shorten that time a bit. I prefer to replenish with fresh slices rather than leaving the entire package out at once.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Smoked salmon platter from the top view.
Print

Smoked Salmon Platter Recipe

This smoked salmon platter is an easy-to-assemble appetizer great for any party, whether it is a brunch or holiday gathering. Made with store-bought smoked salmon, crisp everyday vegetables, creamy whipped cream cheese, and briny olives and capers, it’s a showstopping centerpiece you can put together in 20 minutes. Serve with crackers or toasted bread so guests can build their own bites.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 521kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 oz whipped cream cheese
  • ¼ cup capers drained
  • 12 oz smoked salmon wild-caught, preferably
  • 2 Persian cucumbers sliced
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 3 radishes sliced thinly
  • ½ cup olives black, green, or a combination of both
  • ½ red onion sliced thinly – pickled onions
  • 4 hard-boiled eggs cut in half lengthwise
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon Everything but the Bagel seasoning optional (or just salt and pepper)
  • 4 slices lemon
  • ½ cup fresh dill optional
  • 8-10 slices French baguette toasted and/or crackers to serve

Instructions

  • Put the whipped cream cheese in a medium-sized bowl and capers in a small bowl. Arrange them on a large oval platter (or a board). I like to place the smaller bowl of capers to the right of the cream cheese bowl, slightly lower towards the top of the platter.
  • Place the salmon slightly off-center, fanned or folded into loose ribbons. Leave a little space around the edges to tuck other items in later.
  • Arrange the sliced cucumbers, cherry tomatoes, radishes, olives, and red onions around the salmon.
  • Scatter the halved hard-boiled eggs on both ends of the platter. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with Everything but the Bagel seasoning.
  • Garnish with lemon slices and fresh dill.
  • Serve with a toasted baguette or crackers on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: I usually serve 3 oz (85g) of smoked salmon per person, so this recipe serves 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • How long does a salmon platter stay fresh? Once assembled, it is best to consume it within two hours for food safety. It is best to take out just enough and replenish as needed. I like to keep extra salmon and veggies ready in the fridge and add to my board throughout the evening.

Nutrition

Calories: 521kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 235mg | Sodium: 1790mg | Potassium: 543mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1463IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 169mg | Iron: 5mg

Make-Ahead Instructions and Storing Leftovers

How to make ahead: If you want to make this smoked salmon platter ahead of time, you can prepare most of it a few hours in advance, which is especially helpful if you’re hosting. Simply:

  • Prep all the components: Slice the vegetables, boil the eggs, and gather the pickled items in advance. Arrange everything on the platter, then cover it tightly with plastic wrap and refrigerate.
  • Add the salmon right before serving: I like to open the smoked salmon at the very last minute before serving so it stays fresh.

How to store leftovers: If you have leftovers, store each component in separate airtight containers. 

Smoked salmon is perishable, so aim to eat it within 24 hours. The vegetables, herbs, and pickled items usually last a bit longer, but I prefer consuming everything within a day or two.

How to use leftover salmon: Leftover salmon (and vegetables) is great to add into eggs, into a simple green salad, or tucked into a wrap for an easy lunch the next day so nothing is wasted.

FAQs

How much smoked salmon should I buy for a party platter?

If you are serving it as an appetizer, I recommend buying 2-3 oz (57-85g) of smoked salmon per person; if it is your main meal, it is best to go for 4-5 oz (114-142g) per person.

Can I make a smoked salmon platter the night before?

You can prep most of the ingredients ahead of time, but I prefer to open the salmon right before serving so it stays fresh. You can slice the vegetables, boil the eggs, and set aside any pickled items the day before. When you’re ready to serve, all you have to do is assemble the board.

What wine or drinks pair well with smoked salmon?

Crisp, light drinks complement the richness of salmon best. Dry white wines like Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Grigio are classic, but if you are serving them for a special occasion, something festive like Prosecco, Cava, or Champagne also works well. For a non-alcoholic option, I like serving it with a flavored sparkling water.

More Easy Appetizer Recipes

Chances are, you are here because you need an easy yet delicious appetizer. The good news is that we have plenty of those on this website. Below are a few more easy appetizer recipes I think you might also like:

  • If you want another beautiful board that comes together with simple ingredients, my Meat and Cheese Platter walks you through everything from choosing the best meats and cheeses to arranging them to make the board feel balanced and inviting. 
  • For something quick and crowd-pleasing, my Olive Oil Bread Dip takes just a few minutes to make and is the perfect restaurant-style appetizer to set out with warm bread. 
  • And if you’re looking for a fun, make-ahead option, my Baked Goat Cheese Balls are crisp on the outside and creamy inside. I usually make a batch, keep them in the freezer, and bake them right before my guests arrive.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-platter/feed/ 0
Stuffed Onions with Ground Beef and Rice https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/#respond Wed, 10 Dec 2025 15:27:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85205 Ingredients You’ll Need If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, our holiday tables looked a little different than the ones we have here in the US. Kebabs were always on the menu, but whenever my mom wanted to make something special, she made these ground beef stuffed onions, or soğan dolması as we call it.

It has been years since I last made them, but seeing their recent popularity on social media made me pull out my mom’s handwritten notes and bring this recipe back to life.

Here are a few things that make this version special:

  • It has roots in Turkish cooking. There are many versions of stuffed onions across the Mediterranean and the Middle East, but the Turkish style uses pomegranate molasses to give the dish a gentle, sweet-and-tangy balance.
  • The ingredients are simple. Pomegranate molasses might sound unfamiliar, but most grocery stores now carry it. Everything else is a pantry staple, and I included plenty of substitutions so you can make it work with what you have on hand.
  • It looks impressive, but it is easier than it seems. Once you soften the onions and get the hang of rolling them, the rest of the process is surprisingly approachable and very forgiving.

If you have never made stuffed onions before, I think you will be pleasantly surprised by how doable this dish actually is.

Ingredients You’ll Need

If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a bit. As I worked through each round, I learned a few things about choosing the right ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The exact measurements are in the recipe card below, but these are the notes I kept from all that testing:

Onions: Look for onions that are firm, fresh, and heavy for their size. Yellow onions work beautifully because they naturally become sweeter as they cook, but Vidalia onions and Walla Walla onions will also work if you want an even milder flavor. Red onions are also an option, but stuffed red onions are slightly sweeter than yellow onions.

Pro tip: In the recipe card, you’ll see four medium onions. If you’re making this for the first time, go ahead and buy one extra just in case. Depending on the size, four to five onions usually give me about 20 to 22 usable layers, which is right around what you’ll need for this stuffed onion recipe.

Ground beef: Fat equals flavor, so I like using 85/15 ground beef because it stays juicy and tender. If you prefer something richer, use 80/20 ground beef. 

You can also use lamb if you like, or half lamb and half beef, which is pretty traditional. If you are looking for a lighter alternative, though not traditional, ground chicken would also work, but be aware that it would have a slightly different flavor profile.

White rice: I’m using long-grain white rice here, the everyday enriched kind that you can find in most grocery stores. 

My mom always rinsed the rice under cold water until it ran clear, so I do that too, but I know some people prefer not to wash their rice, and that’s perfectly fine.

Some people soak their rice before using it, which helps it cook a little faster, but since we are using a rather small amount, I do not think that it is necessary. 

Alternatively, medium bulgur wheat can be a good substitute for rice. It would have a distinct earthy flavor profile, but it would still be delicious.

Pomegranate molasses: Can you make it without it? You surely can. But, should you? Absolutely not, because pomegranate molasses takes these stuffed onions to another level, giving them the signature slightly sweet-and-sour taste. So, do not skip it.

Pro Tip: When shopping for it, look for a brand that uses 100% pomegranate juice and no added sugars. If you can’t find it in your local grocery stores’ Middle Eastern section, look for it online. My favorite one is this Pomegranate Molasses.

Red pepper paste: This is known as biber salçası in Turkish cooking. You can find mild or hot versions, and both work here. If you can’t find it, you can use an equal amount of tomato paste as a substitute, and it will still be delicious.

Most Middle Eastern supermarkets carry it, but if you can’t find it there, you can buy it online. I like Oncu Turkish Mild Pepper Paste, which has great depth without being overly spicy.

Spices: This part of the recipe is the most flexible, and you can get as creative as you want. I use ground cumin, dried mint, black pepper, and red pepper flakes for a little heat.

If you can’t get your hands on dried mint, you can omit using it or use a tablespoon of chopped fresh mint instead.

How to Make Stuffed Onions

If this is your first time making stuffed onions with meat, and it looks like a lot of work, let me assure you, it is not. Once you start stuffing and rolling your first couple of onions, you’ll see quickly that the whole process is actually quite simple.

Below, I am sharing every step of the process with the little things I learned from my mom and from making this Mediterranean dish over the years for my own family:

A collage of images showing the preparation of the onions to make stuffed onions.

Step 1 – Prep the onions: If there’s one part to pay a little extra attention to, it’s this step. We’re trying to separate the layers in one piece as much as we can. Even if a few tear, don’t worry, they still work just fine once they’re stuffed.

Start by cutting off both ends of each onion, peeling the outer skin, and making a single straight cut down to the center without slicing all the way through. Doing this helps the layers loosen easily after boiling. Use a sharp knife here to make it easier on yourself.

Step 2 – Boil the onions: Add the onions to a large pot of water, bring it to a boil, and let it simmer for about 15 minutes.  You don’t want them overly soft, just soft enough that they don’t rip when you start separating the layers later. 

A collage of images showing the onion layers and the beef and rice filling.

Step 3 – Let them cool and separate the layers: Spread the onions out on a plate and let them cool on the counter.

Pro Tip: It takes a while to cool down, especially the inner layers. If you are short on time, you can place them in a colander and run them under cold tap water to speed up cooling. However, it is imperative that you let them drain properly before you start stuffing and rolling them.

When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it. You should have about 20-22 onion layers in the end. 

As you peel off each layer, you’ll notice a thin membrane. If you have the time, remove it; it helps the onions cook more evenly and prevents any chewiness. But if you’re in a pinch, you can skip this step. I’ve made this dish plenty of times, leaving the membrane on, and it still turns out great.

As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the onion cores. Don’t throw them out. We’ll use them in the filling, so put them in a large bowl.

Step 4 – Mix the filling: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C), and while it heats, make the filling. Add the ground beef, rice, red pepper paste, tomato paste, all of the spices and seasoning, pomegranate molasses, and parsley to the bowl with the chopped onion cores.

Using clean hands, give it a good mix so that everything is evenly combined. You’re looking for a mixture that feels slightly sticky and moist but holds together when you press it between your fingers. 

Step 5 – Roll each layer into a little stuffed onion (aka dolma): Place about 1 ½ tablespoons of filling inside each layer and roll it tightly.

Pro Tip: As you stuff and roll, you’ll see that the very outermost layers of the onion are longer than the inner layers. I find that stuffed onions made with these longer layers are a bit chewy, so I cut them in half. This way, all layers are roughly the same size, and every stuffed onion tastes the same after everything is baked.

Stuffed onion in a skillet with the sauce.

Step 6 – Arrange them in the pan: I am using a 3 ½-quart cast iron skillet, but a large casserole dish would also work well. 

Place the stuffed onions in a spiral, starting from the outer edge, tucking each one right up against the next.

You want them close enough to support each other without squeezing them too tightly. In my 12-inch pan, depending on the size of my onions, I can usually fit 18-22 stuffed onions in one spiral layer.

Step 7 – Make the sauce: In a measuring cup, combine olive oil, pomegranate molasses, tomato paste, red pepper paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water. Whisk until everything dissolves. 

Pour the sauce right over the onions. You can cover the pan with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.

Pro Tip: During my recipe testing, I kept thinking the sauce looked like too much. It isn’t. You need that liquid to help the onions and filling cook slowly and evenly, and most of it evaporates in the oven, leaving just the right amount behind.

Stuffed roasted before and after they are baked.

Step 8 – Bake: Place the onions in the oven, covered, for about 30 minutes to soften all the way through. Then uncover the dish and let them brown and caramelize around the edges for another 20 minutes or so.

You’ll see that the remaining liquid will be thicker and reduced almost in half.

Step 9 – Finish with fresh parsley and serve: I love adding a handful of parsley at the end to brighten the entire dish. Serve your baked stuffed onions warm, with extra sauce spooned over the top.

Expert Tips From My Mediterranean Kitchen

Stuffed roasted onions look fancy, but once you understand a few small techniques, the whole process becomes much easier (and more enjoyable).

Here are a few lessons I learned during my recipe testing, along with a few things I learned watching my mom make these when I was growing up in Türkiye.

Don’t over-boil the onions: Keep a close eye on them once they start boiling. Let them simmer just until they become soft enough to bend, usually around 15 minutes. If you cook them too long, the layers become mushy and tear easily when you try to separate them. 

Cool the onions before handling: Letting the onions cool takes some time. If you are in a pinch, you can run them under cold water to speed things up. However, it is imperative that you drain them properly before stuffing.

It is okay to cut long onion layers: The outer layers of the onion are sometimes too long for rolling. If they are, simply slice them in half. Too much onion wrapping around the filling can become chewy after baking.

You do not need extra oil: Some versions of this recipe online (especially on social media) add additional (between ¼ cup to ½ cup) olive oil to the filling. I tested this recipe both ways and did not think it was necessary, especially if you are using 85/15 ground meat.

That said, if you’re using leaner meat, feel free to add ¼ cup olive oil to keep the filling tender and moist.

Use boiling or hot tap water for the sauce: When making the sauce, it is hard to dissolve everything with cold (or even room temperature) water, so I recommend using hot water to make it easier on yourself. 

Use parchment paper or foil to cover: Most Turkish cooks use parchment paper to cover the dish. You need to cut it so it covers the entire surface and stays put. However, aluminum foil can also be used.

Ground beef stuffed onions in a skillet from the top view.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Beef stuffed onions garnished with parsley from the top view.
Print

Stuffed Onions Recipe

This Baked Ground Beef Stuffed Onions recipe is a showstopping main dish made with tender onion layers stuffed with a beef-and-rice filling. Everything bakes in a sweet-tangy pomegranate molasses sauce that caramelizes beautifully in the oven.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Cooling time (for Onions) 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 493kcal

Ingredients

For The Onions

  • 4 large onions ~ 2 ½ lbs
  • Salt

For The Filling

  • ½ lbs ground beef 85-15
  • ½ cup white rice rinsed under hot tap water
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • ½ teaspoon dried mint optional
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes Urfa or Aleppo pepper, optional
  • 1 cup chopped fresh parsley plus more for garnish

For The Sauce

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 ½ cups boiling water or hot tap water

Instructions

  • Cut both ends of the onion and peel them one by one. Slice halfway through to the center without cutting all the way.
  • Fill a medium-sized saucepan with water and add the onions over medium heat. Bring to a boil and simmer for 15 minutes. The leaves will soften, and separate a bit.
  • Using a slotted spoon, carefully remove the onions from the boiling water and transfer them to a plate, and let them cool.
  • When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it, and discard the thin membrane as needed. As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the cores of the onions. Set them aside; we’ll use them in the filling.
  • You should have about 20-22 layers of onions in the end. Set them aside.
  • Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • While the oven is heating, make the filling. Into a mixing bowl, place ground beef, white rice, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, kosher salt, black pepper, ground cumin, allspice, dried mint, red pepper flakes, and chopped fresh parsley.
  • Chop the reserved onion cores and add them to the bowl. Give it a good mix to ensure everything is fully incorporated.
  • When it is time to stuff, fill each layer of the onion with a tablespoon of the meat filling, then roll tightly. Repeat this process for the remaining onion layers, then arrange them in a spiral pattern in a large skillet or casserole dish.
  • To make the sauce, whisk together olive oil, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water in a measuring cup until combined.
  • Carefully pour the sauce over the stuffed onions. You can cover it with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.
  • Bake in the oven for 30 minutes, then remove the parchment paper and continue baking for an additional 20 minutes, or until onions turn golden brown.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 stuffed onions, which is ideal for serving 4 adults, with each adult eating 4-5 stuffed onions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Prep the onions and the filling. Stuff and roll the onions and arrange them in a casserole or skillet. Cover tightly and keep in the fridge for up to 24 hours. When ready to cook, make the sauce and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 1596IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 4mg

What to Serve With Stuffed Onions

So you’ve made your beautiful stuffed baked onions. They’re tender, aromatic, and perfectly seasoned. But what should you serve alongside them to turn this into a complete meal?

Below are a few traditional and Mediterranean-inspired pairings to help you serve them the way they’re enjoyed across Türkiye:

Pair them with a cool yogurt sauce: A creamy yogurt sauce is one of the most classic pairings to dolma-style dishes. My Yogurt Dill Sauce adds a bright, herby note with lemon and fresh dill, while my Tzatziki Sauce Recipe is a classic pairing with thick Greek yogurt, cucumber, and garlic. 

Add a refreshing salad: A crisp salad never disappoints. Turkish Shepherd Salad is a traditional go-to with juicy tomatoes, cucumbers, and herbs, especially in the summer months. If you want something a bit more herby, Tabbouleh is another option with lots of fresh herbs.

Serve with rice or pilaf: To make this a little more filling, pair your stuffed onions with a starchy side dish. If you want a Turkish side, my Bulgur Pilaf is a classic, or try my Vermicelli Rice, another staple you’ll often see served alongside dishes like this in many Mediterranean restaurants. And if you want a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa brings a fresh, zesty note without overpowering the main dish.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat 

One of the things I love most about this stuffed onion recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it tastes better the next day.  The flavors magically deepen as they sit, which makes it an ideal recipe for make-ahead dinners, holiday prep, or easy leftovers. 

Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead: You have two make-ahead options:

  • You can prepare, stuff, and roll all the onions, arrange them in your pan, and refrigerate them unbaked, without the sauce, for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to cook, simply mix the tomato sauce, pour it over the onions, and bake as directed.
  • Alternatively, you can bake them completely a day ahead. Let them cool, cover tightly, and refrigerate. Just pop them in the oven to warm thoroughly, sprinkle with fresh herbs, and serve!

Storage: Once baked, let the stuffed onions cool completely before storing. Transfer them to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 4 days. 

Reheat: Reheat the stuffed onions in a 350°F (177°C) oven, loosely covered with parchment or foil, for 10-15 minutes, or just until warmed through. You can also microwave them if needed, but the oven keeps the texture softer and more consistent.

Freezing: Stuffed onions freeze very well. Once completely cooled, place them in an airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months. For the best texture, thaw them overnight in the refrigerator, then reheat.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe vegetarian?

Yes, you can make a vegetarian version. Simply increase the rice to 2 cups and add 3 tablespoons of extra-virgin olive oil to the filling. It is not traditional, but some cooked lentils or mushrooms can be added to the mixture to make it even more satisfying.

What if my onion layers fall apart?

This usually happens when the onions are overcooked. Boil them just until they’re soft enough to bend, but not mushy. Using firm, fresh onions also helps because the layers are sturdier.

Can I make stuffed onions ahead of time?

Yes. To do so, stuff the onions, arrange them in the baking dish, cover tightly, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to serve, simply add the sauce and bake.

Can I use brown rice?

Technically, yes, but it takes much longer to cook and stays much firmer inside the onions. For best results, stick with white rice (long-, medium-, or short-grain). If using brown rice, soak it for at least 1 hour to soften it before adding it to the filling mixture.

Can I use red or white onions?

Yes. Red, white, or yellow onions will all work for this recipe. Just make sure the onions you choose are fresh, firm, and not soft, so the layers hold up well when boiling and rolling.

How is this recipe different than Greek Stuffed Onions?

While the concept is pretty similar, the Greek version of this recipe does not use pomegranate molasses. It is also often made with ground pork, but, similar to my recipe here, ground beef and ground lamb can be good substitutes for pork.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You’ll Love

If these meat-stuffed onions made you curious to try more, I invite you to check out a few of my favorite recipes from the Mediterranean and Middle Eastern regions below:

  • If make-ahead meat dishes are your favorite, try my Greek Lamb Meatballs for an easy dinner or a quick appetizer.
  • You’ve probably seen the Doner Kebab recipe going viral on social media. It takes the century-old classic recipe and turns it into a weeknight dinner with a clever shortcut.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/feed/ 0
Viral Doner Kebab https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/#comments Wed, 03 Dec 2025 02:41:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85054 Ingredients You’ll Need The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Turkish cooking has been having a moment on social media, and I love seeing it finally get the attention it deserves. First, it was the Turkish Pasta trend; now, it is this homemade doner kebab. 

These shortcuts are clever because they make dishes that have been around forever feel doable on a weeknight with ingredients most people already have. The rolling technique you see everywhere was first shared by Mezemike, and it took off for a reason.

For me, this recipe hits close to home. I grew up in Bursa, Turkiye, where the authentic version of this dish, Iskender Kebab, was invented. So even though we never made it using this method, I immediately understood why people loved it. It captures the spirit of the dish in a much more doable way without a trip to Turkiye.

My goal here is simply to walk you through this shortcut in a clear and honest way, with a few tips to help you get as close to the real thing as possible in your own kitchen.

Ingredients You’ll Need

The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes on a few ingredients from my testing:

Doner meat ingredients:

Doner meat ingredients from the top view.

Onion: While many viral versions use only the juice, I prefer using the whole onion, as it helps tenderize the meat, keeps it moist, and adds the depth that real doner has. To get it extra fine, I blend it into a puree, along with the garlic. 

If you don’t have a food processor, a box grater would work well too. Use the large holes to grate the onion, and reserve the juices.

Ground beef: It goes without saying that fat is flavor, so it is key here. I recommend using 85/15 ground beef for the best texture and taste. The shortcut doner kebab recipe uses ground beef, but in Turkey (depending on the region), it’s usually made with lean lamb. 

If you want to get as close as possible to the real deal, use ground lamb to make a lamb doner kebab. Lamb is the classic choice for traditional Turkish doner. Or alternatively, if you want to ease into it, you can try 50% ground beef and 50% ground lamb.

Greek yogurt: Yogurt tenderizes the meat and keeps it moist. I tested this recipe both with full-fat yogurt and 2%. While both work, the texture is richer with the full-fat kind.

Spices: The classic doner meat seasoning includes ground cumin, paprika, and red pepper flakes. If you want to get as close to the real thing as possible, I would also recommend adding a pinch of dried oregano.

For the vegetables: 

Roasting vegetables like tomatoes and peppers is optional, but they are the traditional accompaniment to doner kebab, whether you wrap the meat in lavash or serve it with rice.

Ingredients for the sauce and making durum.

Tomatoes: You can use any tomato variety. If using larger tomatoes, quarter them so they roast evenly and are easier to tuck into the wrap (aka dürüm) later on.

Green peppers: Any long, green pepper works here. Traditional Turkish doner shops use sivri biber, which are mild and have a thinner skin. But because I can’t find them here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. If you’re sensitive to heat and using jalapeños, I recommend removing the seeds before roasting them. 

For the Sauce:

Most versions of the viral recipe don’t include this sauce, but I can’t, in good conscience, publish this recipe on my site without sharing it with you. If you ask me, the sauce is a must, and you just need 2 ingredients.

Butter: I am using unsalted butter so I can better control the seasoning. If all you have is salted butter, simply add a little less salt to the sauce.

Tomato paste & water: Use any brand of tomato paste (domates salcasi) you like. While not traditional, I sometimes change it up and use hot/mild red pepper paste (biber salcasi) for a spicier sauce.

For Serving:

Lavash bread: The classic bread used for wrapping meat is lavash. You can make lavash at home or buy it at the store. Here in the US, my favorite brand is Joseph’s, but I also like Trader Joe’s. 

Alternatively, you can stuff the meat in Pita Bread (in its pockets) to create a similar “sandwich” feel.

Sumac Onions: Optional, but I cannot imagine serving any type of Turkish kebab without them. It takes just a few minutes to put together and is essential to make it taste authentic.

How to Make This Viral Turkish Doner Kebab

Okay, there is a reason why this shortcut doner method has taken over social media. It gives you the same tender, well-seasoned meat you’d find in Türkiye, but in a quicker way you can easily make in your own kitchen for a weeknight dinner.

Here’s how to make it:

Steps showing pureing aromatics and making the meat mixture.

Step 1 – Prep the oven and aromatics: Start by preheating your oven to 400°F (204°C). While it heats, add the onion and garlic to your food processor and blend until smooth and pureed.

Don’t strain out the liquid; that moisture is what keeps the meat juicy and helps everything bind together. 

Step 2 – Mix the meat: Transfer the onion mixture to a large bowl and add the ground beef, tomato paste, yogurt, and spices. Using your hands, mix until everything is thoroughly combined for about 1-2 minutes. It should be well mixed, so you get a bit of each flavor in every bite.

Images showing the rolling of the meat mixture to make Turkish doner kebab.

Step 3 – Divide and shape the mixture: Once the meat is mixed, divide it into three equal pieces. During my initial testing of this recipe, I divided it into 4 portions, which worked well, but I felt the rolled doner was a bit thinner than I would like after cooking. 

That said, you can do either 3 or 4 pieces. It is more a matter of personal preference.

Step 4 – Roll the meat into a sheet: Place one piece of meat in the center of a 12×16 sheet of parchment paper, then place another sheet on top. Use a rolling pin (or your hands) to gently press it into an even rectangle. You want an even layer that’s neither too thin nor too thick.

Sometimes the meat pushes out of the sides of the parchment. Don’t worry, just tuck it back in so it’s not as thin, and keep going.

Pro Tip: Some of the videos I’ve seen on social media make it look so easy to roll out to a perfect rectangle. During my testing, I learned that the shape didn’t matter. Instead, the important thing was to roll the meat evenly on the parchment paper.

Photos showing the rolling of the meat to make the viral doner kabob recipe.

Step 5 – Roll it into a log: Remove the top parchment sheet. Now, starting from the short end closest to you, roll the meat tightly (with the bottom parchment still attached).

Transfer the rolled log to a sheet pan and repeat with the remaining pieces.

Pro Tip: Watching the videos on social media, you’ll likely see people roll the meat (like you are rolling cinnamon rolls) or fold it onto itself. As long as it is evenly rolled, both methods would work.

A collage of photos showing the preparation for the veggies with the rolled doner meat.

Step 6 – Add the vegetables: Once all three logs are on the pan, add the quartered tomatoes and whole peppers to the same pan (onto the side) and drizzle them with olive oil and a little kosher salt. 

Step 7 – Bake: Bake everything for about 15-20 minutes. When it’s done, the meat should look lightly browned, and the vegetables should be softened. 

Remove the pan from the oven and let everything cool for 5 minutes or just enough that you can unroll it without burning your hands.

Showing the cooked doner meat getting unrolled and torn into big pieces.

Step 8 – Tear the meat: Unroll each piece gently, then tear the meat into strips by hand. I don’t strip them down too small, just into large chunks.

Photo showing the texture of the butter and tomato sauce.

Step 9 – Make the tomato-butter sauce: Start by melting the butter in a small saucepan. Then, stir in the tomato paste using a fork (or even a whisk). At first, it will look a bit curdled, which is normal. Once cooked for 20-30 seconds, whisk in some hot water to achieve a more sauce-like consistency.

Pro Tip: Use hot (tap) water here; cold water will make the sauce harder to combine. Let it come to a gentle boil, then take it off the heat.

Expert Tips From My Turkish Kitchen

After testing this recipe multiple times (and growing up eating the real Turkish version), I’ve learned that a few small details make all the difference between a doner that tastes flat and one that tastes like it came straight from a shop in Türkiye. Here’s what helped the most:

Warm your bread: Your wrap is only as good as your bread, and there is nothing better than warmed lavash (or pita). You can quickly warm it in the oven or on a dry skillet, or simply set it on top of the warm meat for a minute to soften (and soak up a bit of the juices on top).

Even thickness when rolling: When you’re pressing the meat between the parchment sheets, you don’t want it paper-thin. We are aiming for even thickness so it cooks properly and stays juicy. If the meat spills out the sides of the parchment, just tuck it back in. Using a rolling pin makes it easier, but your hands work just as well.

Use sturdy parchment paper: Not all parchment paper is the same. Thinner parchment becomes soggy, tears easily, and makes rolling a lot harder. A sturdier brand helps the meat keep its shape, especially if you plan to refrigerate the logs overnight. I used 12×16 parchment sheets, and they held up beautifully.

Don’t overbake it: The meat cooks surprisingly fast. About 15-20 minutes is usually the perfect amount of time, and baking it any longer can dry out the meat. It should be tender enough to tear into strips.

Also, I’ve seen people put the doner meat under the broiler after unrolling it to make it “crispy”. Personally, I did not think that it was necessary as doner is supposed to be served tender and softer than crispy.

Brush and sear the wrap: This is an optional step, but if you have a few extra minutes, for a restaurant-style finish, you can brush the outside of the lavash with a little tomato-butter sauce and sear it in a skillet for 30-60 seconds or place it in a turned-off (but still warm) oven to warm it up a bit while you are assembling the rest of the wraps.

Doner kebab meat with roasted tomatoes and peppers on the side.
Print

Viral Doner Kebab Recipe

A shortcut version of Turkish doner kebab made with ground beef and rolled in parchment paper, just like the one trending on social media. When you serve it with roasted tomatoes, peppers, and the traditional tomato-butter sauce, it comes surprisingly close to the real thing in a fraction of the time.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 483kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Doner Meat

  • 1 onion medium-sized/peeled and cut into large chunks
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled
  • 1 lb ground beef 85/15
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 2 tablespoons Greek yogurt full-fat or no fat (both would work)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For The Vegetables

  • 3 tomatoes quartered / medium sized
  • 2 green peppers
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon black pepper

For The Sauce (optional)

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • ¼ cup hot water
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

For Serving (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 °F (204°C).
  • Place the onion and garlic in a food processor and pulse until fully chopped/pureed. Place it in a large bowl.
  • Into that same bowl, add in the beef, tomato paste, Greek yogurt, ground cumin, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and pepper.
  • Using clean hands, mix well until thoroughly combined.
  • Divide the mixture into 3 equal pieces*.
  • Grab a large sheet of parchment paper and place one of the pieces in the middle. Place another sheet of parchment on top and, using a rolling pin (or your hands), roll it out into a rectangle. Do your best to make it as even as possible.
  • Remove the parchment paper on top. Starting from the bottom with the short side facing you, roll the meat (with the parchment paper) onto itself in 2-inch increments until complete. Transfer it to a large sheet pan.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining pieces.
  • Move the rolled meat to the side and add the tomatoes and peppers to the same sheet pan. Drizzle them with olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Transfer it to the oven and bake for 20 minutes.
  • When done, unfold the rolled meat and tear it into large pieces.
  • To make the sauce, melt the butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Add the tomato paste and water and mix until combined. Cook until it comes to a boil and remove from the heat.
  • To make “durum”, lay a piece of lavash on a cutting board and spread it with a tablespoon of tomato sauce. Add a handful of meat on top, along with some roasted tomatoes and peppers, and a handful of sumac onions (if using).
  • Drizzle it with more tomato sauce and gently roll it up from the bottom, tucking the filling in as you go.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining lavash bread and doner meat. Using a sharp knife, cut it in half and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 doner kebab wraps ideal for serving four adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing all components of the recipe separately in airtight containers. If stored in the fridge, they should be good for up to 3-4 days.
    You can store the wraps as well, but I recommend consuming them in the next day or two. You can reheat in a low-heat (300°F) oven until warmed to your liking.
  • Some versions of this recipe divide the doner meat mixture into 4 pieces (instead of 3 as I did) for 1 pound of ground meat. During my testing, I thought the doner meat made with 4 pieces was too thin to my liking, but either way would work.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 111mg | Sodium: 1064mg | Potassium: 838mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1814IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 4mg

How To Serve Doner Kebab?

You made the doner meat, roasted the veggies, and have the most delicious, silky tomato-butter sauce ready. Now it is time to serve. And if you want the full Turkish experience, pour yourself a cold Ayran, the simple salted yogurt drink we serve with every kebab dish. 

The good news is that you have a few options:

Make A Wrap (aka dürüm): 

Photo of the durum made with doner meat.

This is how they serve it in the viral videos, and, quite honestly, this is how you would find it in Turkey if you buy it from a street vendor. It is called dürüm and is usually made by rolling the meat in lavash bread.

To assemble, place a warm piece of lavash bread on a cutting board and spread it with a generous spoonful of the tomato sauce.

Add a handful of the doner meat, some roasted peppers and tomatoes, and a spoonful of Sumac Onions. Drizzle it with a tablespoon of the tomato sauce.

Roll the lavash tightly, tucking the filling in as you go. Slice in half, then serve immediately with extra sauce on the side. 

Pro Tip: If you prefer something sturdier or don’t have lavash on hand, you can use store-bought or Homemade Pita Bread or any of your favorite flatbreads instead.

Iskender-Inspired Plate: 

I grew up in Bursa, where doner kebab is often served Iskender-style. It uses the same ingredients you already prepared, but the assembly gives it a completely different feel. 

If you want to serve your doner meat this way, place torn pieces of warm pide bread on a plate, drizzle with tomato sauce, pile the meat on top, and finish with more sauce. 

Serve it with a dollop of creamy yogurt on the side, along with the roasted peppers and tomatoes.

With Rice:

Depending on the region, especially when you eat doner kebab in a restaurant, it often comes with rice, a few French fries, and some pickles on the side. After it is assembled, the tomato sauce is poured over the meat and rice, turning it into a simple yet just as delicious meal. 

If you want to serve it that way at home, I highly recommend making my Vermicelli Rice to keep it as close to the real thing as possible.

Viral Turkish doner recipe served with sumac onions and tomato sauce from the top view.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Make ahead: You have a few great make-ahead options:

  • Prep the rolls the day before: You can fully roll the meat logs ahead of time and refrigerate them until you’re ready to bake. The only thing to keep in mind is the parchment paper. Some get soft and wet easily, so choose a good-quality one to help the logs hold their shape overnight. I like this precut parchment paper that is not only sturdy enough but also easy to roll.
  • Prep the meat mixture ahead: If you’d rather roll it fresh the next day, simply mix the meat mixture, transfer it to an airtight container, and refrigerate. This resting time allows the aromatics to mingle and develop even further.

Pro Tip – Make the sauce fresh: The tomato-butter sauce only takes a few minutes to make and tastes best when made right before serving. I do not recommend making it ahead of time for the best results.

Storage: If you know you will have leftovers, store the meat, sauce, and roasted vegetables separately. They all keep well in the fridge, in an airtight container, for 3-4 days. This helps the texture stay closer to its fresh state. 

If not, as long as stored in an airtight container, the rolls will still hold up nicely and keep well in the fridge for 1-2 days.

Freezing: You can freeze the doner meat in two easy ways:

  • Freezing raw rolled logs: Simply wrap each roll tightly in stretch film (or place it in an airtight freezer-safe container) and freeze for up to 2 months. When you’re ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge, then bake as directed.
  • Freezing the cooked meat: After baking, tear the meat, let it cool completely, and freeze it in an airtight container or freezer bag. For the best texture, reheat it in a skillet rather than in the microwave.

Reheating: If you store the meat separately from the rest of the ingredients, you can warm it up in a skillet over medium heat with a splash of water or a little butter. I would recommend avoiding the microwave, as it tends to dry out the meat and make it chewy.

If you have leftover sauce, warm it up in a skillet and add a little warm water to thin it out.

FAQS

Can I make this with ground chicken or turkey?

Yes, you can. Just keep in mind that in this recipe, more fat equals more flavor. If you are choosing to use chicken or turkey, choose dark-meat ground chicken or dark-meat ground turkey to replicate the rich flavors doner kebab is known for.

Is this an authentic Turkish doner?

Not exactly. Traditional doner is made on a vertical spit and slowly roasted for hours. This version is a shortcut that went viral online because it captures the spirit of doner in a way that’s easy to make at home.

What’s the difference between doner, shawarma, and gyro?

All three are sliced, seasoned meats cooked on a rotating spit, but the spices and toppings vary depending on the part of the Mediterranean/Middle East they are served:
– Döner is Turkish. Compared to shawarma and gyro, it is less seasoned, usually made with beef or lamb, and served with tomato sauce, savory yogurt, and grilled vegetables.
– Shawarma (Middle Eastern) is heavily spiced with ground turmeric, clove, cinnamon, and cardamom. It is traditionally made with chicken and beef.
– Gyro (Greek) includes dried oregano, garlic, and Mediterranean herbs, and is typically served with tzatziki. It is usually made with chicken or beef.

Can I make this without parchment paper?

I don’t recommend it. The parchment is what helps the meat hold its shape as it bakes. Without it, the logs won’t roll tightly, and the meat can spread or fall apart.

Can I make this in the air fryer?

Yes, just make sure the rolls fit inside your air fryer basket. Cook them at 400°F (204°C) for about 15 minutes. Be sure to check it around the 12th-minute mark, as air fryers tend to cook faster than ovens.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Turkish Recipes You Might Also Like

If you enjoyed this homemade doner kebab recipe, here are a few more Turkish recipes I think you’ll love:

  • If you’re craving something bold and spicy, my Adana Kebab is as close to the authentic version as you can get at home. It’s the traditional lamb kebab I grew up eating, and this homemade version still captures the rich, smoky flavor of the original.
  • For a comforting and simple weeknight dinner, my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant is a classic. The roasted eggplant with the garlicky tomato-beef filling makes it one of the most iconic dishes in Turkish cuisine.
  • And if you want something quick and nostalgic, try my Turkish Meatballs. Made with just a couple of simple ingredients, they’re the meatballs I grew up eating in Turkey.


This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/feed/ 14
Compound Butter for Turkey https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/ https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/#comments Fri, 14 Nov 2025 13:45:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78361 Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, we did not celebrate Thanksgiving, so I learned how to cook a turkey as an adult after moving to the U.S. more than 20 years ago. Over the years, watching more experienced cooks and learning from a few dry turkeys myself, I discovered one very important truth:

There is a tiny window between juicy perfection and dry disappointment.

So I started focusing on the techniques that truly keep turkey moist. One option is using a Turkey Injection to add seasoning and moisture inside the meat, but I also wanted an option that was easier and required no special tools.

That is where this compound butter, which I specifically created for turkey, comes in.

In the simplest terms, it is softened butter mixed with herbs, garlic, and spices that slowly melts under the skin as the turkey roasts, keeping the meat juicy and helping the skin turn beautifully golden and crisp.

To me, this make-ahead friendly recipe is a simple shortcut with big rewards. And in this post, I will walk you through everything you need to know, from the herbs and spices to use to the easiest way to spread it under the skin so you can confidently cook a tender, flavorful, perfectly browned turkey that everyone will love.

Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas

The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh herbs, citrus, and garlic, resulting in a perfectly seasoned turkey. You can find the exact measurements and the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few important notes from my testing:

Ingredients for butter mixture for turkey.

Unsalted butter: I like to use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt. With that said, you can use salted butter and reduce the salt to ¾ teaspoon.

Fresh herbs (or dried herbs): Fresh herbs will give you the best flavor. I like adding fresh rosemary, fresh thyme, and fresh sage, but you can also incorporate soft herbs like fresh parsley or chives.

While I recommend using fresh herbs, dried ones can also be used as an alternative. Use the chart below when substituting:

For 1 Stick (4 oz) of ButterDried Herb/Seasoning Equivalent
1 tbsp fresh rosemary1 tsp dried rosemary
1 tbsp fresh rhyme1 tsp dried thyme
1 tsp fresh sage1/3 tsp dried sage
2 cloves fresh garlic1/2 tsp garlic powder

How to Make Compound Butter for Turkey (Step-by-Step)

Once your ingredients are ready, this recipe can be prepared in under 5 minutes. Here’s how to make it step by step:

A collage of images showing how to make butter seasoning for turkey.

Step 1 – Mix butter, herbs, and garlic: In a small bowl, combine softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Mash the herbs into the butter with the back of a fork or a rubber spatula until well combined, for about 1 minute. If you’re using salted butter, just reduce the Kosher salt slightly.

A collage of images showing how to roll compound butter for thanksgiving turkey.

Step 2 – Use immediately or shape into a log: At this point, your turkey compound butter recipe is ready to use. You can use it right away or roll it up for later use. 

If you are planning to use it later, place the butter on a sheet of parchment paper or plastic wrap. Then shape it into a log, wrap it tightly, and refrigerate for at least 3 hours.

Pro tip: I like to twist the ends of the parchment like a candy wrapper. It helps the butter keep its shape and makes it super easy to slice later.

Make-Ahead, Storage, and Freezing Tips

One of the reasons I love using this compound butter for Thanksgiving turkey is that it can be made ahead of time, and it stores well. Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter as directed, then shape it into a log and wrap it tightly in parchment or plastic wrap. I like to do a double wrap (plastic wrap followed by an airtight container) to keep it fresh and prevent it from picking up any fridge odors. It will keep well in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Freezing: Follow the same wrapping steps and store the butter in a freezer-safe bag or container for up to 3 months.

Thawing: When you’re ready to use it, take it out of the freezer and let it sit at room temperature for about 1 hour, or until it softens enough to slice and spread.

Sliced Thanksgiving turkey compound butter with a knife on the side.

How to Apply Compound Butter Under Turkey Skin (Step-by-Step)

Now that our compound butter is ready, it’s time to put it to use. If it’s your first time spreading compound butter under the turkey skin, don’t worry, as it’s easier than it looks.

A person showing how to place butter and herbs under skin for turkey.

Step 1 – Dry the skin: Let your turkey rest at room temperature for about an hour before you start. This is critical because cold skin is rigid and prone to tearing, but a rested bird’s skin will loosen up and be much more forgiving.

Set your turkey on a clean cutting board and pat the skin dry with paper towels on all sides. This will help the butter stick better and ensure that it crisps up beautifully in the oven. 

Step 2 – Loosen the skin: Locate the neck opening and gently slide your fingers between the skin and meat to loosen it. 

If you feel resistance, stop immediately. Instead of forcing separation, gently wiggle your fingers so that it is loose enough to push the butter under the skin.

Step 3 – Apply the butter: Take about two tablespoons of your turkey butter herb rub and spread it under the skin, focusing on the breast and thighs. Spread it as evenly as possible by massaging the entire bird, including both the under and outer skin. 

Don’t worry about it being perfect, as the butter will melt while the turkey roasts.

Step 4 – Roast the turkey: Place the prepared turkey in a roasting pan with aromatics such as onions, carrots, and celery.

Compound Butter vs. Dry Rub: Which is Best for Your Turkey?

I’ll be honest, when it comes to seasoning the whole bird, this turkey compound butter recipe is my go-to. However, it is not the only way. If you are wondering whether to use this herbed butter or opt for my Homemade Turkey Rub, the choice comes down to your goal:

  • Choose Compound Butter for:
    • Maximum Moisture and Juiciness: The fat melts beneath the skin, self-basting the white meat throughout the long cooking time, which is key to a tender breast.
    • Golden-Brown Skin: The butter is brushed over the skin, which helps brown the turkey beautifully and develop a rich, buttery flavor.
    • Make-Ahead Simplicity: You can prepare this compound butter days in advance, saving time on Thanksgiving day.
  • Choose a Turkey Dry Rub for:
    • Ultra-Crispy Skin: A dry rub acts as a dry brine, helping to draw moisture from the skin and give you an extra-crispy exterior.
    • Convenience & Speed: If you are short on time and need a quick way to add seasoning, the dry rub is much faster to apply than the compound butter.

FAQs

How much compound butter do I need for turkey?

Over the years of using this compound butter when making our Thanksgiving turkey, I learned that 8 tablespoons (1 stick or 4 ounces) is enough for a bird that is up to 12 pounds, which is about ¾ tablespoon per pound. The important thing here is even distribution under and over the skin without overdoing it.
For a larger bird, you can easily multiply the recipe. If your turkey is between 12 and 18 pounds, multiply the ingredients by 1.5 times.

When should I butter my turkey?

It’s best to butter the turkey right before roasting. Applying the butter just before it goes in the oven helps the skin get crispy while the meat stays juicy and tender throughout cooking.

How to make butter stick to turkey?

If the butter isn’t spreading easily, it’s usually because the turkey skin is damp or the butter is too cold. I like to take the turkey out of the fridge about 1 hour before roasting and pat the skin completely dry with paper towels before adding the butter.

Can I add compound butter to the turkey cavity?

I’ve found it’s best to spread the butter under and over the skin rather than inside the cavity. That way, it melts evenly and keeps the skin golden instead of soggy.

Expert Tips for the Best Compound Butter for Turkey

If this is your first time making compound butter, these notes from several rounds of testing will help you get it just right every time:

  • Use softened butter: Let the butter sit at room temperature for about an hour, until it’s soft and spreadable. If it’s too firm, it won’t blend smoothly with the herbs and seasoning.
  • Rinse and dry your herbs: If you’re using fresh herbs, wash and dry them thoroughly before mincing, as they can hold onto moisture, which makes the butter watery. I like to place the washed herbs between two pieces of paper towels to absorb excess moisture; alternatively, put them in a salad spinner to remove as much liquid as possible.
  • Mince herbs finely: Chop your herbs as finely as possible to ensure they distribute evenly throughout the butter. 
  • A word on using fresh garlic and botulism: When using fresh garlic to make compound butter, keep in mind that a foodborne illness called botulism can occur if garlic is stored at temperatures between 50 °F (10 °C) and 113 °F (45 °C).  Therefore, be sure to keep this seasoned butter in the refrigerator unless you plan to use it within the next hour or so.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Delicious Ways to Use Compound Butter (Turkey and Beyond)

Now that you have this perfect turkey butter prepared, it’s ready to transform your Thanksgiving centerpiece. In fact, this is what I use in my Butter Herb Roasted Turkey and Roasted Turkey Breast recipes.

That being said, just because I’m featuring this compound butter for turkey does not mean it cannot be used in other ways. It is truly the perfect finishing touch to many different meals. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Grilled or Roasted Meat Recipes: It’s hard to find a steakhouse that doesn’t serve a slice of compound butter over their hot, juicy steaks. Make a restaurant-quality meal at home by serving rounds of herb butter on top of Grilled Steak, Beef Tenderloin, or Roasted Chicken Breast.
  • Seafood: Don’t you love a warm, garlicky butter with seafood? Use this herb butter mix to elevate Grilled Salmon or Grilled Shrimp.
  • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: You can truly elevate the flavor of roasted vegetables with this compound butter. Serve it as the topping for Grilled Corn or finish Roasted Butternut Squash with a few melting spoonfuls of this butter.
  • Bread: Butter and bread are a classic pair. Spread a few thin rounds over warm slices of my  Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread, or use it as the butter base when making my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
Thanksgiving butter with herbs sliced.
Print

Compound Butter for Turkey Recipe

Here's a fantastic compound butter for turkey that you can make in minutes. This is probably the easiest way to flavor your Thanksgiving turkey with succulent flavors from fresh (or dried) herbs, garlic, and lemon zest. Make ahead friendly, this recipe is my secret sauce for properly seasoned and moist turkey.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 8 tablespoons
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 oz unsalted butter 1 stick – at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon fresh sage finely minced or ⅓ teaspoon dried sage
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced or pressed
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place the softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, kosher salt, and pepper in a bowl. Mix until well combined using a fork.
  • You can use it right away, or you can turn your compound butter into a log. If you are not using it right away, transfer the butter mixture onto a piece of parchment paper or stretch film and shape it into a log.*
  • Wrap it tightly so it holds its shape. Transfer it to the fridge and let it rest for at least 3 hours.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 tablespoons (4 ounces) of compound butter, which is ideal for a turkey that weighs 10-12 pounds. If your bird is larger, you can multiply the recipe and vice versa. The calorie information below is for one tablespoon.
  • *If it is too soft, you might have to chill it in the fridge for 30 minutes before rolling
  • Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter mixture as directed. Follow the instructions to shape it into a log and wrap it tightly. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for five days.
  • Freezing: Store it in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, and be sure to take it out of the fridge at least an hour before use.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 15mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.02g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 0.2mg
Thanksgiving compound butter in a bowl from the top view.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/feed/ 2
Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/#comments Tue, 07 Oct 2025 19:43:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20747 If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone…]]>

If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone else is vegan (and gluten-free, of course). You need a dish that can compete with turkey while meeting all the dietary requirements.

That’s where this Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash recipe comes in. I came up with it when my best friend showed up with her new boyfriend to last year’s Thanksgiving dinner, who happens to be vegan. And let me tell you, it served its purpose.

It worked beautifully as a plant-based holiday main dish for him, while the rest of the crowd enjoyed it as a side dish with turkey. The good news is that you can serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold, making it a no-fuss recipe that checks all the boxes.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This is one of those recipes that includes all the best festive fall ingredients. The full list with exact amounts is in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Acorn squash: While it may be available year-round in most grocery stores, it is at its peak in the fall and winter months. To choose the best squash, look for a mix of dark green and orange skin colors that look slightly dull (not shiny). It should feel firm and heavy. You can use traditional green acorn squash or try white, golden, or even carnival squash. 

Quinoa: Use the type of quinoa you prefer, such as white, red, black, or a mix of all three. You can cook quinoa on the stove, make microwave quinoa, or even make pressure cooker quinoa for a hands-off method. If you are not a fan of quinoa, you can swap it with cooked wild rice, farro, or couscous.

Apples:  I love using Fuji apples here, but Gala and Honeycrisp also work. If you like a tangier bite, go for Granny Smith. You can also swap the apples for pears for a sweeter bite.

Dried Fruit: I prefer dried cranberries for this recipe, but I like to chop them so they are easier to chew. You can also mix it up with other dried fruits, such as chopped apricots or dates.

Nuts: Pecans are my favorite here, but you can use walnuts, almonds, or whichever nut you prefer. 

For a nut-free option, try toasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. I usually opt for roasted nuts for extra flavor, but raw ones also work well.

Herbs: I am using fresh parsley, but you can also add other fresh holiday herbs like thyme, sage, or rosemary. During the fall, stores like Trader Joe’s often have holiday herb bundles, and they work perfectly here.

Optional Additions:

This is one of those recipes you can really customize and make your own. Here are a few of my favorite ways to mix it up:

Pomegranate Arils: For an extra fall touch, add a handful on top for a pop of color and tartness.

Maple syrup: If you enjoy the salty-sweet combination, whisk a tablespoon of maple syrup with olive oil and brush it over the squash prior to sprinkling it with the spice mixture.

Chickpeas: For a protein boost and a more filling dish (especially if you are serving it as a vegan main dish), you can stir in a 15-oz can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas into the stuffing.

Mushrooms: For a distinctive yet delicious umami boost, consider adding sautéed or roasted mushrooms to the filling. 

Cheese: If you don’t mind making the dish vegetarian, you can garnish it with a handful of crumbled feta or Parmesan cheese for a creamy and salty bite.

How to Make Roasted Vegan Stuffed Acorn Squash

From start to finish, this vegan stuffed squash takes less than an hour to make. The process consists of three parts: roasting the acorn squash, preparing the quinoa and apple filling while it bakes, and filling the roasted squash with the stuffing. Here’s how I do it: 

Images showing how to cut acorn squash for stuffing.

Step 1 – Cut the Acorn Squash: You should exercise extreme caution when cutting acorn squash, especially if you have kids around. Start with a sharp knife to make the job easier and safer. 

First, cut a thin slice off the bottom so it can sit flat on your cutting board. Then cut from top to bottom vertically, pressing the tip of the knife into the center and working your way down until you have two halves. 

Lastly, scoop out the seeds and stringy bits inside. You can toss these or bake them; they make a delicious crunchy snack. 

Photos showing how to season and prepare acorn squash for roasting.

Step 2 – Season and Roast the Squash: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. 

Mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper in a small bowl. Brush the cut sides of the squash with a little olive oil and sprinkle it with the spice mixture.  

Place the acorn squash halves cut-side down to help the edges caramelize and keep the flesh tender. Roast for about 40 minutes, until you can easily slide a fork through the meat. Your kitchen will smell heavenly while these are baking.

A collage of images showing the quinoa filling and stuffing the roasted squash.

Step 3 – Make the Quinoa Filling: While the squash is roasting, sauté the onion and celery in a pan over medium-high heat until softened for 8-10 minutes, stirring frequently.

Then, add the apples and cook until they’re just soft enough, but not mushy. Stir in the garlic, cooked quinoa, cranberries, and pecans. Let it sit so the quinoa absorbs all the flavors, and add the parsley at the very end.

Step 4 – Assemble and Serve: Remove the roasted acorn squash halves from the oven and let them cool for 10 minutes. Then flip and fill each half with the quinoa mixture.

The acorn squash filling/stuffing recipe below yields 3-4 cups of filling. If you have leftovers, you can enjoy them as a side dish or a quick lunch the next day. It can also be served as a standalone side dish.

You can serve your filled acorn squash right away, or optionally, for a crispy, golden topping, return the stuffed squash to the oven and bake for an additional 10 minutes until the pecans are toasted and the quinoa looks golden brown. Garnish with fresh parsley, pomegranate arils, and your preferred toppings before serving.

Make Ahead, Storage & Reheating & Instructions

I love making this stuffed vegan squash recipe not only because it is a feast for the eyes, but also because you can easily prepare it ahead and serve it warm or cold, making it easy to incorporate into your holiday meal prep schedule.

Make Ahead: You can prepare the quinoa stuffing 1-2 days in advance, bring it to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. You can also roast the squash halves a day ahead, let them cool to room temperature, and refrigerate. When you are ready to serve, reheat the filling, stuff the squash, and warm them in the oven at 275°F (135°C) until heated through.

Alternatively, you can assemble the whole thing a day in advance, bring to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container. An hour before serving, you can reheat it in a low-heat (275°F (135°C)) oven for 15 minutes, or until heated through.

Storage: After the stuffed squash has cooled to room temperature, it can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. The leftovers make the most delicious lunch the next day.

Freezing: While you can technically freeze baked acorn squash, I don’t recommend it. It causes the squash to release extra water when thawed, resulting in a mushy texture and minimal flavor.

Expert Tips for Success

Microwave before cutting: Acorn squash can be hard to cut, especially if it is newly harvested. If you are having trouble cutting it, you can place it in the microwave for 1-2 minutes in 30-second increments to soften. Keep a close eye on it and check often rather than letting it run the whole time.

Cutting vertically vs horizontally: As you can see in the pictures, I cut my acorn squash vertically, but it is a personal preference. You can cut it horizontally if it is easier for you. However, be sure to cut a small amount from the top and bottom so they can sit straight after they are flipped.

Extra Caramelization: This is optional, but for a more golden, caramelized finish, flip the roasted squash cut-side up and place it under the broiler for 1-2 minutes after it’s finished baking. Just keep a close eye on it so it doesn’t burn.

Roast cut-side down: This is a crucial step, as it helps the edges caramelize and makes the flesh extra tender and sweet. While I didn’t think it was necessary, if you prefer, you can flip them at the end and put them under the broiler for a minute or two for even more caramelization.

Cook quinoa with stock: One of the best ways to season quinoa is by using stock instead of water as the cooking liquid. I usually use my homemade vegetable stock I make from scraps, but store-bought vegetable stock would also work. I highly recommend rinsing quinoa before cooking for optimal flavor.

Keep the filling moist: If you make it earlier in the day (or reheating), the quinoa mixture may dry out slightly. You can stir in a splash of water or stock to keep it fluffy and add more moisture.

Toast the nuts: Yes, it is an extra step, but toasting pecans (or pumpkin seeds) in a dry skillet takes just a few minutes and is a major upgrade in the overall taste of the filling. So, if you have a couple of extra minutes, place the nuts/seeds in an empty skillet and toast (keeping a super close eye on them) for 5-7 minutes over medium heat before adding them to the filling.

What to Serve with Quinoa-Stuffed Acorn Squash

This quinoa stuffed squash is one of those recipes that can play more than one role on your holiday table. You can enjoy it as a main dish for a vegetarian or vegan dinner, or serve it as a side alongside your favorite holiday mains. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

FAQs

Can I make this ahead for Thanksgiving?

Yes, you can cook the quinoa filling a day or two before and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container. You can also roast the squash halves ahead of time and store them refrigerated for up to three days.

Can I freeze stuffed acorn squash?

Technically, yes, but I do not recommend it. The squash becomes watery and loses its texture once thawed.

Can I use butternut squash instead?

Yes, butternut squash also works. You can roast butternut squash halves or air-fry them and fill them with the quinoa mixture, following the same recipe.

What’s the safest way to cut acorn squash?

The secret is to use a sharp knife and start by slicing a thin piece off the bottom so the squash sits steady. Then cut from top to bottom to split it in half, and if it feels too tough to cut, microwave it for a minute or two to soften the skin.

What if I don’t like quinoa?

You can easily swap the quinoa for cooked rice, wild rice, farro, or even couscous for a similar filling.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Acorn Squash Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this vegan acorn squash recipe, you might like these other fall favorite squash recipes:

  • If you are craving a fall salad, try my Acorn Squash Salad. Made with arugula, pepitas, cranberries, goat cheese, and pomegranate seeds, it has everything you crave during the holiday season.
  • Another reader favorite squash recipe is my Roasted Acorn Squash Slices! It takes the basic acorn squash but turns it into an easy side dish with a quick maple-cinnamon glaze.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Quinoa stuffed acorn squash garnished with pomegranate seeds.
Print

Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash Recipe

Tender roasted squash halves filled with a savory-sweet quinoa stuffing of apples, cranberries, pecans, and fresh herbs. Vegan, gluten-free, and make-ahead friendly, this is the perfect holiday main or side dish.
Course Side
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 291kcal

Ingredients

To Roast the Acorn Squash

  • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 4 large acorn squash cut in half and seeds removed

To Make the Stuffing:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 onion medium-size / chopped (~1 1/4 cup)
  • 3 stalks celery chopped (~3/4 cup)
  • 1 apple peeled and cut into small ½ inch cubes
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 ½ cups cooked quinoa from 1 cup uncooked quinoa
  • ½ cup dried cranberries chopped finely
  • ½ cup pecans coarsely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped, plus more as garnish
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204 °C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • In a small bowl, mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper.
  • Brush the insides of acorn squash with olive oil.
    Acorn squash halves getting seasoned and roasted on a sheet pan.
  • Sprinkle each half with the spice mixture, ensuring that it is evenly distributed.
  • Arrange the squash cut-side down and roast for 40 minutes, or until a knife inserted into the flesh of one of the squash comes out easily. Let it cool on the counter for 5 minutes before stuffing.
  • While the acorn squash is roasting, make the stuffing. Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the onion and celery, and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the apple and cook for 3-4 more minutes, or until the apples are softened.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
    A collage of images showing the quinoa stuffing and as the acorn squash is getting stuffed.
  • Add the cooked quinoa, cranberries, pecans, and season with salt and pepper. Give it a stir and turn the heat to medium-low. Let it cook for 7-8 minutes, stirring occasionally to ensure it remains moist. If you feel like it is drying, add in a few tablespoons of water.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more, if necessary. At the last minute, stir in the parsley.
  • To assemble, fill each roasted acorn squash half with the stuffing and garnish it with pomegranate seeds (if using) and more parsley before serving.
    Vegan and gluten free quinoa stuffed acorn squash on a plate.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 halved stuffed acorn squash, which is ideal for serving 8 as a side dish. If you are serving it as a main dish, I would recommend serving 2 halves per person. The nutritional values listed below are per serving of one half.
  • Filling: Take the time to cut up your apple evenly to ensure that you get some with each bite. I also recommend chopping up the cranberries for the same reason.
  • Make ahead: You can roast the acorn squash and make the filling a day (or two) in advance. Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Assemble and bake right before serving.
  • Storing leftovers: Bring them to room temperature and store in the fridge in an airtight container for 3-4 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 291kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 979mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1037IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/feed/ 30
Mediterranean Baked Cod https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-baked-cod/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-baked-cod/#comments Mon, 22 Sep 2025 19:18:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83443 I recently started working out with a trainer, and one of the first things she mentioned was the importance of…]]>

I recently started working out with a trainer, and one of the first things she mentioned was the importance of incorporating more protein into my meals. Thinking you might be in the same boat, I looked through my recipe archives and realized I needed more quick, protein-rich dinners that I could rely on during the week. That’s how this baked cod recipe came to life.

Growing up in the Mediterranean, fish was always prepared with simple, fresh ingredients, and this version captures exactly that. The combination of roasted tomatoes, garlic, olives, and a drizzle of olive oil is the kind of everyday cooking I grew up with: straightforward, flavorful, and nourishing without being complicated. 

Even if you have never cooked fish before, this recipe is designed to be foolproof, easy enough for a Tuesday night, yet full of the fresh and vibrant flavors I know so well.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need a handful of simple, fresh ingredients to make this baked cod fish. The exact amounts are listed in the recipe card below, but below are a few notes and tips from my kitchen to help you get the best results:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.

For The Vegetables:

Cherry tomatoes: If you can, purchase colorful cherry tomatoes as they are sweeter and offer different flavors. I halve them, but if yours are on the bigger side, quarter them. With that being said, any kind of tomatoes you have on hand would work. Just be sure to cut them into small, even chunks.

Onion: I opted for shallots for their mild and sweet flavor. When roasted, they slightly caramelize and get even sweeter. Alternatively, you can use red onions (cut in large chunks) for a similar flavor or chopped scallions for a milder onion flavor.

Garlic: Freshly minced garlic cloves are my choice, but garlic powder can be substituted if you prefer a milder garlic flavor.

Olives: I am using pitted green olives (Castelvetrano olives are my favorite) in this recipe, but Kalamata olives or any other type of olive you like would also work. If you’re not a fan of olives, other briny ingredients like capers or marinated artichoke hearts can be substituted.

For The Cod:

Cod fillets: Cod is best when bought in season, which typically runs from September through May. I like using wild-caught fresh cod, especially from the Pacific or Icelandic. 

You can purchase this fresh fish as fillets or as a whole. If buying already cut cod, I recommend buying fillets that are equal in size so they bake evenly. 

While I used already cut fillets, you can cook a whole fillet using this recipe. Make sure it fits your baking dish, and keep in mind that the cooking time might be slightly longer.

When it is not in season, frozen cod can be used; just be sure that it’s completely thawed before cooking. If you can’t find cod, halibut, or haddock are good substitutes.

Pro tip: If you’re using frozen cod, the safest way to thaw it is to transfer it from the freezer to the fridge to thaw overnight.

If you want to thaw it quicker, place your fillets in a plastic bag and submerge them in cold water, changing the water every 15 to 20 minutes. Don’t thaw them at room temperature, as it can cause bacteria to grow. 

Seasonings for baked cod: I kept it simple and seasoned my cod lightly with a bit of olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper. But other seasonings like paprika, oregano, or even a little bit of red pepper flakes would work beautifully. 

If you are into making your own seasoning blends, make a batch of my Mediterranean Seasoning and add a teaspoon over the fish to incorporate more flavors of the region. 

Fresh Herbs: You can play around here. I used fresh parsley, but thyme or basil would work really well. 

White wine or vinegar (optional): I wanted to keep this recipe alcohol-free, but if you’d like, a splash of dry white wine (or white wine vinegar) added to the vegetables before roasting adds brightness and depth. The acidity balances the sweetness of the tomatoes and the richness of the olive oil, making the dish taste lighter and more complex.

How to Make Baked Cod with Tomatoes and Olives

One of the best things about this Mediterranean cod recipe is how weeknight-friendly it is. You just have to pre-roast the veggies and add the cod halfway through. Here’s how I do it:

A collage of images showing how to prep the tomatoes, olives and onions before baking.

Step 1 – Prepare the veggie base: In a 9X13 casserole dish, toss together the cherry tomatoes, sliced shallot, fresh garlic, and olives with the olive oil. Season with salt and pepper and give it a good mix. Place it in your preheated oven at 400°F (204°C) and let it roast for 15 minutes or until the tomatoes soften. 

Person drying and seasoning cod fish for baking.

Step 2 – Season cod fish: As the veggies roast, pat your fish fillets dry with paper towels on both sides. Doing so helps the seasoning adhere to the fish and prevents it from steaming, so it bakes up tender and flaky instead of watery.

Drizzle the fish with olive oil and season both sides with salt and pepper.

Showing the Mediterranean cod before and after it is baked.

Step 3 – Add the cod and lemon slices: Once the roasted vegetables are ready, nestle the cod fillets around the roasted veggies and add a few lemon slices around the fish. I like to add the lemon slices at this point so they won’t overcook and taste bitter.

Step 4 – Bake: Roast for 15-17 minutes more, until the fish turns opaque and flakes easily with a fork (or hits 140°F / 60°C if you’re using a meat thermometer). Cod cooks quickly, so keep an eye on it to avoid drying it out.

Step 5 – Serve and enjoy: Spoon some of the roasted tomatoes, olives, and all the juices over the fish before serving. Finish with some fresh parsley and a squeeze of fresh lemon juice.

Make-Ahead, Storage & Reheating Tips

This oven-baked cod is at its best straight from the oven, but if you have leftovers, here’s how to store and reheat them:

Make-Ahead: You can prep the vegetables 1 day in advance, just store them in an airtight container in the fridge. When ready to cook, just toss with olive oil and seasonings and continue with the recipe. 

Storage: Let the cooked codfish cool to room temperature first, then store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Reheating: Warm gently in the oven at 300°F (150°C) for 5-7 minutes or until heated thoroughly or on the stovetop with a splash of water to keep it moist.

Freezing: I don’t recommend freezing, as the fish can turn watery and lose its texture once thawed.

Tips for the Perfect Baked Mediterranean Cod

Even though this recipe is quite simple to make, a few small details can make a big difference in the final result. Here’s what I found works best:

  • Always thaw frozen cod completely: For the best, flakiest texture, it is imperative that your fish is fully thawed before it goes into the oven. Cooking frozen or partially frozen cod will cause it to steam in the oven, leading to a watery and mushy texture.
  • Taste the olives first: Some olives can be extra salty, so tasting them first is always best to avoid oversalting the dish.
  • Pat the cod dry: This is essential for a flaky texture and helps the seasoning stick. Skipping this step can cause it to steam and turn mushy.
  • Use a meat thermometer: The best way to check doneness is to use a meat thermometer. It should register 140°F (60°C) when a thermometer is inserted in the thickest part of the fish.
Two images showing Mediterranean cod with tomatoes and olives in a casserole dish and served on a plate.

What to Serve with Mediterranean Baked Cod

You can enjoy this baked fish on its own with a glass of Sauvignon Blanc or a crisp rosé, but if you want to turn it into a full-on Mediterranean cod dinner, here are some of my favorite pairings:

  • With a starch: Serve it over my Lemon Orzo or Lemon Quinoa for a more filling plate.
  • With fresh greens: A veggie-packed salad is always a great pairing with fish, and this baked cod is no exception. Pair it with my Greek Cucumber Salad to continue with the Mediterranean flavors or with my Spring Mix Salad for a quick and easy green salad anyone can make.
  • Finish it with a sauce: A drizzle of Garlic Butter Sauce is an easy way to turn this dish into a restaurant-worthy meal.
  • Pair with warm bread: My Garlic Bread in Air Fryer or a loaf of my Staub Bread are perfect for soaking up the juices.

FAQs

What’s the best type of cod to use?

I recommend Fresh Atlantic or Pacific cod. Frozen fillets also work, just make sure they are fully thawed before cooking.

What temperature should I cook cod in the oven?

Roast the cod at 400°F (200°C) for it to cook through while staying moist.

How long should I bake my cod for?

For fillets that are 1 to 1 ½ inches thick, bake for 15-17 minutes at 400°F (204°C), or until the internal temperature reaches 140°F (60°C). The fish should be opaque and flake easily with a fork.

What should I season cod with?

I went with a basic extra virgin olive oil, salt, and pepper seasoning, but you can also use a pinch of paprika, oregano, or Italian seasoning.

Can I use other fish in this recipe?

Yes, you can. Haddock, halibut, snapper, or any mild white fish are all great substitutes.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Mediterranean Fish Recipes to Try

It is no secret that seafood dinners are a lifesaver when you need something quick and delicious without too much effort. Here are a few more similar recipes you might also like:

  • My Harissa Salmon Recipe is a sweet-and-spicy one-pan dinner that comes together in under 30 minutes.
  • For something crispy, try my Breaded Fish Recipe, which is baked with a breadcrumb coating, shallots, garlic, and fresh parsley.
  • Try my Grilled Mahi Mahi, marinated in citrus and herbs, then topped with fresh peach salsa.
  • My Shrimp Scampi without Wine is coated in a buttery garlic sauce and pairs perfectly with pasta or crusty bread.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Mediterranean Baked Cod from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Baked Cod Recipe

Add this Mediterranean Baked Cod recipe to your weeknight dinner rotation. Made by roasting tomatoes, garlic, and olives in one casserole dish, this baked cod recipe is fresh, protein-rich, and ready in 45 minutes from start to finish.
Course Seafood
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 318kcal

Ingredients

For The Vegetables:

  • 2 cups cherry tomatoes halved
  • 1 medium-sized shallot sliced thinly
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ cup green olives sliced (or capers)
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil

For The Cod:

  • 4 cod fillets 1 ½ lbs / 5 to 6 oz. each (If using frozen, make sure it is thawed) *
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped, as a garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400°F (204 °C).
  • Place cherry tomatoes, sliced shallot, minced garlic, and sliced olives in a 9X13 casserole dish.
    Two images showing how to prepare the tomato and olive mixture.
  • Drizzle it with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes, if using. Toss to combine.
  • Transfer to the preheated oven and bake for 15 minutes or until vegetables are softened.
  • Meanwhile, pat dry cod fillets with paper towels on both sides.
    Person patr drying and seasoning cod filets.
  • Drizzle them with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Remove the veggies from the oven and carefully nestle the cod fillets and lemon slices in the vegetables.
  • Bake for 15-17 minutes or until the internal temperature of a cod filet registers 140 °F (60 °C) when a meat thermometer is inserted in the thickest part.
    Mediterranean cod in a casserole dish before and after it is baked.
  • When ready to serve, transfer a cod fillet to a plate and spoon it with some of the roasted veggies. Sprinkle it with fresh parsley right before serving.
    Baked cod with tomatoes and olives in a casserole dish.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 4 servings of baked cod, with each serving consisting of one fillet and roasted vegetables. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *Don’t have cod? You can use any mild fish like haddock, halibut, or snapper.
  • Storing & reheating leftovers: Bring the baked cod to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge for up to 2 days.  Reheat in a low-heat oven, 300°F (150°C), for 5-7 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

Nutrition

Calories: 318kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 805mg | Potassium: 963mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 859IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-baked-cod/feed/ 4
Grilled Caprese Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-caprese-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-caprese-chicken/#comments Sun, 07 Sep 2025 18:07:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83230 I’m a big fan of taking a proven flavor combination, like the classic Caprese (originally from Capri, Italy), which features…]]>

I’m a big fan of taking a proven flavor combination, like the classic Caprese (originally from Capri, Italy), which features tomatoes, basil, fresh mozzarella cheese, and balsamic, and finding new ways to bring it to the table. 

I first started making it a few years back during peak tomato season when my basil plant was overflowing and I had more cherry tomatoes than I knew what to do with. And of course, with a chicken-loving husband, I’m always looking for ways to make grilled chicken exciting. 

After testing a few marinades and toppings, I found that using my balsamic chicken marinade was the perfect base for this recipe. It adds just the right amount of tang to balance the creamy mozzarella and sweet summer tomatoes, while the grill brings out a smoky depth in every bite.

It’s the kind of easy, beautiful dinner you’ll want to make on repeat all summer long. Some people call it grilled Caprese chicken, others call it Caprese grilled chicken, but no matter the name, it’s always a hit.

Ingredients for the Perfect Grilled Caprese Chicken

While the ingredient list might look a bit long, chances are you already have most ingredients at home. This recipe is built around three main components: grilled chicken, a tangy balsamic marinade, and a fresh tomato salad.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes to guide you as you cook:

For the Chicken:

Chicken Breasts: For this recipe, boneless, skinless chicken breasts are ideal. For even cooking, pound them to about ¾-inch thick so the thinner ends don’t dry out before the center is cooked through. 

Mozzarella Cheese: Go for thinner pieces (about ⅓ inch) and use two per chicken breast. I used fresh mozzarella here, but shredded mozzarella works just as well. Use about ¼ cup per breast, keeping in mind that shredded cheese will melt nicely but won’t provide the same creamy effect as fresh mozzarella.

Seasoning: I only used salt and pepper because the seasoning of this recipe relies heavily on the balsamic marinade. However, adding a pinch of dried oregano, Mediterranean seasoning, or Italian seasoning is perfectly fine if you’d like.

For the Marinade:

Olive Oil: Choose a high-quality extra virgin olive oil. Lately, I have been using Garcia de la Cruz for its smooth, well-rounded flavor. You will also need a little extra to brush on the grill grates so the chicken releases easily.

Balsamic Vinegar: For the best flavor, choose a balsamic vinegar labeled “aged,” ideally from Modena. It has a thicker texture and is a bit sweeter. That being said, any balsamic vinegar would work to make the marinade.

Honey: Adds a touch of natural sweetness. You can swap in brown sugar or white sugar if that’s what you have.

Dijon Mustard: Dijon has a stronger, tangier bite, which is what I am going for in this recipe. If you prefer a milder flavor, yellow mustard will work as well.

Garlic: I like to use freshly minced garlic in marinades for its stronger flavor, but if you prefer something milder, garlic powder works as well.

For the Caprese Topping:

Tomatoes: I prefer cherry or grape tomatoes in this recipe, as they are sweeter. However, larger heirloom or beefsteak tomatoes can also be used; just chop them into bite-sized pieces.

Basil: Fresh basil leaves add that classic Caprese finish. Tear them gently so they release their aroma without bruising too much. Alternatively, you could use store-bought pesto or make a batch of my Basil Pesto Vinaigrette for easy drizzling.

How to Make Juicy Grilled Chicken Caprese

The beauty of this recipe is that it works whether you’re making it the day of or marinating the chicken a day ahead. Either way, it comes together easily: grill the marinated chicken, melt some fresh cheese on top, and finish with a quick tomato topping. 

Here’s how I make it, step by step:

A collage of images showing chicken before and after it is pounded.

Step 1 – Pound the Chicken: Place the chicken breasts on a cutting board and pat them dry with paper towels to help prevent the mallet from slipping (just a safety tip). Cover with plastic wrap and gently pound each piece to about ¾-inch thickness so they cook evenly from edge to center.

A collage of images showing chicken marinade.

Step 2 – Marinade: In a large bowl, whisk together the balsamic vinegar, olive oil, honey, Dijon mustard, garlic, salt, and pepper until the mixture looks smooth. This is the same base as my Balsamic Chicken Marinade, which you can also use on its own for a quick and flavorful grilled chicken dinner.

If you want to get a head start, you can prepare the marinade the day before and store it in the fridge. Then, let it come to room temperature before using. 

Let the chicken marinate at room temperature for 30 minutes or an hour while you prepare the garnish, or refrigerate for up to overnight or no longer than 24 hours.

Tomato topping for grilled Caprese chicken.

Step 3 – Make the Caprese Garnish: In a medium bowl, combine the cherry tomatoes, garlic, olive oil, balsamic vinegar, salt, and pepper. Toss gently so the tomatoes keep their shape; overmixing can cause them to become mushy. 

Add the torn basil right before serving as well, to keep it fresh. If you prepare the garnish too far in advance, the basil may wilt, and the tomatoes will release more liquid.

A collage of images showing the chicken grilled and with mozzarella on top.

Step 4 – Grill the Chicken: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, about 450°F (232°C). This higher heat helps sear the outside quickly, locking in the juices and creating those beautiful grill marks. 

Once the grill is ready, clean the grates thoroughly to remove any leftover bits, then brush them with oil to prevent sticking. Remove the chicken from the marinade and let the excess drip off to avoid flare-ups. 

Place the chicken on the grates and cook for 4 to 5 minutes on the first side without moving it, which helps the sear marks form and keeps the meat from tearing when flipped. Cook for another 3 to 4 minutes on the second side, or until the thickest part of the chicken reaches 160-165°F (71-74°C) on a meat thermometer. 

If you do not have a thermometer, look for clear juices running from the thickest part and a firm, springy texture when pressed.

Step 5 – Melt the Mozzarella and Rest: Top each chicken breast with two thin slices of mozzarella. Reduce the heat to medium-low, cover the grill, and cook until the cheese melts, about 3-4 minutes. During my testing, I found that two thinner slices melt more evenly than one thick slice, which can leave the center unmelted and cause the chicken to dry out.

If your grill has a warming rack, move the chicken there to hold the heat without overcooking. Otherwise, simply turn the grill off, close the lid, and let the chicken sit for 3-4 minutes. 

Transfer the chicken to a platter, cover loosely with foil, and rest for 5-10 minutes so the juices redistribute and every bite stays juicy.

Caprese chicken on a plate garnished with tomatoes and basil.

Step 6 – Garnish and Serve: Top each chicken breast with the tomato-basil garnish, and feel free to drizzle some of the tomato juices on top; they’ll make the chicken even juicier. Serve right away while the chicken is still warm and the cheese is still melty.

Make-Ahead, Storage, and Freezing Tips

Make Ahead: You can marinate the chicken and keep it in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours before cooking. I do not recommend making the tomato basil topping in advance, as it will become soggy as it sits. It is best to make it right before serving.

Storage and reheating: Store leftover mozzarella grilled chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep the tomato-basil garnish separate to keep the chicken from getting soggy. 

When reheating, warm the chicken gently in a covered skillet over low heat (with a splash of water) or in a 300°F (150°C) oven until heated through. Try to skip the microwave if possible, as it can make the chicken rubbery and overcook the cheese.

Freezing: I don’t recommend freezing the recipe fully assembled, since fresh mozzarella and tomatoes don’t thaw well. 

For the best results, freeze the cooked chicken separately once it has cooled completely. Wrap each piece tightly in plastic wrap, place it in a freezer-safe bag, and freeze it for up to 2 months. When ready to serve, thaw overnight in the refrigerator. Reheat gently, then add fresh mozzarella slices during the last couple of minutes of warming. Finish with the tomato-basil topping.

Expert Tips for the Best Caprese Grilled Chicken

While this Caprese grilled chicken recipe is simple to put together, I wanted to include a few extra tips that I learned during my recipe testing to help you achieve juicy chicken with perfectly melted cheese every time.

  • Slice mozzarella while it’s cold, serve it at room temp: Fresh mozzarella is easiest to slice when it’s cold from the fridge. However, it melts more evenly if you let it warm up slightly before grilling. I recommend slicing it right after you prep the marinade, then letting it sit at room temperature while the chicken marinates.
  • Don’t grill straight from the fridge: If you marinated your chicken overnight, let it rest on the counter for 20-30 minutes before grilling. Cold chicken takes longer to cook through and can dry out before the center is done.
  • Rest the chicken after grilling: Let the chicken rest for 5-10 minutes after it comes off the grill. This allows the juices to redistribute throughout the meat, keeping it moist and tender when it comes time to slice.
  • Check doneness with a digital thermometer: The most reliable way to know your chicken is cooked through is to check that the thickest part reaches 165°F (74°C).
  • Prevent flare-ups: Let any excess marinade drip off before placing the chicken on the grill. Too much oil or sugar on the grates can cause flare-ups and burnt spots.
  • Basil: For the freshest taste and presentation, I recommend tearing fresh basil leaves instead of slicing them. The tearing method helps prevent bruising and keeps the basil’s color and aroma intact.

What to Serve With Caprese Grilled Chicken?

This grilled mozzarella chicken is one of those mains that goes with just about everything. It’s light but still filling, and that fresh tomato-basil topping makes it easy to pair with all kinds of sides. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

Grilled chicken Caprese style on a plate.

FAQs

How do I keep cheese from sliding off?

Slice the mozzarella while it’s still cold (it cuts much more cleanly), then use two thin slices instead of one thick one. Thinner slices melt more evenly and adhere better to the surface of the chicken, which helps prevent them from sliding off as they soften.

What kind of mozzarella cheese is best?

I recommend using fresh mozzarella cheese as it holds its shape better. However, in a pinch, shredded mozzarella would also be a suitable substitute. I recommend using no more than ¼ cup and keeping a close eye on it while it is on the grill, as shredded mozzarella tends to melt faster.

Can I use chicken thighs?

Yes, you can. Chicken thighs are flavorful and juicy, but their uneven surface can make it trickier to keep the cheese in place. Chicken breasts provide a flatter surface, which makes melting and serving easier, but thighs are still a good substitute if that’s what you have on hand.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Caprese Recipes You Might Like

Caprese flavors are just too good to stop at one recipe, so if you’re craving more of that tomato, mozzarella, and basil magic, here are a few of my favorites.

  • My Eggplant Caprese layers grilled eggplant with juicy tomatoes, creamy mozzarella, and fresh basil for a simple vegetarian option.
  • For an easy lunch, try my Chicken Caprese Sandwich, which brings together the same fresh tomato, mozzarella, and basil combination on a soft bun.
  • When you’re craving something light and refreshing, my Caprese Pasta Salad is a fresh twist on pasta night.
  • If pizza is on the menu, my Caprese Pizza tops a crisp crust with fresh mozzarella, tomatoes, and basil for a simple yet comforting dinner.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled Caprese chicken garnished with tomato salad and basil.
Print

Grilled Caprese Chicken Recipe

This Grilled Caprese Chicken is one of my favorite ways to turn the classic Caprese salad into a full dinner. Juicy balsamic-marinated chicken, melty mozzarella, and a fresh tomato-basil topping come together in a dish that's simple enough for weeknights but special enough to share.
Course Chicken Recipes, Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 466kcal

Ingredients

For the chicken:

  • 4 boneless skinless chicken breasts 6-8 ounces each
  • ½ cup balsamic vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for cooking and for grill grates
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 cloves minced garlic
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 6 ounces fresh mozzarella sliced ¼ -inch thick (about 6 slices)

Tomato Garnish

  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half or quartered if too big
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon balsamic vinegar
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn, plus more as garnish
  • 4 tablespoons of balsamic glaze optional

Instructions

  • Place the chicken breasts on a cutting board and pat them dry with paper towels. Place a sheet of stretch film over the chicken and pound it to ¾-inch thickness. Repeat the same process for the rest of the chicken breasts and set them aside.
    Chicken breasts pounded with stretch film on top.
  • To make the marinade, in a large bowl, whisk together ½ cup of balsamic vinegar, ¼ cup of olive oil, 1 tablespoon of honey, 1 teaspoon of Dijon mustard, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon of black pepper.
    Side by side images showing how to make balsamic chicken marinade.
  • Add the chicken breast to the bowl, ensuring it is fully submerged in the liquid. Cover with plastic wrap and let them sit on the counter while you work on the garnish and preheat the grill.*
  • To make the caprese garnish, place 1 cup of halved cherry tomatoes, 1 clove of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon of olive oil, 1 tablespoon of balsamic vinegar, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon of black pepper in a bowl. Toss to combine. Add the torn basil leaves and set them aside.
    Images showing how to make tomato topping.
  • When ready to cook, preheat the grill over medium-high heat, about 450°F (232°C). Once hot, scrape the grates to remove any food residue and oil the grates.
  • Remove the chicken breasts from the marinade, letting the excess drip off, and place them on the hot grill. Grill for about 4-5 minutes, flip, and then cook for another 3-4 minutes. Check with a meat thermometer to ensure that the internal temperature registers somewhere between 160-165°F (71-74°C).
    Images showing the grilling of the chicken breasts with mozzarella slices on top.
  • Place the mozzarella slices (2 slices on each chicken) over the chicken breasts, turn the heat to medium-low, cover the grill, and continue to cook until the cheese is slightly melted for about 3-4 minutes.
  • If your grill has a wire shelf on top (inside the lid), place the chicken on it to prevent further cooking (and potentially drying).
  • Transfer the chicken breasts to a large platter and cover loosely with foil. Let them rest for 5-10 minutes.
  • Right before serving, garnish the chicken with the tomato salad we made earlier.
    Grilled Caprese chicken garnished with tomatoes on a plate.
  • If using, drizzle it with balsamic glaze and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe makes 4 caprese chicken, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include the calories coming from the optional balsamic glaze.
  • Marinating time: If you have more time, you can marinate the chicken in the fridge for up to 2 hours or overnight. Be sure to take it out of the fridge 30 hours before grilling so that the chicken is not super cold when it hits the hot grill.
  • Grill pan: If grilling outside is not an option, you can also cook the chicken in a grill pan. 
  • Baked Version: No grill (or grill pan)? No problem! While I love the smoky flavor of grilled Caprese chicken, the baked version is just as easy to prepare. Start by marinating the chicken as written. Then place it on a parchment-lined baking sheet and bake in a preheated 400°F (204°C) oven for 18-22 minutes, or until the thickest part reaches 165°F (74°C) on a meat thermometer. During the last 3-4 minutes, add the mozzarella slices on top so they melt evenly. Once done, spoon the fresh tomato-basil mixture over the chicken and serve while it’s still warm and juicy.
  • Storing leftovers: Place leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep the tomato-basil garnish separate to keep the chicken from getting soggy. 

Nutrition

Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 106mg | Sodium: 1297mg | Potassium: 595mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 586IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 244mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-caprese-chicken/feed/ 2
Chicken Kofta https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/#comments Tue, 02 Sep 2025 13:35:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83148 I kept her tricks in my own version so you can enjoy juicy, reliable patties year-round. You can grill them…]]>

I kept her tricks in my own version so you can enjoy juicy, reliable patties year-round. You can grill them outside in summer, roast them on a sheet pan with veggies, or cook them quickly on the stovetop or even in your air fryer.

Grilled chicken kofta served with hummus, sliced onions and tomatoes.

Ingredients for the Juiciest Chicken Kofta

Having grown up eating this dish and after making it countless times, I’ve learned a few helpful things about the key ingredients. You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are some highlights, including substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from  the top view with the name of the ingredients.

Onion: Both white and yellow onions work. My mom always grated the onion so it blended evenly into the mixture. Be sure to drain the liquid, as grated onions release a significant amount of juice. Red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Ground chicken: I prefer to use organic chicken when available. Ground chicken made with dark meat adds more richness, but lean ground chicken breast also works if you prefer a lighter option.

Panko breadcrumbs: I usually reach for panko, but regular or seasoned breadcrumbs will also work. For a gluten-free option, use gluten-free breadcrumbs. Half a cup is the sweet spot. Any less and the mixture feels loose, any more and it turns too dense.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: Mince them as finely as you can. Garlic powder works in a pinch, but fresh garlic makes a big difference here.

Baking soda: This is our secret ingredient and one of my mom’s little tricks. A small amount of baking soda alters the pH of the meat, allowing the proteins to bind less tightly, which helps koftas remain tender while retaining their shape. And in case you are wondering, you won’t taste the baking soda in your cooked chicken koftas.

Egg: The egg works as a binder, which is especially helpful with lean ground chicken. Some recipes skip it, but I’ve tested it both ways and find that adding one keeps the patties from falling apart. If you prefer not to use it, the kofta will still work, though they may be a little more delicate when cooking.

Spices & Seasonings: I opted for ground cumin, sweet paprika, kosher salt, and black pepper, but adding ground coriander would also be a great option. If you want some heat, Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes are great options. Start with a small amount and adjust to taste.

Herbs: I opted for fresh Italian parsley, but any fresh herbs, such as mint or dill, work beautifully.

Optional Add-Ins:

Tomato paste: You can add up to 1 tablespoon to the mixture to add moisture and a pop of color. Red pepper paste also works, but it will slightly change the flavor.

Cheese: Both grated Parmesan cheese and low-moisture mozzarella work well here, about ¼ cup. Parmesan adds a savory umami boost, but it is salty, so be mindful of the salt in the rest of the recipe.

How to Make Chicken Kofta: Step-by-Step Instructions

Person showing how to grate an onion using a box grater.

Step 1 – Prep the onion: Set a fine mesh strainer over a bowl and grab your box grater. Using the large holes, grate the onion and place it right into the strainer. Then, using the back of a spoon, press it down to squeeze out as much juice as you can. 

It may feel like extra work, but draining the onion is key for kofta that hold their shape. If you prefer, you can chop the onion instead, but it won’t blend as seamlessly into the mixture.

Ground chicken kofta mixture in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 2 – Mix everything together: Transfer the grated onion to a large mixing bowl, then add the ground chicken, panko breadcrumbs, garlic, baking soda, cumin, paprika, egg, salt, black pepper, red pepper flakes, and parsley. 

I like to mix it with my hands, gently working it until just combined. This helps you feel when everything is evenly distributed and prevents overmixing, which can make the patties too dense.

A collage of images showing the shaping of the meatballs and grilling them.

Step 3 – Shape the kofta: Pour a little olive oil (or water) into a small bowl to keep nearby. Scoop about two tablespoons of the mixture, or use a cookie scoop so you’ll get even chicken kofta meatballs. 

Lightly oil your hands, and roll and press them into oval-shaped patties. Dip your hands in olive oil as needed to prevent the mixture from sticking to your hands and to help you form smooth, even patties.

Pro Tip: Traditionally, ground chicken koftas are shaped into oval patties, which is how my mom used to make them. You can also roll them into meatballs, flatten them slightly, or even press them onto skewers to make chicken kofta kebabs. Just remember that different shapes may cook a little faster or slower.

Step 4 – Let them rest: Place the shaped kofta on a platter, cover with plastic wrap, and let them sit at room temperature for 10-15 minutes while you heat up your grill, skillet, or oven. This quick rest helps them hold their shape when you cook them. If you are prepping ahead, you can refrigerate them instead.

How To Cook Chicken Kofta

My favorite way to cook chicken kofta is on the grill for those beautiful char marks, but I know that is not always possible. The good news is that they also turn out delicious when cooked in the oven or on the stovetop. Below are the steps for each method:

On The Grill

Step 1 – Preheat and prep the grill: Heat to medium-high and clean the grates thoroughly. A hot, oiled surface keeps the patties from sticking and gives them good grill marks.

Step 2 – Grill the Kofta: Place the patties on the grill and cook for 2 to 3 minutes per side, turning them over to ensure even cooking.

Step 3 – Check for doneness: Use an instant-read thermometer and remove the kofta as soon as the center reaches 165°F (74°C). Pulling them off at exactly the right temperature keeps them juicy and tender.

In The Oven

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: Set your oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. The parchment not only makes cleanup easier, but it also helps prevent the bottoms of the kofta from sticking or over-browning.

Step 2 – Arrange and Bake: Place the patties in a single layer, leaving some space between each one to allow hot air to circulate. Bake for about 15 minutes, flipping halfway through for even cooking.

Step 3 – Avoid overbaking: Start checking the temperature at the 14-minute mark. Chicken cooks quickly in the oven, and once it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C), it can dry out rapidly.

On The Stove Top

Step 1 – Heat the skillet: A cast-iron pan works best because it retains heat evenly and provides a good sear for the kofta. Add a tablespoon of olive oil and heat until it begins to shimmer. A hot pan sears the outside quickly, helping to lock in the juices.

Step 2 – Cook the kofta: Place the patties in the skillet and cook 2-3 minutes per side, keeping total cook time under 8 minutes. Medium-high heat gives you golden outsides while keeping the inside tender.

Step 3 – Cook in batches if needed: Avoid overcrowding the pan, as this will lower the temperature and cause the kofta to steam instead of sear. Cooking in two batches is worth it for the better browning and flavor. Check for 165°F (74°C) in the center before serving, so you know they are cooked perfectly.

In the Air Fryer

Step 1 – Preheat: Set your air fryer to 375°F (191 °C) and lightly spray or brush the basket with olive oil to prevent sticking.

Step 2 – Arrange: Lay your chicken koftas in a single layer, leaving a small amount of space between each one to ensure even cooking.

Step 3 – Cook: Air fry for about 12 minutes, flipping them halfway through. They’re ready when the centers reach 165°F (74 °C) on a meat thermometer or when they’re nicely golden on the outside.

How To Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Chicken kofta is a great make-ahead recipe, whether you’re planning for a busy weeknight or stocking the freezer for later. You can prepare the mixture ahead of time, store leftovers after cooking, or freeze them raw or cooked. Here’s how I handle it:

Make Ahead: Shape the koftas, place them on a baking sheet, wrap with stretch film, and store them in the fridge for up to 24 hours. 

Storing Leftovers: You can enjoy them warm or cold. If you’re eating them cold, just let them come to room temperature so they’re not fridge-cold. Store them in an airtight container and they’ll keep in the fridge for 3 to 4 days.

Reheat: My favorite way to reheat is on the stove with just a splash of water in the pan. The steam from the water gently warms the kofta, keeping them from drying out. 

You can also pop them in a 300°F (149°C) oven for 5-10 minutes or until they are heated through. 

Freeze (raw or cooked): You can freeze them raw or cooked. Below is how I do it.

  • Raw: Place the shaped ground chicken kofta on a parchment-lined sheet pan, cover with plastic wrap, and freeze for a couple of hours until firm. Then move them into a freezer bag so they don’t take up much space. They should last up to 3 months this way. When you’re ready to cook, thaw them overnight in the fridge.
  • Cooked: Store in a freezer-safe container, pressing out as much air as you can to prevent freezer burn. They’ll keep for up to 3 months. Thaw them in the fridge overnight.
Grilled chicken koftas on a plate served with lemon wedges.

Expert Tips

Even though making this chicken kofta recipe is simple, a few small details can make all the difference in how tender, juicy, and perfectly cooked they turn out. Below are my notes from years of making this recipe, along with what I learned from testing various methods.

  • Do not overmix the mixture: Overmixing the meat compresses the protein fibers and squeezes out some of the natural moisture. This is what can make the cooked chicken koftas feel dense instead of soft and tender. I like to mix just until all the ingredients are evenly combined. 
  • Wet your hands when shaping:  Be aware that the meat mixture is very sticky. To make shaping easier, I keep a small bowl of olive oil (or water) nearby and dip my hands in it to keep them moist. A small amount of liquid makes the mixture glide smoothly, resulting in even, smooth patties.
  • Avoid cooking straight from the fridge: If you’ve prepped the mixture ahead of time and stored it in the fridge, let it sit at room temperature for 20-30 minutes before cooking. Starting with ice-cold meat can cause the kofta to cook unevenly. Allowing it to come closer to room temperature helps them cook more evenly and stay juicy.

Serving Suggestions for Chicken Kofta

If you’re wondering what to serve with chicken kofta, the good news is that it’s one of the most versatile dishes I make. You can build it into a wrap, pair it with grains, or add it to a mezze platter for entertaining. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Wraps: My favorite way to serve kofta chicken is tucked into Homemade Pita Bread or wrapped in soft Lavash Bread, with fresh veggies, and drizzled generously with one of my creamy yogurt sauces, such as Mint Yogurt Sauce or Yogurt Dill Sauce. It’s quick, satisfying, and makes the perfect grab-and-go meal.
  • Salad: A simple crisp salad balances the warm spices in the kofta beautifully. Try my Mediterranean Pasta Salad for a crowd-pleasing, make-ahead option, or keep it light with a fresh green salad, such as my Spring Mix Salad or Fattoush.
  • Sheet Pan Kofta: For a hands-off option, make a sheet pan chicken kofta dinner by roasting the chicken koftas in the oven with quick-cooking vegetables like onions, bell peppers, and cherry tomatoes. Everything comes out ready at the same time, making it ideal for busy weeknights. 
  • Mezze Platter: Add these Turkish chicken meatballs to a mezze platter alongside Hummus, Tzatziki, and CAVA’s Feta Sauce, then add some warm bread and a few marinated olives. It’s the easiest way to make dinner feel like a little Mediterranean feast. If you prefer ground beef, my Turkish Meatballs are another great option for a mezze spread.
  • Grains: For a more filling plate, serve the kofta over Vermicelli Rice or Seasoned Quinoa. A spoonful of yogurt sauce ties everything together.

FAQs

What is the difference between kebab and kofta?

The biggest difference lies in how the meat is prepared and cooked. In Turkey, we call it chicken kofte. It is made from ground meat mixed with spices and herbs, then shaped into logs, patties, or little meatballs. If you shape it into long cylinders and wrap them around skewers, you get chicken kofta kebab. Kebab, on the other hand, is more about the cooking style and typically refers to chunks of meat, sometimes accompanied by vegetables, grilled on skewers.

Why did my kofta fall apart?

The most common reasons are either too much moisture or not enough binding. Be sure to squeeze out as much juice as possible from the onion before adding it to the mixture. Additionally, letting the shaped kofta rest for 10-15 minutes before cooking also helps them stay together.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Chicken Dinners You Might Like

If you enjoyed this chicken kofta recipe, here are a few other Mediterranean chicken dinners to add to your weeknight rotation:

  • For a customizable meal prep-friendly dinner, my Chicken Shawarma Bowl is a great choice. It is a great dinner you can make ahead and enjoy during the week.
  • If you love a mix of savory, spicy, and sweet, my Harissa Honey Chicken is always a hit. All you need is 30 minutes of marinating time.
  • For a hands-on Mediterranean chicken recipe, try cooking Chicken Kabobs in the Oven.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled chicken kofta in a platter from the top view.
Print

Chicken Kofta Recipe

Juicy, tender chicken kofta comes together in less than an hour with simple ingredients. Grill, bake, or pan-sear these seasoned patties and serve with warm bread, crisp salads, or your favorite sides for a delicious Mediterranean dinner.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 minutes
Resting time 15 minutes
Total Time 36 minutes
Servings 10 koftas
Calories 103kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 onion medium-size / peeled (about ½ cup)
  • 1 lb ground chicken
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • 1 egg
  • 1 ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • ¼ cup fresh Italian parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil to use when shaping the kofta (or water)

Instructions

  • Place a fine mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside. Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the onion*. Place the grated onion into the strainer. Using the back of a spoon, strain all of its juices. Transfer the onion to a large mixing bowl. Discard the juices.
    Person grating onion and then straining its juices.
  • Into that same bowl, add 1 lb ground chicken, ½ cup of panko breadcrumbs, 2 cloves of minced garlic, ¼ teaspoon of baking soda, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, 1 large egg, 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ½ teaspoon of black pepper, ¼ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, and ¼ of chopped fresh parsley.
    A collage of images showing the making of the chicken kofta mixture.
  • Mix with clean hands until well combined.
  • Pour the olive oil into a small bowl. To shape the kofta, scoop about 2 tablespoons of the mixture, oil your hands lightly, and form into 10 oval patties (or your preferred shape). A cookie scoop works well for even portions.
    Person shaping chicken koftas and grilling them.
  • Arrange the koftas on a platter, cover with plastic wrap, and let them rest at room temperature for 10-15 minutes before cooking.

Cooking On The Grill

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat. Clean the grates, then oil them using a paper towel dipped in oil.
  • Grill the kofta for 2-3 minutes for each side, turning often, until lightly golden brown and cooked through. They’re ready when an instant-read thermometer inserted into the center registers 165°F.
  • Transfer to a plate and let rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

In The Oven

  • Preheat your oven to 375 °F (191°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Arrange the chicken koftas on the baking sheet and bake for 15 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process for even baking.

On The Stove top

  • Heat a tablespoon of olive oil in a cast-iron skillet (or a large non-stick skillet) over medium high heat until shimmering.
  • Place the patties in the skillet, and cook undisturbed, for 2-3 minutes or until lightly golden brown. Continue to cook each side, turning every 2-3 minutes. It should take no more than 8 minutes to cook.*

In The Air Fryer

  • Preheat your air fryer to 375 °F (191°C). Lightly spray (or brush) it with oil.
  • Arrange the koftas in a single layer, leaving enough room between each patty for air to circulate.
  • Air fry for 12-13 minutes, turning them halfway through, until the center of a chicken kofta registers 165°F (74 °C) when inserted with a meat thermometer.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 chicken koftas. The nutritional values listed below are per kofta.
  • Grating the onion: I know that grating the onion is the most time-consuming part of this recipe, and I think it is worth the effort, as it allows the onion to blend seamlessly into the meat mixture. However, if you prefer, you can chop your onion finely. Be sure to remove any juices (if present) before use.
  • Baking soda: The small amount of baking soda helps keep the koftas hold their shape. In case you are wondering, no, you won’t taste it in the finished dish.
  • Do not overcrowd the pan*: When cooking on the stove, it is best to cook your koftas in batches to achieve a good crust. If you cook them all at the same time, koftas will steam instead of sear.
  • Storing leftovers: Once your chicken patties come to room temperature, you can place them in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. You can enjoy them cold or warm. 

Nutrition

Calories: 103kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 434mg | Potassium: 286mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 267IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/feed/ 2
Harissa Salmon https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-salmon/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-salmon/#respond Wed, 20 Aug 2025 16:24:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82909 My love for Sockeye Salmon started after a trip to Copper River in Alaska, where I had the chance to…]]>

My love for Sockeye Salmon started after a trip to Copper River in Alaska, where I had the chance to see how local fishers catch salmon during the short but intense fishing season. 

Ever since then, as soon as the Sockeye season starts, I begin thinking about how to make the most of it. This recipe is one of my favorite ways. It combines my love for harissa with the fatty richness of the salmon. Not to mention, it is a fantastic Mediterranean weeknight dinner.

Plus, it’s incredibly easy to prepare. Just mix the glaze, spread it on, and roast. It’s the kind of dish that feels a little fancy but fits perfectly into a busy weeknight.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You do not need a long list of ingredients to make this honey harissa salmon, and while you might have a few of them on hand, harissa is the one you may need to pick up or make from scratch. 

Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image for each ingredient.

You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are my notes on the key ingredients and why they make such a difference:

Harissa: Thanks to social media, harissa, a spicy and smooth chili sauce originating in Tunisia, is having a moment right now. And I have to say, it is for a good reason because it is delicious. 

As a little trivia, most versions of harissa you find at markets are the Moroccan version of this North African sauce, mixed in with other ingredients such as red peppers, preserved lemons, etc., compared to the original recipe made with dried chili peppers, olive oil, garlic, and spices.

Regardless of the version of harissa you use, in my opinion, it is the perfect spicy sauce for salmon.

And, when it comes to harissa for this spicy baked salmon recipe, you have a few options:

  • Homemade from scratch: You can follow my Harissa Sauce recipe for a homemade version, which takes about 45 minutes to make (with just 10 minutes of hands-on time).
  • Homemade from harissa powder: You can also make your own harissa spice blend (or buy it at the store) and turn that powder into a paste.
  • Store-bought: Or, you can buy a jar at grocery stores like Trader Joe’s and Whole Foods, in their “international,” “Mediterranean,” or “ethnic” sections. I tested this recipe with both NY Shuk and Mina, and while they both worked well, my husband and I thought NY Shuk’s preserved lemon harissa had a superior taste.

Still, regardless of the brand, keep in mind that spice levels vary, so give it a taste first and adjust the amount, especially if you’re serving kids. 

I’ve tested this recipe with both store-bought and homemade harissa, and while both work, if you have the time, I recommend making your own. It not only tastes better but also allows you to control the spice level.

Salmon: I like to use fresh wild salmon, especially Sockeye, available May through September. However, while wild-caught is my go-to, farm-raised can also be used. 

If you can’t get your hands on fresh salmon, you can use frozen salmon, but be sure to thaw it before using.

You can use Atlantic or Pacific salmon, and if you want to treat yourself and don’t mind spending a bit extra, king salmon is an amazing choice. Other options, such as Sockeye and Coho, are also excellent. 

You can cook a whole fillet or use pre-cut portions, just aim for center-cut pieces so they are an even thickness and cook at the same rate. Remember that thickness can vary, so you may need to adjust the cooking time.

Finally, you can use skin-on or skinless salmon; it is totally a personal preference.

Honey: Honey is my secret ingredient here, so don’t skip it. Just a tablespoon of it helps balance the heat coming from harissa, the fattiness from salmon, and the acid from lemon slices.

And in case you are wondering, it doesn’t make the whole dish sweet. Rather, it is there to tame the spiciness and offer a surprising sweet pop of flavor.

Olive oil: As it is with any recipe that uses just a few basic ingredients, using a good quality extra virgin olive oil is highly recommended in this baked salmon recipe. Choose one that you like the taste of. 

Lately, my go-to has been Garcia de la Cruz, but feel free to use any extra virgin olive oil you enjoy.

Lemon: We use a small amount of lemon juice in this spiced salmon to brighten up the harissa and lemon slices to garnish on top as it is baking in the oven. 

You can use lime instead, but keep in mind that the finished dish will have a slightly more tangy and aromatic flavor.

Garlic: In my opinion, fresh minced garlic is the best option, but for a milder flavor, you can also use a teaspoon of garlic powder instead.

Spices: I used kosher salt and black pepper, but you can add your favorites like paprika, cumin, coriander, or a pinch of cayenne for extra heat. Though I would refrain from incorporating too many spices, as we want the spicy harissa to shine. 

Fresh herbs: I used a small amount of fresh parsley, mostly for color and a pop of freshness. However, other herbs like fresh dill or cilantro can also be used for a slightly different but just as delicious flavor.

How to Make Harissa Salmon: Step-by-Step Instructions

Cooking salmon with a harissa glaze can look quite simple, but a few small details will make sure it turns out tender, flaky, and perfectly balanced between sweet and spicy. Here is how I do it and why each step matters:

Step 1 – Preheat your oven and prep the pan: Set your oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper to make cleanup easier and prevent the glaze from sticking or burning. This temperature is ideal for salmon because it cooks the fish through but without drying it out in only 12-14 minutes.

A collage of images showing of the making of the dressing.

Step 2 – Make the glaze: In a small bowl, whisk together the harissa, honey, olive oil, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and pepper. I like to mix the liquids first, then add the seasonings so the honey blends in smoothly. The smoother the glaze, the more evenly it will spread over the salmon, giving you a seasoned bite each time. 

Be sure to give it a taste and adjust as needed. If your harissa is very spicy, feel free to add a small amount of honey or lemon juice to balance the heat and adjust the seasoning as needed.

A collage of images showing how to prepare salmon to bake.

Step 3 – Prep the salmon: Pat the salmon dry on both sides with paper towels to remove that extra moisture. This is an important step in that it helps the glaze stick well on the fish and allows it to roast rather than steam, resulting in a nice, lightly crisp salmon.

Images showing honey harissa salmon before and after it is baked.

Step 4 – Glaze generously: Next, place the salmon on the baking sheet and spread the harissa mixture over the top, making sure to get the sides too. You want it fully coated so every bite is seasoned. 

I like to finish with a few lemon slices on top before baking, because as they cook, they release a bit of juice that soaks into the glaze. This adds a pop of brightness that balances the harissa and makes it visually appealing.

Step 5 – Bake: Place your salmon in the oven and let it bake for about 12 to 14 minutes. You will know it is ready when the thickest, center part of the fillet is between 125 and 135°F on an instant-read thermometer. Be sure to check in the middle and not the thinner ends, since those cook faster and can give you a misleading reading. 

We are keeping the temperature gentle and the cook time short because the goal is soft, moist salmon that flakes apart with just a fork. Overcooking can dry it out quickly, so keep an eye on the clock. With that being said, if you prefer a more well-done fillet, bake for about 15-17 minutes.

Step 6 – Garnish and serve: When the salmon comes out of the oven, top it with fresh parsley for freshness. I also like to put extra lemon wedges on the table so everyone can squeeze fresh lemon juice over the salmon.

Expert Tips

Even though this harissa salmon recipe is quick to put together, a few small details can make a big difference in how juicy and perfectly cooked your fish turns out. Here are my notes from years of cooking salmon and testing this recipe:

Remove salmon and harissa from the fridge before use: Remove the salmon from the fridge and let it sit at room temperature for about 10 minutes before cooking. Starting with cold salmon can cause it to cook unevenly. This also applies to harissa, especially if you are using a store-bought brand. It spreads more easily when it is at room temperature.

No need to cover with foil: Some recipes suggest covering the salmon with foil, but since this one cooks quickly, leaving it uncovered helps the glaze caramelize while still keeping the salmon tender. 

Use a meat thermometer: This is the best way to avoid dry salmon. Aim for 125 to 135°F in the thickest, middle part of the fillet. If you are using a different type of salmon, you may need to adjust the cooking time depending on its thickness. 

If you don’t have a thermometer, you can gently peek in the middle with a fork. It should flake easily and look cooked through, not raw or pinkish.

Don’t overcook: Salmon cooks pretty quickly, and overcooking is the fastest way to dry it out. By using a gentle oven temperature and baking it just long enough, you end up with soft, flaky fish that comes apart easily with a fork and stays nice and juicy.

Coat all sides with the glaze: Take a minute to make sure to cover every bit of the salmon with the harissa and honey mixture, not just the top. As it bakes, the mixture caramelizes, and with the roasted lemon on top, it’s absolutely delicious.

What To Serve With This Spicy Salmon Recipe?

One of my favorite things about this spicy baked salmon recipe is how easy it is to turn it into a complete meal. You can keep it light with a fresh salad, add something hearty like a grain, or drizzle it with a creamy sauce. Here are a few ideas:

Grains: Light, citrusy grains go so well with the heat from the harissa. My Lemon Orzo or Lemon Quinoa add a nice freshness and are great for soaking up that extra glaze.

Salads: If you are looking to keep the Mediterranean-theme going, pair it with either my Mediterranean Pasta Salad or Quinoa Tabbouleh. If you want something cooling to balance the spice, my Creamy Cucumber Salad is always a hit.

Sauce: A drizzle of Yogurt Dill Sauce on top or on the side is the easiest way to add creaminess and a fresh, herby touch that works perfectly with the spicy-sweet salmon.

How To Store and Reheat?

If you have leftovers, you can definitely enjoy this salmon the next day. It’s great cold over a salad, or you can gently reheat it so it stays moist.

Storage: Once the salmon has cooled, store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. If possible, keep it whole instead of flaking it apart, as this helps it retain more moisture when reheated.

Reheating: Salmon dries out quickly, so it is best to reheat it low and slow. Here, you have two options:

  • In the oven: Pop it in a low heat oven (275 °F / 135 °C) for about 7-10 minutes or until heated thoroughly.
  • In a skillet: Place the salmon in a non-stick skillet over low heat with a splash of water to create a little steam to keep the fish moist as it reheats. Keep a close eye on it as it warms very quickly.

Make Ahead: This recipe comes together so quickly that I wouldn’t bother making it ahead. You’ll get the best texture and flavor when it’s fresh from the oven.

Freezing: I don’t recommend freezing cooked harissa salmon. The texture of the fish changes, and it loses that soft, flaky quality we love.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Harissa salmon fresh out of the oven garnished with lemon slices.
Print

Harissa Salmon Recipe

This baked harissa salmon recipe is spread with a sweet and spicy honey-harissa glaze for a quick and easy dinner you can make in under 30 minutes.
Course Dinner, Seafood
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 14 minutes
Total Time 24 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 309kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons harissa homemade or store-bought
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs salmon filet skin on or off*
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • Fresh parsley leaves for garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 375 °F (191 °C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Into a bowl, place harissa, honey, olive oil, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper. Whisk until fully combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Set it aside.
    Person making the harissa sauce for the salmon.
  • Pat-dry the salmon on both sides using a few sheets of parchment paper. Transfer it to the prepared baking sheet.
  • Spread the harissa mixture evenly on the salmon, ensuring that all the top and sides are fully covered. There is no need to spread harissa at the bottom. Top it off with a few slices of lemon.
    Photos showing the salmon being prepared for baking.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 12-14 minutes or until your salmon registers between 125 to 135 °F.
    Photos showing harissa salmon before and after it is baked.
  • Garnish with parsley and serve it with lemon slices/wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Salmon: I prefer using wild Alaskan salmon (such as Sockeye Salmon or King Salmon) in most of my salmon recipes, and this one is no exception. However, you can use any salmon you can get your hands on. If it is thawed, be sure to fully thaw it before spreading it with harissa. Also, keep in mind that the baking time could change based on the thickness of your salmon.
  • A Whole filet or slices? Both would work. I usually shop for salmon in Costco, and they sell it as a filet. However, sliced salmon can also be used. 
  • Skin on or off: Both would work.
  • Storage: While this dish tastes best fresh out of the oven leftovers can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 309kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 94mg | Sodium: 517mg | Potassium: 924mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 151IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 2mg

FAQs

Can I substitute harissa?

In a pinch, you can use Turkish red pepper paste (biber salcasi) or even sriracha. Just know they are not quite the same. Sriracha is tangier and sweeter, while harissa has a deeper, spicier kick that is fantastic in marinades, dips, soups, and roasted meats. If you swap, the overall flavor will be a little different, but still delicious.

How do I know when my salmon is done?

If you have a meat thermometer, aim for 125 to 135°F in the thickest, middle section of the fish. If you do not have one, use a fork to gently peek inside. The salmon should flake easily and look opaque, not raw or too pink in the center.

How spicy is harissa salmon?

The spice levels depend on the harissa you are using. If you are making it home, you can adjust the spice levels by removing most of the seeds from the chilies. If you are buying harissa from the store, choose a brand that suits your taste and spiciness preference.

Can I grill harissa salmon?

You sure can. I usually use my Grilled Salmon Recipe as a guide when grilling. Simply preheat your grill to 350 °F/177 °C. Place salmon, skin side down, and cook uncovered for 3 minutes or until it releases easily. Carefully flip and cook the other side for another 3 minutes or until the thickest part of it registers 125 °F to 135 °C.

Can I make this recipe with frozen salmon?

You sure can, but be sure to thaw your salmon fully before using it in the recipe.

Can I make harissa salmon in the air fryer?

Yes, you can. For best results, use 2-3 salmon fillets instead of a whole side of salmon. Preheat your air fryer to 400°F and cook the fillets for about 5 minutes. Then, carefully spread the salmon with harissa paste over the top and continue cooking for another 2-3 minutes, or until the salmon is cooked through and flakes easily. Just keep in mind that cooking time may vary depending on the thickness of your fish.

Other Harissa Recipes You Might Like:

If you love harissa and are in need of more creative ideas to use it, these recipes are worth a try:

  • My Harissa Vinaigrette is a quick CAVA-inspired dressing that you can drizzle over salads, grain bowls, grilled meats, or roasted veggies.
  • For a simple weeknight dinner, Grilled Harissa Chicken pairs tender chicken with the bold, smoky kick of harissa and comes together with just 20 minutes of hands-on time.
  • When you’re craving a sweet-and-spicy combo (similar to this harissa honey salmon recipe), my Harissa Honey Chicken combines harissa with honey, garlic, and lemon for roasted caramelized chicken thighs.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-salmon/feed/ 0
Grilled Flank Steak Salad https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/#respond Tue, 12 Aug 2025 20:16:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82744 During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on…]]>

During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on the grill, that is where you will find me, especially when peak summer produce is at its best. This marinated flank steak salad is the perfect way to celebrate the season in one big fresh bowl. 

Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

For years, I grilled flank steak with just salt and pepper, but lately, I have been marinating it for a few hours, which really amps up the flavor. The rest is simple: toss in whatever summer produce you have on hand, such as tomatoes, corn, or radishes, and make it your own. But really, take my recipe as a place to start and make it your own. 

It is a fantastic summer salad recipe you will want to make again and again.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes you need to bring this grilled steak salad to life: 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Flank Steak: 

I usually use about 1½ pounds of flank steak. When buying flank steak to use in this salad, ask your butcher to give you a piece that is well marbled for the best flavor. 

You can certainly keep it simple with a little salt, pepper, and olive oil, but I opted to use my Flank Steak Marinade, which only takes about an hour to work its magic. 

Salad Dressing: 

I’m using my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette for this recipe because it pairs beautifully with the grilled steak and vegetables. If you’re in the mood for something lighter, my Lemon Vinaigrette is a great option too. You can even make the dressing a day ahead and keep it in the fridge until you’re ready to serve.

For the Salad:

Lettuce: I like using romaine for the crunch, but any salad greens you have on hand will work. Arugula or a simple spring mix are great options, too. Just make sure they’re thoroughly washed, dried, and chopped into bite-sized pieces. 

Corn: I grill my corn on the cob right before grilling the flank steak, but any corn, whether it is thawed frozen corn or drained and rinsed canned corn, would work in this recipe.

Tomatoes: I like using cherry tomatoes, but any tomato will work. Roma, heirloom, or any ripe summer tomato is a good option. If you’re using cherry tomatoes, slice them in half or into quarters if they’re too big. For other tomatoes, cut them into bite-sized pieces so they’re easy to mix into the salad.

Radishes:  I use regular red radishes, but any variety works. Just slice them thinly so the acid in the dressing can cut through their bitterness and give them a lightly pickled taste.

Scallions: I opted for thinly sliced green onions (including both the white and green parts) for their milder flavor. But if you’re after something with more bite, thinly sliced red onions are a great option.

Avocado: Choose a ripe avocado. I recommend adding it just before serving so it stays fresh and does not turn brown. You can slice or cube it depending on your preference.

Cheese: I used fresh mozzarella for its mild flavors. If you can get your hands on them, fresh mozzarella pearls are ideal, but you can also buy a whole mozzarella and cut it into bite-sized cubes. 

Alternatively, for a bolder cheese option, crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese can also be used.

How To Make Grilled Flank Steak Salad?

This marinated flank steak salad recipe consists of two main parts: first, we marinate the flank steak, then we grill it and assemble the salad. I usually marinate the steak the night before so it’s ready to go, making this a perfect weeknight summer dinner. 

Below are the step-by-step instructions, along with helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Person making a flank steak salad and adding it into a bowl with the steak.

Step 1 – Make the Marinade: In a mixing bowl, combine all the marinade ingredients and whisk until smooth. I like to start with the wet ingredients first, then add the seasonings so everything blends evenly. Place the flank steak in a shallow glass dish or a resealable plastic bag. 

Pour the marinade over the surface, ensuring it’s evenly coated, then gently press or massage it in to allow the marinade to soak in. Cover and let it rest for at least 1 hour, or refrigerate up to overnight. Avoid marinating for more than 24 hours, as the acidity can break the meat down quite a bit and affect the texture.

Person making salad dressing and grilling the meat.

Step 2 – Make the Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, combine the balsamic vinegar, lemon juice, minced garlic, kosher salt, and pepper. Whisk to combine. Then, while whisking, slowly drizzle in the extra virgin olive oil until the dressing looks smooth and emulsified. Doing so helps the oil and vinegar come together without separating too quickly.

During my recipe testing, I’ve found that using a combination of balsamic vinegar and lemon juice gives the dressing a nice balance of depth and brightness, complementing the balsamic flavors in the steak marinade.

Step 3 – Grill the Steak: Preheat your grill to 500°F. High heat is key here because it sears the steak, creating those beautiful grill marks. Scrape the grates clean to remove any leftover bits so the meat can get even contact with the heat, then coat them generously with olive oil. Place the steak directly on the grill and cook for about 4 to 5 minutes per side for medium-rare. Use an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link) to check doneness and avoid overcooking, especially with lean cuts like flank steak.

If you’re not sure what temperature to aim for, here’s a quick guide to help you cook your steak just the way you like it:

  • Medium-rare: 130 to 135°F (3 to 4 minutes per side)
  • Medium: 140 to 145°F (4 to 5 minutes per side)
  • Medium-well: 150 to 155°F (5 to 6 minutes per side)

I usually aim for medium-rare to keep the steak juicy and tender. Going much past medium can cause it to dry out.

Step 4 – Rest the Steak: Transfer the steak to a platter and cover with foil. Let it rest for at least 10 minutes while you prepare the salad. This allows the juices to redistribute so they stay in the meat when sliced, keeping every bite juicy and tender.

A collage of images showing the dressing of the salad and the slicing of the grilled steak.

Step 5 – Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine the chopped romaine lettuce, grilled corn, cherry tomatoes, thinly sliced radishes, thinly sliced green onions, avocado (sliced or cubed), and cubed mozzarella. 

That being said, if you are assembling this salad a few hours in advance, it is best to add the avocado at the last minute to prevent it from browning. The same goes for the dressing; it is best to drizzle it right before serving to keep the salad crispy and fresh.

Taste and adjust the seasoning as needed. Sometimes all it needs is a pinch of salt or a touch more acidity to bring everything together.

Step 6 – Slice the Steak: Slice the steak thinly (about ½ inch thick) against the grain. This means cutting across the natural lines you see running through the meat. Those lines are muscle fibers, and cutting across them makes each bite softer and easier to chew. 

The steak salad on a large plate from the top view.

Step 7 – Arrange and serve: Arrange the meat on top of the salad and serve while still warm.

Expert Tips for the Best Results

  • Plan ahead for grilled corn: If you’re planning to grill your corn, be prepared to set aside a bit more time, as it takes longer to grill corn than flank steak. Corn usually needs 10-15 minutes on the grill (depending on size), while flank steak takes about 5-7 minutes. I recommend starting with the corn first, so everything finishes around the same time.
  • Dressing and greens: The beauty of this salad is that it can be made with whatever salad greens you have on hand. I use romaine lettuce because I find that it gives a nice bite and crunch to the overall salad. It is also able to withstand the salad dressing for a longer time. 
    If you choose to use more delicate salad greens like arugula or spring mix, it is best to drizzle the salad with the dressing right before serving to prevent soggy greens.
  • Avocado: Add avocado just before serving to keep it fresh and prevent it from browning.
  • Best Timing for Serving: I recommend making the salad (without the dressing) while the steak is resting. Dress the salad, give it a quick toss, and then slice the steak and place it right on top so it’s ready to serve.

How to Store Leftovers?

Storage: I always recommend storing the steak separately from the salad because once the greens sit with the dressing, they start to get soggy pretty quickly. 

If you know you’ll have leftovers, let everything come to room temperature first, then place the steak and the salad in separate airtight containers before popping them in the fridge. Both will keep well for up to 3 days.

Reheating (optional): You can enjoy this straight from the fridge, but if you’d rather have it warm, just reheat the steak on its own before adding it back to the salad. Right before serving, give the salad a good toss to redistribute everything, and if needed, add a pinch more seasoning since the juices tend to settle at the bottom and the greens can lose a bit of their seasoning as they sit.

FAQs

Can I use a different cut of steak?

Yes. Skirt steak is the closest substitute and works really well with this marinade. Sirloin is another great option if you prefer something a little thicker and more tender. Just keep in mind that cooking times will vary depending on the cut and thickness, so use an instant-read thermometer to get it just right.

Can I make this salad ahead of time?

You can prepare the components ahead of time, such as making the dressing and cooking the steak. I recommend storing everything separately and assembling the salad just before serving so the greens stay crisp and fresh.

What if I don’t have a grill for the steak?

You can cook flank steak in a hot cast-iron skillet on the stovetop or under the broiler in your oven. For the stovetop, sear it in a lightly oiled skillet for 3-5 minutes per side for medium-rare. For the oven, broil it on a rack set over a baking sheet for about 5-6 minutes per side, depending on your preferred doneness. Always let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing against the grain.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Flank Steak Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you’re a fan of this grilled flank steak salad, you’ll want to try these other flank steak recipes:

  • Switch up your usual taco night with my Flank Steak Tacos, pairing them with your favorite toppings and enjoying them on warm tortillas.
  • For a satisfying and comforting meal, my Chimichurri Steak Sandwich has juicy grilled steak with fresh chimichurri on soft bread for a lunch or dinner you’ll want to make on repeat.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled flank steak salad with utensils on the side.
Print

Grilled Flank Steak Salad Recipe

This grilled flank steak salad is packed with tender marinated steak, crisp romaine, sweet grilled corn, creamy avocado, and fresh mozzarella. Tossed in a tangy balsamic dressing, it's a fresh, meal-worthy summer salad perfect for weeknights or backyard gatherings.
Course Dinner, Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 551kcal

Ingredients

For the flank steak marinade:

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more to oil the grill grates
  • cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs flank steak

For The Salad Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove peeled and minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

For The Salad:

  • 2 heads romaine lettuce rinsed, dried, and roughly chopped (about 6 cups)
  • 2 cups corn kernels grilled, or frozen, and thawed or canned and rinsed
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 3 small radishes sliced thinly
  • 3 scallions chopped (both white and green parts)
  • 1 ripe avocado sliced
  • 1 cup fresh mozzarella cheese cubed or crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese

Instructions

  • To make the marinade, grab a large enough container that can accommodate your flank steak and place ¼ cup of olive oil, ⅓ cup of soy sauce, ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper in it. Whisk until smooth.
    Flank steak marinade being poured into a bowl.
  • Cover and let it marinate in the fridge for at least an hour or overnight (no more than 24 hours.)
  • While the meat is marinating, make the salad dressing. In a small bowl, place 3 tablespoons of balsamic vinegar, 2 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, 1 clove garlic, peeled and minced, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper. Give it a whisk. While still whisking, slowly add the 1/4 cup of extra-virgin olive oil. Whisk until fully incorporated and smooth. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the dressing being made and the meat grilled.
  • To grill the steak, preheat a gas grill to 500 degrees °F. Scrape the grill grates and coat them generously with the oil.
  • Place the flank steak on the grill and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side for rare (internal temperature is 130 to 135 °F), 4-5 minutes on each side for medium (internal temperature is 136 to 145 °F), or 5-6 minutes on each side for medium-well (internal temperature is 146 to 155 °F).
  • When it reaches your desired doneness, transfer the grilled flank steak to a platter and cover it with foil. Let it rest while you prepare the salad.
  • To make the salad, place 6 cups of roughly chopped romaine lettuce, 2 cups of corn, 1 cup of chopped cherry tomatoes, 3 small sliced radishes, 3 thinly sliced green onions, 1 sliced avocado, and a cup of mozzarella pearls in a large salad bowl.
    Person adding the dressing over the salad and the steak is sliced.
  • Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss to ensure that all of the ingredients are evenly coated. Add more seasoning to taste and adjust as needed.
  • Slice the steak against the grain (1/2-inch thick slices) and layer it over the salad just before serving.
    Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 cups of salad that is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing the salad and the meat separately. If not, place the leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Corn: You can use any corn you have on hand. Frozen (and thawed), Canned (and drained) or grilled fresh corn would all work. If you are planning to grill your corn, I recommend setting aside a bit more time as it takes longer for corn to grill (compared to the flank steak).

Nutrition

Calories: 551kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 1721mg | Potassium: 1358mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 18731IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 224mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/feed/ 0
Flank Steak Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/#comments Tue, 12 Aug 2025 20:13:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82742 I’ve been making flank steak for years, but it wasn’t until we bought our first gas grill a couple of…]]>

I’ve been making flank steak for years, but it wasn’t until we bought our first gas grill a couple of summers ago that I really started perfecting it. I was first drawn to this cut because it’s budget-friendly and cooks quickly, which makes it perfect for busy weeknights or casual weekend grilling.

Back then, I kept things simple with just salt and pepper. The steak was fine, but it never had that “wow” factor. That changed once I began experimenting with marinades, and the version you see here quickly became my go-to. 

Grilled flank steak sliced on a plate.

What makes this the best flank steak marinade is the balance of soy sauce, vinegar, Dijon mustard, and a touch of honey (or brown sugar). Paired with high heat and a quick cook time, it transforms this lean cut into a tender, juicy steak that people can hardly believe is flank steak.

Ingredients You’ll Need

The full list of ingredients is in the recipe card below, but after making this recipe countless times, I’ve gathered a few notes on what makes these key ingredients so important:

Ingredient for the recipe from the top view.

Olive oil: Use a good-quality extra virgin olive oil here. Nowadays, my favorite brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link) with its smooth and earthy flavor. You’ll also want to keep a little extra oil to grease your grill grates right before grilling to prevent the meat from sticking to the grill. 

Soy sauce: Soy sauce is the secret ingredient that gives the steak its deep, salty, savory, and umami kick. I’ve tried using just salt before, but soy sauce adds so much more depth. If you’re following a gluten-free diet, tamari or coconut aminos work just as well.

Apple Cider Vinegar: As the primary acid in this recipe, vinegar helps tenderize the meat. I use apple cider vinegar in this recipe, as it is commonly found in most households. However, balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar would also work. Keep in mind, though, depending on the vinegar you use, that the flavor profile of your marinade will be slightly different.

For example, using an aged balsamic from Modena will give you a deeper, sweeter taste.

Lemon or lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed juice for the best taste. I usually go with lemon juice for its slightly tangier flavor, but lime juice works just as well. While freshly squeezed juice is best, in a pinch, bottled juice will work too.

Dijon mustard: When it comes to mustard, I like to use Dijon mustard for its strong, tangy flavors, but if you prefer a bit of texture in your marinade, you can also use grainy mustard. Yellow mustard will work in a pinch, though it has a milder taste.

Sweetener of your choice: A small amount of sugar helps balance the tangy and umami flavors of the marinade. I use honey in my recipe, but brown sugar would also work.  Either way, be sure to whisk it well so that it’s fully dissolved to prevent the sugar burning on the grill.

Fresh garlic cloves: For the best taste, I recommend using freshly minced garlic. But if you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder works too.

Seasoning for Flank Steak: For the spices in this marinade, I’ve found that sweet paprika and ground cumin work best, but if you prefer a smokier flavor, you can swap in smoked paprika. You can also add fresh or dried herbs that complement the rest of your meal. Choose ones that echo the flavors in your side dishes for a harmonious pairing.

Flank steak: When buying flank steak, look for a cut that is well marbled and has a bright red color that looks fresh and moist. It is best to choose a flank steak that is even in thickness. My recipe calls for 1 ½ lbs of flank steak that is  ¾ to 1 inch thick, which is ideal for grilling.

How to Marinate Flank Steak? Step-by-Step Instructions

Marinating flank steak is one of the simplest ways to ensure it turns out tender and full of flavor. It really is as easy as whisking a few ingredients together in a large bowl and letting the steak soak up all that goodness.

Here’s exactly how I do it with some helpful tips on every step:

Flank steak marinade in a bowl and being poured over the meat.

Step 1 – Make the marinade: In a mixing bowl, combine olive oil, soy sauce, vinegar, lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, Dijon mustard, honey, garlic, paprika, cumin, salt, and pepper. Whisk until everything is fully incorporated and the marinade looks smooth. 

I find it helps to start with the wet ingredients first, then add in the seasonings so everything blends evenly. This is especially helpful when using ingredients like honey or Dijon mustard, as it ensures they dissolve smoothly and don’t clump.

Step 2 – Add the steak: Use a large, shallow dish (ideally one with a tight-fitting lid) that’s big enough to hold your flank steak in a single layer so it can lie flat and be fully coated in the marinade. 

If you’re working with a larger cut or want less cleanup, a resealable plastic bag will work as well. Pour the marinade over the top, making sure the entire surface is covered.

I like to press the steak gently into the marinade to help it really soak in. If you’re using a plastic bag, seal it tightly and massage the marinade into the meat to distribute the liquid evenly. 

Marinated flank steak before and after it is grilled.

Step 3 – Cover and marinate: Cover your dish with a tight-fitting lid (or seal your bag). If you can plan ahead, marinating overnight in the fridge is my go-to, but even a quick 1-hour marinade will still give you good flavor. Depending on your schedule, here’s how I do both:

  • 1 Hour Marinade: If all you have is an hour, you can let it sit at room temperature on your kitchen counter, which helps take the chill off the meat, allowing it to cook more evenly later. 
  • Overnight Marinade (preferred method): If you can plan ahead, marinating it overnight in the fridge is even better. Just don’t go past 24 hours; the acids in the marinade will start to change the texture, and instead of tender, the meat can turn a little mushy.

How To Cook Marinated Flank Steak?

Once your steak is marinated and ready to go, it’s time to cook. While my preferred method for cooking is on the grill, I know that it is not always possible. The good news is that you can cook your marinated steak on the stove or in the oven.

Below are the steps for each method:

On The Grill

Step 1 – Preheat the grill: When it comes to grilling marinated beef flank steak, we’re aiming for high heat, around 500°F. You want that grill nice and hot so you get a good sear on the steak without overcooking the inside. 

While the grill heats up, give the grates a good scrape to remove any residue. Then, use a paper towel dipped in oil to coat the grates generously to prevent sticking and help you get those beautiful grill marks.

Step 2 – Prepare the steak: Remove the steak from the marinade, letting the excess drip off. We don’t want it soaking wet when it hits the grill, which can cause flare-ups and burn the outside before the inside cooks. 

As the first side cooks, you can spoon a little of the leftover marinade over the top to keep the uncooked side moist. However, once you flip the steak, you should discard any marinade that has been in contact with raw meat.

Step 3 – Grill: Place the steak directly on the grill and cook for about 4 to 5 minutes per side for medium-rare. The best way to determine if it has reached your ideal doneness is to use an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link). If you’re not sure what temperature to aim for, here’s a quick guide to help you cook your steak just the way you like it:

  • Medium-rare: 130 to 135°F internal temperature (3 to 4 minutes per side)
  • Medium: 140 to 145°F internal temperature (4 to 5 minutes per side)
  • Medium-well: 150 to 155°F internal temperature (5 to 6 minutes per side)

I usually go for a medium-rare to medium level of doneness with flank steak to keep it juicy and tender, but feel free to adjust based on your preference. Just remember, since it’s a lean cut, going much past medium can start to dry it out.

Step 4 – Rest before slicing: Once your steak is cooked to your liking, transfer it to a cutting board or platter and let it rest for about 5 to 10 minutes. This will give the juices time to redistribute, so when you slice into it, they stay in the meat instead of running out and keeping every bite juicy and tender.

In The Oven

I’ll be honest, my favorite way of cooking flank steak is on the grill, but let’s face it, sometimes grilling is not an option. The good news is that you can get a similar result using your oven’s broiler, and it’s just as easy.

Step 1 – Turn the broiler on: Set your oven to the “broil” setting on high. For the best results, place the oven rack in the upper third section, about 5-6 inches from the heat source.

Step 2 – Prepare the pan: Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil), then set a wire rack over it. The rack is key because it allows hot air to circulate completely around the meat as it roasts, helping us create crispy edges and evenly cooked flank steak.

Step 3 – Broil: Remove the steak from the marinade and let the excess drip off before transferring it to your prepared sheet pan. Broil for 5-6 minutes on each side, or until it reaches your desired doneness. The best way to know when it’s ready is by inserting an instant-read thermometer into the thickest part of the meat. For a quick guide on what temperatures to aim for, see the doneness temperature chart in the grilling section above.

Step 4 – Rest and slice: When the cooking time is completed, transfer the steak to a plate, cover loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

On The Stove Top:

When it comes to cooking your marinated steak on the stove top, a cast-iron skillet works best as it retains heat very well. Simply:

Step 1 – Heat the skillet: Grab a large (10 or 12 inch) cast iron skillet and heat it over medium-high heat until sizzling hot. You can check if it is hot enough by spraying it with a drop of water. If it evaporates right away, it should be good to go.

Step 2 – Prepare the steak: Remove the marinated flank steak from the marinade, making sure to remove any excess. This is an important step in that excess liquid will steam the meat instead of searing it. I even recommend patting it dry with a few sheets of paper towels to make sure that it is as “dry” as possible.

Step 3 – Cook the steak: Transfer the steak to the skillet and sear for 3-4 minutes or until nicely browned. Flip the steak and cook for another 3-5 minutes, depending on the level of doneness you prefer.

Expert Tips:

Even though marinating flank steak is a simple process, a few small details can make all the difference in how tender and juicy your steak turns out. Below, I am sharing my notes from my recipe testing to help you make the best marinated flank steak:

  • Don’t put cold meat on the grill: If you’re marinating your flank steak overnight, take it out of the fridge 30-60 minutes before grilling. You don’t want to put super cold steak onto a hot grill, as it won’t sear properly, and the outside can overcook before the inside comes up to temperature.
  • Let the excess marinade drip off: Before cooking, I always let the steak rest for a moment over the bowl or dish to let any extra marinade drip off. Too much liquid on the surface can cause the steak to steam instead of sear, especially if you’re grilling or using a cast-iron skillet. Also, since the marinade contains acid, putting the steak on the grill while it’s still dripping can cause flare-ups. Letting it drip off helps avoid all that and gives you better control over the cook.
  • Aim for medium doneness: Since flank steak is a thinner, leaner cut, I usually aim to cook it to medium. This gives you a tender, juicy result without drying it out. If you go much past that, it can start to get tough and chewy.
  • Let it rest before slicing: Just like with any steak, let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes on a cutting board before slicing. This allows the juices to redistribute throughout the meat instead of spilling out, keeping every bite tender.
  • Always slice against the grain: This is the key to keeping flank steak tender. The long muscle fibers run in one direction, and cutting across them shortens those fibers, making each bite easier to chew.

What To Serve It With?

One of the things I love most about this flank steak marinade recipe is how versatile the steak turns out. You can serve it on its own for a simple dinner or build it into bowls, tacos, or hearty salads. No matter how you enjoy it, here are some of my favorite recipes to round out the meal:

Grilled Vegetables: If you’re making this as a summer meal, it pairs beautifully with grilled vegetables like Grilled Eggplant or Grilled Corn on the Cob. Both are easy to prepare alongside the steak and bring that same fresh-off-the-grill taste to the plate.

Marinated flank steak served over a salad.

Salad: My Grilled Flank Steak Salad is a fantastic, meal-worthy salad that is everything you want in a bowl on a warm summer dinner. If you want a different option, my Original Caesar Salad, tangy Mediterranean Pasta Salad, or creamy Coleslaw with Greek Yogurt all complement the steak perfectly without overpowering it.

Potatoes: If you’re looking to add something hearty, try a side of crispy potatoes. I recommend my Fingerling Potatoes in an Air Fryer for a quick option or my simple Smashed Fingerling Potatoes.

Butter Sauce: And don’t forget a drizzle of something buttery to finish it off. A spoonful of Roasted Garlic Butter or my simple buttery Garlic Sauce takes this steak over the top and ties the whole meal together.

How To Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

If you have leftovers, this grilled flank steak keeps well and makes for an easy second meal. Remember, the key to great leftovers is preserving moisture. By following these simple steps, you can enjoy this delicious flank steak days or even weeks later with the same great taste:

Storage:

If you’re planning to store leftovers, I recommend keeping the steak whole. It helps lock in moisture and makes it easier to reheat without overcooking. Once it’s cooled, wrap it up or transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. 

If it’s already sliced, that’s okay, you’ll just want to reheat it in a cast-iron skillet with a splash of water to bring back some of that texture.

Freezing:

If you plan on freezing it, I recommend freezing the cooked steak whole. Let it cool completely first, then wrap it tightly in parchment paper or plastic wrap to help prevent freezer burn. Place it in a freezer-safe bag and press out as much air as you can before sealing. It’ll keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

When you’re ready to enjoy it again, thaw it in the fridge overnight. For a quicker option, submerge the sealed bag in a bowl of cold water and let it sit for about 30 minutes.

Reheating: 

If you stored your steak whole, the best way to reheat it is in the oven. Preheat to 275°F, wrap the steak loosely in foil, and warm it for 10 to 15 minutes or until heated through. Covering is important as it will help lock in moisture and keep the steak from drying out.

If your steak is already sliced, I recommend reheating it in a cast-iron skillet over medium heat. Add a splash of water or beef broth to keep it moist, and warm just until heated through. This helps bring back some of that texture and gives the edges a slight crisp without overcooking the inside.

Whichever method you use, reheat low and slow. Since flank steak is lean, high heat can dry it out fast.

FAQs

How long can you marinate flank steak?

You can marinate flank steak for as little as 1 hour at room temperature if you’re short on time. For the best results, though, I recommend marinating it overnight in the fridge. Just be sure not to go over 24 hours, as the acid in the marinade can start to break the meat down and affect the texture.

Can I freeze raw flank steak in the marinade?

Yes, you technically can. Freezing pauses the marinating process, and as the meat thaws, it will continue to absorb the flavor. The key is to cook the meat as soon as it is thawed, to ensure that the acidic ingredients don’t alter its texture too much.
To freeze, place the raw meat and the marinade in a freezer-safe bag and remove all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.

Can I freeze marinated flank steak after it is cooked?

Yes, you can. For best results, freeze the steak whole. This helps maintain its moisture and texture when you reheat it. Make sure it’s fully cooled, then wrap it tightly in parchment paper or plastic wrap to avoid freezer burn. Transfer it to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and seal. It’ll keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

What is the best way to slice flank steak?

Always slice flank steak against the grain. This means cutting across the visible lines of muscle fibers rather than parallel to them. Doing this shortens the muscle fibers and gives you tender and easy-to-chew pieces every time.

Can I use this marinade for skirt steak as well?

Yes, you can. Skirt steak is a similar cut that is lean and perfect for high-heat cooking, so it benefits from the same balance of acidity, salt, and sweetness.

Flank Steak vs. Flap Steak: Are they the same?

Most people are confused about these two cuts of meat, but they are not the same. Flank steak comes from the cow’s lower abdomen, while flap steak is cut from the bottom sirloin, just next to the flank. With that being said, this marinade can be used for flap steak and deliver great results.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Steak Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoyed this easy flank steak recipe, there are plenty of other ways to enjoy it too:

  • For an easy weeknight dinner or a get-together, you can’t go wrong with my Flank Steak Tacos. These pair perfectly with fresh toppings and warm tortillas.
  • If you’re craving something hearty and satisfying, my Chimichurri Steak Sandwich is always a hit.  Imagine perfectly cooked steak wrapped in chimichurri sauce in a soft, crusty bread. It’s everything you want in a sandwich.
  • Or if you’re in the mood for something lighter, try the cult-favorite, Houston’s Thai Steak Noodle Salad for an impressive yet easy steak dinner recipe.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled marinated Flank steak sliced on a plate.
Print

Flank Steak Marinade Recipe

Here's an easy flank steak marinade that transforms a budget-friendly cut into a tender, juicy steak every time. Made with simple pantry staples, it's perfect for grilling, broiling, or searing flank steak for an easy, crowd-pleasing meal.
Course Meat
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 266kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more to oil the grill grates
  • cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup apple cider vinegar or balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice or lime juice
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey or brown sugar
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs flank steak

Instructions

  • Select a container that is large enough to fit your flank steak comfortably, ideally one with a fitting lid. Alternatively, you can also use a resealable plastic bag.
  • Add in ¼ cup of olive oil, ⅓ cup of soy sauce, ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper. Whisk to combine.
    Flank steak marinade being poured over the meat.
  • Add the flank steak and ensure that the whole piece is submerged in the marinade.
  • Cover and refrigerate for at least 1 hour, preferably overnight, but no longer than 24 hours.
    Flank steak in the marinade and then on the grill.

To Cook it on the Grill:

  • When ready to cook, preheat a gas grill to 500°F.
  • Scrape the grill grates to remove any possible food residue. Dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl of oil and coat the grates generously with the oil.
  • Remove the flank steak from the marinade, letting the excess marinade drip off. Discard the marinade.
  • Place the meat on the grill and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side for rare (internal temperature is 130 to 135 °F), 4-5 minutes on each side for medium (internal temperature is 136 to 145 °F), or 5-6 minutes on each side for medium-well (internal temperature is 146 to 155 °F).
  • When it reaches your desired doneness, transfer the grilled flank steak to a platter and cover it with foil.
  • Let it rest for 5 minutes, and then slice it against the grain. Serve while still warm.

To Broil in The Oven

  • Set your oven to the "broil" setting on high. For the best results, place the oven rack in the upper third section, about 5-6 inches from the heat source.
  • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set a wire rack over it.
  • Remove the steak from the marinade and let the excess drip off before transferring it to your prepared sheet pan. Broil for 5-6 minutes on each side, or until it reaches your desired doneness.
  • Transfer the steak to a plate, cover loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

On The Stove Top

  • Place a large cast-iron skillet over medium high heat and heat it until sizzling hot.
  • Remove the marinated flank steak from the marinade, making sure to remove any excess. Transfer it onto a clean plate and pat dry with a paper towel to remove as much of the liquid as possible.
  • Transfer the steak to the skillet and sear for 3-4 minutes or until nicely browned. Flip the steak and cook for another 3-5 minutes, depending on the level of doneness you prefer.

Video

Notes

  • Let it come to room temperature before grilling: If you are marinating your steak overnight, take it out of the fridge and let it rest on the counter 30 to 60 minutes before grilling. If you put cold marinated steak on a hot grill, it won’t sear properly. It’s likely that the outside will cook before the inside is cooked.
  • Level of doneness: Please use the grilling times I listed in the post as a place to start. The grilling time could change based on the thickness of your flank steak. The best way to check doneness is with a meat thermometer.
  • Storage: If you’re planning to store leftovers, I recommend keeping the steak whole. Once it’s cooled, wrap it up or transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. If it’s already sliced, that’s okay too. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 266kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 1077mg | Potassium: 495mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 173IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/feed/ 2
Adana Kebab Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/#comments Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:17:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82217 Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in…]]>

Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in Turkiye and with a good friend who owns a kebab restaurant in Adana (and serves nothing else!), I felt uniquely qualified to take on the challenge.

In this post, I will walk you through every aspect of creating these juicy, flavorful skewers with confidence. I’ll share how to choose the right meat, the true authentic seasonings, essential shaping techniques, and foolproof grilling tips I’ve picked up through my own recipe testing.

Adana wrap on a plate from the top view.

What Is Adana Kebab?

At its essence, Adana Kebab (or as we call it, Adana Kebap) is Turkey’s most iconic grilled lamb skewer. Hailing from the city of Adana, this traditional recipe is made with just a handful of core ingredients: finely ground lamb, tail fat, a specific Turkish red pepper called kapya, fiery Urfa chili flakes (or Aleppo pepper), salt, and black pepper.

Although many online versions include aromatics and spices like onion, garlic, or cumin, the authentic recipe adheres to those five basics.

The traditional method also calls for hand-mincing the meat with a special curved knife called a zırh (affiliate link), threading it onto wide metal skewers, then grilling it over charcoal for a deeply smoky, rich result.

The True Secret of Adana Kebab: Ingredients and Their Role

When it comes to the ingredient list for this Turkish classic, the most important thing to remember is that less is more.

Sure, you can add onion, garlic, or spices like cumin and coriander. But my suggestion is to first master the basics of the authentic recipe, and then tweak it to your own preferences from there.

Ingredients for Turkish lamb kebabs in bowls from the top view.

You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here is a more detailed breakdown of what you will need.

The Meat: Lamb, Beef, or Both?

That said, even though I just made a case for sticking to tradition, I’ll be the first to bend the rules a bit, starting with the most important part of the recipe: the meat.

The authentic version is made by chopping lamb (typically from the shoulder) and tail fat with a curved knife called a zırh (in the US, it is referred to as a cleaver knife).

The goal with using a tool like zırh is to chop the meat and fat together, back and forth, so that it (almost) forms a paste. In a way, you’re grinding the meat yourself, by hand, until the fat and muscle bind naturally.

Now, as much as I love the idea of sticking to the original, even as someone who cooks for a living, I don’t own a zırh.

And as for tail fat? Let’s just say it’s not exactly easy to find.

So, in the spirit of making this Turkish skewers recipe doable for home cooks (dare I say it, even on a weeknight), I use ground lamb instead. I know it’s not quite the same, but I truly believe it’s the next best thing.

Now, you might be wondering: can you use ground beef instead, or a combination of both? The answer is yes and yes. But there’s one very important detail to keep in mind: fat content.

What makes Adana Kebab so iconic, and so delicious, is the fat. Fat doesn’t just add richness. It also helps the meat hold together and cling to the skewer as it cooks. It’s the secret to that signature juicy texture and the reason these kebabs don’t dry out or fall apart on the grill.

Since ground lamb naturally has more fat than beef, you’ll need to make adjustments if you’re using beef. Look for a fatty grind, ideally a 60/40 ratio if possible. 

If you’re buying from a butcher, ask for ground chuck with extra fat, or see if they can add in some beef fat trimmings for you.

Signature Seasonings of Adana: Red Pepper, Urfa Chili, and Salt

There’s a common belief that most kebab recipes rely heavily on aromatics like onion and garlic, along with spices such as ground cumin, coriander, and paprika.

Red Pepper

While that might be true for many types of kebab, this ground lamb skewer recipe challenges that idea. Instead of layering in lots of spices, it highlights one very specific ingredient: a red pepper called kapya. Native to Turkey, kapya peppers are known for their sweet and smoky flavor and add a distinctive depth to the original recipe.

I would have loved to use Kapya here, but since it’s not widely available in the US, I went with the next best thing I could find: red Fresno peppers.

If you can’t get your hands on those, a red bell pepper will also work.

Urfa Chili Flakes (Pul Biber)

The next signature ingredient is Urfa chili pepper (affiliate link), also known as Aleppo-style red pepper flakes. Urfa chili has a deep, earthy heat that’s mild yet complex, and it complements the richness of the lamb beautifully.

If you can find it, it is absolutely worth using. That said, you can use any red pepper flakes you have on hand. And, of course, feel free to adjust the heat level to suit your preferences.

Paprika

To help round out the flavor of the red pepper, especially when using substitutes like Fresno or bell pepper, I like to add a little extra depth with paprika. I use two teaspoons of my favorite kind to help bring in some of the sweetness and smokiness that kapya naturally offers.

This is also a great place to put your own spin on the recipe. Use sweet paprika, smoky paprika, or a combination of both, depending on what you prefer and have on hand.

Salt & Pepper

Finally, we have salt and black pepper.

And I’ll say this upfront. The amount of salt might surprise you. The recipe calls for one tablespoon of kosher salt for two pounds of ground lamb. It may sound like a lot, but it is essential.

Salt not only enhances the taste, but it also helps the meat bind and hold its shape on the skewer.

Of course, not all salts are created equal. I use Diamond Crystal kosher salt (affiliate link), which is lighter and less salty by volume than many other brands. If you are using something like Morton’s kosher salt, I recommend starting with half the amount and adjusting to taste.

I also add a touch of black pepper to round out the simple seasoning.

The Essential Tool Worth Investing in for Home-Style Adana Kebab

Whenever I share a recipe here on the blog, I try to avoid using tools or gadgets that most home kitchens don’t already have.

But in the case of this Turkish lamb skewers recipe, I wanted to stay as true to the original as possible, which meant making one small exception; I had to buy the thick, flat metal skewers (affiliate link) traditionally used in Adana.

My thinking is this: if you enjoy making kebabs at home, this is a worthy one-time investment that will more than pay off in the long run.

During my recipe testing, I first attempted to make these kebabs using thin bamboo skewers commonly found in most households. I had such a hard time getting the meat to stick and hold that signature thickness. The mixture kept slipping off or falling apart during grilling, which made the whole process stressful.

That’s when I realized that the people who have been making this Adana recipe for generations must know what they’re doing. So, I ordered a set of one-inch-wide kebab skewers (affiliate link), and the difference was night and day.

Here is how it is helpful:

  • The thicker skewers give you more surface area to work with when shaping the meat. 
  • Their width helps the meat cling better, and the longer body allows you to form a full-length kebab that cooks evenly over the grill. 
  • They also help the meat stay intact when exposed to high heat, which is especially important when working with a high-fat mixture like this one.

How to Make Adana Kebab at Home

Once you have your ingredients prepped and your skewers ready, the rest comes down to technique. It’s not difficult, just a few key steps to follow for the best results. Here’s how I break it down:

Preparing your kebab mixture:

Step 1 – Chop and Drain the Red Peppers

Start by removing the seeds and chopping the red peppers as finely as you can. This helps them blend seamlessly into the meat mixture, rather than showing up as visible chunks.

After chopping, place the peppers in a fine mesh strainer and press gently to release their juices. This step is essential as we want to remove as much liquid as possible so the mixture doesn’t become too wet or soggy when it’s time to shape.

Meat mixture in a bowl from the top view.

Step 2 – Prepare the Meat Mixture

In a large mixing bowl, combine the drained chopped peppers, ground lamb, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper. Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and evenly seasoned.

Once it’s mixed, divide the meat into equal portions based on how many skewers you plan to use. My set came with three skewers, so I divided the mixture into three even parts. You can eyeball it or, if you prefer precision, weigh the portions using a kitchen scale.

If you want to make it ahead, just cover the bowl and place it in the fridge. In fact, if you can plan ahead, I highly recommend it. Giving the mixture a chance to rest helps the flavors come together and settle into the meat. An overnight rest (up to 24 hours) can really make a difference.

Shaping your Adana Kebabs

The meat is being threaded onto the skewer.

Step 3 – Thread Onto the Skewers

When you’re ready to thread the meat, start by setting up your workstation. Grab your skewers, a small bowl of water to wet your hands, and bring out the meat mixture from the fridge.

To thread, take one portion of the ground lamb mixture, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center. Using your hands, press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to create an even shape.

If or when the mixture starts to feel sticky, lightly wet your hands to prevent the meat from sticking too much. Just be careful not to overdo it. A little water goes a long way, and too much can make the mixture too soft to hold together.

As you work, do your best to keep the thickness even from top to bottom. Once you’ve shaped the kebab, take a moment to gently press and seal the top and bottom ends of the meat onto the skewer.

Step 4 – Create the signature ridges

Adana skewers shaped from the top view.

If you’ve had Adana Kebab before, you’ve probably noticed the pattern of shallow ridges pressed into the surface. They’re not just for appearance. These indentations help the meat cook more evenly over high heat and give the kebab its signature look.

To make them, use your thumb and forefinger to gently press along the length of the meat, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat the same motion on the other side.

Grilling Your Kebabs

Step 5 – Grill

Lamb kebabs on the grill.

The traditional way to cook Adana Kebab is over a charcoal grill, which gives it that distinct smoky taste and slightly crisp exterior. That said, I used my gas grill for this version to keep it simple and approachable for home cooks. Both methods work well, and below you’ll find tips for each.

If using a gas grill: Preheat your grill to 400°F to 425°F. Clean the grill grates thoroughly and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.

Carefully place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates and grill, turning them frequently to ensure even cooking and a nice char on all sides.

Depending on the thickness and length of your kebabs, this will take about 10 to 12 minutes.

Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it cooks. That’s completely normal, but it’s important to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking. 

Adjust the heat as needed and continue rotating the skewers to avoid burning and help them cook evenly.

If using a charcoal grill: Light your charcoal and let the coals burn until they’re covered with a thin layer of white ash.

Spread them out evenly and position the skewers directly over the heat. Grill the kebabs, turning them every couple of minutes to ensure even cooking and that nice, smoky char.

The total time will be similar, around 10 to 12 minutes, again depending on the heat level and the size of your skewers.

Similar to cooking it on a gas grill, keep a close eye during grilling, especially if you notice flare-ups. The goal is juicy, charred kebabs that stay intact from grill to plate.

Step 6 – Let It Rest While Making Sumac Onions

Sumac onions before and after they are mixed.

Once the kebabs are grilled, transfer them to a sheet pan and cover loosely with foil. Let them rest for about 5 to 10 minutes so the juices have time to settle back into the meat.

While the kebabs are resting, you can prepare one of the classic accompaniments to Adana Kebab: sumac onions, a traditional onion salad that beautifully balances the richness of the meat.

They’re easy to make, but if you’d like a more detailed breakdown, feel free to check out my Sumac Onions recipe.

To make a quick batch, combine sliced red onion, olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and a pinch of red pepper flakes in a medium bowl. Using clean hands, gently massage the onions until they have softened slightly. Finish with a sprinkle of chopped parsley.

Assembling and Serving

Step 7 – Assemble:

Adana wrap being assembled and placed on a plate from the top view.

With the meat grilled and your sumac onions ready, all that’s left is the bread. Traditionally, Adana Kebab is served with lavash, a soft Mediterranean-style flatbread.

It’s similar to pita bread, and you can usually find it in most supermarkets. Of course, if you’d like to try making your own, I also have a homemade lavash recipe available for you to follow.

To assemble, place a piece of lavash flat on a plate and use it to slide the meat off the skewer. Since my skewers are quite large, I like to cut the kebab in half while it’s still on the skewer, then slide each half off gently. The meat should release easily.

From there, simply top it with a generous spoonful of sumac onions, a few slices of tomatoes, and a sprinkle of fresh parsley before rolling it up.

Needless to say, it is best to enjoy your Adana wrap while it’s still warm.

Expert Tips: Troubleshooting Adana Kebab

As you can see, making this Turkish Adana Kebab recipe doesn’t require any unusual ingredients or complicated cooking techniques. Still, while preparing this post, I made a few mistakes and learned a few things that I think would be helpful, especially if you’re making it for the first time.

Below are some tips to help you get the best results:

Falling off the skewer during grilling: During my recipe testing, I had a couple of kebabs fall apart on the grill. In the end, I realized there are two main reasons this can happen:

  • Not enough fat: If the meat doesn’t have enough fat, it will have trouble sticking to the skewer and keeping its shape. So don’t skip the fat, especially if you’re using ground beef or a beef-lamb mix.
  • Ends not sealed properly: Sealing the ends means gently squeezing and securing both the top and bottom of the kebab where the meat meets the skewer. If this step is skipped, the meat may loosen or fall off when exposed to high heat.

Even thickness is key: As you’re threading the skewers, make sure the meat is evenly distributed from end to end. I’ll admit, it takes a little practice, but once you shape your first one, it gets easier. Taking the time to shape the kebab evenly helps it cook properly and stay intact.

Let it rest: As with any kebab recipe, letting the meat rest in the fridge before grilling makes a big difference. That chill time allows the salt to work its way through the mixture and gives the flavors time to meld.

Keep a close eye on the grill: Because of the high fat content, flare-ups are normal while grilling. This is where you may need to manage the heat a bit. Stay close by, and turn the skewers often so they cook evenly without burning.

Using make-shift skewers: During my research for this recipe, I came across a few versions where people used makeshift skewers by wrapping bamboo skewers (or wooden skewers) with aluminum foil.

I’ll be honest, I haven’t tried that method myself. After testing this recipe more than five times, I can say that even with thick metal skewers, getting the meat to stick takes a bit of technique. So while it might work in a pinch, I’d be hesitant to recommend it. In my experience, investing in proper wide skewers makes the process much more reliable and much less frustrating.

How to Serve Adana Kebab: Authentic Turkish Pairings for a Complete Meal

So you made your Adana Kebab, garnished it with sumac onions, and wrapped it in warm lavash. Good for you! But what if you want to take it up a notch?

Below are a few traditional pairing ideas in case you’d like to serve it the way we do in Türkiye:

Pair it with a classic Turkish salad: Turn your kebab into a full feast by serving it alongside a fresh salad like the classic pairing, Turkish Ezme. Alternatively, you can go with a traditional Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası), a white bean salad like Piyaz, or even my Greek Cucumber Salad for a cooling contrast.

Add grilled vegetables: If you have a little extra time, grill some tomatoes or green peppers on the side while your kebabs are cooking. These simple vegetables add a lovely charred flavor and are often served right on top of the kebab in restaurants across Türkiye.

Serve with rice or bulgur pilaf: For a more substantial meal, pair your kebab with a starch. My Vermicelli Rice or Bulgur Pilaf are both authentic and satisfying options that round out the plate perfectly.

Drizzle it with yogurt sauce: While not traditional, a spoonful of tzatziki sauce or my yogurt mint sauce can be a nice addition, especially if you’re serving this to kids or anyone who prefers a milder dish. The creamy yogurt helps balance the spices and adds a cooling contrast to the richness of the meat.

Don’t forget the ayran: In Türkiye, if you order Adana Kebab at a restaurant, chances are your server will bring out a glass of ayran without even asking. This cool, tangy yogurt drink helps balance the spices in the kebab and brings everything together. The good news is you can make ayran at home in just a few minutes.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Adana kebab on a plate served over lavash.
Print

Adana Kebab Recipe

This Adana Kebab recipe is a home-cook-friendly version of the iconic Turkish ground lamb kebab, made with ground lamb, red peppers, and Urfa chili (also known as red pepper flakes). Threaded onto wide skewers and grilled to perfection, it's rich, juicy, and full of authentic flavor. Served with lavash and sumac onions, it's a complete meal that brings the taste of Türkiye to your own backyard.
Course Dinner, Lamb
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 32 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 669kcal

Ingredients

For the kebab

  • 2 red peppers red fresno chilis or ½ red bell pepper
  • 2 lbs ground lamb or 1 lb ground lamb + 1 lb ground beef
  • 2 teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon Urfa chili flakes or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Water to wet your hands

For the Sumac Onions

  • 1 medium-sized red onion sliced
  • 1 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoons sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili flakes Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

To Serve with

  • 6 Lavash or pita bread

Instructions

  • Start by preparing the peppers. Remove the seeds and chop them as finely as you can. Place the chopped peppers in a colander set over a bowl and let them drain to release their juices. Once drained, transfer them to a large mixing bowl.
  • Add the ground lamb, paprika, Aleppo pepper, salt, and black pepper to the bowl with the peppers.
    Ground lamb mixed with red peppers and spices in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and the seasonings are evenly distributed.
  • Divide the meat mixture evenly based on the number of skewers you have. For example, if you have 3 skewers, divide the mixture into 3 equal portions.
    A person is threading the meat onto the skewer.
  • Take one portion, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center.
  • Fill a small bowl with cold tap water and keep it nearby. Using your hands, carefully press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to ensure even thickness all around. Lightly wet your fingers as needed to prevent the meat from sticking to your hands. Remember that just a little water is enough to help shape the kebabs without making the mixture too wet.
    Adana kebab on skewers ready to grill.
  • Once shaped, gently press and secure the top and bottom edges of the meat where it starts and ends on the skewer. This is an essential step in that it helps prevent the meat from breaking apart during grilling.
  • To create the traditional ridges, use your thumb and forefinger to lightly press along the length of the kebab, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat on the other side. These ridges help the meat cook evenly and give the kebabs their signature look.
  • Preheat your gas grill to 400°F-425°F. Clean the grill grates well and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.
    Turkish Adana on the grill.
  • Once the grill is ready, place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates. Grill for 10-12 minutes, turning them often so they cook evenly and develop a nice char on the outside.
  • Keep in mind that because the meat has a higher fat content, you may experience flare-ups. Stay close to the grill and adjust the heat as needed to prevent burning.
  • Once cooked to your liking, cover the meat with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes.
  • While the meat is resting, make the sumac onions. In a medium-sized bowl, mix the sliced onions, olive oil, lemon juice, salt, sumac, and red pepper flakes.
    Sumac onions in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, gently massage the onion mixture until slightly softened. Garnish with parsley.
  • When ready to assemble your Adana kebab, grab a lavash (or pita bread), place the meat on top, and garnish with sumac onions. Roll and serve right away.
    Adana kebab served on lavash with sumac onions on top.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves six adults and the nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Using beef instead of lamb: You can make this recipe with beef or with a mixture of beef and lamb, but it is important that you use a cut that is high in fat or ask your butcher to incorporate some beef trimmings to your ground beef.
  • Keep a close eye while grilling: Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it is grilling. That’s expected, but it’s essential to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking.
  • Storage: Bring your kebabs to room temperature and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  • Reheating: Warm in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Nutrition

Calories: 669kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 39g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 110mg | Sodium: 1755mg | Potassium: 487mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1809IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 6mg

Storing, Reheating and Freezing Instructions:

While freshly grilled Adana Kebab is always best, leftovers can be stored, frozen, and reheated with good results. Here’s how I handle it:

Storage: Let the kebab cool to room temperature, then place it in an airtight container. Store it in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

Freezing: Wrap the leftover meat tightly in parchment paper, then wrap again with aluminum foil to keep everything in place. Transfer to the freezer and store for up to 1 month. When ready to use, thaw overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: Reheat in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Can You Make Adana Kebab Without a Grill? (Oven & Stovetop Alternatives)

While many online sources suggest you can easily cook Adana Kebab in the oven or on the stovetop, the truth is, the very essence of true Adana Kebab comes from cooking it over an open flame.

To be perfectly honest, that signature smoky flavor and crisp exterior are incredibly difficult to replicate without a grill.

However, I understand not everyone has a grill, and /or weather conditions may not cooperate to grill kebabs on the outside.

In that case, you can adapt this recipe, but it’s important to know you’ll likely be missing out of the signature smokey flavors. These alternatives are best thought of as Adana-style ground lamb kebabs, not a substitute for the real thing.

Cooking in the Oven

Step 1: Line a quarter sheet pan with a wire rack. This helps the meat cook evenly and allows air to circulate underneath. Preheat your oven to 400°F (204°C).

Step 2: Spread the meat mixture onto the rack in an even layer. Using a knife or spatula, divide it into 6 to 8 portions to mimic the shape and size of skewers.

Step 3: Bake for 20 to 23 minutes. Finish with 1 to 2 minutes under the broiler to develop a bit of char on top.

Cooking on the Stovetop

To be completely honest, I don’t recommend trying to cook full skewers on a skillet. It’s just too difficult to manage the thickness and shape. Instead, I suggest turning the meat mixture into Adana Kofte-style meatballs, which are easier to handle and still delicious.

Step 1: Form meatballs. Use a small cookie scoop or tablespoon to portion out the meat. Roll and gently flatten each one in the palm of your hand, then set them aside on a plate.

Step 2: Heat the pan. Add about a tablespoon of oil to a cast-iron or heavy-bottomed skillet. Heat it until it’s shimmering and very hot-this ensures you get a nice sear rather than steaming the meat.

Step 3: Cook in batches. Add the meatballs to the skillet, being careful not to overcrowd the pan. Cook them on all sides until nicely browned and cooked through, working in batches and adding more oil if needed.

FAQs

Is Adana kebab very spicy?

It depends. The heat in Adana Kebab comes mainly from the red peppers and Urfa chili used in the recipe. The level of spiciness can vary based on how many pepper seeds you include and how hot your red pepper flakes are.

If you want a milder version, simply remove all the seeds from the peppers and use less Urfa chili or substitute with a milder variety. If you like it spicy, keep some of the seeds and use more chili to dial up the heat.

Can I add onion, garlic, or other spices like cumin to this recipe?

You can, but keep in mind that it won’t be considered authentic Adana Kebab anymore. The traditional version is very simple and doesn’t include aromatics like onion or garlic.
That said, if you’d like to experiment with your own version, you can absolutely add them. Just make sure to grate them finely (or use a food processor to chop it finely) and strain out any excess liquid before mixing them into the meat. This helps keep the mixture from getting too wet and falling apart on the grill.

How do I know when Adana Kebab is cooked through?

You will know that it is fully cooked when it is nicely browned with grilled marks on the outside, is firm to touch and juicy when cut open.

What if I don’t have wide metal skewers?

Wide, flat metal skewers are essential for shaping and grilling Adana Kebab properly. If you don’t have them, you can try doubling up bamboo skewers or flattening them slightly, but keep in mind that the results won’t be quite the same.

You’ll likely lose the traditional look, and there’s a higher chance the meat won’t stay in place during grilling.

Other Authentic Turkish Recipes You Might Like:

If you’ve landed on this page, I suspect you’re a fan of Turkish food and maybe looking for even more foolproof, beginner-friendly recipes from my home country. Below are a few more classics you might also enjoy:

  • If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant and looked over the menu, chances are you’ve seen Turkish Red Lentil Soup on the list. It’s a simple 30-minute soup that’s just as beloved and familiar as Adana Kebab.
  • And if you’re in the mood for something cozy and quick, Turkish Pasta is another weeknight favorite that’s gone viral for a reason. It’s easy to make and loaded with comforting flavors.
  • Treat yourself to Türkiye’s most famous breakfast dish with my Turkish Eggs (Çılbır), poached eggs nestled on garlicky yogurt, drizzled with spicy butter, and ready in minutes. It’s truly a unique and satisfying experience!

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/feed/ 2
Balsamic Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:44:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81713 Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts…]]>

Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts (or thighs) into a flavorful, crowd-pleasing meal. Plus, it’s easy to make ahead, perfect for meal prep, and freezer-friendly, making it ideal for busy weeknights or laid-back weekend BBQs.

Key Ingredients for Balsamic Marinade for Chicken

You can find the full list of ingredients for this balsamic vinegar chicken marinade in the recipe card. Below are a few helpful notes to help you make it your own.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Balsamic vinegar: When choosing a balsamic vinegar, follow your taste buds and your budget. 

You can use a traditional, aged balsamic from Modena for deeper sweetness and complexity, or a more affordable condiment-grade balsamic vinegar. Both will work beautifully to add that sweet-tangy depth to your chicken.

I would not recommend substituting store-bought balsamic glaze here, as it is already sweet and thickened. As a result, it won’t work the same way in the marinade.

Olive oil: I recommend using a high-quality extra-virgin olive oil here. Its smooth flavor perfectly balances the tangy balsamic vinegar and creamy Dijon mustard, helping the marinade coat the chicken evenly and soak up all those delicious flavors.

Sweetener: While I used honey, other liquid sweeteners such as maple syrup and agave can also be used. If you prefer to use brown sugar instead, be sure to stir it thoroughly so that no grainy sugar particles are left behind.

Garlic: I find that fresh garlic cloves make this recipe shine, but for a milder flavor, you can use ½ teaspoon garlic powder (equivalent to 2 cloves of fresh garlic).

Fresh Herbs: I think chopped fresh thyme pairs beautifully with the tangy-sweet flavors in this balsamic vinaigrette marinade, but if you don’t have fresh thyme, use half the amount of dried thyme instead. 

Alternatively, a robust Italian seasoning blend or other fresh (or dried herbs) like rosemary and oregano would also work well in this recipe.

Chicken: While I used skinless and boneless chicken breasts, you can also use skinless and boneless chicken thighs. 

How To Make Balsamic Chicken Marinade?

Making this balsamic vinegar marinade for chicken is easy and quick (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Lemon Balsamic Salad Dressing). Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make balsamic marinade for chicken.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Use a container large enough to comfortably hold two pounds of chicken, ideally one with a tight-fitting lid. 

Place the balsamic vinegar, olive oil, honey, Dijon mustard, minced garlic, thyme, salt, and pepper in the container and whisk until thoroughly combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable bag, such as a Ziplock bag (for easy cleanup), and pour marinade over the meat. This is especially ideal if you are making it in larger quantities.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid and refrigerate.

Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade from the top view.

Step 3 – Let time do the rest: Marinate the chicken in the fridge for at least 30 minutes or, if you have the time, overnight for maximum flavor.

How To Cook Balsamic Marinated Chicken?

What makes this balsamic vinegar-marinated chicken so versatile is that you can cook it in any way you like. During the summer months, I love to fire up the grill, while in cooler weather, I let the oven do the heavy lifting. And when I’m short on time, cooking them quickly on the stovetop makes for an easy and delicious lunch. Here’s how you can do it:

Balsamic marinated chicken breasts on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is by far my favorite way to cook chicken marinated in balsamic vinegar—the high heat seals in the juices and creates those beautiful charred grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the grill: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat (about 425–450°F). Clean the grill grates to ensure there’s no residue from previous grilling sessions. Use a pad of oiled paper towels to thoroughly oil the grates to prevent the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Remove the chicken: Take the chicken out of the marinade, letting any excess drip off. This is an important step, as too much marinade can cause flare-ups on the grill.

Step 3 – Grill: Place the chicken breasts on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for about 6 to 8 minutes per side. A good way to tell when it is time to flip is to gently lift the chicken. If it releases easily from the grill, it is ready to flip. If it is sticking, give it another minute or two. It will release naturally once it is properly seared. 

Please note that the timing may vary depending on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness by inserting a digital thermometer in the thickest part of the chicken—it should read 165°F.

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Loosely tent the grilled balsamic-marinated chicken with foil and let it rest for 5–7 minutes, allowing the juices to redistribute before serving.

Balsamic marinated grilled chicken on a plate from the top view.

In The Oven:

When I’m after a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do most of the work for me. Below are the steps:

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: My go-to oven temperature for baking chicken is 425°F (218 °C). I find that any lower, and it takes longer; plus, caramelization happens better at this hotter temperature.

Grab a baking sheet and line it with parchment paper. This helps with cleanup later, but if you prefer a more caramelized, slightly sticky exterior, you can skip using it.

Step 2 – Arrange: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan. Just like with the grilling method, it is important to let any excess marinade drip off first. Otherwise, it will steam instead of roast, and you will miss out on that beautiful caramelized crust.

Step 3 – Roast: Let the oven do its magic for 20 to 22 minutes, keeping in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken pieces. Rotate the pan halfway through for even roasting.

Again, the best way to check for doneness is by inserting a digital thermometer into the thickest part of the chicken and ensuring that it registers 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Remove from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper) and let it rest 5-10 minutes before serving.

On The Stove Top:

I usually cook it on the stove when I am preparing my balsamic marinated chicken for lunch, to serve with a quick salad or rice on the side. Here’s how:

Step 1 – Heat your skillet: Heat 1 tablespoon of oil in a large (10–12 inch) skillet over medium-high heat. 

Pro Tip: It is essential that the skillet is shimmering hot before adding the chicken. A properly heated skillet ensures the chicken sears immediately, creating a flavorful crust and preventing it from sticking to the pan.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the pan, making sure to (1) let the excess marinade drip off first and (2) avoid overcrowding the skillet. Giving the chicken enough space helps it sear and brown properly rather than steaming.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for 5 to 7 minutes on each side. Similar to the grilling method, if the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it is ready to be turned. If not, give it a few more minutes to develop a nice sear.

Use a digital thermometer to check doneness.

Step 4 – Rest and serve: Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

How To Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

My favorite thing about this balsamic marinade recipe is that you can make a batch in minutes and have it ready to cook at a moment’s notice. 

It also freezes beautifully, making it perfect for those busy days when you need a quick and flavorful meal.

Storage and reheating: The leftover cooked or grilled balsamic-marinated chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-temp oven (300 degrees F) for 10 minutes or until it is heated through, being careful not to overcook and dry it out.

Freezing: If you prefer to freeze, I recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade instead of cooking it first. Simply place the chicken and marinade in a freezer-safe bag or container, removing as much air as possible to help prevent any ice crystals from forming. It will keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Thawing: Remove the frozen chicken and marinade from the freezer and let them thaw in the fridge overnight.

Balsamic marinated chicken served with a salad on the side.

Expert Tips:

While marinating chicken in this balsamic vinegar marinade is a straightforward process, there are a few key points to consider for optimal results.

  • Marinating time: I find that the ideal marinating time is between 30 minutes and 12 hours, maximum. Balsamic vinegar, as an acidic ingredient, helps break down the muscle fibers in the chicken, making it more tender and juicy.
    However, any longer than that and the acidity can start to break down the chicken too much, especially with lean cuts like chicken breasts, leading to a mushy texture.
  • Take the chicken out of the fridge 15-30 minutes before cooking: While it may sound like an extra step, letting the chicken come close to room temperature helps it cook evenly. If you put cold chicken directly into a hot pan, grill, or oven, the outside will start cooking quickly while the inside remains cold.
  • Save some of the marinade: Before adding the chicken, save a few tablespoons of the marinade to use for a light brushing at the end. I especially recommend this when you’re grilling. It adds a beautiful finishing touch, keeping the chicken juicy and glossy all at the same time.
  • Safety First: Discard any marinade that came in contact with raw chicken once you’re done with it. This helps prevent any foodborne illnesses or salmonella contamination.
  • Large Chicken Breasts: If you’re using very large chicken breasts, I recommend cutting them in half lengthwise or pounding them with a meat mallet to an even thickness. This not only shortens the cooking time but also helps them cook more evenly.

FAQs

How long can you marinate chicken in balsamic vinegar?

I recommend marinating the chicken for at least 30 minutes or up to 12 hours in the refrigerator.

Why did my balsamic chicken burn on the grill?

Balsamic marinated chicken can potentially burn if the grill is too hot or if you use too much sugar in the marinade.

Do I need to rinse the marinade off the chicken before grilling?

No, you do not. Just let the excess marinade drip off before cooking.

Pairing Suggestions with Balsamic Chicken

Starches: Pair it with my Seasoned Quinoa for a light meal, or turn it into a feast with Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes.

Salads: During the summer months, when I need something quick and easy to serve with grilled balsamic chicken, I usually go for my 5 Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad.

Vegetables: If you’re after a low-carb dinner, serve your balsamic marinated chicken with a side of my Garlic and Butter Green Beans or Sauteed Asparagus.

Make it a dinner: Try my Grilled Caprese Chicken, where I use this marinade and then grill the chicken with sliced fresh mozzarella for an easy summer dinner.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoyed this recipe, I think you might also:

  • Enjoy my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. Similar to vinegar-based marinades, the lactic acid in yogurt gently tenderizes the meat, keeping it just as juicy and flavorful.
  • Like my Mediterranean Chicken Marinade recipe, it embodies the characteristics of the Mediterranean diet with fresh lemon juice, olive oil, and fresh herbs. And you only need 15 minutes of marinating time for the most succulent chicken recipe.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Balsamic chicken breasts sliced on a plate.
Print

Balsamic Chicken Marinade Recipe

This easy balsamic chicken marinade comes together in minutes using simple pantry staples. It’s perfect for grilling, baking, or pan-searing, and it leaves your chicken tender, juicy, and full of rich, tangy-sweet flavor.
Course Chicken
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 426kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ cup balsamic vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for cooking and for grill grates
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 cloves minced garlic
  • 1 teaspoon chopped fresh thyme or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breasts 6-8 oz each / or thighs

Instructions

To Make The Marinade:

  • In a large container with a lid, whisk together ½ cup balsamic vinegar, ¼ cup olive oil, 1 tablespoon honey, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon chopped thyme, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make balsamic chicken marinade.
  • Place the chicken in the container and ensure it is thoroughly coated with the marinade.
  • Cover it with the lid and refrigerate for 30 minutes or overnight.
    Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade.
  • When ready to cook, remove it from the fridge 10-15 minutes before you are prepared to cook.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (450°F/232°C). Clean grill grates and brush them with vegetable oil.
  • Remove the chicken from the marinade, letting excess liquid drip off as much as possible, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side (the timing would change depending on the thickness of your chicken breasts) or until the thickest part of a chicken breast registers 165°F (74°C) when inserted with a meat thermometer.
    Balsamic grilled chicken on the grill from the top view.
  • Transfer the now cooked chicken onto a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat the oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan and bake for 20-22 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F / 74°C.
  • Remove from the oven and onto a plate. Cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 5 minutes before slicing and/or serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10 or 12-inch cast iron skillet or a skillet grill is ideal) over medium-high heat.
  • When it is simmering hot, place the chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan.
  • Cook, turning once until they are fully cooked, 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted in the center of a breast registers 165°F /74°C.
  • Remove the chicken breasts from the skillet and onto a plate; cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ¾ cups of balsamic vinegar chicken marinade, enough for marinating 2 pounds of chicken which is good for 4 servings. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
  • Let the excess marinade drip off: Regardless of the cooking method you are using, take the time to let the excess marinade drip off before cooking. This is an essential step for achieving perfectly cooked and lightly caramelized balsamic chicken, rather than burned or steamed chicken.
  • Storage and Reheating: Leftover cooked or grilled chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F / 149°C) for 10 minutes or so until it is warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing & Thawing: You can freeze raw chicken in marinade in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.

Nutrition

Calories: 426kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 889mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Mediterranean Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:37:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81740 Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more…]]>

Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more bottled dressings or long waits needed. Just real, simple ingredients that deliver mouthwatering results with minimal effort. 

Whether you’re firing up the grill, roasting in the oven, or searing on the stovetop, my marinade for Mediterranean chicken guarantees tender, delicious chicken that’s perfect for meal prep or a fast, flavorful dinner.

Key Ingredients – Building Blocks of Flavor

The beauty of this chicken marinade is that it is made with everyday ingredients you likely already have in your pantry. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are some helpful ingredient notes.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Olive Oil: I recommend using extra-virgin olive oil, which is the purest and least processed type of olive oil. Look for a brand that offers fruity flavors with balanced bitterness and a slight peppery finish.

Lemon zest: The zest of a lemon is essential for delivering the distinctive lemony flavors that Mediterranean chicken marinade recipes are known for. Keep in mind that zesting the lemon is much easier before juicing it, so zest first, then juice.

Fresh lemon juice: No bottled supermarket juice here. Take the time to juice fresh lemons as freshness is key to a bright, zesty flavor.

Garlic: For the most potent flavor, I recommend using 3 minced fresh garlic cloves. For a milder garlic flavor, feel free to use garlic powder.

Mustard: I prefer Dijon mustard for its smooth tanginess, which brings the marinade together beautifully. However, grainy mustard can also be a great choice, adding a bit of texture and richness.

Fresh herbs: For the most authentic Mediterranean chicken marinade, I used fresh oregano, chopped just before adding it to the mix. Fresh rosemary, thyme, or even parsley (for a milder flavor) also work well in this recipe. If you’re using dried herbs instead, they’re more concentrated, so use about half the amount of fresh to avoid overpowering the marinade.

Seasoning: While I used basic salt and pepper for seasoning my marinade, you can use your favorite seasoning blends or spices from your cabinet. I particularly like my Mediterranean spice blend, also known as Baharat Spice Mix, for its continuation of Mediterranean flavors.

Chicken: I tested this recipe both with skinless and boneless chicken breasts and thighs, and they both worked beautifully. However, I think this is an all-purpose chicken marinade that would work with any cut of chicken.

How to Make Mediterranean Chicken Marinade?

Making this chicken marinade is quick and easy (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Mediterranean Salad Dressing). While the steps are pretty straightforward, there are a few things to keep in mind. Below are the steps to follow:

Steps showing how to make the marinade.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Grab a large container with a tight-fitting lid (big enough to hold 2 pounds of chicken). 

Combine the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, minced garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, and a good pinch of salt and pepper. Whisk until everything is combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable ziplock bag, which makes cleanup easy and is especially handy if you’re doubling or tripling the marinade.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid.

Chicken breasts submerged in the marinade.

Step 3 – Let it rest: Let the chicken marinate on the kitchen counter for 15 to 30 minutes.

Pro Tip: Due to the amount of lemon juice we’re using, marinating for longer can cause the chicken to start “cooking” in the acid, which can result in a slightly rubbery texture and an overpowering lemony flavor once cooked.

How to Cook Mediterranean Marinated Chicken?

In addition to being a quick marinade that only needs 15 minutes, you can cook your Mediterranean marinated chicken any way you like. While grilling is my favorite method for this chicken recipe, I also love roasting it in the oven for a hands-off approach. And when I need a quick sear, I turn to the stovetop. 

Below, you’ll find my tips and how I use each cooking method.

Marinated Mediterranean chicken on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is one of my favorite grilled chicken marinade recipes because as soon as the chicken hits the hot grill, the tangy juices lock in the flavors, and you get those beautiful grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Heat Up the Grill: Start by preheating your grill to a medium-high heat about 425–450°F (218-232 °C). Give the grates a good scrub to remove any lingering bits from past cooks, then lightly oil them with a paper towel pad dipped in oil. This keeps the chicken from sticking and makes for easy flipping.

Step 2 – Prep the Chicken: Take the marinated Mediterranean chicken out of the marinade, letting any extra drip off. Too much marinade can cause flare-ups or uneven cooking, so this step is worth taking the extra time to do it right.

Step 3 – Grill Away: Place the chicken on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for 6 to 8 minutes per side. You’ll know it’s ready to flip when it naturally releases from the grill. If it sticks, give it another minute. Patience here pays off! 

Use a digital thermometer to check for doneness; you’re aiming for 165°F (74°C) in the thickest part.

Step 4 – Rest and Enjoy: Once the chicken is grilled, transfer it to a platter, cover it loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5–7 minutes. This brief pause allows the juices to settle back into the meat, ensuring every bite is juicy and full of Mediterranean flavor.

In the Oven:

When I’m in the mood for a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do all the work.

Oven-roasting helps lock in moisture and ensures the meat cooks through gently and evenly, which is something you don’t always get with quicker, high-heat methods.

Step 1 – Preheat the Oven: Heat your oven to 425°F (218°C). This temperature is ideal for roasting chicken because it cooks quickly, helping the chicken stay juicy and flavorful. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or skip the parchment if you prefer a slightly crispier exterior.

Step 2 – Arrange the Chicken: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan, making sure to let any excess marinade drip off first. This prevents the chicken from steaming and helps it roast to a golden perfection.

Step 3 – Roast: Bake the chicken for 20 to 22 minutes, rotating the pan halfway through for even cooking. Keep in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness with a meat thermometer. It should register 165°F (74°C) when inserted in the thickest part of a chicken breast.

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Remove the chicken from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper), and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing and serving.

Grilled chicken from the top view.

On the Stovetop:

I often turn to the stovetop when I want to get a quick sear for lunch or an easy dinner. 

Step 1 – Heat Your Skillet: In a large skillet (10–12 inch), heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil over medium-high heat. You can also use a cast iron skillet if you prefer.
Pro Tip: Wait until the oil is shimmering hot before adding the chicken—this ensures a flavorful sear and prevents the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Add the Chicken: Place the marinated chicken breasts into the pan, shaking off any excess marinade first. Avoid overcrowding the pan to give the chicken space to sear properly.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for about 5 to 7 minutes on each side. If the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it’s ready; otherwise, let it cook a bit longer to develop that beautiful crust. Use a digital thermometer to check that the thickest part of the chicken reaches 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes to allow the juices to redistribute.

Expert Tips for the Best Mediterranean Chicken

While this recipe is straightforward and doesn’t involve any fancy steps, there are a few key points to keep in mind for optimal results. Here are some of the helpful insights I picked up while testing this recipe:

  • Reserve Some Marinade: It’s a good idea to set aside a few tablespoons of the marinade before adding the chicken. I love to use this reserved portion to brush over the grilled or cooked chicken at the end for a glossy finish.
  • Toss the Marinade: After marinating the chicken, discard any leftover marinade. This helps prevent the risk of spreading harmful bacteria, such as Salmonella.
  • Don’t Marinate for Too Long: Through testing, I found that the sweet spot for this lemon and olive oil chicken marinade is 15 to 30 minutes. Marinating longer can cause the chicken to become rubbery, so stick to the recommended time.
  • Cooking Times Vary: The cooking times in the recipe card are based on chicken breasts. If you’re using other cuts, such as chicken thighs, keep in mind that they may take a bit longer to cook. The foolproof way to check doneness is with a digital meat thermometer.
  • Pound the Chicken Breasts: I used chicken breasts that were around 6–8 ounces, which is considered a normal size. If yours are larger or thicker, use a meat mallet to pound them to an even thickness, which ensures even cooking and juicy results.
  • Garnish for Presentation: For an extra-special presentation, serve your Mediterranean chicken with slices of fresh lemon and a sprinkle of fresh herbs.

Storage and Freezing Tips

Storage and reheating: You can store leftover cooked chicken in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F/149 °C) for 5-10 minutes, or until warmed to your liking.

Freezing: While freezing does slow down the effects of the acidic lemon in the marinade, it doesn’t completely stop it. As a result, when the chicken is thawed and cooked, it can end up rubbery and mushy. For that reason, I don’t recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade.

What to Serve with Mediterranean Chicken?

What I love most about this recipe is its versatility, transforming your marinated Mediterranean chicken into an impressive feast with endless pairing options to suit any crowd. Here are a few of my favorite ways to round out the meal:

  • Salads: Keep things fresh and light with salads that highlight Mediterranean flavors. My creamy yogurt cucumber salad or Greek salad are both low-carb, crisp, and refreshing recipes that pair perfectly with this chicken. If you’re after a vibrant splash of color, my Red Cabbage and Carrot Slaw adds a satisfying crunch and a pop of color.
  • Pilafs: For a more substantial meal or to incorporate into your weekly meal prep, pair your chicken with Mediterranean classics like my Bulgur Wheat Pilaf or Mediterranean Rice with Vermicelli. These cozy sides bring a warm, hearty balance to the lemony chicken.
  • Pasta: Looking for a comforting plate? Slice your chicken and serve it over or alongside my Garlic Butter Spaghetti or Lemon Ricotta Spinach Pasta for a delicious, easy-to-make dinner.
  • Sauce: Add an extra layer of Mediterranean flavor with classic sauces like my Tzatziki sauce or yoghurt tahini sauce. They’re creamy, cooling, and the perfect finish for this juicy chicken.

FAQs

Can I use this marinade for other proteins?

Yes! This Mediterranean marinade recipe is a great all-purpose option that works beautifully with seafood (like shrimp or salmon) and lamb.

Do I need to pat the chicken dry before marinating?

Patting the chicken dry does help the marinade stick better and more evenly coat the meat, but it will still work well if you skip this step.

Can I use the leftover marinade as a sauce?

No. Since the marinade has come into contact with raw chicken, it’s not safe to use as a sauce. Instead, if you’d like to brush it on the cooked chicken for extra flavor, set aside some marinade before adding the raw chicken.

How can I prevent my chicken from drying out?

Use a digital meat thermometer to make sure you don’t overcook the chicken. Once it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C), take it off the heat. Also, don’t skip the resting step because letting the chicken rest before slicing helps the juices settle back in, keeping every bite tender and juicy.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Also Like

  • If you prefer a yogurt-based marinade that still captures those Mediterranean flavors, try my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. It’s creamy and packed with herbs.
  • For a more robust, vinegar-forward flavor, my Balsamic Vinegar Chicken Marinade is a fantastic option with its sweet and tangy notes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim

Mediterranean marinated chicken on a plate.
Print

Mediterranean Chicken Marinade Recipe

This Mediterranean Chicken Marinade is a quick 15-minute marinade that infuses chicken with fresh, vibrant flavors. Made with basic ingredients, this foolproof recipe guarantees juicy, flavorful chicken that can be cooked on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop.
Course Chicken Recipes
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 15 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 430kcal

Ingredients

  • cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • cup lemon juice
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon fresh oregano chopped or 2 tsp dried plus more as garnish
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs chicken breasts boneless & skinless (6-8 oz each) or chicken thighs

Instructions

To make the marinade:

  • In a large bowl, whisk together ⅓ cup olive oil, 1 teaspoon lemon zest, ⅓ cup lemon juice, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon chopped fresh oregano (or 2 teaspoons dried), 1 teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until fully combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make the marinade.
  • Add the chicken into the bowl, making sure it’s fully coated with the marinade.
    Chicken breasts in the marinade.
  • Cover with the lid and refrigerate for 15 minutes or up to 30 minutes.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (about 450°F/232 °C). Clean grill grates and brush lightly with oil.
  • Remove chicken from the marinade, letting excess drip off, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with aluminum foil, and let rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.
    Grilled Mediterranean chicken from the top view.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place chicken breasts on the prepared sheet pan. Bake for 20-22 minutes, or until a digital thermometer registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10- or 12-inch cast-iron skillet or grill pan) over medium-high heat.
  • Once the oil is hot and shimmering, place chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan. You may have to cook them in batches.
  • Cook, turning once, for 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the breast registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ⅔ cup of marinade, enough for 2 pounds of chicken breasts, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is calculated per serving.
  • Drip off the excess marinade: Take a moment to let any extra marinade drip off before cooking. This is especially important if you’re grilling to prevent flare-ups.
  • Storage: Cooked marinated chicken can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-heat oven (300°F/ 149 °C) for 5-10 minutes or until it is warmed through.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing raw chicken in this marinade. The acid in the lemon juice will continue to break down the chicken (similar to ceviche), leading to a rubbery texture when cooked.

Nutrition

Calories: 430kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 860mg | Potassium: 891mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Mediterranean Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/#comments Thu, 22 May 2025 12:56:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81553 Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing…]]>

Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing in the kitchen wondering, what should I bring? I mean, I know I have a blog full of recipes, but when you’re serving a crowd with so many preferences and diet restrictions, it’s always a hard decision to make.

My experience is that this Mediterranean macaroni salad seems to please most people. For one thing, most people love the familiar “Greek” flavors (i.e. cucumbers, olives, tomatoes, etc.) and it rarely needs an introduction. To me, it is like a bistro pasta salad that is the most popular dish on the menu.

Cold Mediterranean pasta salad in a bowl with wooden spoons from the top view.

Key Ingredients:

The good news is that once you understand the process and the flavor profile, it’s easy to make this Mediterranean pasta recipe your own. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are a few helpful notes and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Pasta: I used farfalle (also known as bow tie pasta), but other shapes like rotini and fusilli would also work. I prefer these shapes as they hold on to the dressing, blend well with the rest of the ingredients, and are easy to scoop and eat cold. Of course, you can always use gluten-free pasta if preferred. 

Canned & fresh veggies: In my humble opinion, using a combination of canned and fresh vegetables is what makes this Mediterranean noodle salad a winner. And the best part is that if you do not have one ingredient (or you don’t care for it), you can use another. Here are a few optional add-ins and substitution ideas:

  • Onion: Use finely chopped red onion instead of scallions.
  • Tomatoes: If tomatoes are not in season, use finely chopped sun-dried tomatoes instead.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh oregano is the classic “Mediterranean” herb used in salads like this, but other herbs like fresh parsley, dill, and mint would all work.
  • Cheese: Not a fan of feta cheese? Use goat or no cheese if you prefer a vegan or dairy-free version of this pasta salad. 
  • Add protein: If you want to turn this into a more filling meal, feel free to bulk it up with a protein. Chickpeas are a great plant-based option and work beautifully with the Mediterranean flavors. You can also add grilled shrimp, chicken, or even canned tuna for a quick boost. Just be sure everything is cooled before mixing it in.
  • Pasta Salad Dressing: I used my go-to Mediterranean Vinaigrette, but my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette would also be a great dressing option.

How to Make Mediterranean Pasta Salad?

Once you have the ingredients ready, making this Mediterranean diet pasta salad is no more than a few easy steps. You can find the detailed recipe below, but here’s how I put it together:

A collage of images showing cooked pasta and making of the pasta salad dressing.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: I feel like most pasta salads either have too much pasta or too many “supporting” ingredients. For a salad with so many add-ins, I find that 8 ounces of pasta (which gives you about 4 cups cooked) is the right balance.

Cook it in well-salted boiling water until al dente, according to the package instructions. Then drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process.

Pro tip: Let the pasta cool completely before adding the rest of the ingredients. If it’s too warm, it can wilt the veggies or melt the cheese. Plus, the dressing will soak in too quickly, leaving the salad a bit dry.

Step 2: Make the dressing: You can make the Mediterranean pasta salad dressing in a mason jar (great if you’re making it ahead) or a measuring cup, but if I’m making this for just us at home, I usually grab a large bowl and make it right there. 

That way, (1) I don’t have to wash another dish, and (2) I can start building the salad directly in the bowl.

No matter what vessel you’re using, start by adding the lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, salt, and pepper. Then, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while whisking. This helps emulsify the dressing, making it a little creamy and helping it cling to the pasta.

Photos showing how to assemble the Mediterranean noodle salad.

Step 3 – Assemble the salad: Grab a large salad bowl. And I do mean large because we’ve got a good amount of vegetables going in. Add the cooled pasta along with the rest of the ingredients. It’ll look like a pile at first, and that’s totally fine.

Step 4: Dress and serve: Drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine. It might get a little messy, but that’s part of the charm of this easy pasta salad. Use tongs or two large spoons, and be gentle (and patient) as you toss.

If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes so the flavors can mingle.

Expert Tips:

Before you start cooking, here are a few tips to help you get the best results from this cold Mediterranean pasta salad. These small details can make a big difference in taste, texture, and presentation.

Drain the canned vegetables: One of the reasons this salad is so convenient is that it takes advantage of canned or jarred ingredients like artichoke hearts, roasted bell peppers, and olives. But if you don’t drain them properly, they can add too much moisture and water down the salad. Use a colander and drain each ingredient thoroughly before adding it to the bowl.

Taste for seasoning: Whenever I write a recipe with salty or briny ingredients like feta cheese and olives, I keep the added salt to a minimum. But let’s face it, not all feta or olives are created equal. Some are much saltier than others. So it’s always a good idea to taste those components first, then adjust the amount of salt in the dressing as needed.

Chop everything into similar sizes: For the best texture and an even bite, keep all the ingredients around the same size as the pasta. It’s a small thing, but it helps everything mix well and makes the salad easier to eat.

Serving Suggestions:

While this Mediterranean bow tie pasta salad can stand on its own, it also pairs well with a variety of main dishes. Below are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Roasted or grilled meat and seafood: This pasta salad is the ideal companion to a simply grilled salmonbaked chicken breast, or even lamb chops. The fresh, vibrant flavors of the salad beautifully cut through the richness of grilled proteins, making for a light yet satisfying meal.
  • Make it a Mediterranean weeknight dinner: Make a batch of my mom’s Chicken Kofta Recipe and serve it with your pasta for a true Mediterranean feast.
  • Bread: Serve it with a side of crusty bread (such as my Olive Bread) or warm pita bread to scoop up every last bit of that delicious dressing.
  • Fresh fruit: If all you need is a light and refreshing complement, serve it alongside a bowl of seasonal fresh fruit, such as watermelon, berries, or grapes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Mediterranean cold pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mediterranean Pasta Salad is a vibrant, make-ahead dish that’s perfect for gatherings, lunches, or easy dinners. It travels well and tastes even better after a few hours.
Course Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 350kcal

Ingredients

For the Salad:

  • 8 oz dry pasta farfalle, fusilli or rotini
  • 3 Persian cucumbers or 1 English cucumber – peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 2/3 cup black olives such as Kalamata olives sliced or chopped – 3 oz.
  • 1 cup roasted red peppers sliced and drained (or cut into small strips) (I use jarred)
  • 1 cup marinated artichoke hearts quartered and drained (7 oz after drained)
  • 3 scallions thinly sliced
  • 2 cups arugula or baby spinach – washed and dried
  • 4 oz. feta cheese crumbled

For the Mediterranean Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – or ⅛ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Cook the pasta until it’s al dente, according to the package directions. Drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the cooked pasta and salad dressing for the recipe.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the dressing by whisking together 3 tablespoons lemon juice (or vinegar), 1 clove of minced garlic, ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard, ½ teaspoon chopped oregano, ½ teaspoon of Kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a small bowl. Slowly drizzle in ¼ cup of olive oil while whisking until fully emulsified.
  • To assemble the salad, in a large bowl, combine the cooked and cooled pasta, cucumber, tomatoes, olives, roasted red peppers, artichoke hearts, scallions, arugula, and feta cheese.
    Images showing how to assemble the Mediterranean macaroni salad.
  • Pour the dressing over the salad and toss gently to ensure all ingredients are evenly coated with the dressing. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving.
    Pasta salad in a bowl with wooden utensils.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of pasta salad that is ideal for six (generous) servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead Instructions: Keep in mind that this salad gets better as it sits, so you can absolutely make it a day in advance. The only thing I recommend is holding off on adding the arugula or spinach until just before serving so the greens stay fresh and don’t wilt.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. It is normal to get a bit soggy as it sits. Be sure to give it a good toss and taste (and adjust) the seasoning before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 350kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1104mg | Potassium: 314mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1027IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/feed/ 4
Bulgur Pilaf https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/ https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/#comments Wed, 14 May 2025 11:56:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7708 If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s…]]>

If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s just not as popular as grains like brown rice or quinoa here in the U.S. But you’re in the right place. 

I grew up eating (and cooking) this ancient grain on the regular, and on this site, you’ll find plenty of approachable and flavorful recipes using bulgur wheat. Start with this Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe, and when you are ready for more, learn How To Prepare and Cook Bulgur like rice or try my Chicken with Bulgur and Tabbouleh Salad recipes.

Turkish bulgur pilaf in a pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

What You Need To Know in a Nutshell

  • What is Bulgur Pilaf? Also referred to as bulgar pilaf, bulgur pilavi, or bulghur pilaf, this traditional dish is made by cooking bulgur with aromatic vegetables and spices. It’s a beloved staple across Mediterranean and Middle Eastern countries, especially in Turkish, Lebanese, and Armenian cuisines. Made with coarse bulgur, it has a chewy texture and a naturally nutty flavor that makes it both hearty and satisfying.
  • Two versions to choose from: Depending on the region (or your own preference), bulgur wheat pilaf can be made with vegetables like onions, tomatoes, and peppers, or kept more basic with toasted vermicelli. Both are equally simple to prepare and delicious in their own way.

How To Make Bulgur Pilaf?

This Mediterranean Bulgur Wheat Pilaf recipe comes together in just a few steps with pantry staples. Here is how you cook it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  1. Gather your ingredients:  For the full list of ingredients, check out the recipe card below. Here are a few helpful notes and substitution ideas:
    • Bulgur: You’ll find several types of bulgur at the store, but for this recipe, coarse or extra coarse bulgur works best. I usually order mine online (affiliate link), but Bob’s Red Mill red bulgur is a good alternative and easy to find in most grocery stores.
    • Tomato: One large fresh tomato is all you need. If you do not have fresh tomatoes on hand, you can either omit it or add one more tablespoon of tomato paste.
    • Pepper: A small green bell pepper can be used instead of jalapenos.
    • Cooking liquid: For extra flavor, use vegetable stock or chicken stock instead of water.
    • Spices and herbs: Ground cumin and fresh parsley are classic choices, but feel free to experiment with other spices such as ground coriander and paprika. The same applies to fresh herbs.  If you have it on hand, a combination of fresh mint, dill, and parsley would be fantastic in this Mediterranean bulgur recipe.
A collage of images showing how to make bulgur pilaf with tomatoes and chickpeas.
  1. Saute aromatics: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add onion, ground cumin, green pepper, and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Stir in the minced garlic and tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or so.
  2. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in bulgur, chopped tomatoes, chickpeas, and your cooking liquid of choice. Season with salt and pepper, and stir to combine everything evenly.
A collage of images showing bulgur wheat pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  1. Let it cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and lower the heat. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  2. Let it rest & serve: Off the heat, rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork. Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve.

Bulgur With Vermicelli – Mom’s Version

A lot of Turkish rice dishes include vermicelli, like the classic Vermicelli Rice Pilaf. So it’s no surprise that bulgur pilaf with vermicelli is also a popular variation. As a matter of fact, it was one of my mom’s signature recipes. 

Bulgur wheat pilaf with vermicelli from the top view.

To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:

  1. Heat oil (or butter): You can use any oil, but as is usually the case, butter makes this pilaf taste better. Heat it on medium heat.
  2. Saute vermicelli: Add in ¼ cup of the vermicelli (or orzo) and saute until it is golden brown. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
  3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur wheat and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
  4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil: Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
  5. Cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.

Expert Tips

  • Use the right bulgur grind: For the best texture, stick with coarse or extra coarse bulgur (sometimes sold as “pilavlik bulgur”). Finer (sold as fine bulgur) varieties tend to become mushy and won’t give you the signature chewy bite that it is known for. If you are new to cooking bulgur and adding it in your recipes, feel free to check out my post I wrote on Types of Bulgur Wheat.
  • Should you rinse bulgur before cooking? It’s totally up to you. Rinsing isn’t required, especially if your bulgur is pre-packaged and clean. But if you’re buying from bulk bins, a quick rinse under cold water is a good idea.
  • Toast for extra flavor: If you have a few extra minutes, toast the bulgur briefly before adding the liquid. It might come as an extra step, but doing so deepens the nutty flavor and adds a subtle complexity to the overall dish.
  • Liquid-to-bulgur ratio: My go-to ratio for 1:2, meaning for every 1 cup of coarse bulgur, you will need 2 cups of liquid. That said, depending on the brand and grind of bulgur, you might need slightly more or less liquid. If the grains still feel firm after the liquid is absorbed, add a splash of hot water, cover, and let it sit a bit longer.
  • Do not skip the resting: Letting the pilaf rest covered after cooking helps the grains fully absorb any remaining moisture and gives you a fluffier final dish.
  • Adjust the seasoning after cooking: Taste your bulgur pilaf before serving and adjust the salt, pepper, or herbs to your liking. While it is optional, a squeeze of lemon juice just before serving can brighten the flavors beautifully.

Serving Suggestions

Traditionally, bulgur pilaf is served with chicken or beef recipes as a side dish. That being said, it can stand on its own as a vegetarian dish, especially if it is served with a side salad. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

  • Red meat: Bulgur pilaf pairs beautifully with hearty meat dishes, especially the ones with rich sauces that the pilaf can soak up. Try it with my eggplant beef stew or Ina’s pot roast to add a Mediterranean twist to your meal. And if you’re in the mood for something a little lighter, it goes perfectly with lamb meatballs.
  • Chicken: This pilaf is the perfect side dish for classic Middle Eastern chicken recipes. Serve it with juicy Shawarma Chicken or Shish Taouk for a meal that feels special but is super easy to pull together. 
  • Vegetarian: For a simple vegetarian meal, serve the pilaf with creamy cucumber and yogurt sauce (aka tzatziki), yogurt dressing, or a cold glass of ayran. Or, if you’re feeling a bit fancy, use it as a filling in my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe—it’s a beautiful dish that looks impressive but is easy enough for a weeknight dinner.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is one of the most popular Turkish recipes on Foolproof Living, and for good reason, it is absolutely delicious. If you try it, please leave a comment and rating below to let me know how it turned out. And don’t forget to tag your photos on Instagram with #foolproofeats so I can see and share your creations!

Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Turkish Bulgur Pilaf Recipe

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is a classic Middle Eastern/Mediterranean side dish made with simple pantry ingredients. Ready in about 20 minutes, it has a satisfying chewy texture and a subtle nutty taste, making it perfect to serve with meat, chicken, or as a light vegetarian meal.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 22 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 214kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp olive oil or butter
  • 1 onion chopped, medium sized (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 green pepper seeded jalapeno or a small bell pepper would work (approximately 1/2 cup)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tbsp tomato paste
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur both coarse and extra coarse bulgur would work for this recipe
  • 1 fresh tomato cut into small cubes (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 can chickpeas 14 oz. can, drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups water or vegetable broth
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper

Garnishes

  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Saute onion and tomato paste: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion, cumin and green pepper and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes.
    Person showing how to saute veggies to make bulgur wheat pilaf.
  • Stir in the minced garlic and sautee for 30 seconds. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or so.
  • Add in bulgur wheat, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season it with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
    Bulgur pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  • Off the heat, allow it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork, garnish with parsley, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups of bulgur pilaf, which serves four people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat in a pot with a splash of water over medium heat until warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, transfer to a freezer-safe container, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw it a day in advance in the fridge and warm it up on the stove before you are ready to serve it.
  • Bulgur and Vermicelli Pilaf: An earlier version of this recipe included a more basic bulgur pilaf made without tomatoes, tomato paste, vegetables (onion, pepper, etc.) and chickpeas. It is how my mother made it. To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:
    1. Heat oil (or butter): Heat oil in medium heat.
    2. Saute vermicelli: Add in 1/4 cup vermicelli and saute until it is golden brown for 5-6 minutes while constantly stirring it with a wooden spoon. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
    3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
    4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil. Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt and pepper. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.
    5. Rest & Serve: Let it rest (with the lid on) for 10 minutes and then fluff it with a fork before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 661mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 499IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/feed/ 49
Lamb Burgers Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/ https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/#respond Tue, 06 May 2025 20:00:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81378 How to Make Lamb Burgers? These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell

Before we jump into how to make lamb burgers, here are the key things to know that will help you get it just right:

How to cook the lamb patties: I like grilling them during the summer months, but if I make these burgers during the colder months, I cook them in the oven or on the stovetop. You’ll find the cooking instructions for all methods below.

How long does it take to cook? Depending on the thickness of your patties, on the grill, they take about 10–12 minutes. In the oven at 400°F, expect around 15–18 minutes. On the stovetop (using a cast iron skillet), go for 5–6 minutes per side.

Seasoning for lamb burgers: A flavorful blend of cumin, coriander, paprika, and lemon zest gives the ground lamb burgers a Mediterranean-style taste that pairs beautifully with tzatziki.

What to put on lamb burgers: We keep these Greek-style lamb burgers fresh and simple by layering the burger patties with tzatziki sauce, a slice of tomato, pickles, and curly greens. However, other burger toppings like pickled red onions, sumac onions, a dollop of CAVA’s feta cheese dip, or even a spoonful of harissa would also work beautifully, especially if you’re leaning into the Mediterranean flavors.

How to Make Lamb Burgers?

These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using a grill, oven, or skillet, here’s how to do it with step-by-step photos:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below. But here are a few quick ingredient notes and substitutions:

  • Ground Lamb: The base for this lamb patty recipe is ground lamb, which naturally has a higher fat content (typically around 20–25%), making it juicy. If you prefer something slightly leaner or want a milder taste, try a 50/50 mix of ground lamb and ground beef. Lamb and beef burgers still capture that Mediterranean feel but with a milder flavor that some people prefer.
  • Fresh Herbs: Parsley is essential for freshness. Mint is optional, but I recommend using it. Mint adds a bright, cooling note that helps balance the natural gaminess of the lamb.
  • Spices: Cumin, coriander, and paprika create a warm, aromatic base that complements the richness of the lamb. For more depth, you can use a tablespoon of my Mediterranean Spice Blend or Middle Eastern 7 Spice, which work beautifully with these ground lamb patties.
  • Toppings: We used tzatziki, tomato slices, pickles, and greens. For a different sauce for lamb burgers, try my Mint Yogurt Sauce or Lemon Tahini Sauce, which are quicker to make.
  • Hamburger Buns: Store-bought burger buns work just fine, but if you have the time, I highly recommend making my Brioche Burger Buns.
A collage of photos showing how to make the lamb mixture.

Step 2 Prepare the burger meat: Mix ground lamb, garlic, herbs, spices, lemon zest, salt, and pepper in a large bowl until just combined. Resist the urge to overmix the lamb mixture as it can make patties dense and tough instead of tender and juicy.  

A collage of images showing the lamb patties before and after they are cooked.

Step 3 Form the patties: Shape into four patties, about 4 inches wide. Press a shallow thumbprint in the center of each, which is key to a perfect lamb hamburger patty recipe.

Step 4 Cook the patties: Whether you’re grilling, baking, or pan-searing, you can cook these patties to your preferred level of doneness (here is a temperature chart). For medium, aim for an internal temperature of 145°F (63°C); for well done, cook to 160°F (71°C). The best way to check is by inserting an instant-read thermometer into the center of the patty.

  • On the Grill: Preheat the grill to medium-high heat (400–425°F / 200–220°C). Clean and oil the grates, then place the lamb patties on the grill. Cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium, or 5–6 minutes per side for well done.
  • In the Oven: Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Place the patties on a parchment-lined baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.
  • On the Stove: Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat. Cook the lamb burgers for 5–6 minutes per side, depending on the size of your patties and doneness preference.
The toppings from the top view.

Step 5 Toast the buns & prep your toppings: While the burgers cook, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill or in the oven to toast them lightly. This is also a great time to slice your tomato, rinse the greens, and get your pickles and tzatziki ready for assembly.

An image showing how to prepare lamb burgers.

Step 6 Assemble: Spread tzatziki on the bottom bun, add a thinly sliced tomato, greens, pickles, and the grilled lamb burger patty. Top with more tzatziki and the top bun. Serve right away.

Expert Tips

Here are a few tips to help you get the best results when making this recipe:

  • Thumbprint trick: Don’t skip the small dent in the center of each lamb patty as it helps the burgers cook evenly and keeps them from puffing up in the middle as they cook.
  • The secret to juicy lamb burgers: Mix the ingredients just until combined to avoid a dense texture, and cook the patties only until they reach your desired doneness (145°F (63°C) for medium or 160°F (71°C) for well done). Overmixing or overcooking are the most common reasons for dry burgers.
  • Prevent falling apart: If your lamb burger patties tend to break apart on the grill, try chilling them in the fridge for 30 minutes before cooking and avoid flipping too early. During testing, I found versions of this recipe that use breadcrumbs or egg as a binder. I didn’t find those additions necessary in my version here, but they can be helpful if your mixture feels too soft or loose.
  • Shape slightly larger than the bun: As the lamb burger patties cook, they shrink slightly. To ensure a perfect fit, shape your patties just a bit wider than the buns. They’ll cook down to the correct size.

Serving Suggestions

These lamb hamburgers are easy to pair with a variety of fresh and satisfying sides. Here are some of my favorite ideas:

  • Coleslaw: If I make these lamb burgers for a cookout, I usually serve them with a bright, crunchy slaw like my Red Cabbage Slaw or Mayo-Free Coleslaw, which pairs beautifully and can be made ahead.
  • Mediterranean-inspired salads: Continuing with the Greek/Mediterranean theme, serve these lamb burgers with a Mediterranean Pasta Salad or a Greek Cucumber Tomato Salad—both are refreshing, easy to prep ahead, and complement the flavors of the burgers beautifully.
  • Bean Salads: Serve alongside my Five Beans Salad or Cowboy Caviar for a colorful, protein-packed addition—great for outdoor cookouts.

More Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoy cooking with lamb, be sure to check out some of my other go-to lamb recipes like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Ground lamb burger layered with tzatziki sauce from the front.
Print

Lamb Burgers Recipe

These juicy Greek-style lamb burgers are seasoned with warm Mediterranean spices and topped with tzatziki, fresh tomato, and crisp greens. They are quick to prepare and easy to cook on the grill, stovetop, or in the oven. Perfect for a weeknight dinner or casual cookout.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 546kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb ground lamb
  • 2 garlic cloves peeled and minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped finely
  • 2 tablespoons fresh mint chopped finely optional
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For Serving

  • 4 burger buns sliced in half
  • 1 cup Tzatziki Sauce or yogurt dill sauce
  • 1 tomato sliced
  • ½ cup sliced pickles dill or bread-and-butter, depending on your preference
  • 4 leaves curly greens or any other salad greens

Instructions

  • Place 1lb ground lamb, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 2 tablespoons of fresh parsley, 2 tablespoons of fresh mint, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of ground coriander, ½ teaspoon of paprika, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon of ground black pepper in a large bowl.
    Lamb mixture before and after it is mixed.
  • Using clean hands, mix until all the ingredients are fully combined, being careful not to overwork the meat.
  • Divide the meat mixture into four equal portions and shape them into 4-inch-wide patties. As you shape them, remember that they shrink slightly during the cooking process so it is best to make them a bit larger than your burger bun.
    Lamb patties being shaped and grilled.
  • Use your thumb to gently press a shallow indent in the center of each patty—this helps them cook evenly and prevents puffing on the grill. Cover and set aside while you preheat the grill.

To Cook On the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (around 400–425°F). Once hot, scrape the grates clean and brush them with olive oil.
  • Place the lamb patties on the grill and cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium (145°F) or 5–6 minutes for well done (160°F), depending on your preference. Once cooked, place them on a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 2-3 minutes for the juices to redistribute.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Transfer the patties to the baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat.
  • Place the lamb patties on the hot skillet and cook for 5–6 minutes (or more, depending on your doneness preference) per side.
  • While the patties are cooking, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill (or in the oven or the skillet) to warm them through.

To Assemble

  • To make lamb burgers, spread some tzatziki (or yogurt dill sauce) on the bottom half of each bun. Add a slice of tomato, some salad greens, a few pickle slices, and a grilled lamb patty. Spoon a little more tzatziki over the top of the meat, then place the top bun on and serve.
    Ground lamb burgers on a plate with yogurt sauce.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes four lamb burgers. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the toppings. 
  • Other herbs: While I opted for fresh parsley and mint, you can use other fresh herbs like rosemary and oregano in smaller quantities (about 1 to 2 teaspoons each) as they tend to be more potent.
  • Make ahead: You can mix and shape the lamb burger patties up to a day in advance. Store them covered in the fridge until you’re ready to cook.
  • Leftovers: Cooked lamb burgers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently on the stove or in the oven to avoid drying them out.
  • Freezing: 
    • To freeze raw, place uncooked patties on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze until solid. Then transfer to a freezer-safe bag or container with parchment between each patty. They’ll keep for up to 2 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.
    • To freeze cooked lamb patties, bring them to room temperature, cover tightly with plastic wrap, and freeze for up to a month.

Nutrition

Calories: 546kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 37g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 93mg | Sodium: 1305mg | Potassium: 454mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 892IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 194mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/feed/ 0
Greek Lamb Meatballs https://foolproofliving.com/greek-lamb-meatballs/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-lamb-meatballs/#comments Mon, 24 Mar 2025 20:28:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80784 Meatball dinners are a lifesaver when you’re short on time. If you love these Greek lamb meatballs, feel free to…]]>

Meatball dinners are a lifesaver when you’re short on time. If you love these Greek lamb meatballs, feel free to check out some of my other favorites, like Turkish Meatballs for a bold, spiced twist or Turkey Zucchini Meatballs for a lighter, veggie-packed option.

And if you’re in the mood for something handheld, my new Lamb Burger recipe is just as flavorful and quick to make. It’s perfect for a weeknight dinner with tzatziki on top.

What You Need To Know in A Nutshell:

  • Taming the Gamey Flavor: Lamb has a stronger, more distinct taste than beef, which some find too “gamey.” This ground lamb meatballs recipe uses a mix of fresh mint (or parsley), lemon zest, and feta cheese (a small amount of dairy) to help mellow that flavor, making these meatballs well-balanced and delicious.
  • Make Ahead Friendly: Prepping these simple lamb meatballs a day ahead makes them an ideal protein-packed meal for busy weeknights and allows the flavors to develop for an even better taste. But you can also cook them immediately if you are short on time.
  • Evenly Sized Meatballs: A small cookie scoop (affiliate link) is a game-changer for portioning—ensuring uniform meatballs that cook evenly every time. If you don’t have one, a tablespoon works just as well—just aim for consistent sizes for even cooking.
Greek lamb meatballs served over a bed of lemon orzo garnished with tzatziki sauce and mint.

How To Make Greek Lamb Meatballs?

This lamb meatball recipe comes together with a few easy steps. You can serve them with tzatziki on the side or use them in a Greek-inspired grain bowl for a satisfying weeknight dinner. But first, let me show you how to make them:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  1. Gather your ingredients: You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are some ingredient substitutions:
    • Ground Meat: While this recipe is made with lean ground lamb, you can use a 50/50 mix of ground beef and lamb for a milder flavor.
    • Bread crumbs: Panko breadcrumbs or regular bread crumbs can be used interchangeably in this recipe. Use a gluten-free brand if you are following a gluten-free diet.
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh mint is a classic pairing with lamb, but fresh parsley, fresh oregano, or fresh dill can also be used.
    • Cheese: Feta cheese is one of the most popular cheeses used in most Mediterranean recipes, but crumbled goat cheese can also be used. Alternatively, if you prefer your lamb mince meatballs to be dairy-free, omit using them.
  2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat oven to 425 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
A collage of images showing how to make the lamb meatball and feta mixture.
  1. Mix Ingredients: In a large bowl, combine the ground lamb, onion, panko breadcrumbs (or regular breadcrumbs), garlic, spices, egg, lemon zest, feta (if using), and chopped herbs. Give the meatball mixture a good mix until all the ingredients are thoroughly combined. If you have the time, cover it with stretch film and let it marinade in the fridge for an hour or even overnight. Otherwise, move on to the next step.
Lamb mince balls formed into a ball and placed on a sheet pan.
  1. Form meatballs: Using a small cookie scoop or a spoon, measure about 1 ½ to 2 tablespoons of the mixture to form meatballs. Your meatballs can be slightly smaller or larger, but the more important thing here is to have them as equal in size as possible so that they can cook evenly.
  2. Bake or Pan Fry: While I prefer the baked option for more of a hands-off cooking approach, you can cook your lamb meatballs in a pan as well. Here is how I do it:
    • To bake in the oven: Arrange the lamb meatballs on the prepared baking sheet, spacing them about 1 inch apart for even cooking. Bake for 10 to 12 minutes or until a meatball inserted with a meat thermometer registers 160 degrees F. (71 C). It is optional, but if you want, turn the broiler on in the last 2 minutes of the baking time for slightly crispy and golden browned lamb meatballs.
    • To cook on the stove top: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil in a large cast iron skillet (or you can use a nonstick pan) over medium heat. Once shimmering hot, add your meatballs on a single layer and cook for about 8-10 minutes, turning a few times to ensure even browning. Work in batches if needed to avoid overcrowding.
A collage of images showing what to do with lamb meatballs.
  1. Serve: Enjoy them as a quick appetizer with tzatziki sauce on the side, or serve them over a bed of my creamy lemon orzo, garnished with pickled red onions, kalamata olives, fresh mint (or the herb of your choice) and a squeeze of lemon juice.

Expert Tips:

While this Greek lamb meatball recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that I’d love to include to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Taste your feta before adding salt: Some feta brands are saltier than others, so give it a quick taste before seasoning your meat mixture. You can always add more salt, but you can’t take it out!
  • Let them sit before baking: If making the meatballs ahead of time, take them out of the fridge 30 minutes before baking. This helps them cook evenly, preventing the centers from being too cold while the outside browns.
  • Mix by hand: While some recipes suggest using a food processor to mix the meatball mixture, I don’t recommend it. Overmixing can make the meatballs dense and tough. Instead, use your hands to gently combine the ingredients for the best texture.

What to Serve with Lamb Meatballs?

Many people wonder about what to do with lamb meatballs. The good news is that these Mediterranean lamb meatballs are a dynamic protein you can enjoy in multiple ways:

  • As an appetizer: The classic pairing for lamb meatballs is tzatziki sauce, but if you want to kick things up a notch, try pairing them with a bold harissa sauce or a creamy tahini yogurt sauce, mint yogurt sauce for a delicious appetizer. Simply plate your lamb and feta meatballs, add a bowl of your sauce, and don’t forget some warm pita bread for scooping—it’s all about those perfect bites!
  • Make Greek lamb bowls: Get creative and toss your easy lamb meatballs into a bowl with Mediterranean veggies such as pickled onions, cucumbers, and tomatoes, then use rice or another grain as your base. My favorite options include: Lemon Parmesan Orzo, Bulgur Wheat Pilaf, and, for a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa
  • Serve them with a salad: Skip the bland chicken and use these Greek meatballs as a topping for a simple Greek Salad or a refreshing Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad
  • Stuff them into pita pockets: For an easy handheld meal, tuck these lamb meatballs into warm pita bread with lettuce, tomatoes, onions, and a drizzle of tzatziki for a Mediterranean-inspired wrap.

If you make this Greek Lamb Meatballs recipe, please take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Lamb meatballs with tzatziki on a plate from the top view.
Print

Greek Lamb Meatballs Recipe

Juicy, flavorful, and ready in under 30 minutes, these Greek Lamb Meatballs are a must-try! Made with aromatic spices, fresh herbs, and a touch of lemon zest, they’re perfect as an appetizer with homemade tzatziki sauce or served over lemon orzo for a satisfying meal.
Course Appetizer, Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 32 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 418kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb ground lamb
  • ½ cup onion finely chopped
  • ¼ cup panko breadcrumbs (or regular breadcrumbs)
  • 3 garlic cloves minced
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt*
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 teaspoons lemon zest ~ zest of 1 large lemon
  • cup feta cheese crumbled, (optional) plus more for garnish
  • 2 tablespoons fresh mint/parsley chopped finely, plus more for garnish
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil to keep your hands moist

For Serving (optional*)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • In a large mixing bowl, place 1 lb ground lamb, ½ cup finely chopped onion, ¼ cup panko breadcrumbs, 3 cloves of minced garlic, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper, 1 large egg, 2 teaspoons lemon zest, ⅓ cup crumbled feta cheese, and 2 tablespoons finely chopped fresh parsley.
    Images showing how to serve lamb meatballs.
  • Using your hands or a large spoon, mix everything until all ingredients are well combined.
    Person shaping meatballs.
  • Scoop about 1 ½ to 2 tablespoons of the mixture (a small cookie scoop works beautifully here ), coat your hands with a small amount of olive oil, and roll it into a ball.
  • Repeat this process for the rest of the meat.
  • Place the meatballs on the prepared baking sheet, spacing them evenly (about an inch) apart. You should end up with approximately 18-22 meatballs.
  • Bake 10-12 minutes or until the meatballs are lightly browned and a meatball inserted with a meat thermometer registers 160 degrees F. (71 C)
  • If desired, during the last 2 minutes of baking, turn the broiler on to give the meatballs a slightly crispy, golden-brown finish. However, keep a close eye on them to prevent burning.
  • Serve meatballs by themselves with tzatziki on the side or with lemon orzo. Garnish with a few tablespoons of crumbled feta, pickled red onions, and chopped mint/parsley.
    Images showing how to serve lamb meatballs.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 lamb meatballs ideal for serving 4 adults with 4-5 meatballs per serving. The nutritional values below do not include the optional serving ingredients and are per serving.
  • Salt: Before adding salt, be sure to taste your feta, as some brands can be saltier than others.
One of the best things about this lamb feta meatball recipe is its versatility—it can be made ahead, stores well, and even freezes beautifully for a quick meal when you’re short on time. Here’s how I do it:
  • Make Ahead: Blend your lamb and feta mixture, form it into evenly sized meatballs, then place them on a parchment paper-lined baking sheet. Cover with cling wrap and store in the fridge up to 1 day in advance to cut your prep time before they go into the oven.
  • Storage: First, be sure to bring your baked lamb meatballs to room temperature. Then, store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Reheating: Bake them in a low-heat oven of 275 degrees F for about 5 minutes or until they’re heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 418kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 135mg | Sodium: 677mg | Potassium: 335mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 150IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-lamb-meatballs/feed/ 2
Lemon Orzo https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-orzo/ https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-orzo/#comments Mon, 24 Mar 2025 20:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80826 Cooked in chicken broth, this small pasta may resemble rice but has an incomparably tender consistency. The lemon, garlic and…]]>

Cooked in chicken broth, this small pasta may resemble rice but has an incomparably tender consistency. The lemon, garlic and Parmesan create a zesty flavor profile that will have you licking the spoon. If you can’t get enough of orzo after this, I know you’ll also appreciate my Lemon Chicken Orzo Soup.

Lemon orzo garnished with lemon and parsley in a pot from the top view.

What You Need To Know in A Nutshell:

Before you dive into the lemon orzo recipe below, here are a few essential notes from my test kitchen to ensure your success:

  • My preferred ratio of orzo to liquid is 1 to 2. Because this recipe for lemon orzo has you cooking the pasta with the pot’s lid off, some of the liquid will evaporate as it simmers. Thus, my recipe calls for a bit more broth than others you may find. 
  • Stay close and stir often. This is a quick-cooking dish that you will want to keep a close eye on to prevent the pasta from scorching at the base of the pot. If you find that it’s cooking too fast, turn down the heat slightly and add a splash more of your stock.
  • 1 cup of dry orzo yields about 2 to 2.5 cups of cooked orzo. If you’re wondering how much dry orzo per person to cook, a good rule of thumb is to use  ⅓ cup (about 2 ounces) of dry orzo per person as a side dish. If you’re serving it as a main dish, you may want to increase the portion to ½ cup (about 3 ounces) per person.

How To Make Lemon Orzo?

The simplicity and versatility of this lemon orzo recipe are what you will love most about it. Here’s how I make it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  1. Gather your ingredients: You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are some ingredient notes:
    • Oil: I opted for butter, but you can use extra virgin olive oil (or other vegetable oils) if you prefer. 
    • Chicken stock: Need to make this vegetarian? In this recipe, we are cooking orzo with chicken broth (or stock), but it can easily be made with vegetable broth instead. Whichever option you choose, if you use storebought, remember to select the low sodium version.
Steps showing how to sautee orzo with oil.
  1. Sautee orzo with butter (or oil): Heat your butter in a medium-sized saucepan or Dutch oven over medium heat, then add the minced fresh garlic and lemon zest and saute for 30 seconds. Next, add the orzo and continue to saute, stirring constantly, until the orzo is coated with oil and lightly browned, about 4 minutes. While it may look like an extra step, toasting orzo in oil brings out a nutty, slightly roasted flavor that deepens the dish’s overall taste.
Lemon orzo with parmesan in a pot from the top view.
  1. Add your stock and boil: Carefully pour in the chicken stock and add the kosher salt and black pepper. Stir to combine. Bring it all to a boil, then lower the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer, uncovered, until the orzo is cooked through (most of the liquid is absorbed) but still al dente, about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally. The whole thing happens quickly, so it is best to keep a close eye on it.
  2. Serve: Remove the pan from the heat, then add lemon juice and parmesan cheese. Taste for seasoning and add more salt and pepper, if necessary, before serving. Garnish with parsley and serve immediately.

Optional Add-ins and Variations

This easy lemon orzo is highly modifiable—one of my favorite things about it! Not only does this flavor combo go with just about any main dish, but you can also elevate it with a few different vegetables. Here are some that I think are worth trying in your kitchen:

  • Add in a vegetable. You can easily toss frozen blanched peas or fresh baby spinach into your lemony orzo during the last 3 minutes of cooking. My favorite veggie add-in is asparagus; you will also mix this into your lemon orzo pasta in the last 3 minutes as it cooks. However, I recommend blanching or steaming asparagus first before adding it in. You can do the same with broccoli if you prefer.
  • Select your cheese & fresh herbs according to your menu. While this creamy lemon orzo recipe calls for Parmesan cheese, you can mix things with regional flavors. Serving this as an Italian side dish? Use Parmesan and fresh basil. Using your garlic lemon orzo as a part of a Mediterranean meal? Swap in feta cheese and fresh dill. Want some added heat? Garnish your finished lemon orzo with red pepper flakes. 
  • Want an extra creamy lemon orzo pasta? Add a splash of heavy cream (¼ cup or so) towards the end (in the last 3 minutes or so) of your cooking time.

What to Serve with Lemon Orzo?

This lemon parmesan orzo is the ultimate side dish for a reason: it is versatile and can be enjoyed in many ways. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

  • As a side dish: While I would devour this lemon garlic orzo with just about any main dish, my current go-to pairings are either serving it alongside my Chicken Kabobs or with my Honey Harissa Chicken
  • As the base of a bowl: Orzo with lemon is an excellent (and surprising!) grain option in place of rice for a wide variety of bowls. Top your lemon orzo with your favorite veggies and a protein like Turkey Zucchini Meatballs or Lamb Feta Meatballs.

FAQs

What is orzo made of?

Orzo is a rice-shaped pasta made of semolina durum wheat, and its tiny size is what makes it so easy to use in everything from salads, bowls, soups, and more.

Can I use rice instead of orzo in this recipe?

Even though orzo looks like rice, it isn’t a 1-to-1 substitute. Orzo cooks faster than rice and absorbs liquid differently, creating a creamier texture. If you want to use rice, you’ll need to adjust both the cooking time and the liquid ratio—plus, the result will be less creamy and more like a pilaf than a pasta dish.

You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Lemon Orzo recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim

Lemony orzo recipe in a pot garnished with parsley.
Print

Lemon Orzo Recipe

This lemony orzo pasta is a one-pot, go-with-anything side dish that’s ready in 20 minutes and perfect for busy weeknights. The lemon, garlic, and Parmesan create a zesty flavor profile that will have you licking the spoon.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Kosher
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 356kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or extra-virgin olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 teaspoons lemon zest approx. zest of 1 large lemon
  • 1 ½ cups orzo 9 oz.
  • 3 cups chicken stock homemade or store bought (low sodium) or vegetable stock for a vegetarian option
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • ½ cup grated parmesan cheese or crumbled feta cheese
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley or fresh basil leaves

Instructions

  • Heat one tablespoon of butter in a medium-sized saucepan or Dutch oven over medium heat.
    A collage of photos showing how to sautee orzo with butter.
  • Add two cloves of minced garlic and two teaspoons of lemon zest and sautee using a wooden spoon for 30 seconds.
  • Add 1 ½ cups of orzo and cook, stirring constantly, until orzo is coated with oil and lightly browned, about 4 minutes.
  • Carefully pour in the 3 cups of chicken stock and add one teaspoon of kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of black pepper. Stir to combine.
  • Bring it to a boil, lower the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer, uncovered, until the orzo is cooked through but still al dente, about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally and keeping a close eye on it.
    A collage of images showing how to add chicken broth and parmesan to lemon orzo as it is cooking.
  • Off the heat, add lemon juice and parmesan cheese. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary before serving.
    Cooked lemon parmesan orzo in a pot from the top view.
  • Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve immediately.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 to 3 1/2 cups of cooked lemon orzo pasta that is ideal for 4 to 6 servings as a side dish.
  • Storage: Allow the leftovers to come to room temperature, then store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: Place your leftover lemon orzo in a saucepan with a splash of water or stock and warm over low heat. 
  • Freezing: While you can, in theory, freeze orzo cooked in broth, I don’t recommend it. Pasta will always be mushy when thawed; I find it best to make this side dish fresh.
  • Cook only until al dente: While I listed the cooking time as 10 minutes (or so), please be aware that the timing might slightly differ based on the brand you are using. Be sure to check the package instructions and taste for texture (and doneness) towards the end to ensure it is cooked to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 356kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 24mg | Sodium: 1062mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 287IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-orzo/feed/ 2
Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/#comments Fri, 07 Mar 2025 16:28:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80631 Served with a bright and herby mint chimichurri, this leg of lamb roast recipe is a showstopper whether you serve…]]>

Served with a bright and herby mint chimichurri, this leg of lamb roast recipe is a showstopper whether you serve it for Easter dinner, Christmas, or a special Sunday dinner. 

If you’re looking for more roasted lamb recipes, we also have a roasted rack of lamb that is incredibly tender and has a well-rounded flavor profile through plenty of fresh garlic and rosemary.

Sliced roasted boneless leg of lamb served with mint chimichurri.

Ingredients and Substitutions for Leg of Lamb Roast

With a few simple ingredients—all of which you can find on a single supermarket run!—you can make this boneless leg of lamb roast recipe and wow everyone at your table. Here’s what you will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Boneless (or deboned) leg of lamb: Here in the U.S., you’ll typically find lamb from New Zealand, Australia, or the U.S. I usually buy mine from Costco, which carries Australian lamb leg. It is sold in different weights, so choose one based on how many people you plan on serving. The leg of lamb without bone I’m using here is just over 5 pounds, which is perfect for 6 to 8 adults, but you can go smaller or larger depending on your needs.
  • Dijon mustard: Dijon adds a nice tangy flavor and helps tame the gameness of lamb. I do not recommend swapping it out for yellow or brown mustard, which can be too harsh for this simple leg of lamb recipe.
  • Extra Virgin Olive oil
  • Fresh garlic cloves: We use a lot of fresh garlic in this recipe to balance out the gamey flavor of the boneless lamb roast—8 whole garlic cloves! You will use 4 of them, finely minced, for the inside of the lamb (mixed into the marinade), and the remaining four cloves will be stuffed into slits on the outside once it’s rolled.
  • Fresh herbs: We used a combination of fresh rosemary and parsley, though you’re welcome to substitute in thyme, as well. However, it’s important to finely mince the rosemary, if that’s what you plan on using, so the pine-like needles blend in well. 
  • Spices and seasonings: This rosemary and garlic lamb roast is quite adaptable to a range of seasoning blends, depending on the flavor profile you’re aiming for. As a nod to my own Mediterranean roots, I opted for ground cumin and coriander. 
  • Lemon zest: The brightness of lemon mellows out the gamey flavor in our seasoned leg of lamb. 

How to Cook Boneless Leg of Lamb in the Oven

If you’ve been feeling a little intimidated when you see photos of perfectly roasted lamb, don’t worry—if you follow these simple steps that I’ve outlined for you, accompanied by the step-by-step photos, you can easily achieve a stunning roast boneless leg of lamb of your own. Here, my friends, is the best way to cook a boneless leg of lamb:

  1. Prep your oven: Adjust your oven rack to the lower-middle position and heat the oven to 425 degrees F. (218 C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set it aside to warm with the oven.
Steps showing how to make the seasoning and prep the lamb for the recipe.
  1. Make the seasoning: Into a medium-sized bowl, combine your Dijon mustard, olive oil, 4 cloves of minced garlic, finely chopped fresh rosemary, finely chopped fresh parsley, ground cumin, ground coriander, Kosher salt, black pepper, and zest of a lemon. Stir mixture evenly. 
  2. Prepare the lamb: Remove the lamb from its packaging. It will likely look like an uneven bundle of meat. Lay it flat on a cutting board with the inside facing up. Do your best to spread it out into as even of a shape as possible. Pat it dry with paper towels on both sides to remove excess moisture. Using a sharp chef’s knife, trim off any excess fat, focusing on removing any greyish or tough fat. *Note: the grey fat is what brings out the gamey flavor, which is why we focus on removing that type in this step.
  3. Remove the excess fat (optional): Turn it over and trim away any thick or uneven patches of fat, leaving a thin layer for flavor and moisture retention. 
Steps showing how to prepare the boneless leg of lamb for roasting.
  1. Even out the thickness: Flip the meat back to the inside facing up position. Cover the meat with plastic wrap. Using a meat mallet, gently pound the meat to create an even thickness of about 1-inch, focusing on the thicker areas. Remove the stretch film. 
  2. Spread it with the seasoning rub: Spread ⅔ of the Dijon-herb mixture evenly over the inside layer of the meat.
  3. Roll into a cylinder: To roll the leg of lamb, begin with the right bottom part of the meat and roll it towards the center (away from your body), pulling it snug as you go. Then, take the left top side and roll it towards you, meeting the first roll in the middle. It should have a uniform cylinder shape. Tuck the ends of the meat inside the roll as much as you can.
  4. Tie the lamb: Using butcher’s twine, secure the roast by tying loops around it at roughly  1 ½ inch intervals, ideally starting from the center and working towards both ends. You’ll likely need about 8-9 loops to keep everything in place. It doesn’t have to be perfect!
Person inserting sliced garlic in the lamb and seasoning the outside.
  1. Cut small slits for more garlic: Using a pairing knife cut 14-16  1-inch slits evenly around the exterior of the lamb and insert the leftover four sliced garlic cloves into each cut as evenly as you can.
  2. Season the outside: Spread the rest of the dijon-herb mixture over the outside of the deboned lamb roast, ensuring that all sides are evenly coated.
  3. Roast: Transfer the meat onto the prepared baking sheet from the oven. Bake for 15 minutes in the preheated 425 degrees F oven for a nice sear and then turn the heat down to 350 degrees F and bake until the internal temperature reaches 125-130 degrees F (for medium-rare) when a thermometer is inserted in the middle of the roast. This takes about 40-45 minutes* (a total of 1 hour in the oven). 
  4. Let lamb rest: When the leg of lamb is finished roasting, remove it from the oven, tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10-15 minutes. As the lamb rests, the internal temperature will increase by 5 to 10 degrees, thanks to the residual heat.
  5. Slice and serve: Transfer the roast onto a cutting board, remove the twine, and slice it into about 1-inch thick slices, depending on your preference. Transfer your boneless leg of lamb roast onto a plate and serve it with your favorite sauce (I served mine with my mint chimichurri sauce).
Boneless leg of lamb roast sliced and served with mint sauce on the side.

Ideal Temperature and Cooking Time (Based on Doneness Level)

Some of the top questions I receive are: How long to cook boneless leg of lamb? and What is the optimum cooking temperature? I promised you an easy boneless leg of lamb recipe, so here are a few notes to keep it easy & foolproof:

  • How long to roast a boneless leg of lamb depends on the weight and your preferred doneness level. While most boneless leg of lamb recipes say the cooking time per pound is about 15-20 minutes, I think it is more like 10-15 minutes.
  • 3 things affect the boneless leg of lamb roasting time:
    •  The boneless leg of lamb temperature (I usually take the meat out of the fridge to come to room temperature for at least 30 minutes to an hour before working with it); 
    • The weight of your boneless lamb leg roast
    • Your preferred doneness (rare, medium-rare, or medium). 
  • The two-step process – My approach to roasting lamb starts with a high-heat sear to lock in flavor, followed by a slow, gentle cook. I begin at 425°F for the first 15 minutes, then lower the temperature to 350°F to ensure a tender, evenly cooked roast. The final touch happens as the lamb rests, allowing residual heat to finish the cooking process while keeping it juicy and flavorful.
  • Looking for a boneless leg of lamb roasting chart based on doneness? The below chart from America’s Test Kitchen cookbook, Meat Illustrated (affiliate link), is the one I use.
Desired DonenessCooking Stop TemperatureFinal Temperature After Resting
Rare115 to 120 °F (46 – 49 °C) 120 to 125 °F (49 – 52 °C)
Medium-Rare120 to 125 °F (49 – 52 °C)125 to 130 °F (52 – 54 °C)
Medium130 to 135 °F (52 – 57 °C)135 to 140 °F (57 – 60 °C)
Medium-Well140 to 145 °F (60 – 63 °C)145 to 150 °F (63 – 66 °C)
Well-Done150 to 155 °F (66 – 68 °C)155 to 160 °F (68 – 71 °C)
  • Residual heat will likely raise the temperature of your leg of lamb with garlic and rosemary by 5–10 degrees during the 10–15 minutes of resting. That means if I pull my lamb out when the internal temperature is at 120°F, it should ultimately reach around 130°F, which is exactly how I like it—perfectly tender and juicy.

Expert Tips

Here are a few tips from my foolproof test kitchen to help you get the best results on your first try:

  • Before cooking it in the oven, be sure to take it out of the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes to an hour prior. You do not want to put it directly in the oven while it’s still cold.
  • A wire rack is essential. A wire rack allows the air to circulate, producing an evenly cooked roasted leg of lamb. If you do not have a wire rack, you can use a roasting pan with a V-rack.
  • Chop your herbs finely.  Rosemary is a pine-y shaped herb, and can add unpleasant bits to chew on if you don’t chop it finely enough. Feel free to experiment with the amount of herbs you use based on your preferences.
  • Remove the fat from the inside and outside of your leg of lamb in the prep stage. My boneless lamb roast recipe is perfectly flavored in large part due to this step, so don’t skip it. The grey fat on the inside is what contributes most to the gamey flavor of the lamb, so if that’s not something you enjoy (I do not), removing a large part of the grey fat will solve this issue. While the outer layer of fat does help retain moisture as it roasts, you want to remove some of it so the end slices are not excessively fatty. 
  • Evening out the meat makes rolling your roast easier. This is a great tip that I picked up in my research from America’s Test Kitchen. Using a meat mallet (or you can also use a can or mason jar in a pinch) helps create an even layer, which then makes it easier to achieve the cylinder shape you see in my photos.
  • Do not skip resting your meat. Resting allows the juices to redistribute, making the meat extra tender.
  • Slice your baked boneless leg of lamb evenly. Using your chef’s knife to slice your roast into 1-1.5” slices will give you a beautiful presentation and equal serving sizes. 

How To Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Looking to save some time on the roasting day? Here are some quick tips:

  • Make Ahead: This entire recipe can be prepared ahead of the roasting day. Simply follow all of the steps before putting it in the oven, then wrap it in stretch film. This is a great way to bring out more flavor by allowing it to marinate overnight. Just remember to take it out of the fridge an hour or two before cooking to allow it to come to room temperature. 
  • Storage: Store any leftover lamb as a cylinder or as slices. First, allow the meat to come to room temperature—you don’t want to store it while it’s still hot. Then, wrap it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freezing and Thawing: You can freeze any leftovers as a cylinder or as slices as well. Bring it to room temperature and then store it in a freezer-safe container for up to a month in the freezer. Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Warm slices of the lamb in a low heat (275 F to 300 F oven) for 10 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

FAQs

Do I cook lamb with netting on?

No. For even cooking, you must first remove the net and follow my instructions to flatten the meat, then roll it into a cylinder to get the best results.

How much boneless leg of lamb per person?

I usually serve ¾ lbs per person, about 2 slices each.

Should you cover lamb with foil when roasting?

No, there is no need. You want the oven air to circulate evenly around the meat for a nice sear on the outside.

What To Serve with It?

This leg of lamb recipe is a versatile main dish that pairs well with many sides, making it perfect for any special meal. Here are some great serving ideas:

Other Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Photography by Tanya Pilgrim.

Roasted boneless leg of lamb sliced on a plate.
Print

Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb Recipe

Looking for a foolproof way to make a juicy, flavorful, roasted boneless leg of lamb? This easy recipe walks you through every step—from seasoning to roasting—so you get a perfectly tender, golden-crusted lamb every time.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Resting time 15 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 363kcal

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup Dijon mustard
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 8 cloves garlic divided – 4 cloves for rub minced, 4 cloves for inserting into slits sliced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh rosemary leaves removed from stems and chopped finely
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley finely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 3 teaspoons kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Zest of 1 lemon about 1 ½ teaspoon
  • 5 lbs Boneless leg of lamb

Instructions

  • Adjust oven rack to lower-middle position and heat oven to 425 degrees F. (218 C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set it aside.
  • Into a medium-sized bowl, place ¼ cup of Dijon mustard, 2 tablespoons of olive oil, 4 cloves of sliced garlic, 2 tablespoons of finely chopped fresh rosemary, ¼ cup finely fresh parsley, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 3 teaspoons kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, and zest of a lemon. Stir to combine.
    A collage of images showing the garlic mustard seasoning.
  • Remove the leg of lamb from its packaging. It will likely look like an uneven bundle of meat. Lay it flat on a cutting board with the inside facing up. Do your best to spread it out into as even a shape as possible. Pat it dry with paper towels on both sides.
  • Using a sharp chef’s knife, trim off any excess fat, focusing on removing any greyish or tough fat.
  • Turn it over and trim away any thick or uneven patches of fat, leaving a thin layer for flavor and for keeping the moisture in.
    Person removing fat from lamb.
  • Flip the meat back to the inside facing up position. Cover the meat with plastic wrap.
    Person evening out the meat and spreading it with the seasoning.
  • Using a meat mallet, gently pound the meat to create an even thickness of about 1-inch, focusing on the thicker areas. Remove the stretch film.
  • Spread ⅔ of the dijon-herb mixture evenly over the meat.
  • To roll the leg of lamb, begin with the right bottom part of the meat and roll it towards the center away from you, pulling it snug as you go. Then, take the left top side and roll it towards you, meeting the first roll in the middle. It should have a uniform cylinder shape. Tuck the ends inside the roll as much as you can.
    Person rolling the lamb and then it is tied.
  • Using kitchen twine, secure the roast by tying loops around it at roughly 1 ½ inch intervals, ideally starting from the center and working towards both ends. You’ll likely need about 8-9 loops to keep everything in place.
  • Using a pairing knife, cut 14-16 1-inch slits evenly around the exterior of the lamb and insert the leftover four sliced garlic into each cut as evenly as you can.
    Person inserting garlic into the meat and spreading it with the rest of the seasoning.
  • Spread the rest of the dijon-herb mixture over the meat, ensuring that all sides are evenly coated.
  • Transfer the meat onto the prepared baking sheet.
  • Bake for 15 minutes in the preheated 425 degrees F oven and then turn the heat down to 350 degrees and bake until the internal temperature of the meat reaches 125-130 degrees F for medium-rare when a thermometer is inserted in the middle of the roast. This takes about 40-45 minutes* (a total of 1 hour in the oven).
  • When the leg of lamb is finished roasting, remove it from the oven, tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10-15 minutes. As the lamb rests, the internal temperature will increase by 5 to 10 degrees, thanks to the residual heat.
  • Transfer the roast onto a cutting board, remove the twine, and slice it into about 1-inch thick slices, depending on your preference.
    Finished dish from the top view.
  • Transfer onto a plate and serve it with your favorite sauce.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10-12 slices (as shown in pictures), which is ideal for serving 6 adults (~2 slices per person and about ¾ lb per serving).
  • *Use a thermometer: As it is with any large cut of meat like this, the best way to check doneness is by using a probe thermometer or an instant-read thermometer. If you have a probe thermometer, you can insert it into the meat before placing it in the oven and set it to your desired temperature. Alternatively, you can use a meat thermometer to check doneness.
  • Make ahead: You can season, roll, and tie the lamb a day in advance and store it in the fridge in an airtight container. Be sure to remove it from the refrigerator a couple of hours before roasting.
  • Storage and reheating: Bring leftover lamb to room temperature, transfer to an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 4 days. Warm them up in a low heat (300 F) oven for 10 minutes or until warmed.

Nutrition

Calories: 363kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 50g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 152mg | Sodium: 1428mg | Potassium: 753mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 244IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/feed/ 2
Quinoa Tabbouleh https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Sat, 01 Mar 2025 12:47:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring…]]>

Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring and summer salad, which she paired with pretty much everything. 

This version, made with protein-rich quinoa (a fantastic substitute for bulgur), is the latest addition to my Quinoa Salad recipes collection, and it’s just as delicious as the traditional recipe. If you love quinoa as much as I do, be sure to check out my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad for another fresh and vibrant option. 

Quinoa tabouli being drizzled with the dressing.

And if you’ve ever wondered about the different names and spellings—tabbouleh, tabouli—they’re simply variations of the same name, reflecting different versions of the Arabic word.

Recipe Ingredients:

This tabouli quinoa recipe is made with simple ingredients that make a bright and refreshing salad. The fresh herbs and crisp vegetables provide a delicious contrast to the fluffy quinoa, while the tangy lemon dressing ties everything together beautifully. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Quinoa: This quinoa tabbouleh salad will work with any type of quinoa. Red, black, tricolor and white quinoa would all work. It is imperative to rinse quinoa before cooking if you want it to taste good. 
  • Cooking liquid: While water works just fine, I highly recommend cooking your quinoa in vegetable stock. It adds depth of flavor, ensuring that the base of your quinoa tabouli salad is tasty right from the start.
  • Fresh lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is my favorite acid for the dressing used in this recipe, but in a pinch, white wine vinegar can be used. The flavors would be slightly different but still be great.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
  • Fresh herbs: A mix of fresh herbs is key to classic tabouli, and this quinoa version is no exception. I like to use a cup of fresh flat-leaf parsley, a cup of fresh dill, and half a cup of fresh mint leaves, but there’s no strict rule—adjust to your taste! You can stick to just parsley and dill or skip the dill altogether if it’s not your favorite.
  • Fresh tomatoes: I prefer using colorful cherry tomatoes for their sweetness and vibrant look, but any variety will work—just be sure to chop them into small pieces for even distribution.
  • Cucumber: I prefer Persian cucumbers as they are crunchy, but English cucumbers would also work.
  • Scallions: Green onions provide a mild onion flavor that ties everything together. While it is not traditional, finely chopped red onion could be a good substitute in a pinch. 
  • Seasonings: I kept it simple with just kosher salt and pepper in this tabbouleh quinoa salad recipe, but you can add a touch of ground cumin, ground coriander, or a pinch of red pepper flakes to the dressing for extra depth of flavor.

Optional Add-Ins

While the recipe for quinoa tabouli I’m sharing stays close to the traditional version, you can easily customize it with a few extra ingredients. These aren’t traditional, but they add delicious new flavors:

  • Feta Cheese: A handful of crumbled feta adds a creamy, salty contrast that pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean flavors.
  • Kalamata Olives: Their briny, tangy taste enhances the salad and adds an extra punch of flavor.
  • Garlic: The traditional tabbouleh salad recipe does not use garlic in the lemon dressing, but you can always add a minced garlic clove if you are a fan.
  • Chickpeas: Again, the classic tabbouleh recipe does not use chickpeas, but sometimes I add a can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas to make it even more satisfying.

How To Make Quinoa Tabbouleh?

Making this quinoa tabouli recipe is easy, and it comes together in just a few steps in under 20 minutes. Yes, there is a bit of chopping involved, but the result is a refreshing and wholesome dish that you’ll want to make on repeat.

A collage of images showing how to cook quinoa and make the dressing.
  1. Cook the Quinoa: Place the rinsed quinoa in a medium saucepan along with your cooking liquid and salt. Bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, cover, and cook for about 10-12 minutes until the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork and transfer it to a large bowl to cool.
  2. Make the Dressing: While the quinoa is cooking, prepare the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper until fully combined. 
  3. Chop the fresh herbs and veggies – Finely chop the fresh parsley, dill, and mint. Quarter the cherry tomatoes, dice the cucumbers and thinly slice the scallions. Add the chopped herbs, tomatoes, cucumbers, and scallions to the cooled quinoa.
Tabbouleh with quinoa in a salad bowl.
  1. Assemble your tabouli quinoa salad – Drizzle the cooked quinoa and the veggies with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
  2. Serve – Taste for seasoning and add more salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed. Serve immediately or refrigerate for later.

How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

My favorite thing about this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe is that it stores well. As a matter of fact, since the flavors meld together over time, it actually tastes even better the next day. Here is how I make-ahead and store leftovers:

  • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
  • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Before serving, give it a quick stir, taste for seasoning, and refresh it with a squeeze of lemon and more seasoning if needed.
  • Freezing: You can technically freeze this dish, but I do not recommend it as it will lose most of its fresh flavors when thawed.

Expert Tips:

This recipe is simple and easy to make, but to ensure the best quinoa tabbouleh, here are a few key tips to help you get it right on your first try:

  • Chopping by hand vs. using a food processor: I like to chop the herbs by hand using a sharp chef’s knife as it gives me more control over the texture, ensuring evenly chopped herbs. Plus, there is no risk of over-processing, which can turn herbs into a paste. However, if you prefer a food processor, pulse in short bursts instead of running it continuously to prevent the herbs from turning into a paste.
  • Herb stems: When it comes to herbs, you can chop the parsley and dill stems, as they are tender and flavorful. However, with mint, I prefer using only the leaves unless you’re growing your own and it’s super fresh.
  • Are you short on time? You can prep the herbs and veggies a day in advance and store them in the fridge until you’re ready to put it all together.
  • Let the quinoa cool a bit: You can mix everything together while the quinoa is still warm for a slightly different texture and flavor, but letting it cool first helps keep the herbs fresh and vibrant. I usually cook the quinoa a day in advance—not only does this save time, but it also ensures it’s perfectly cooled and ready to use.
  • Cooking quinoa: While I opted to cook quinoa on the stovetop, you can cook quinoa in the microwave, in an instant pot, and a rice cooker. Feel free to pick the method that works best for you. Also, I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
  • Serve at room temperature: This tabouli recipe with quinoa tastes best when served at room temperature, allowing the flavors to fully develop. If you made it in advance, take it out of the fridge 15 minutes before serving for the best taste and texture.

Serving Suggestions:

You can serve this gluten-free tabbouleh salad with any protein or vegetarian main or just by itself for a light meal. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

Other Quinoa Salads You Might Also Like

If you make this recipe for tabbouleh salad with quinoa, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This recipe was originally published in September 2018 and updated in March 2025 with new step-by-step photos and more helpful tips. The recipe itself remains the same, with only minor edits for clarification.

Quinoa tabbouleh in a salad bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean, Turkish
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 205kcal

Ingredients

For the Quinoa:

  • 1 cup uncooked quinoa rinsed
  • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable stock
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste as needed
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Tabbouleh:

  • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 cup fresh dill chopped (optional)
  • ½ cup fresh mint leaves chopped
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and chopped or 1 English cucumber
  • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

Instructions

  • Place 1 cup quinoa in a saucepan along with 1 ¾ cups of vegetable stock (or water) and a half teaspoon of kosher salt. Stir to combine, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
    Person showing how to cook quinoa.
  • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes. Fluff it with a fork, transfer it to a large salad bowl, and let it cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Meanwhile, prepare the dressing by whisking together 4 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the dressing and prep the ingredients.
  • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh, add 1 cup of chopped parsley, 1 cup of fresh dill, ½ cup fresh mint, 1 cup of quartered cherry tomatoes, 2 chopped Persian cucumbers, 3 thinly sliced green onions into the bowl with the quinoa.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
    A bowl of tabouli with quinoa is being drizzled with the dressing.
  • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 to 6 cups of tabbouleh, ideal for serving six adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Using dill: Most tabouli recipes are made with fresh parsley and mint, but my mom always added fresh dill, so I followed in her footsteps. If you are not a fan, you can omit using dill (and use more parsley or mint instead.)
  • A quick note on chopping herbs: Traditional tabbouleh is made with finely chopped herbs for a light, delicate texture, but if you prefer a rougher chop, that works too! It all comes down to personal preference.
  • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
  • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Before serving, taste for seasoning and add more lemon juice and salt and pepper if needed. 

Nutrition

Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 408mg | Potassium: 404mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1812IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
Chicken Shawarma Bowl https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/#comments Tue, 25 Feb 2025 22:15:45 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80344 During the week, all-in-one dinner bowls like this and my  DIY CAVA bowl are a satisfying, time-saving option. With a…]]>

During the week, all-in-one dinner bowls like this and my  DIY CAVA bowl are a satisfying, time-saving option. With a little bit of advanced preparation, you can turn this popular street food (typically served with pita bread) into a hearty shawarma rice bowl perfect for a quick weeknight dinner. If chicken isn’t your preference, you can also make this shawarma bowl recipe with my classic Beef Shawarma.

Chicken shawarma bowl served with rice and toppings from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This is a wonderful recipe to make with leftover chicken shawarma, and it comes together very quickly if you have leftovers. Otherwise, you can make your chicken shawarma meal from scratch. You can find all of the ingredients at your everyday grocery store—no specialty shopping is required.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
  • For The Marinade
    • Chicken: I used boneless skinless chicken thighs in this deconstructed chicken shawarma, which gives the best flavor and texture. But if you’d prefer to swap in chicken breasts, they will also work well. 
    • Kosher salt
    • Shawarma seasoning: My homemade spice blend, made with flavorful spices like ground cumin, paprika, turmeric, coriander, cardamom, and cinnamon, is easy to make and great to have on hand. But if you’d prefer to buy a ready-made jar, here’s my favorite one (affiliate link). 
    • Lemon juice
    • Extra Virgin Olive oil 
    • Garlic: I prefer fresh garlic cloves for the most impact but garlic powder could be used for a milder garlic flavor.
  • For The Rice
    • Water or Stock: While water is sufficient, using either vegetable stock or chicken broth when cooking your rice will give it more flavor.
    • Unsalted butter: I prefer unsalted butter so that I can adjust the salt but if all you have is salted butter, omit the additional Kosher salt. Alternatively, you can also use olive oil to cook your rice,
    • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
    • Rice: For my chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe, I used long-grain white rice. While I know it is controversial, I prefer to rinse my rice before cooking it.
  • Toppings For The Bowls
    • Cherry tomatoes: Look for fresh, crisp cherry tomatoes and cut them into quarters. Regular or grape tomatoes will also work if that’s what you have available.
    • English cucumber: Persian cucumbers are also an option. 
    • Curly salad greens: These can be one type of lettuce or a blend of various kinds. The key here is that you want a more delicate, curly leaf to slice thinly for texture in your shawarma chicken bowl.
    • Dill pickles: You can purchase these at the store, or pickle your own in advance. The zesty crunch these pickles provide makes them one of the chicken shawarma toppings you don’t want to skip!
    • Pickled red onions: If you’d like to make your own, here’s my pickled red onions recipe. Storebought is also ok to use. 
    • Tzatziki: While you can find many tzatziki options at the grocery store, making your own tzatziki using plain Greek yogurt, cucumbers, and fresh lemon juice is easy and extra tasty. 
    • Hummus: This is an optional ingredient that adds some creaminess to your chicken shawarma bowls. Again, you can select any version at the store, or you can make my Mediterranean Hummus in advance. 
    • Lemon: A couple of lemon wedges, served on the side, are optional for a touch of brightness as a finisher. 

Ingredient Substitutions

One of the best parts about this chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe is that it is endlessly customizable. There are so many different varieties that you can make, depending on which ingredients you have on hand or simply prefer. Here are some common substitutions you can use:

How to Make Chicken Shawarma Bowls?

Chicken shawarma over rice is a straightforward recipe that anyone can make. With a little advanced prep, you can even throw your shawarma bowls together quickly on a busy weeknight for a quick and easy dinner. 

A collage of image showing how to prepare chicken shawarma with rice.
  1. Prepare your chicken. Pat 1 ½ pounds of chicken thighs dry with paper towels and season them with 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt on both sides. Transfer them to a large bowl.
  2. Season your chicken and allow time to marinate. Add 2 tablespoons of shawarma seasoning, ¼ cup of lemon juice, ¼ cup of olive oil, and 2 cloves of fresh minced garlic to the bowl with your chicken in it. Mix it all together using kitchen tongs to coat the chicken with the marinade. Cover the chicken with stretch film and marinate it in the refrigerator for an hour or overnight.
  3. Cook your marinated chicken shawarma. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Arrange the marinated chicken on the sheet pan and place it on the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until the internal temperature of a chicken thigh registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes more, while watching it closely to prevent burning.
  4. Prepare your chicken shawarma for your bowls. Let the chicken rest for 5 minutes, then slice it into ½ inch strips (or you can cut it into cubes as well.)
A collage of photos showing how to make rice and assemble the bowl.
  1. Cook the rice. While the chicken is cooking, cook the rice. In a medium saucepan, add 2 cups of water (or stock), 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, and 1 teaspoon of kosher salt. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat, then add the rinsed rice, reduce the heat down to low, cover, and cook until rice is tender, about 15-17 minutes. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10 minutes (do not remove the lid); right before serving, fluff it with a fork.
  2. Assemble your chicken shawarma bowls. To assemble the shawarma chicken and rice, divide the rice among four bowls. Top it off with sliced shawarma chicken, a handful of cherry tomatoes, sliced cucumbers, salad greens, pickled cucumbers, pickled red onions, and a generous dollop of hummus and tzatziki.

How to Meal Prep & Store Leftovers?

My chicken shawarma bowls recipe can be adapted for your weekly meal prep routine. Here are a few simple instructions to ensure the optimal result: 

  • Meal Prep: How you prepare your shawarma meal in advance depends on how you prefer to eat it. Do you plan to enjoy it hot, or do you not mind eating it cold/at room temperature? 
    If you’d like to eat your chicken rice shawarma hot, then I recommend you store your rice and chicken together, keeping the rest of the toppings separate. This way, when you go to reheat your bowls, you can heat only the shawarma chicken and rice, then add the toppings afterward. If you don’t mind eating your chicken shawarma bowls cold or at room temperature, feel free to store everything together when you meal prep your bowls. 
  • Storing Leftovers: The same instructions as above apply here with any leftovers you have. Store the rice and chicken together separately from the toppings if you plan to eat it again hot. As long as they are kept in an airtight container in the fridge, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat rice and chicken in a low-heat oven (around 300 degrees F) and then add the toppings right before serving.
Chicken Shawarma Rice Bowls with fresh lemon slices on the side.

Expert Tips

When it comes to all of the chicken shawarma bowl recipes you’ll find, this one is achievable and foolproof. Here are a couple extra tips that I have for you to ensure a seamless preparation experience in your own kitchen:

  • Feel free to cook your chicken in the manner you prefer. While the recipe below instructs you to cook your chicken thighs on a sheet pan in the oven, they will also come out just as delicious if you choose to grill them on a barbeque, or if you choose to use a cast iron skillet on the stovetop. You can find the details of each method in our chicken shawarma recipe.
  • Marinating your chicken will result in the best flavor. My mom always marinated our chicken shawarma overnight, allowing the spices to fully infuse the meat. This extra time helps the flavors develop and makes the chicken even more tender. However, if you’re short on time, you can cook it right away—shawarma seasoning is already packed with bold, aromatic flavors that will still shine through.
  • Short on time? Take the Trader Joe’s shortcut. If you live in the US and have access to Trader Joe’s, here’s a hot tip: The packaged chicken shawarma they sell at Trader Joe’s is fantastic and takes about 20 minutes to cook in the oven. It is a fantastic shortcut to make this shawarma chicken bowl in less than 30 minutes for a quick weeknight dinner. 
  • Make it lighter. If you want to cut down on calories, you can skip the rice and assemble your shawarma bowls over a bed of lettuce or cauliflower rice (for a low-carb and keto friendly option) instead. Additionally, you can add other veggies like thinly sliced red bell peppers, cucumbers, and radishes. 
  • Serve it as a part of a larger meal. While this recipe is a complete meal on its own, you can easily turn it into a feast by pairing it with chicken shawarma sides like warm pita bread, baba ganoush, muhammara, or a fresh cucumber and tomato salad.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this Healthy Chicken Shawarma Bowls recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Chicken shawarma bowl garnished with pickled red onions from the top view.
Print

Chicken Shawarma Bowl Recipe

If you’re wondering how to eat chicken shawarma beyond the usual pita, this versatile grain bowl is the answer. Meal prep-friendly and easy to customize, this chicken shawarma and rice recipe transforms a classic shawarma plate into a hearty rice bowl with all the authentic Middle Eastern toppings like tzatziki sauce, hummus, and pickled red onions.
Course Lunch, Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 747kcal

Ingredients

For The Marinade:

  • 1 ½ lbs. Boneless skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons shawarma seasoning
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Rice:

  • 2 cups vegetable stock or water or chicken stock
  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 cup long-grain white rice rinsed and drained

For The Bowls:

  • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 1 English cucumber cut into small pieces, or 3 Persian cucumbers
  • 1 ½ cup curly salad greens rinsed and sliced thinly (or any other salad greens)
  • ½ cup pickled cucumber sliced (aka dill pickles)
  • ½ cup pickled red onions
  • 1 cup tzatziki sauce or yogurt tahini sauce
  • 1 cup hummus optional
  • 4 wedges of a lemon

Instructions

  • Pat dry 1 ½ pounds of chicken thighs with paper towels and season with 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt on both sides. Transfer them to a large bowl.
    Person preparing chicken for the chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe.
  • Add 2 tablespoons of shawarma seasoning, ¼ cup of lemon juice, ¼ cup of olive oil, and 2 cloves of fresh minced garlic. Mix well using kitchen tongs to coat the chicken with the marinade. Cover the chicken with stretch film and marinate it in the refrigerator for an hour or overnight.
  • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.).
  • Arrange the marinated chicken on the baking sheet on a single layer and place it on the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of a chicken registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes (while watching it closely).
    Chicken shawarma before and after it is cooked.
  • Let the chicken rest for 5 minutes, then slice it into ½ inch strips (or you can cut it into cubes as well).
  • While the chicken is cooking, cook the rice. Into a medium saucepan, add 2 cups of water (or stock), 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, and 1 teaspoon of kosher salt. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat. Add the rinsed rice, reduce the heat down to low, cover, and cook until rice is tender, about 15-17 minutes. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10 minutes (do not remove the lid); right before serving, fluff it with a fork and season with black pepper.
    A collage of images showing cooking the rice and the assembled chicken shawarma bowl.
  • To assemble the chicken shawarma bowls, divide the rice among four bowls. Top it off with sliced shawarma chicken, a handful of cherry tomatoes, sliced cucumbers, salad greens, pickled cucumbers, pickled red onions, and a generous dollop of hummus and tzatziki.
  • Serve right away.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes four adult servings of chicken shawarma bowls. The nutrition values below include optional toppings like hummus and tzatziki.
  • Meal prep: If preferred, you can assemble it in airtight meal prep containers. If you go in that direction, I recommend storing cooked chicken and rice together and adding the toppings right before serving the most fresh shawarma rice bowls. 
  • Storing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container and keep in the fridge for upto 3 days.
  • Marinading: The one-hour (or overnight) marinading is optional. If you are short on time, you can cook chicken right away.

Nutrition

Calories: 747kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 44g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 179mg | Sodium: 2615mg | Potassium: 896mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 948IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 159mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/feed/ 2
Chicken Orzo Soup https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/#respond Mon, 17 Feb 2025 14:54:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80259 Ingredients for Lemony Chicken Orzo Soup This easy soup recipe comes together with a few basic ingredients you probably already…]]>

How This Recipe Fixes the 2 Most Common Orzo Soup Mistakes

Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Growing up in the Mediterranean, “Chicken Noodle Soup” wasn’t really a dish I knew much about. Instead, my mother made this Chicken Orzo Soup every time I felt under the weather.

The good news? It isn’t much different from a classic American chicken noodle soup in method or taste. However, it features a much brighter, lemony broth, a hallmark of Mediterranean cooking. But because the ingredients are similar, the issues you run into are also the same:

  • The “Mushy Pasta” Issue: If you’ve ever ended up with a pot of bloated pasta (orzo in this case) that “drank” all your broth, you know the frustration.
  • Dry, Rubbery Chicken: This happens when the meat is boiled for far too long.

After years of watching my mom and refining this recipe in my own kitchen, I’ve learned two non-negotiables for success:

  1. The Timing: Add the orzo towards the end of the cooking process. This prevents the pasta from overcooking and becoming giant and mushy. And no, you do not need to cook the orzo separately before adding it to the soup.
  2. A gentle simmer: Maintain a gentle simmer and cook the chicken only until it registers 165°F on a meat thermometer.

One final note: While many consider this a “Greek” soup, do not confuse it with Avgolemono. Traditional Avgolemono soup is thickened with an egg-lemon sauce. My version here is lighter, finished with plenty of fresh lemon juice and a handful of fresh herbs.

Ingredients for Lemony Chicken Orzo Soup

This easy soup recipe comes together with a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand.

While the complete list of ingredients is in the recipe card below, here are a few notes from making this recipe over the years:

Ingredients for chicken orzo recipe soup, including chicken, orzo, carrots, celery, onion, garlic, lemon, olive oil, chicken broth, and herbs.

Chicken: I used boneless, skinless chicken thighs in this soup because I find dark meat more flavorful than white meat. Plus, I find that it stays moist even after it is poached in hot broth. That said, boneless and skinless chicken breasts are also a great option if you prefer a leaner cut. 

Orzo pasta: Any brand of dried orzo pasta will work for this recipe. There is no need to cook it ahead of time, as the orzo cooks directly in the broth.

If you are not familiar with it, orzo is a small, rice-shaped pasta that looks similar to rice but cooks much more quickly, making it ideal for soups like this one.

Chicken stock: It is no secret that Homemade chicken stock elevates any soup, and using a high-quality bone broth makes the texture slightly creamier thanks to its natural collagen.

With that being said, if you’re short on time, store-bought chicken broth works just as well. I recommend buying a low-sodium one so you can adjust the seasoning yourself.

Mirepoix: Yellow onion, carrots, and celery make the aromatic vegetable base of any great soup, including this chicken orzo lemon soup. 

Fresh garlic: I used 3 cloves in this recipe, but feel free to adjust if you prefer a stronger garlic flavor. While I prefer fresh garlic, in a pinch, you can use garlic powder. It is not traditional, but it would work.

Lemon juice: I used 4 tablespoons in this lemon chicken orzo soup, but I highly recommend keeping some extra on hand, as you may want to add more at the end after tasting.

Fresh herbs: I used fresh parsley at the end, but if you’d like a little extra burst of Mediterranean flavor, a handful of chopped fresh dill or fresh thyme works beautifully as well.

Seasonings: Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper are all you really need, but I like adding a teaspoon of Italian seasoning, although it’s completely optional.

Lemon zest: This is optional, but if you enjoy a brighter lemon flavor, stir in about 1 teaspoon of freshly grated lemon zest right before serving.

How to Make Chicken Orzo Soup? (Step-By-Step)

With one pot and 45 minutes, anyone can make this easy soup recipe. Here is how I make it:

Chopped carrots, celery, and onion cooking in olive oil in a large pot, followed by seasoning added to the softened vegetables.

Step 1 – Cook your veggies: Heat the olive oil in a Dutch oven or a large soup pot (with a lid) over medium-high heat. Next, add your chopped onion, chopped carrots, and chopped celery. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables are softened but not browned, which takes about 7 to 8 minutes.

Step 2 – Add your seasonings: Toss the minced garlic, Italian seasoning, kosher salt, and ground black pepper with the veggies. Sauté the mixture, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds, just until the garlic is fragrant.

Cooked chicken thighs shredded with forks on a cutting board for lemon chicken orzo soup.

Step 3 – Add in the broth: Pour in the chicken stock and lemon juice, then add the boneless, skinless chicken thighs (or breasts). Bring the soup to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium and let it simmer gently for about 15 minutes, or until the chicken is fully cooked. The chicken should register 165°F (74°C) when checked with a meat thermometer.

Once cooked, remove the chicken from the pot and transfer it to a cutting board to rest for a couple of minutes before shredding. 

Step 4 – Cook your orzo directly in the broth: Add the orzo into the simmering broth and cook for about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pot.

Step 5 – Shred the chicken: While the orzo cooks, shred the chicken with two forks, or cut it into small pieces if you prefer. Then, add it back into the pot and stir to combine.

Pro Tip – Shred or cut? My mother would always shred the chicken, which is what I usually do. However, if it is easier to cut it into smaller cubes, that is perfectly fine. Remember, the goal here is to have some chicken with every spoonful, so cut them into bite size pieces.

Two images side by side showing 
shredded chicken added back into simmering lemon chicken orzo soup in a large pot and served in a bowl.

Step 6 – Season and garnish: When the orzo is fully cooked, give the soup a quick taste, and adjust the seasoning with more salt and lemon juice as needed. Add the chopped parsley, ladle into bowls, and serve right away.

Two bowls of lemon chicken orzo soup served with crusty bread, fresh dill, sliced carrots, shredded chicken, and lemon wedges.

Expert Tips for the Best Chicken Orzo Soup

This chicken lemon orzo soup recipe is simple, but a few small tricks can make a big difference in the final dish. 

Here are some tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

Cut your veggies evenly: For the best texture and even cooking, try to chop the onion, carrots, and celery into similar-sized pieces. This way, they’ll soften at the same rate, which will give you the best base without any pieces turning mushy while others stay firm.

Do not overcook the orzo: It cooks quickly because it is a small pasta, so timing is critical. Adding it toward the end of cooking helps keep the texture tender rather than mushy.
However, keep in mind that cooking times may vary slightly depending on the brand you use, so following the packaging instructions is the best way to achieve al dente orzo. 

Adjust your lemon and seasonings to taste: Lemon is a personal preference, as some people (like me!) like this homemade chicken orzo soup even more lemony. Therefore, I highly recommend tasting it before serving and adding a little more lemon juice, salt, or fresh herbs as you see fit.

This soup will thicken as it sits: As the soup rests, the orzo continues to absorb liquid, which naturally thickens the broth. This is especially helpful to keep in mind if you are not serving it right away. When reheating, simply add a splash of water or chicken stock to loosen it back to your desired consistency.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Lemon chicken orzo soup in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Chicken Orzo Soup Recipe

This Lemon Chicken Orzo Soup is a cozy, one-pot meal with tender chicken, orzo pasta, and a bright, lemony broth. Easy to make in under 45 minutes, it’s the ultimate Mediterranean chicken soup recipe, perfect for busy weeknights or cold winter days!
Course Soup
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Kosher
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 338kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped about 2 cups (265g.)
  • 3 medium carrots peeled and cut into small pieces about 1 cup (135 g.)
  • 2 stalks celery sliced thinly, about 1 cup (125 g.)
  • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt more to taste
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 6 cups homemade chicken stock
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed plus more to taste
  • 1 lb boneless skinless chicken thighs or breasts*
  • 1 cup uncooked orzo 155 g.
  • ½ cup fresh parsley and or dill, roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven or a large pot with a lid over medium-high heat. Add 2 cups of chopped onion, 1 cup of chopped carrots, and 1 cup of chopped celery. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 7-8 minutes.
  • Add 3 cloves of minced garlic,1 teaspoon Italian seasoning, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of ground black pepper. Saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds.
  • Add 6 cups of chicken stock, 4 tablespoons of lemon juice and 1 pound (about 4) boneless skinless chicken thighs (or 2 medium-sized chicken breasts).
  • Bring it to a boil. Once it comes to a boil, bring the heat down to medium and let it simmer for 15 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Chicken should register 165 degrees F when inserted with a meat thermometer.
  • Remove the chicken and transfer to a cutting board.
  • Stir in the orzo and let it cook for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally.
  • While the orzo is cooking, shred the chicken using two forks (or you can also cut it into small bite-sized pieces.)
  • Add the now-shredded chicken back into the pot and stir to combine.
  • When the orzo is fully cooked, give it a quick taste and add more seasoning and lemon juice as needed.
  • Add ¼ cup chopped parsley, ladle into bowls, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7-8 cups of soup ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cooked chicken: While I used raw chicken, if you have leftover or rotisserie chicken on hand you can make this soup even faster. Simply shred it (or cut it into cubes) and then add it to the soup right before adding the orzo. 
  • Storage: Bring the leftover soup to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and keep it in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. Reheat in a saucepan with a splash of water or broth.
  • Freezing: While you can technically freeze this soup as it is, I am not a fan of freezing pasta. If you are planning to freeze it, reserve the portion that you are planning to freeze before adding the orzo in the soup.

Nutrition

Calories: 338kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 438mg | Potassium: 671mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 5556IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 2mg

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Chicken Orzo Soup

Preparing a large pot of soup, especially one as satisfying as this chicken and orzo soup, often means you will have leftovers to enjoy for a second or even third meal. 

Here is how I like to store it to keep it tasting fresh.

Storage: For any leftovers, allow your soup to cool to room temperature first. Then, store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Pro tip: If you know you’ll have leftovers, instead of cooking the orzo in the broth, cook it separately. This way, you won’t run into the issue of it “bloating”.

Freezing: I honestly do not recommend freezing this soup once the orzo has been added, as pasta generally does not freeze well and tends to become soft and mushy once thawed. 

However, if you are planning to make a large batch for meal prep, a better option is to prepare the chicken soup without the orzo, freeze the broth and chicken, and then add freshly cooked orzo when reheating.

Reheating: Transfer the soup to a saucepan and warm it over medium heat, stirring occasionally.

As the soup sits, the orzo will continue to absorb liquid, so it is normal for it to thicken. If needed, add a splash of water or chicken stock while reheating to thin the sauce and restore its original texture.

Variations & Substitutions 

There are a few simple swaps and additions you can make to adapt this easy chicken orzo soup based on what you have on hand.

Here are a couple of ideas:

Use leftover or rotisserie chicken: If you already have cooked chicken, such as leftover roasted chicken or rotisserie chicken, you can use it here. Simply skip cooking the raw chicken in the soup and stir the cooked, shredded chicken in toward the end, just long enough to warm it through.

Regional Adaptations: Most people think of this soup as a Greek dish, but many countries across the Mediterranean region serve it with minor variations.

For example, Italians add a Parmesan rind to the broth as it simmers, finish the soup with a sprinkle of grated Parmesan, and swap parsley or dill for fresh basil. 

In Turkiye, we use a generous amount of fresh chopped dill instead of any other herb or spice.

Add extra greens: If you like adding more vegetables to your meals, you can stir in a few handfuls of spinach or kale toward the end of cooking. The greens will wilt quickly in the soup without overpowering it.

What to Serve with Chicken Orzo Soup

While this easy lemon chicken orzo soup is satisfying enough to enjoy on its own, it also pairs well with:

  • A meal-worthy salad: A crisp salad is always a great contrast to a warm bowl of soup. I especially enjoy serving it with my Greek Cucumber Salad for a refreshing Mediterranean touch or my Kale Brussels Sprout Salad when I want something with a bit more substance.
  • Crusty bread: There’s nothing better than soaking up that flavorful broth with a good piece of bread. My go-to options are No Knead Artisan Bread for the classic crusty bread-and-soup pairing, or my Air Fryer Garlic Bread for an extra punch of flavor. 

Other Mediterranean Brothy Soups

A Turkish classic: Turkish Red Lentil Soup is another classic soup recipe from the region. Naturally vegan, this is the kind of soup you’d be served in a local restaurant in Istanbul.

A vegan weeknight dinner: This French Lentil Soup is my go-to when I want something simple and dependable that holds up well for leftovers.

All the Comfort, Less Work: If you love the idea of stuffed cabbage rolls but not the time commitment, this Stuffed Cabbage Soup delivers the same familiar taste in soup form.

Chicken orzo lemon soup in a Dutch oven with a ladle, showing orzo pasta, carrots, shredded chicken, and fresh herbs in the broth.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/feed/ 0
Chicken Stroganoff https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-stroganoff/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-stroganoff/#comments Wed, 12 Feb 2025 15:29:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=38487 I first dabbled with making my own homemade stroganoff in 2014 after reading about it in America’s Test Kitchen. Naturally,…]]>

I first dabbled with making my own homemade stroganoff in 2014 after reading about it in America’s Test Kitchen. Naturally, I started with their version of easy beef stroganoff — the wildly popular comfort food that originated in Russia and quickly made it onto many American families’ dinner tables. And it was a hit! 

I found that the right cut of beef and a homemade stroganoff sauce was key in making this meal a standout dish. But this got me thinking, why stop at beef? Can you make stroganoff with chicken? The answer is yes, and that is what we are making today;  my foolproof creamy chicken stroganoff with mushrooms recipe. This version of the classic Russian dish is just as delicious and made with pantry staple ingredients.

Chicken stroganoff with mushrooms and egg noodles in a large pan.

Key Ingredients for Chicken Stroganoff

There are two components to this chicken mushroom stroganoff (aka pollo stroganoff recipe) – the meat and noodles and the homemade stroganoff sauce.

Best Cut of Chicken Meat For This Recipe

I found that the best cut of chicken for stroganoff is boneless and skinless chicken thighs. However, you can also use skinless chicken breasts in this recipe. The trick to getting super tender chicken, regardless of the cut you use, is to:

  1. Cut it in even bite size pieces against the grain
  2. Season it well
  3. Give it a quick sear

With that being said, if you are looking for a quicker option, you can use ground chicken (or ground turkey) in this chicken pasta stroganoff recipe.

Ingredients for noodles with chicken and mushrooms

Ingredients for the Stroganoff Sauce / Gravy

  • Fat for Sautéing: You can use any neutral-flavored vegetable oil here. You can also use butter, which of course, yields a rich, delicious stroganoff.
  • Onions: One medium yellow onion is all you need; white onions will work, too.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Baby Bella Mushrooms: I used baby Bella mushrooms (aka cremini mushrooms), but you can also use white button mushrooms. 
  • Fresh Parsley 
  • All-Purpose Flour: For making and thickening the stroganoff sauce
  • White Wine: Pick a dry white wine like Pinot Grigio or Chardonnay. If you want to make this recipe alcohol-free, you can swap out this ½ cup of wine for a ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar.
  • Dijon mustard 
  • Worcestershire Sauce
  • Low-Sodium Chicken Broth: You can make chicken stock at home or buy it from the store. If you do, I recommend getting low-sodium broth. 
  • Wide Egg Noodles: Egg noodles cook quicker than the usual pasta and require less liquid, which works perfectly in this chicken mushroom noodle recipe. Alternatively, if you are following a gluten-free diet, you can use gluten-free pasta/egg noodles. In a pinch, you can also make this chicken stroganoff recipe with pasta. A small cut, like penne or fusille, would be ideal. However, I would recommend cooking it separately and adding it to the sauce.
  • Sour Cream: I recommend using full-fat sour cream, but low-fat version would also work.
  • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice adds a pop of brightness at the very end.
  • Salt and Pepper: I always use Kosher salt.

How To Make Chicken Stroganoff?

Making this stroganoff chicken and mushroom recipe is relatively easy. The whole thing comes together in one pot and requires no special equipment.

Person seasoning and mixing chicken thighs
  1. Prep & season the meat: Pat dry chicken with paper towels and cut it into small 1-2 inch cubes. Whatever you do, do not skip this step. Drying the meat thoroughly will help achieve perfect browning, which will result in a tender, juicy chicken for your stroganoff. Season with kosher salt, black pepper, garlic powder, and paprika.
Chicken thighs being simmered in a large pan
  1. Sear the meat: Heat a tablespoon of vegetable oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Sear the first half of the chicken for 3-4 minutes on each side, making sure to achieve a golden brown crust. Place cooked chicken in a bowl. Repeat this process with the rest of the oil and chicken. Set it aside. Do not wash the skillet! You should be left with bits of the chicken and some brown spots that are key for creating a super flavorful stroganoff sauce.
Onions and mushrooms are being cooked in a large pan
  1. Cook the aromatics: Melt two tablespoons of butter, add in the onion, and cook for about 5-6 minutes or until softened, stirring frequently and scraping the browned bits and pieces of chicken at the bottom of the pan. Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds. Then, add the mushrooms and thyme, and cook until mushrooms are softened, approximately 4-5 minutes.
  2. Make the stroganoff gravy: Next, add the flour and cook, stirring constantly, for a minute. Pour in the wine, dijon mustard, Worcestershire sauce, chicken stock, salt, and pepper. Give it a stir to combine, scraping up any remaining seasoned chicken and vegetable bits.
  3. Add the reserved chicken back into the pan: Secure the lid, bring the stroganoff sauce to a boil, reduce the heat and let it simmer for about 15 minutes until the chicken is fully cooked.
Egg noodles are added into the dish and sauce is cooking
  1. Stir in the Egg Noodles: Lastly, stir in the egg noodles, cover and let cook 10-12 minutes, stirring occasionally. Remove from heat and stir in the sour cream and lemon juice off the heat. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Garnish with fresh thyme and/or parsley, and enjoy.

PRO TIP: Sour cream and lemon juice are acidic, so stir them into the sauce after it has been removed from the heat. If you add these two ingredients over heat, they will cause the sauce to break and curdle. Room-temperature sour cream also creates a better emulsion than cold.

What to Serve with Chicken Stroganoff?

This creamy dish pairs well with a variety of sides to round out your meal:

Chicken Mushroom Stroganoff allrecipes served in a bowl with a spoon on the side

How To Make Ahead, Storage, Freeze, and Reheat?

  • Make Ahead: If you want to make this recipe ahead of time, I recommend adding the egg noodles until just before serving. Otherwise, they may fall apart in the days leading up to your meal while being refrigerated or frozen as they are softer than typical pasta (like spaghetti or fettuccine). So, to turn this into a make-ahead chicken stroganoff recipe, follow steps 1-7, then wait to add the egg noodles when you reheat and prepare to serve. The key is to let your chicken and stroganoff sauce completely cool and come to room temperature before storing it in an airtight container and placing it in the fridge. 
  • Store any leftover chicken and stroganoff sauce in an airtight container in your refrigerator for up to 3 days. Omit the egg noodles, if possible, and instead prepare before serving. If you need to store the noodles with the sauce, refrigerate for up to two days.
  • To freeze, cook the recipe up to step 7 — before you add the noodles — allow it to cool completely and come to room temperature. Place in an airtight container, and freeze for up to a month. 
  • To reheat, allow the frozen chicken stroganoff to thaw in the fridge overnight the day before you are planning to serve. Then, transfer it into a saucepan and heat over medium heat until warmed through and starting to bubble at the edges. Add the egg noodles, and cook until they are softened. You should have enough liquid, but if you feel like it needs more, add in some broth or water. Remove the chicken stroganoff from the heat, and then add the sour cream, lemon juice, and herbs before serving. Enjoy!

FAQs

What is stroganoff sauce made of?

Stroganoff sauce is usually made of vegetable oil (or butter), onion, garlic, mushrooms, all-purpose flour, white wine, dijon mustard, Worcestershire Sauce, and chicken stock.

What is a good substitute for sour cream in this recipe?

While the flavor profiles would slightly change, Greek yogurt and cream cheese (softened with a bit of milk or stock) can be used in place of sour cream. For a dairy-free option, cashew cream can be used.

What is a low-carb option I can use instead of egg noodles or pasta?

For a low-carb option, serve this dish over cauliflower rice or zucchini noodles.

Other Chicken Dinner Recipes To Try

If you enjoyed this recipe for Chicken Stroganoff with mushrooms, I invite you to check out my collection of easy chicken recipes or check out the ones below that I hand-selected for you:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this easy chicken stroganoff recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

a bowl of chicken stroganoff in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Chicken Stroganoff Recipe

This Chicken Stroganoff recipe has everything you love about Beef Stroganoff, but made with chicken instead. Tender Chicken thighs simmered in silky stroganoff sauce with egg noodles, this is a great weeknight dish that you can make under an hour.
Course Chicken, Dinner
Cuisine Russian
Diet Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 727kcal

Ingredients

For the Chicken:

  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 ½ pounds chicken thighs Boneless & skinless (Skinless chicken breast can also be used)
  • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil

For the Stroganoff Sauce/Gravy:

  • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil or butter
  • 1 onion sliced thinly
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 10 oz. mushrooms I used baby bella but button mushrooms would also work
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme chopped plus more as garnish
  • 2 tablespoons all purpose flour
  • ½ cup dry white wine Pinot Grigio or Chardonnay would work
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon worcestershire sauce
  • 2 cups chicken stock preferably homemade or low-sodium
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 3 cups wide egg noodles
  • ½ cup sour cream
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • To prepare the chicken: Mix together salt, pepper, garlic powder, and paprika in a small bowl. Dry chicken thighs with a paper towel. Cut them into small pieces (1-2 inch cubes) and season with the salt mixture.
  • To cook the chicken: Heat a tablespoon of vegetable oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Sear the first half of the chicken for 3-4 minutes on each side. Place cooked chicken in a bowl. Repeat the same process with the rest of the oil and chicken. Cover the bowl with aluminum foil and set aside. Do not wash the skillet. You should be left with the remainings of the chicken and some brown spots.
  • To cook the vegetables: Heat vegetable oil (or butter) in the now-empty skillet. Add in onion. Cook, stirring frequently scraping the bits and pieces of chicken at the bottom of the pan, for about 5-6 minutes or until softened. Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add in mushrooms and thyme and cook until mushrooms are softened, 4-5 minutes.
  • To make the sauce: Add flour and cook, stirring constantly, for a minute.
  • Pour in the wine, dijon mustard, and worcestershire sauce, chicken stock, salt and pepper. Give it a stir to combine.
  • Transfer the reserved chicken back into the pan. Stir to combine.
  • Put the lid on, bring it to a boil and let it simmer for about 15 minutes until the chicken is fully cooked.
  • Stir in the egg noodles and cook for 10-12 minutes or until fully cooked, keeping a close eye on it and stirring it a few times as it cooks.
  • Meanwhile, whisk together the sour cream and lemon juice in a small bowl.
  • Off the heat, add the sour cream mixture into the chicken stroganoff and give it a big stir.
  • Garnish with fresh thyme and parsley, ladle into bowls and serve.

Video

Notes

  • If you want to make this recipe alcohol-free, you can swap out this ½ cup of wine for a ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar.
  • To make ahead: Make the stroganoff sauce, bring it to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. When ready to serve, reheat it in a large skillet and add in the egg noodles. Cook until egg noodles are fully cooked.
  • Storage instructions: Place leftovers in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 3 days. Omit the egg noodles, if possible, and instead prepare before serving. If you need to store the noodles with the sauce, refrigerate them for up to two days.
  • To freeze, cook the recipe up to step 7 — before you add the noodles — allow it to cool completely and come to room temperature. Place in an airtight container, and freeze for up to a month. 

Nutrition

Calories: 727kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 47g | Saturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 184mg | Sodium: 1568mg | Potassium: 920mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 701IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 90mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-stroganoff/feed/ 2
Ground Beef Stroganoff Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/ground-beef-stroganoff-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/ground-beef-stroganoff-recipe/#comments Wed, 12 Feb 2025 15:08:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80118 If you are a fan of the traditional Beef Stroganoff made with sirloin steak tips but want a quicker way…]]>

If you are a fan of the traditional Beef Stroganoff made with sirloin steak tips but want a quicker way to make it, this recipe for beef stroganoff using ground beef is just what you need. It’s faster to make, more economical, and just as comforting—a total win-win!

This easy version still delivers the same rich, savory stroganoff sauce but swaps in hamburger meat for a more convenient twist. And if ground beef isn’t your favorite, my Chicken Stroganoff recipe is another delicious alternative.

Hamburger stroganoff recipe garnished with parsley in a pot from the top view.

Ingredients and Substitutions

Our stroganoff recipe with ground beef calls for only a few basic ingredients that you can find at your local grocery store—some you may even already have on hand at home:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
  • Vegetable oil: Any neutral-tasting oil like olive oil, avocado oil, or ghee can be used. If you prefer a richer flavor, then you can also use unsalted butter.
  • Ground beef: Hamburger meat, aka chop meat, aka ground meat—whatever you want to call it—is what we’re using in this easy hamburger stroganoff recipe. I recommend using 93% lean ground beef. With that being said, if you are looking to lighten up the dish further, you’re also welcome to swap in ground turkey or ground chicken as an alternative to burger meat.
  • Onion: I find that this beef burger stroganoff pairs best with a white or yellow chopped onion. 
  • Mushrooms: This beef stroganoff skips the canned cream of mushroom soup, avoiding unnecessary additives and opting for fresh mushrooms instead. I find that baby bella mushrooms (also known as cremini mushrooms) add more depth of flavor, but white button mushrooms also work. Just be sure you slice them thinly in advance. 
  • Fresh garlic cloves: You really want the full flavor of fresh garlic—trust me. But if you only have granulated garlic (or garlic powder) on hand, you are welcome to swap that in instead.
  • Flour: Wondering the secret to making the best stroganoff sauce? It’s in the roux! In this homemade ground beef stroganoff recipe I use general all-purpose flour to prepare the sauce. However, if you need to make this as a gluten-free dish, then it is ok to use your favorite cup for cup gluten-free flour instead.
  • Beef broth: Use your favorite low-sodium beef broth brand or if you have the time, make your own.
  • Worcestershire sauce: This classic steak sauce gives homemade ground beef stroganoff its zing—don’t skip it!
  • Seasonings: This simple recipe requires nothing much in the realm of seasonings beyond Kosher salt and pepper, as the beef broth, burger meat, and mushrooms really bring out that umami flavor on their own. 
  • Sour cream: For the creamiest stroganoff sauce, I recommend using full-fat sour cream. If you’re seeking to lighten up the dish, you can substitute Greek yogurt in its place; however, just note that it will have a bit more tangy taste and a less creamy texture.
  • Egg noodles: Available in various sizes, egg noodles all work well in this recipe, but I prefer medium-sized noodles for the best texture and bite. With that being said, you can use plain dried pasta as well. I like short pasta like fusilli or penne. And if you use pasta, I recommend cooking it separately until al dente and then adding it to the sauce.
  • Acid: To brighten up the flavors, I prefer to use a generous squeeze of lemon juice, but apple cider vinegar would also work with this ground beef stroganoff recipe. Alternatively, you can also mix in ½ to 1 teaspoon of Dijon mustard to the sauce to brighten up the flavors.
  • Fresh parsley

How to Make Beef Stroganoff with Ground Beef?

This hamburger stroganoff recipe with homemade beef stroganoff sauce is so delicious and simple to make that you’ll no longer be tempted to grab the powdered box mix or that additive-laden can of cream of mushroom soup. Below are the steps:

  1. Start with warming your oil. Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet or Dutch oven over medium-high heat until it shimmers. 
A collage of images showing how to make hamburger stroganoff recipe.
  1. Cook your stroganoff hamburger meat. Add the ground beef to the warmed oil and cook it until it’s evenly browned, breaking it up as you cook to avoid large chunks. This should take only about 5 minutes. Then, transfer the now-cooked meat onto a platter using a slotted spoon and set it aside.
  2. Saute your mushrooms, onions, and garlic. Continue with the pan on medium-high heat, adding the remaining tablespoon of olive oil. Then, add the chopped onions and sliced mushrooms and saute them until the liquid from the mushrooms has evaporated—this takes about 6-8 minutes. 
  3. Add garlic: After the mushrooms are softened, reduce the heat if needed to avoid burning before you add the fresh garlic, sauteeing it for an additional 30 seconds.
A collage of images showing the steps of making this recipe.
  1. Make your roux. Sprinkle the flour over the cooked vegetables and stir continuously for 30-45 seconds, or until the flour turns golden brown. 
  2. Prepare your beef stroganoff sauce. Gradually pour in the broth, stirring frequently to deglaze the pan, scraping the browned bits at the bottom aka the fond) to thoroughly incorporate them. Then, bring the mixture to a boil and cook it until the sauce has thickened, which takes about 3-4 minutes.
  3. Combine your ground meat and seasonings to the stroganoff sauce. Add the now-browned ground beef, Worcestershire sauce, Kosher salt, and pepper to the skillet. Give it a good stir.
  4. Add in the noodles to cook them in the beef stroganoff sauce. Stir in the egg noodles and simmer, covered, on low heat for 10 – 12 minutes (or until tender), stirring occasionally.
  5. Remove from heat to finish the dish. Take the skillet off of the heat, then stir in the sour cream and lemon juice (or apple cider vinegar), if using. Adjust the seasoning to your desired taste.
  6. Garnish your pasta. When you’re ready to serve the one-pan hamburger stroganoff, sprinkle the top of it with the parsley.

How To Store and Freeze Leftovers?

  • To Make-Ahead: Brown the meat, sauté the vegetables, and make the sauce up to 2 days in advance. Store in an airtight container in the fridge and simply reheat before adding cooked noodles and sour cream.
  • To Store: Because this is truly the best hamburger stroganoff recipe, don’t anticipate that you’ll have leftovers (wink-wink), but if you do, recommend that you allow the beef burger stroganoff to come to room temperature first. Once it’s no longer hot, you can place it in an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. 
  • To Freeze: If you are planning to freeze your homemade hamburger stroganoff, it’s best to freeze the creamy sauce and ground beef mixture separately from the noodles for the best texture. The noodles don’t freeze well and the dish will taste far better when you prepare the noodles fresh on the day you plan to serve them. To do this, prepare the recipe through Step 6, then allow the sauce to come to room temperature. Place it in an airtight freezer-safe container and freeze it for up to 3 months. To defrost it, place it in the fridge overnight to thaw. 
  • To Reheat: When reheating this beef stroganoff with hamburger and mushrooms, I recommend that you do so over medium heat, stirring frequently. You may have to add a splash of water (or beef broth) to thin it out, depending on the consistency of the stroganoff sour cream sauce.

FAQs

Can you use cream cheese instead of sour cream?

Your finished this would have a slightly different flavor, but you can mix softened (room temperature) cream cheese with a few tablespoons of warmed beef broth and add it at the end (off the heat).

Can I use Greek yogurt instead of sour cream?

Yes, you can substitute Greek yogurt for sour cream, but the dish will have a slightly tangier flavor. I recommend using whole milk Greek yogurt, as its higher fat content creates a creamy texture similar to sour cream.

Can I add other vegetables to the sauce?

While it is not traditional, you can add vegetables to make it more nourishing. When choosing veggies, opt for quick-cooking veggies like peas and spinach.

Can I make ground beef stroganoff without mushrooms?

Again, not traditional, but you can make it without mushrooms. To maintain the umami flavors, you can add an extra teaspoon of Worcestershire sauce, a splash of soy sauce, or a beef bouillon to intensify the flavor.

What To Serve It With?

One of our favorite things about our beef stroganoff recipe with ground beef and sour cream is that the savory flavors pair well with practically any one of our vegetable side dishes. Can’t decide? Here are a couple of our top pairings.

Ground beef stroganoff with sour cream in a bowl garnished with parsley.

Expert Tips

Our beef stroganoff recipe with hamburger truly couldn’t be easier. However, here are a few added tips that we’ve discovered in our test kitchen to ensure your finished meal comes together seamlessly:

  • A large skillet is ideal. What you want for this recipe is a lot of surface area so that your ingredients aren’t piled up on top of each other and can cook evenly. This is my go-to skillet (affiliate link) for any time I make this easy ground meat stroganoff recipe. 
  • Have everything ready before you begin cooking. This recipe comes together so quickly that you won’t want to reach for ingredients that haven’t been set aside and measured yet. This is one of those recipes where an advanced mise en place really comes in handy. 
  • Watch the noodles closely. Once your noodles go into the skillet with the sauce, keep an eye on them, as egg noodles cook quickly and you don’t want them to turn into mush. 
  • Adjust your stroganoff sauce consistency as needed. The recipe written in the recipe card below will give you the creamiest sauce, but if it is thicker than you want, you can add a splash of beef broth to thin it out. And if it ends up being too thin, just continue to cook for a few minutes longer until it thickens, stirring often and keeping a close eye on it.
  • This dish can be prepared in the skillet with or without the noodles. You can prepare this dish in the skillet with or without the noodles. Some people prefer to cook and drain the noodles separately, then serve the stroganoff over them on the plate. If that’s easier for you, go for it! This method is especially useful if you plan to freeze leftovers, as I recommend freezing the stroganoff sauce without the noodles for the best texture.
  • Don’t add in your sour cream until the dish is off the stove. Sour cream will curdle if cooked over heat, so you will want to wait to add it to your hamburger stroganoff once you have finished cooking it and have taken it off the burner.

You Might Also Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own easy Ground Beef Stroganoff Recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Ground beef stroganoff in a pot from the top view.
Print

Ground Beef Stroganoff Recipe

Our Ground Beef Stroganoff recipe is a quick, budget-friendly one-pan meal that’s hearty, comforting, and ready in 30 minutes. Made with hamburger meat, fresh mushrooms, and sour cream, it delivers a rich, savory stroganoff sauce perfect for busy weeknight dinners.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 376kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil divided
  • 1 pound ground beef 93%
  • ½ medium onion roughly chopped (about 1 cup)
  • 8 ounces baby bella mushrooms cleaned and thinly sliced (aka cremini mushrooms)
  • 3 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 2 tablespoons all-purpose flour or your favorite gluten free flour
  • 2 cups beef broth
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup sour cream full-fat
  • 3 cups egg noodles uncooked (5 ounces)
  • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice or apple cider vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley minced

Instructions

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet or Dutch oven over medium-high heat until it shimmers.
  • Add 1 pound of ground beef and cook until browned, breaking it up as you cook to avoid large chunks, about 5 minutes. Transfer the now-cooked meat onto a platter using a slotted spoon and set it aside.
    Hamburger meat being sauteed in a skillet.
  • Continue with the pan on medium-high heat, adding the remaining tablespoon of olive oil. Add the ½ cup chopped onions and 8 ounces of sliced cremini mushrooms and saute until the liquid from the mushrooms has evaporated, about 6-8 minutes. Reduce the heat if needed to avoid burning. Add 3 cloves of minced garlic and saute for 30 seconds.
    Person adding garlic to mushroom sauce.
  • Sprinkle 2 tablespoons of all-purpose flour over the cooked vegetables and stir continuously for 30-45 seconds, until the flour turns golden brown.
  • Gradually pour in 2 cups of beef broth, stirring frequently to deglaze the pan (scraping the browned bits at the bottom) and incorporate the fond. Bring the mixture to a boil and cook until the sauce is thickened about 3-4 minutes.
    Flour and beef broth is added to the skillet.
  • Add the now-browned ground beef, 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 1 teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper to the skillet. Give it a good stir.
  • Stir in 3 cups of egg noodles and simmer, covered, on low heat for 10 – 12 minutes until tender, stirring occasionally.
    The stages of cooking the recipe is shown from the top view.
  • Off the heat, stir in ½ cup sour cream and a tablespoon (or more to taste) lemon juice (or apple cider vinegar), if using. Adjust the seasoning to your desired taste.
    Sour cream added to the ground beef stroganoff in a skillet.
  • When ready to serve, sprinkle with 1 tablespoon of chopped fresh parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7-8 cups of ground beef stroganoff, which is ideal for six servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: Bring leftovers to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. To reheat, place them in a large skillet over medium heat, adding a few splashes of water or broth if it is too thick.
  • A note on sour cream: For the creamiest texture, I recommend using full-fat sour cream, but a low-fat one can also be used. You can substitute cream cheese (by mixing 3-4 tablespoons with some of the liquid and adding it to the pan) for an even creamier taste. If you want a lighter alternative, while not traditional, you can use Greek yogurt, but keep in mind the taste will be tangier, and the texture will be less creamy.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 376kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 81mg | Sodium: 786mg | Potassium: 540mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 191IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/ground-beef-stroganoff-recipe/feed/ 6
Beef Barley Soup Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/#comments Wed, 15 Jan 2025 18:42:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79780 Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here…]]>

Why This Version Succeeds Where Other Recipes Fall Short

Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

A big pot of beef soup on the stove is one of the coziest things during the colder months, and beef and barley soup is a true classic.

The problem is that many versions end up with mushy barley, dry beef, or a soup that’s either too thick or a little bland.

Over the last few years, I’ve made it my mission to develop a recipe that avoids those exact issues. After many tests, I am here with my version of the best beef and barley soup. Here are the reasons why:

  • Chuck roast stays tender during a long simmer. I cut a whole chuck roast myself (instead of buying precut stew meat made up of odds and ends of leftover cuts), so the pieces cook evenly, stay juicy, and taste consistent throughout the soup.
  • Barley is added later (after the meat is browned and veggies cooked) to prevent it from turning mushy. It gets just enough time to cook through while keeping a nice texture.
  • A splash of apple cider vinegar keeps the soup from tasting bland. It balances the richness of the beef and the earthiness of the barley.
  • Simmering with the lid slightly ajar helps control thickness. Keeping the lid ajar lets excess moisture escape slowly so the soup thickens naturally without becoming gluey or overly dense.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup

While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here are a few helpful notes to guide you as you prepare the soup and make it your own.

Top-down view of Beef Barley Soup ingredients in small bowls, including cubed chuck roast, pearl barley, diced carrots, celery, onion, and fresh thyme on a blue tiled surface.

Choosing The Right Meat

Chuck roast: Chuck roast is my go-to cut for beef barley soup because it is well-suited for longer cooking times. Cut from the shoulder, it contains plenty of connective tissue that slowly breaks down as the soup simmers, resulting in fall-apart tender, rich bites of beef. 

Wouldn’t it be better (and more time-saving) to buy already-cut stew meat instead? It might seem easier to buy pre-cut stew meat, and yes, it does save you a few minutes.

But I still like to cut my own because most store-bought stew meat is usually a mix of different cuts that cook at different times. Some pieces turn tender while others stay tough.

Starting with one cut, like chuck roast, and cutting it into ½-inch cubes yourself helps everything cook evenly and stay tender.

Vegetable oil: You can use olive oil or any neutral oil, such as avocado oil, to sear the meat. The goal is to use an oil with a higher smoke point so the beef browns properly without burning.

For the Soup + Tips on Buying Barley

Pearl barley: When shopping for barley, be sure to choose pearl barley rather than hulled barley. Pearl barley differs in that its outer bran layer is removed, allowing it to cook more quickly and develop a tender, slightly chewy texture that works especially well in soups and stews. 

Hulled barley can be used, but it takes much longer to cook.

Vegetables: We are using chopped onion, carrots, and celery, the classic combination of veggies that pretty much any meat soup recipe like this uses. As you are chopping them, take your time to cut them into even pieces so they cook evenly.

Beef broth: You can use homemade beef stock or buy it from the store. If you choose to use store-bought, get low-sodium beef broth so you can easily control the salt level in your soup.

Selecting Your Broth: For the richest flavor, I recommend choosing a beef broth that lists real beef bones or beef stock as the first ingredient rather than “beef base” or artificial flavorings.

I tested this recipe with Kettle & Fire, and it worked beautifully.

Alternatively, you can use chicken stock. I have also tested this recipe with my homemade chicken stock, and while the color was slightly lighter, the soup was still delicious and satisfying.

Red wine: A medium-bodied red wine, such as Pinot Noir or Merlot, enhances the soup’s subtle, earthy flavor.

Can I make this soup without alcohol? Yes, for an alcohol-free barley beef soup recipe, you can substitute an equal amount of beef broth for wine.

Diced tomatoes: I use one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes (unsalted) to add just a hint of acidity and subtle sweetness to the soup without overpowering it.

Worcestershire sauce: This classic seasoning adds a subtle umami depth to the soup. Its savory, slightly tangy notes help balance the richness of the beef.

Fresh herbs: I use a few sprigs of fresh thyme, tied together with kitchen twine so they are easy to remove before serving. I also add a handful of fresh chopped parsley at the end for a vibrant finish. You can use dried herbs in a pinch, but I would use no more than a teaspoon of dried thyme as a substitute.

Apple cider vinegar (optional): While optional, a splash of an acidic ingredient, such as vinegar or lemon juice, is my secret move to take this beef and barley soup from good to great. It adds a nice tang that helps balance the rich flavors of the beef and earthy flavors of all the veggies in the soup.

How to Make Beef Barley Soup (Step-by-Step)

This homemade beef barley soup comes together in one pot, making it both simple to prepare and easy to clean up. I highly recommend having all your ingredients ready before you start. Here is how I make it:

A collage showing aromatics being sautéed with tomato paste, deglazing the pot with red wine, and adding diced tomatoes and beef back into the broth.

Step 1 – Prepare the beef: Using a sharp knife, cut the meat into ½-inch cubes. You can cut them larger (about 1-inch cubes) if you prefer more stew-sized meat in your soup. It is a personal preference. 

Then, pat the beef really well with paper towels on all sides so it browns instead of steaming, which is what gives you that deep, rich base in the soup.  Once it’s dry, season all sides with salt and pepper so every piece is properly seasoned from the start.

Step 2 – Sear the meat: Heat the oil in a large Dutch oven (at least 5.5 quarts) over medium-high heat until it shimmers. Add the beef in an even layer. Since we’re using a large Dutch oven with a rather large surface area and the beef is cut into small pieces, we can add all the meat at once. 

Spread it out in an even layer as much as possible. Let it cook undisturbed for a minute or two before stirring, which gives it a chance to brown, which is imperative for building that rich meat flavor that this soup is known for.

But wait, there is so much liquid in the pan? During my recipe testing, I quickly found out that at this stage, the meat releases some of its juices as it cooks, and that’s okay.

As you let it cook and stir, some of it cooks off, and the meat starts to brown. The key is to continue stirring every few minutes so all sides get a chance to brown. It takes about 6-10 minutes (depending on your meat), so be patient.

Also, keep in mind that they will shrink as they cook.

Once done, transfer the now-seared beef to a plate and cover it with foil to keep it warm. Do not wash the pot!

Step 3 – Cook the vegetables: Using the same large pot, add the diced onion, sliced carrots, and sliced celery. Cook them over medium-high heat, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes, or until they soften and start to release their natural sweetness.

Pro Tip: I usually don’t add extra oil at this stage since chuck roast is well-marbled and leaves enough fat in the pot to cook the vegetables. That said, if the pot looks dry, feel free to add a tablespoon of olive oil to help them sauté evenly.

A collage of images showing how to cook the vegetables and make the broth for this Dutch oven beef barley soup recipe.

Step 4 – Add the aromatics: Add the minced garlic and sauté for about 30 seconds, just until fragrant. Keep an eye on it, as garlic can burn quickly. Stir in the tomato paste, salt, and black pepper and cook, stirring constantly, for about 1 minute.

Step 5 – Deglaze the pot: Pour in the red wine, then use a wooden spoon to gently scrape up the browned bits from the bottom of the pot. Those bits hold a lot of flavor, and the wine helps lift them while adding depth to the soup. 

Let it simmer for a minute or two, so some of the alcohol cooks off and further concentrates before we move on to the next part.

Step 6 – Add the broth: Return the seared beef to the pot along with any juices collected on the plate (those juices are pure flavor, so don’t skip them). Add the beef broth, diced tomatoes, and the thyme sprigs tied together with kitchen twine.

Give everything a good stir, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Let the soup simmer, partially covered, for 30–45 minutes, allowing the beef to slowly tenderize while the flavors come together.

Step 7 – Add barley and finish cooking: Stir in the pearl barley and Worcestershire sauce, and let it simmer until the barley is tender, about 45-55 minutes. 

You’ll notice the barley absorbs liquid as it goes, so check on the soup and give it a stir about every 15 minutes to prevent it from sticking to the bottom. The barley is ready when it’s tender but still has a slight bite.

Step 8 – Season and serve: Remove the thyme bundle and stir in a splash of apple cider vinegar. Give it a taste and adjust the seasoning as needed, then finish with a sprinkle of fresh parsley and serve while hot.

A cozy close-up of a bowl of Beef Barley Soup garnished with parsley, served with crusty sourdough bread and a glass of red wine.

Expert Tips for the Best Beef Barley Soup Recipe

Making beef barley soup doesn’t have to be complicated, but a few small details can make a big difference in the final result. These are the tips I rely on every time to make sure the soup turns out just right:

Keep an eye on the consistency: As the soup simmers and the barley cooks, you might notice the liquid reducing quite a bit. This is completely normal. I usually keep the lid slightly ajar to minimize evaporation. You can also move the pot to the simmer burner (or to the smallest heat source on your stove top) and/or add more water or broth as needed. 

Add warm broth, not cold: If you need to thin the soup while it’s cooking or reheating, use warm water or warm beef broth. Adding cold liquid can slow down the cooking process and affect the overall texture.

Check the barley packaging: While pearl barley typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook, different brands can vary slightly. It’s always a good idea to check the package and use the texture as your guide; the barley should be tender but still have a bit of bite.

Taste at the end: The flavors concentrate as the soup cooks, so it’s best to do your final seasoning right before serving. A quick taste at the end lets you adjust salt or add a splash of acid if needed.

Beef barley vegetable soup in a Dutch oven with a ladle full of soup.
Print

Beef Barley Soup Recipe

Warm yourself from the inside out with this foolproof, one-pot Beef Barley Soup recipe! Meticulously tested to ensure tender beef and perfectly cooked barley, it's a rich, satisfying comfort meal you can count on. Never mushy or bland.
Course Soup
Cuisine American
Diet Kosher
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 50 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 462kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Meat:

  • 2 lbs chuck roast
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil such as olive oil or avocado oil

For The Soup:

  • 1 onion 340g/3 cups, roughly chopped
  • 3 carrots 180g/1 ½ cups, peeled and sliced thinly
  • 2 stalks celery about 1 cup, sliced thinly
  • 4 garlic cloves finely minced
  • 3 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup red wine
  • 7 cups beef broth plus more as needed
  • 1 14- ounce can diced tomatoes
  • 3-4 sprigs fresh thyme tied with kitchen twine
  • 1 cup pearl barley
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar optional
  • ½ cup fresh parsley roughly chopped plus more for garnish

Instructions

  • Using a sharp chef’s knife, cut 2 lbs of chuck roast into ½-inch cubes. Pat them dry using a sheet of paper towel.
  • Season the cubed beef with 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper on all sides. Set aside.
  • Heat two tablespoons of olive oil in the Dutch oven over medium-high heat until it shimmers.
  • Add the beef cubes and brown them on all sides for about 6-7 minutes, about a minute or two per side. Transfer them onto a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the pot.
  • Add 3 cups chopped onion, 1 ½ cups of carrots, and 1 cup celery to the pot and cook on medium-high heat, until softened, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes.
  • Add the 4 minced cloves of garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add 3 tablespoons of tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly for about a minute or so. Season with 1 teaspoon of kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper.
  • Stir in ½ cup of red wine and scrape any brown “bits” at the bottom of the pot using a wooden spoon.
  • Add the browned beef (with all the juices), 7 cups of beef broth, one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes, and 3-4 sprigs of fresh thyme. Give it a stir, place the lid ajar, and bring it to a boil. Then, turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for 30-45 minutes or until your meat is fully cooked and tender.
  • Next, stir in 1 cup pearl barley and 1 tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce.
  • Let it simmer, with the lid ajar, for 45-55 minutes, keeping a close eye on it and stirring occasionally, until the pearl barley is tender but has a slight “bite”.
  • Turn the heat off, remove the thyme bundle, and stir in 2 tablespoons of apple cider vinegar if using. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Add ½ cup of chopped fresh parsley and serve right away.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 11-12 cups of soup, enough to serve 6 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Consistency of the soup: As the soup simmers, you’ll see some of the liquid evaporate, resulting in a thicker soup. I recommend keeping the lid slightly ajar while simmering to prevent too much liquid from evaporating. This helps maintain the soup’s rich flavor without diluting it. Still, you can add more broth or water for a thinner consistency. However, be sure to add warm liquid to keep the soup’s temperature consistent.
  • Storage and freezing: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4-5 days and in the freezer for up to 3 months. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it. Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheating: Transfer the leftovers to a saucepan, add a cup (more or less) of water or broth, and warm on medium heat, stirring regularly.
  • Slow cooker beef and barley soup: If you’re looking for a more hands-off approach, or want to make it ahead, you can cook this soup in your crockpot. The process is similar but with a few key differences. Simply:
    • Sear the meat, set it aside, sauté the vegetables, and cook the wine while scraping up those browned bits. 
    • Store the meat and veggies separately in airtight containers in the fridge overnight. 
    • In the morning, transfer everything to a slow cooker, along with the rest of the ingredients. Cook it on low for 7-9 hours or high for 4-5 hours until the meat is tender. If you can, stir it a few times during the process. 
    • When done, stir in the apple cider vinegar and parsley right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 462kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 2069mg | Potassium: 1051mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 5700IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 6mg

Storage, Freezing, and Reheating

One of the great things about this vegetable beef barley soup is that it tastes even better the next day as the flavors develop and meld, so you can make a big pot as a part of your meal plan and enjoy it throughout the week. 

Here is how I do it:

Storing leftovers: Let the soup cool to room temperature, then transfer it to an airtight container. It will keep well in the refrigerator for 4-5 days. As it sits, the soup will thicken since the barley continues to absorb liquid. When reheating, add a splash of broth (or water) to thin it out.

Freezing: Once it comes to room temperature, transfer it to freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. When you’re ready to enjoy it, thaw it overnight in the fridge for the best texture and flavor.

Reheating: To reheat, transfer the soup to a saucepan and warm it over medium heat, stirring occasionally. Since it thickens as it sits, add a small amount (no more than ¼ cup) of water or beef broth as needed to loosen it.

Pro-Tip for Meal Prepping: If you are making this as a part of your meal prep, I recommend slightly undercooking the barley (about 5 minutes). This way, it will reach perfect tenderness during reheating.

Variations & Substitutions

What I love most about this recipe for beef barley soup is that it is easily adaptable with whatever you have on hand. Here are some substitution and variation ideas to make this soup your own:

Other types of beef: When it comes to meat choice, you have options:

  • Other cuts: Instead of chuck roast, you can also use boneless short ribs, beef shank, or brisket, all of which work for slow cooking.
  • Beef stew meat: You can use pre-cut packaged beef stew meat from most grocery stores, but be sure to check that it’s sourced from the same cut, such as chuck roast, rather than a mix of random trimmings from different leftover cuts. Doing so ensures that you end up with evenly cooked meat with a similar texture and taste.
  • Ground beef: You can use ground beef for a quick and easy beef barley soup. This version, often called hamburger barley soup, allows you to skip the longer cooking time required for tougher cuts. Simply sauté the ground beef (hamburger meat), then cook the vegetables in the same pot.
  • Already cooked (leftover) beef: If you have some leftover roast, prime rib, or beef tenderloin, you can cut them into bite-sized chunks and use them in this veggie beef barley soup. Since the leftover meat is already cooked, you can skip sautéing it at the beginning and add it when you add the broth.

Additional vegetables: Parsnips, turnips, mushrooms, peas, green beans, or leeks would all be delicious additions. And if you want to sneak in some greens, you can stir in a handful of baby spinach or even kale at the very end. 

Spices: While I kept the recipe simple with salt and pepper, you can enhance the flavors and bring warmth to your soup by adding a small amount of ground cumin, ground coriander, sweet paprika, and a few bay leaves. These additions add depth to the broth without overpowering the overall flavor.

FAQs

Why did my barley turn mushy?

Barley usually turns mushy if it’s added too early or cooked for too long. Pearl barley needs time to soften, but it should still have a slight bite. To avoid this, add it after the beef has had time to tenderize and keep an eye on the simmer so it doesn’t overcook.

What is the best cut of beef for beef barley soup?

The best cuts of beef for beef barley soup are those that can handle longer cooking times, such as chuck roast, short ribs, beef shank, or brisket. These cuts contain connective tissue that breaks down as the soup simmers.

How long does it take to cook barley in soup?

If you are using pearl barley, it typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook in soup. The exact timing can vary slightly by brand, so it’s best to check the packaging for exact timing and use its texture as your guide.

Do you cook barley before adding it to soup?

No, there’s no need to cook the barley beforehand. Pearl barley is added uncooked and cooks directly in the soup, absorbing flavor from the broth as it softens.

Can I use quick-cooking barley?

Yes, but keep in mind that quick-cooking barley has a much shorter cooking time, usually 10-15 minutes, since it’s partially pre-steamed. If using it, add it toward the end of cooking to prevent it from becoming overly soft or mushy.

What to Serve With Beef Barley Soup

While this barley vegetable beef soup is excellent on its own, here are my favorite pairings:

Other Beef Soup Recipes You Might Like

It is no secret that beef soups and stews are the classic winter comfort food. If you are in need of more inspiration, here are a few more recipes:

  • Freezer favorite: If you love slow cooker meals, try my Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup. It’s a set-it-and-forget-it version of classic vegetable beef soup, made with similar ingredients. It’s great for meal prep and freezes well.
  • An Old-Fashion Classic: For a quicker but similar soup, try my Vegetable Beef Soup is an old-fashioned favorite that comes together in under an hour. 
  • Weekend Meal Prep Favorite: If you’re in the mood for a cozy weekend supper, my Eggplant Beef Stew is a slow-simmered stew with pull-apart beef and a rich sauce.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/feed/ 4
Marry Me Chicken Pasta https://foolproofliving.com/marry-me-chicken-pasta/ https://foolproofliving.com/marry-me-chicken-pasta/#respond Tue, 14 Jan 2025 15:17:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79710 Our top chicken pasta recipes include classics such as Chicken Stroganoff and Chicken Bolognese, and this recipe for Marry Me…]]>

Our top chicken pasta recipes include classics such as Chicken Stroganoff and Chicken Bolognese, and this recipe for Marry Me Chicken Pasta is so simple, yet hearty, that it’s sure to become a timeless favorite among their ranks. 

The elevated finished dish, as you’ll see in the photos below, is also a worthy chicken pasta recipe for your next date night. With Valentine’s Day around the corner, be sure to bookmark this for your romantic menu.

One pan marry me chicken recipe with pasta garnished with basil leaves in a pan.

Ingredients and Substitutions

In this Marry Me Chicken Pasta recipe, you’ll be combining the ingredients from the main Marry Me Chicken recipe with your choice of pasta, and a luscious Marry Me pasta sauce. These basic ingredients can be easily sourced ahead of time from any mainstream grocer, allowing you to throw this impressive meal together in around 30 minutes on any busy weeknight. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Pasta: We found that the best pasta for Marry Me Chicken is penne pasta, as we feel it holds the sauce well. However, any short pasta, such as Fusilli or Cavatappi, would also work. For those looking for a gluten free version of this recipe, feel free to substitute in the GF pasta of your choice. 
  • Chicken: While boneless skinless chicken breasts are ideal for this Marry Me Chicken with pasta, you can also use boneless skinless chicken thighs if that’s your preference. Whichever one you choose, cut them into bite-sized pieces to make the cooking process faster.
  • All purpose flour: In this recipe, the flour is used as a thickening agent. If you are following a gluten free diet, any 1 to 1 gluten free flour will be an acceptable substitution.
  • Oil: Our Marry Me Chicken recipe with pasta uses olive oil and feels like a pleasantly decadent dish. If you’d like to swap in avocado oil, it will feel a little lighter and change the flavor slightly. And if you’d like to up the creaminess factor, swapping the olive oil out with ghee or unsalted butter will do the trick.
  • Garlic: In our recipe testing, we found that fresh garlic was best for the deep flavor we were seeking, but in a pinch, garlic powder can be used. 
  • Chicken Stock: In general, in our chicken and pasta recipes, we prefer to use homemade chicken stock, as the savory notes can’t be beat. However, you’re also welcome to use storebought chicken broth—just be sure you grab the low-sodium version. 
  • Heavy cream: Heavy cream makes the pasta sauce gorgeously creamy, however, if you’re looking for a lighter version of this dish, you may swap in half and half. Keep in mind, though, that the sauce made with half and half won’t be as thick as the heavy cream version.
  • Sundried tomatoes: This is the essential ingredient to bring out that irresistible umami flavor of this chicken and pasta recipe. You will get the most flavorful punch by using sundried tomatoes in oil (sold in jars)—just be sure to drain the oil before you use them in the recipe. While you can find sundried tomatoes in stores that are not in oil (usually sold in bags), we do not recommend you use them for this dish.
  • Parmesan cheese: I prefer to buy a block of Parmesan cheese and grate it myself to ensure maximum freshness and nutty, buttery flavors. However, you can also purchase pre-grated versions to cut down on prep time.
  • Herbs: We use a combination of both dried and fresh herbs for this recipe. Dried oregano and dried thyme are used in our Marry Me pasta sauce, and fresh basil is used to finish off the end dish at serving time. If you’d prefer to not use the individual dried herbs, you’re welcome to substitute in an Italian seasoning blend. 
  • Lemon juice: You may be tempted to skip the final step of squeezing in a little fresh lemon juice (watch those seeds!), but it’s actually a key ingredient. Fresh lemon juice really brightens up the flavors in our Marry Me pasta—you may even want to add a little more, depending on your taste.
  • Seasonings: Beyond the fresh and dried herbs, this recipe calls for a simple combo of Kosher salt and finely ground black pepper. Don’t mind a little heat? Then sprinkle in some red pepper flakes for an added pop.

How to Make Marry Me Chicken Pasta?

Weeknight dinners don’t have to be boring thanks to this easy pasta recipe. If you’re organized, this meal comes together in 30 minutes, so you can enjoy a plated dish that didn’t come from the freezer! Here are a few simple steps to accomplish this meal:

A collage of images showing how to cook pasta and prepare chicken for this recipe.
  1. Cook your pasta of choice. In a large pot, bring your salted water to a boil, add the pasta of your choosing, and cook it al dente, according to the package directions. Don’t forget to reserve ½ cup of pasta water for the pasta sauce. Then, drain the noodles and set them aside.  
  2. Prepare your chicken breasts. While the pasta is cooking, take out your uncooked chicken breasts and pat them dry. Cut each breast into 1-inch cubes, then place them in a bowl with Kosher salt, black pepper, and all-purpose flour. Toss the chicken cubes thoroughly to ensure they are well-coated in the mixture. 
A group of images showing how to cook chicken and make the sauce for marry me pasta.
  1. Saute the chicken. In a large skillet over medium-high heat, warm up 2 tablespoons of olive oil until it shimmers. Then, shaking off any excess flour, drop your chicken cubes into the skillet, being careful not to crowd them together. Depending on the size of your skillet, you may need to saute your chicken in two separate batches. Cook the chicken until the pieces are all lightly browned—about 2-3 minutes per side. Once they are cooked through, transfer them onto a plate, cover with foil, and set them aside.
  2. Prepare your Marry Me pasta sauce. In the same skillet, turn the heat down to medium-low, allowing it to cool off slightly. Then, add the remaining one tablespoon of olive oil and minced garlic. Saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds, or until fragrant. Slowly pour in the chicken stock and heavy cream, mix together evenly, then add in the sundried tomatoes. Allow the liquid to come to a low boil and simmer it for 2-3 minutes.
Person showing how to make the marry me chicken with pasta in a collage of photos.
  1. Add in the chicken. Take the still-warm chicken and add it to the sauce. You will want to simmer it for 3-4 minutes, stirring frequently, or until slightly thickened. At this point, it should still be quite thin, but if yours gets too thick, add in some reserved pasta water, one tablespoon at a time, until it reaches your desired consistency. Next, stir in the Parmesan cheese, oregano, thyme, lemon juice, and red pepper flakes, if using. Take a taste, and adjust the seasoning to your liking.
  2. Add the cooked pasta to the sauce. Once combined, allow the full dish to simmer for 3-4 minutes to ensure it is thoroughly warmed.
  3. Serve: Distribute the pasta evenly into bowls, topping with some additional Parmesan and torn fresh basil leaves.

Leftovers, Storage, and Reheating

While this easy Marry Me Chicken Pasta recipe doesn’t tend to have leftovers (in our experience, it was a second-helping kind of dish!), it’s simple enough to store any leftover pasta to enjoy again later. 

  • Storage: Before storing your Marry Me Chicken and Pasta, allow it to cool down and come to room temperature. You can then store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat the leftovers on the stovetop in a saucepan. You may need to add in a little water to loosen up the pasta sauce as it heats. 
  • Freezing: Sorry—this isn’t a dish that freezes well. We do not recommend that you freeze it.

Variations

This recipe, due to being composed of simple ingredients and instructions, lends itself easily to some alterations, depending on your dietary needs and/or preferences. Here are the most common ingredient swaps and additions that we came across as we were working on this recipe:

  • A Dairy-Free Marry Me Chicken and Pasta: If you’d like to remove the dairy in this recipe, you can use cashew cream in place of the heavy cream, vegan butter in place of the unsalted butter/ghee, and nutritional yeast in place of the Parmesan cheese. Please just note that in making these changes, while it will be dairy-free, you will ultimately be changing the flavor profile of the finished dish. 
  • Marry Me Chicken with Rotisserie Chicken: If you’re looking to streamline your cooking time, rotisserie chicken pasta definitely saves you some stovetop minutes. While the consistency of the dish will be altered, you can swap in the same quantity of rotisserie chicken in place of the chicken breast cubes. 
  • A High Protein Chicken Pasta: Looking to up the overall protein content of your dinner? You can easily make a high protein pasta sauce by using cottage cheese in a similar fashion to how we did in our Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese. Note: just be careful not to overcook your pasta sauce if you’re adding cottage cheese. 
  • Add a handful of Spinach: Adding more greens is one way to make a bit healthier. You can do this by tossing a handful of spinach leaves into the finished pasta. The spinach also adds a pleasing pop of color alongside the fresh basil leaves. 
Marry me chicken pasta in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

What to Serve it With?

Beyond a crisp glass of white wine (because that’s our top pairing!), you can also pair this chicken and penne pasta recipe with a couple of side dish options to round out your dinner table. Here are our top suggestions:

  • A green salad: For a salad to complement the big flavors of this pasta dinner, we recommend keeping it simple with either our Spring Mix Salad or our Classic Caesar Salad
  • A vegetable side dish: The veggie we love most to savor alongside this iconic pasta is definitely asparagus. Try either our Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms or our Oven Baked Asparagus
  • Garlic bread: What is Marry Me Pasta without garlic bread? Truly, we think they shouldn’t be allowed to exist without one another! Our go-to is our Air Fryer Garlic Bread, which you can make while the pasta is cooking in 15 minutes!

FAQs

What is Marry Me Pasta Chicken?

Marry Me Chicken a viral recipe that gained massive popularity on social media, especially on TikTok. It features tender chicken simmered in a rich and creamy sun-dried tomato sauce. The name comes from the sauce’s indulgent flavor, said to be so irresistible it could inspire a marriage proposal. As Marry Me Chicken became a sensation, creative variations emerged, including this version with pasta. Over time, it has become so popular that many now refer to it as “Engagement Chicken Pasta.”

What type of pasta should I use?

We found that the best pasta for Marry Me Chicken is penne pasta, as we feel it holds the creamy sauce well. However, any short pasta such as Fusilli, rigatoni or Cavatappi would also work. For those looking for a gluten free version of this recipe, feel free to substitute in the GF pasta of your choice.

Other Pasta Recipes You Might Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Marry Me Chicken Pasta following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Marry me chicken pasta in a bowl garnished with basil leaves.
Print

Marry Me Chicken Pasta Recipe

This Marry Me Chicken Pasta is not only the latest viral sensation on social media but also a modern-day comfort food classic—a 30-minute weeknight chicken and pasta dinner so irresistible it might just get you a proposal.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 581kcal

Ingredients

For The Pasta:

  • 8 ounces pasta a short pasta like penne, fusilli or Cavatappi would all work
  • Water & salt

For The Chicken:

  • 1 ½ lbs chicken breasts boneless and skinless
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 4 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil divided
  • 3 cloves garlic minced finely or pressed
  • 2 cups chicken stock or storebought low sodium chicken broth
  • 1 cup heavy cream or half and half*
  • ½ cup sun-dried tomatoes packed in oil, drained, and finely chopped
  • cup Parmesan cheese plus more for topping
  • ¼ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ¼ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 tablespoon fresh basil torn

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil, add 8 ounces of dried pasta, and cook al dente according to the package directions. Reserve ½ cup of pasta water and drain. Set it aside.
  • While the pasta is cooking, pat dry and cut 1 ½ pounds chicken breasts into 1-inch cubes. Place it in a bowl with 1 teaspoon kosher salt, ½ teaspoon of black pepper, and 4 tablespoons of all-purpose flour. Toss to coat thoroughly.
  • Heat 2 tablespoons of olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat until it shimmers.
  • Place the prepared chicken, shaking off any excess flour, in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd. You may need to saute in two batches. Cook until lightly golden browned, for 2-3 minutes per side, adjusting the heat as necessary to ensure they are evenly browned and register 165 degrees F when inserted with a meat thermometer. Transfer them onto a plate, cover with foil, and set aside.
  • Add the remaining one tablespoon of olive oil and 3 cloves of minced garlic in the now-empty skillet over medium heat. Saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds until fragrant.
  • Slowly pour 2 cups of chicken stock and 1 cup of heavy cream, then add ½ cup of sun-dried tomatoes. Stir, scraping the brown bits at the bottom of the skillet with a wooden spoon. Bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 2-3 minutes.
  • Add the reserved chicken and simmer for 3-4 minutes, stirring frequently until slightly thickened. At this point, it should still be quite thin, but if yours gets too thick, add a splash of the reserved pasta water (or one tablespoon at a time) until it reaches your desired consistency.
  • Stir in ⅔ cup Parmesan cheese, ¼ teaspoon of oregano, ¼ teaspoon of thyme, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, and ½ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, if using. Taste and adjust seasoning.
  • Add the cooked pasta to the sauce and toss well to combine. Let it simmer for 3-4 minutes to warm thoroughly.
  • When serving, sprinkle with additional Parmesan and torn basil.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 cups of chicken and pasta, ideal for 6 normal servings or 4 generous servings. Below nutritional values are per serving of 6 servings.
  • Do not skip browning the chicken: This step of the recipe is imperative when it comes to depth of flavor. If you don’t brown your chicken as you saute it (which can happen from either crowding the chicken pieces in the skillet or not cooking them long enough), then you will miss out on the rich, caramelized crust that adds both flavor to the chicken and a savory base for the sauce.
  • The chicken must be cooked thoroughly in the sauteeing stage: When it comes time to add the chicken to the sauce, it must be cooked all the way through, as it will only be simmering in the pasta sauce for a short time before serving.
  • Don’t forget to reserve some pasta water before draining your noodles: We use the reserved pasta water to even out the consistency of the sauce as needed. You may not need all of it but it is good to have it as a backup. And I love this tip on an easy way to reserve pasta water.
  • Give the final dish a taste before serving: You may find yourself wanting to add a little bit more lemon juice than this recipe calls for, which adds a zesty brightness most people love.
  • Storing and reheating leftovers: Bring the pasta to room temperature and then store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. To reheat, place the pasta and chicken in a large skillet and add a splash of chicken stock or water if the sauce is too thick.

Nutrition

Calories: 581kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 127mg | Sodium: 852mg | Potassium: 804mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 896IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 186mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/marry-me-chicken-pasta/feed/ 0
Broccoli Feta Soup https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/#comments Wed, 08 Jan 2025 15:02:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11028 This vegetarian and gluten-free 30-Minute Broccoli and Feta Soup is a lifesaver when you are short on time. It is easy to make and a great way to incorporate vegetables into your diet. Once it is topped off with fresh Italian parsley and feta cheese you end up with a delicious and veggie packed soup that will warm your heart.]]>

Nothing says fall and winter more than soup season. And this hearty and creamy broccoli feta soup recipe is surely a winner. So, make a big batch, enjoy leftovers throughout the week, or freeze them for more extended storage.

And if you enjoy this dish, be sure to check out our Sweet Potato Soup, Turkish Lentil Soup, French Lentil Soup, Pumpkin Ginger Soup, and Carrot Ginger Soup recipes.

Broccoli Feta Soup in a bowl garnished with croutons.

Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredient list for this healthy broccoli soup consists of olive oil, onions, celery, garlic cloves, Kosher salt, cracked pepper, large Yukon gold potato, vegetable broth, broccoli crowns, fresh parsley, and feta cheese.

Ingredients for the recipe portioned out and photographed from the top view.

Ingredient Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Chicken Stock: Swap out vegetable broth for Homemade Chicken Broth if you are okay with it not being a vegetarian soup.
  • Fresh Herbs: Compliment the broccoli and feta with a small handful of fresh mint or fresh dill instead of parsley.
  • Make it more green and nutritious by adding a cup of baby spinach in the last 10 minutes before pureeing the soup.
  • Cheese: Top it with your favorite cheese, like mozzarella, cheddar, or freshly grated Parmesan cheese.
  • Seasoning: Finish with a sprinkle of red pepper flakes, sumac, a squeeze of lemon juice, or a drizzle of olive oil or heavy cream.
  • Vegan: Omit the feta cheese or swap it out for vegan feta.

How to Make This Broccoli and Feta Soup?

Broccoli feta cheese soup comes together in less than 30 minutes after a quick and gentle simmer on the stove. Puree right in the same pot, or use a countertop blender to blend in batches. Here’s how to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make cream of broccoli soup.
  1. Saute aromatics: Warm olive oil over medium heat in a Dutch oven or large pot. Add onion and celery, and cook until translucent, about 5-7 minutes. Stir in the cloves of garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  2. Add potatoes: Add potatoes and salt and pepper. Pour in vegetable stock. 
  3. Simmer: Bring it to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer and allow it to cook for 10 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  4. Add broccoli: Stir in the broccoli florets and cook briefly for 8-10 minutes over medium heat.
Person pureeing and mixing soup in a collage of two images.
  1. Puree: Add the parsley. Then, using an immersion blender, puree the soup in the pot. Alternatively, you can puree it in batches in a blender.
  2. Garnish and serve: When ready to serve, ladle into bowls, and garnish with feta crumbles and more parsley.

What To Serve it With?

While you can enjoy this cream of broccoli soup all on its own, there are a few ways to jazz it up. You can try:

How to Store, Freeze, Thaw and Reheat?

What I love the most about this vegetable soup with feta is the fact that it stores well, so you can enjoy the leftovers in the following days. Here is how I store it:

  • Storage: You can store leftovers of this broccoli soup with feta in an airtight container for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: If you plan to freeze this soup, I recommend not adding the feta to the soup, as dairy doesn’t freeze well.  Follow the recipe as written, cool completely, and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen broccoli soup overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat a bowlful of soup in the microwave in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, or reheat the whole batch on the stovetop over medium heat until bubbling and simmering. Top with feta cheese crumbles.
Bowls of healthy broccoli soup garnished with parsley and croutons from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Use an immersion blender. This way, you can puree this feta cheese soup in the same pot with no extra dishes. This Kitchen Aid stick blender (affiliate link)  is the one I own and recommend.
  • If you do not own an immersion blender, you can blend the soup in a blender or food processor. However, whichever gadget you use, fill it about halfway full and be extra careful when blending hot liquids.
  • Puree to desired consistency. Keep a few chunks of broccoli intact or puree until silky smooth.
  • Mash with a potato masher. Rather than blending, mash the soup with a potato masher to keep it chunky.

FAQs

Can broccoli cheese soup be frozen?

Yes, this soup freezes well. Omit the feta cheese before freezing, and top with the cheese once thawed, reheated, and ready to serve.

Can you put feta in soup?

Yes, you can, but putting it at the end is recommended.

Other Broccoli Recipes You Might Like:

This recipe is adapted (with minor changes) from Emilie Raffa’s The Clever Cookbook.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this Broccoli and Feta Soup recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Broccoli Feta Soup in a bowl garnished with feta and parsley.
Print

Broccoli Feta Soup Recipe

This vegetarian and gluten-free 30-Minute Broccoli Feta Soup is a lifesaver when you are short on time. It is easy to make and a great way to incorporate vegetables into your diet. Once it is topped off with fresh Italian parsley and feta cheese you end up with a delicious and veggie packed soup that will warm your heart.
Course Soup
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 cups
Calories 135kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 2 stalks celery chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 large Yukon Gold Potato peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 4 cups low-sodium vegetable stock plus more as needed
  • 6 cups broccoli florets rinsed and drained
  • 1/3 cup Italian parsley rinsed and chopped coarsely – plus more as garnish
  • 1/3 cup feta cheese crumbled – plus more as garnish

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven (or any large, heavy bottom pot would work). Add in the onion and celery. Cook until they are soft, 5-7 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Stir in the potatoes, salt, and black pepper. Pour in the vegetable stock. Bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 10 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  • Stir in the broccoli florets and cook briefly, 8-10 minutes, over medium heat.
  • Right before you are ready to puree the soup, add in the chopped parsley.
  • Using a hand blender, puree soup in the pot. Alternatively, you can puree it in batches in a blender. I prefer my soup rustic-style with chunks of broccoli, but if you prefer it to have a smooth texture, then puree it until it has a silky texture.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning* if necessary.
  • When ready to serve, ladle some into bowls and garnish with feta crumbles and parsley leaves.

Video

Notes

  • *While we want the soup to be properly seasoned, be sure to taste your feta cheese before adding more.
  • It is optional, but you can finish it with a drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of sumac if you have it.
  • Storage of leftovers: Bring to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: Follow the recipe as written (except omit using crumbled feta in the end), cool completely, and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat a bowlful of soup in the microwave in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, or reheat the whole batch on the stovetop over medium heat until bubbling and simmering. Top with feta cheese crumbles and garnish with fresh parsley right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 135kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 949mg | Potassium: 458mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1217IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/feed/ 20
Turkish Pasta https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/#comments Sat, 04 Jan 2025 17:34:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79631 Growing up in Türkiye and making my fair share of Turkish recipes, this comforting Turkish pasta dish, known as kiymali makarna, was…]]>

Growing up in Türkiye and making my fair share of Turkish recipes, this comforting Turkish pasta dish, known as kiymali makarna, was one of my mom’s go-to weeknight dinners. So, when I came across Anna Paul’s TikTok video of her mom making it, I was instantly transported back to my childhood.

This dish is a simplified take on manti, the iconic Turkish dumplings known for their labor-intensive preparation. Making manti is usually a communal activity involving making the dough from scratch, filling it with spiced meat, and folding each piece by hand. It is a process that takes hours. This “cheat manti” (or sometimes referred to as “manti pasta”) offers the same bold and comforting flavors but in a fraction of the time, making it perfect for modern weeknight cooking.

Pasta Turkish garnished with dried mint and tomatoes from the front view.

Ingredients and Substitutions:

This dish is all about combining simple ingredients to create layers of flavor. While the list of ingredients may look long, there are plenty of options when it comes to substitutions. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients from the top view.
  • Pasta: I use farfalle, but other small pasta shapes like fusilli or penne would work. You can also use your gluten-free pasta if you are following a gluten-free diet. For a gluten-free option, use your favorite gluten-free pasta. While alternative pastas like chickpea or brown rice pasta can be used, note that their distinct flavors might slightly change the overall taste of the dish.
  • Ground beef: Lean ground beef (93%) works best for a lighter, flavorful meat sauce. You can also use ground lamb, turkey, or chicken, but keep in mind that each will bring a distinct flavor profile to the dish.
  • Yellow onion: You’ll need about a cup of finely chopped yellow onion. Any type of onion, like Walla Walla, Vidalia or even white onion would work.
  • Red Pepper Paste : Traditionally, this recipe uses mildly hot red pepper paste, which adds a unique depth of flavor. It’s readily available online (affiliate link). If you don’t have it on hand, tomato paste makes a great substitute.
  • Spices: You’ll need a combination of onion powder (to enhance the onion taste), ground cumin, sweet (or smoked) paprika, red pepper flakes (such as Aleppo or Urfa chili pepper), salt and black pepper.
  • Greek Yogurt: I like the thickness of plain Greek yogurt (as you can see in my Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce recipe), but regular unsweetened plain yogurt would also work. Go for full-fat yogurt for the most delicious creamy sauce or low-fat for a lighter one.
  • Fresh Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves for the signature garlicky taste. However, while not traditional, you can use garlic powder for a milder flavor.
  • Lemon Juice: Similar to my yogurt dressing recipe, a squeeze of lemon juice helps balance the strong garlic flavor.
  • Unsalted butter: You can use salted or unsalted butter, but if you go with the salted version, be sure to adjust the seasoning accordingly.
  • Kosher salt
  • Garnish: Though they are optional, the traditional Turkish pasta is sprinkled with a handful of dried mint and sumac. Alternatively, you can use chopped parsley and chili flakes, if you don’t mind the heat. I also added a handful of cherry tomatoes for some color, but they are also optional. 

How To Make Turkish Pasta?

At first glance, this recipe might seem to have many steps, but most of them can be done simultaneously, making the process quicker and more efficient. Here is how I do it:

A collage of images showing how to make the tiktok viral Anna Paul's Turkish pasta recipe.
  1. Cook the pasta: Bring a large pot of generously salted water to a boil. Add the pasta and cook according to the package instructions until al dente. Save half a cup of the cooking liquid, drain the pasta, and set it aside.
  2. Saute meat: While the pasta is cooking, add the ground meat in a large skillet (or a pan). In the viral TikTok video, Anna’s mom intentionally does not use olive oil, saying that the meat releases its oils as you saute it. Initially, I was a bit skeptical, but she was right. Still, if you feel like your meat can benefit from a little olive oil, feel free to use it.
  3. Cook with the spices and add the onion: Add the spices and cook, stirring constantly, for about 5 minutes, or until the meat is no longer pink. Then, add the diced onion and red pepper paste (or tomato paste) cook until softened. As you are sauteing, use the reserved pasta as needed, ensuring that the meat sauce maintains its moisture levels.
  4. Make the garlicky yogurt sauce: Whisk yogurt, minced garlic, lemon juice and kosher salt in a bowl until super creamy. Taste for seasoning and make sure it is seasoned according to your taste buds.
A collage of photos showing the butter sauce drizzle.
  1. Make the butter drizzle: I recommend making the butter drizzle right before serving. The process is super simple. Melt butter in a small saucepan and then stir in 1 teaspoon sweet paprika, ¼ teaspoon (or more) red pepper flakes and ½ teaspoon kosher salt. Cook until butter is fully melted and bubbly.
  2. Assemble: To serve, grab a pasta bowl. Place the cooked pasta at the bottom, spoon 4 tablespoons of the yogurt sauce on top followed by ⅔ cup of the cooked beef. Finish it with a drizzle (about one or two tablespoons) of the paprika butter sauce. Repeat the same process for the rest of the bowls.
  3. Garnish: If preferred, garnish with a handful of cherry tomatoes, a tablespoon of dried mint (or fresh parsley) and a teaspoon of sumac, if using. 

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

While this dish is quick to assemble, you can save time by preparing some components in advance to assemble it in a flash. It also stores well, making for a flavorful lunch the next day. Here is how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: 
    • Meat sauce: Cook the meat and onion mixture, let it cool to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
    • Garlic yogurt sauce: Prepare the sauce and store it in a jar or airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
    • On the day you plan to serve: Cook the pasta while reheating the meat sauce on the stovetop. Right before serving, make the chili butter sauce and assemble as written in the recipe.
  • Storage & Reheating: If you can, I recommend keeping each component of the leftovers separate in airtight containers in the fridge. When ready to serve, reheat the pasta, meat, and butter sauce and assemble as described in the recipe.
Cheat manti pasta recipe in a bowl with a fork on the side.

Helpful Tips:

  • Cooking onion: When I first saw the viral video, I was a bit skeptical about sauteing the onion after cooking the meat, but to my surprise, I found that this method preserves the onion flavor better, creating a distinct and delicious contrast, very similar to manti. It’s different from how my mom prepared it, but I really enjoyed the end result.
  • Spice levels: The spicy butter drizzle is a signature component of this recipe. While the recipe below is more on the milder side, feel free to up the amount of red pepper flakes if you love spicy food. The yogurt sauce beautifully balances the spiciness creating a harmonious flavor profile.
  • Let it sizzle: I’ve seen some people make the butter drizzle in the microwave. While I understand that it is convenient (and one last dish to wash), the butter drizzle is supposed to sizzle when drizzled. That is why, for the most authentic Turkish pasta experience, take the extra minute to melt and season the butter in a skillet. The sizzling adds a burst of aroma and flavor that truly elevates the dish.
  • Curry powder: In Anna Paul’s version of Turkish pasta, she adds a dash of curry powder. While you’re welcome to include it, I chose to omit it since curry powder isn’t traditionally used in manti. To stay true to the version I grew up eating, I opted for the classic spices instead.

Other Pasta Recipes You Might Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Turkish Pasta following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Turkish pasta recipe being drizzled with the melted butter sauce.
Print

Turkish Pasta Recipe

The TikTok-viral Turkish Pasta recipe, made famous by Anna Paul, is a 30-minute wonder that's as delicious as it is easy. Made by layering cooked pasta with garlicky yogurt, spiced ground beef, and a chili butter drizzle, this recipe is easy to make, satisfying, and totally worthy of the hype.
Course Main Course – Pasta Dish
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 563kcal

Ingredients

For The Pasta

  • 8 ounces pasta I use farfalle but any shape would work
  • Kosher salt

For The Meat Sauce

  • 1 lbs ground beef 93%
  • 1 medium size onion chopped (about 1 cup)
  • 1 tablespoon red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 2 teaspoons sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Garlic Yogurt Sauce

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt unsweetened plain (full fat or skim)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Butter Sauce

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes or more to taste (such as Aleppo Pepper or Urfa Chili pepper)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

As Garnish (optional)

  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 4 tablespoons dried mint or fresh parsley
  • 2 tablespoons sumac optional

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Season the pasta water generously with salt. It should taste like the ocean. Add the pasta and cook until it is al dente. Timing might differ depending on the brand you use, so be sure to check the instructions on the packaging. Mine took about 9-10 minutes. Save ½ cup of the cooking liquid*, drain the pasta, and set it aside.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the meat sauce. In a large skillet over medium heat, add 1 pound ground beef. Cook, breaking up the large chunks of meat with a wooden spoon for about 4-5 minutes or until it is no longer pink. As it cooks, it should release some of its oils.
  • Add the 1 medium-sized chopped onion, 1 tablespoon red pepper paste (or tomato paste), 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 2 teaspoons sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper. Cook, stirring regularly, until onions are softened and meat is fully cooked, for about 5-6 minutes. If needed, use the reserved pasta water to keep the sauteed meat moist. Set it aside.
  • To make the yogurt sauce, whisk together 1 cup of Greek yogurt, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, ½ teaspoon kosher salt in a bowl. Give it a taste and make sure it is seasoned to your liking. Set is aside.
  • Right before serving, melt 4 tablespoons butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Add 1 teaspoon sweet paprika, ¼ teaspoon (or more) red pepper flakes and ½ teaspoon kosher salt. Stir and cook until butter is fully melted and bubbly.
  • To assemble, place the now-cooked pasta in a bowl. Top it off with 4 tablespoons of the yogurt sauce and ⅔ cup of the cooked beef. Drizzle it with a tablespoon (or more) of the butter sauce. Repeat the same process for the rest of the bowls.
  • If preferred, garnish with a handful of cherry tomatoes, a tablespoon of dried mint (or fresh parsley) and a teaspoon of sumac, if using. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Reserved liquid: I always save some of the pasta water in case my pasta dries out while I am working on the sauce. In this recipe, you (most likely) will not need it since we work simultaneously, but still, it is a good backup in case you need it.
  • No olive oil for sauteing the meat: I stayed true to the TikTok viral recipe by not using oil to saute the beef as the meat releases its oils as you cook it. Initially, I was a bit skeptical, but she was right. As long as you keep stirring, the meat will eventually release some of its oils and brown nicely. Still, if you feel your meat can benefit from a bit of olive oil, feel free to use it.
  • Storage & Reheating: Store each component of the leftovers separately in airtight containers in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, reheat the pasta, meat, and butter sauce and assemble as described in the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 563kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 983mg | Potassium: 692mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1054IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/feed/ 29
Reverse Sear Filet Mignon https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-filet-mignon/ https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-filet-mignon/#respond Tue, 10 Dec 2024 17:54:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79318 If you’ve been a reader of our website for a while, you’ll know this isn’t the first time we’re raving…]]>

If you’ve been a reader of our website for a while, you’ll know this isn’t the first time we’re raving about the reverse searing method. This Reverse Seared Tenderloin steak recipe joins our collection of reverse-seared beef favorites, including Reverse Sear Whole Beef Tenderloin and Reverse Sear Prime Rib Roast.

We’re huge fans of this two-step, foolproof cooking technique (perfected by J. Kenji Lopez-Alt), where the meat is gently cooked at a low temperature first, then finished with a quick sear in a blazing hot cast-iron skillet or grill. The result? A perfectly crisp, caramelized exterior with a tender, juicy interior.

Reverse seared tenderloin steak in a cast iron skillet from the top view.

Recipe Ingredients

You’ll need 5 simple ingredients for this filet mignon reverse sear. Here’s a little more detail about each ingredient:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Filet Mignon: We used filet mignon steaks that were about 6 ounces each, 2 inches thick. You can use thicker steaks, but thickness and timing go hand-in-hand, so pay attention to cooking time if your steaks are thicker (see chart below).
  • Kosher salt: We used Diamond Crystal kosher salt, which has smaller flakes and promotes better coating around the steaks. Use half the amount if you use any other brand (such as Morton’s kosher salt).
  • Neutral oil: Use a high-heat vegetable oil, such as avocado oil, olive oil, or sunflower oil, or you can also use ghee.
  • Butter or ghee: Finishing the steaks with a butter baste is optional, but let’s be honest—it takes them to the next level. You can use butter, and ghee, or, if you have a little extra time, try making our Garlic Compound Butter for an added layer of deliciousness.
  • Fresh herbs: If you are basting, toss in a few fresh rosemary sprigs or fresh thyme for additional flavor.

How to Reverse Sear Filet Mignon?

Reverse searing is particularly suited for premium cuts like filet mignon because it highlights their tenderness. Because filet mignon does not have a lot of fat (or marbling) reverse searing filet mignon ensures even doneness throughout. Here’s how we do it:

Oven Method

Here is our step-by-step guide for reverse sear filet mignon in the oven:

A collage of images showing how to prepare filet mignon steaks for reverse searing in the oven.
  1. Prepare steaks: Remove the filet mignon from the fridge 30 minutes to 1 hour before cooking. Pat the entire surface dry with paper towels. Season all sides with salt.
  2. Prepare baking sheet: Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack over it. Place the filet mignon steaks on the wire rack.
  3. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 250 degrees F/121 C.
  4. Roast: If you have a probe thermometer (affliate link), stick the probe in one of the filet mignons and bake until the internal temperature of the steak reaches your desired doneness (see the chart below). For a rare steak (doneness at 120 degrees F), you’ll need to bake it for 35 minutes, and for a medium-rare steak (doneness at 125 degrees F), 40 minutes should be sufficient. If you do not have a probe thermometer, you can use a digital meat thermometer to check the temperature of your steak.
A collage of images showing how to sear filet mignon on a cast iron skillet.
  1. Rest: Remove the steaks from the oven and rest them uncovered on the counter (while the cast iron skillet is heating). 
  2. Preheat skillet: Heat a large cast iron skillet over high heat for 5-10 minutes. You will know it is hot enough when you splash a drop of water into the pan, and it sizzles, dances around, and evaporates rapidly.
  3. Sear: Add the oil to the hot pan and sear the filet steaks for 45 seconds on each side (including the sides) until a nice brown crust forms. There is no need to rest the steak when reverse searing, you can serve them right away or baste them following the instructions below.
  4. Baste: Optionally, in the last 30 seconds of searing, add ghee or butter and a few sprigs of fresh herbs into the skillet. Spoon the melted butter over the meat for 10 seconds.
  5. Serve: Transfer the steaks to a platter or slice them against the grain and pour over any excess juices from the pan before serving.

On the Grill

Here are the step-by-step instructions for reverse sear filet mignon on a gas grill:

  1. Season steaks: Season the filets and let them rest for an hour at room temperature before grilling.
  2. Preheat grill: Preheat the grill by turning one side to high heat and leaving the other off, creating two zones (hot zone and cool zone).
  3. Prepare grill: Clean the grates with a grill brush, then dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl with oil, grab the paper towel with tongs, and generously coat the grates.
  4. Reverse sear: Place the filets over the indirect heat (cool side), cover, and cook depending on your desired level of doneness. Check doneness with a meat thermometer after 15 minutes of grilling. It took about 20 minutes to reach 130 degrees F (medium rare) for us.
  5. Sear steaks: When done, move the filets to the hot side of the grill. Grill, uncovered, for 45 seconds on each side and 30 seconds on each edge. Since this side is very hot, you should be able to get nice grill marks as soon as the steak hits the grates.
  6. Rest: Remove the steaks and place them on a platter, uncovered. Let them rest for 5 minutes before serving.

Temperature and Timing for Reverse-Seared Steak

How long to reverse sear filet mignon depends on the thickness and your desired degree of doneness. For the most consistent results, it’s important to remember to remove the filet steak from the fridge at least 30 minutes, and up to 1 hour, before cooking.

Even more so, the best way to test for doneness is with a probe thermometer, which takes the guesswork away, but an instant-read digital thermometer is the next best thing. If using an instant-read thermometer, I recommend beginning to check the internal temperature after 20 minutes of cooking.

Here is a handy time chart when reverse searing filet mignon:

DonenessInternal Temperature (°F)Approximate Time 250 degrees F oven
Rare120 – 125°F25 – 30 minutes
Medium Rare130 – 135°F35 – 40 minutes
Medium140 – 145°F42 – 45 minutes
Medium Well150 – 155°F45 – 48 minutes
Well160°F50 minutes
Cooking time and temperature chart for reverse sear filet mignon.
Reverse seared steak sliced and served on a bed of mashed potatoes.

Expert Tips

Follow the recipe as written, and you’re likely to nail it on your first try. That said, here are a few extra tips to ensure your reverse sear filet mignon steak turns out absolutely perfect:

  • Local Butcher: It is no secret that filet mignon is an expensive cut of beef. We recommend seeking your local butcher for the best quality if you can. The good thing is you can even have them cut it based on your desired thickness.
  • No wire rack? The wire rack helps circulate the hot air in the oven while the meat cooks, but the recipe will still work without one.
  • Cast iron: The cast iron skillet must be screaming hot to seal that dreamy crust. Let it get hot (at least 10 minutes) before adding the oil.
  • No Need to Rest: Unlike a traditionally seared steak, which needs to rest before slicing to allow the juices to redistribute, this method eliminates that step. Thanks to the low-temperature cooking, the juices have already settled evenly before the final sear, so you can slice and serve immediately after searing. Still, if you want, you can let it sit for a few minutes.
  • Overnight Salting: During our recipe testing, we found some methods that recommend salting the steak the night before and leaving it uncovered on a lined baking sheet in the refrigerator. While you can certainly do this if you have the time, we tested both approaches and found the difference to be minimal.

FAQs

What Is The Reverse Sear Method?

Reverse searing is a foolproof method that starts by cooking the steak in a low-temperature oven until it reaches your desired doneness. Then, it’s quickly finished in a blazing hot skillet to develop a beautiful crust.

Why Should You Reverse Sear Your Steak?

Because this technique ensures the inside stays perfectly cooked at the desired temperature while the outside achieves that irresistible sear. When followed to a t, this method will deliver perfectly cooked filet mignon every time.

Can I Reverse Sear Other Cuts Of Steak?

Yes, you can. You can follow the reverse sear method for any other thick cut of meat, such as bone-in rib eye, Tomahawk, New York strip, T-bone, or porterhouse. However, please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of the meat and the time of cooking in the oven for the meat to reach your desired level of doneness.

Storage and Reheating

Filet mignon is a special cut of meat and we do not want this expensive cut going to waste. Here are my best storage and reheating instructions for reverse-seared steak:

  • Storage: Bring leftover tenderloin steaks to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat the steaks in a low oven (300°F) until warm, about 10 minutes.

What to Serve with This Recipe

Filet mignon reverse sear is an elegant recipe that deserves the spotlight on your plate. A few of my favorite ways to serve that highlight this gorgeous piece of meat even further are:

You Might Also Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this Filet Mignon Reverse Sear recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Reverse seared filet steak sliced and served on a bed of mashed potatoes.
Print

Reverse Sear Filet Mignon Recipe

Once you learn how to reverse sear filet mignon, you'll never go back to cooking steak any other way. This easy method is foolproof and works every time.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 2 minutes
Cooling time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 7 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 498kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 filet mignon steaks about 6 ounces each; 1 ½-2 inches thick
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1 tablespoon neutral oil such as ghee or vegetable oils like avocado oil
  • 1 tablespoon butter or ghee (optional)
  • 2 sprigs fresh herbs such as rosemary or thyme, (optional to finish)

Instructions

In The Oven:

  • Thirty minutes to an hour before you are ready to start cooking, remove the filet mignon from the fridge. Pat dry with paper towels to remove the excess moisture, and sprinkle them liberally on all sides.
  • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack* over it. Transfer the filet mignon steaks to the wire rack. Loosely cover it with stretch film.
  • While the meat is resting, preheat the oven to 250 degrees F/121 C.
  • Transfer the filet mignon to the oven and bake until it reaches your desired doneness*. For a rare steak ( doneness at 120 degrees F), you’ll need to cook for about 35 minutes; for a medium-rare steak (doneness at 125 degrees F), it would take about 40 minutes for the meat to reach the ideal temperature.
  • Remove the steaks and let rest, uncovered on the counter ((while the cast iron skillet is heating).
  • Meanwhile, heat a large cast iron skillet over high heat for 5-10 minutes or until very hot. You will know it is hot enough when you splash a drop of water into the pan, and it sizzles, dances around, and evaporates rapidly.
  • Add the oil to the hot pan and sear the steaks for 45 seconds on each side (including the sides of the steak) until a nice brown crust forms.
  • At this point, you can remove the steaks from the pan and slice it right away. There is no need to let reverse seared filet mignon rest.
  • Optionally, in the last few seconds of searing, you can add a tablespoon of ghee or butter and a few sprigs of fresh herbs into the skillet and spoon the melted oil (baste) over the meat for 10 seconds.
  • Transfer the steaks onto a platter, or alternatively, slice them against the grain and pour over any excess juices from the pan before serving.

Grilling on a gas grill:

  • Pat dry, season the filets, and let them rest for an hour before grilling.
  • Preheat your grill by turning one side to high heat and leaving the other side off, creating two zones—we’ll use the cooler side for the initial cooking (until it reaches our desired doneness) and the hot side for searing.
  • Clean the grates well, dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl with oil, and then generously coat the grates.
  • Place the filets on the cool side, cover and cook depending on your desired level of doneness. It is best to check doneness (using a meat thermometer) after 15 minutes of grilling. It took about 20 minutes to reach 130 degrees F (for a medium-rare steak).
  • When done, move the filets to the hot side of the grill and grill, uncovered, for 45 seconds on each side and 30 seconds on each edge.
  • Remove from the grill. Serve as a whole or slice against the grain before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves two filet mignon steaks, which is ideal for 2 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving. If serving a larger crowd, you can multiple the recipe following the same method.
  • Checking doneness*: Using a probe thermometer is the best way to check doneness. You can find the one we like and use in the equipment section above. If you have one, insert it in one of the steaks before placing them in the oven. This way, it can alert you as soon as your steak reaches the set temperature. If you do not have a probe thermometer, we recommend using an instant-read thermometer and checking it (depending on the desired temperature) after the 20-minute mark.
  • A note on Kosher Salt: We used Diamond Crystal Kosher salt, which has a finer texture and less salty taste than Morton salt. I recommend decreasing the salt to ½ teaspoon if using Morton. You can always finish the steaks with Maldon flakey sea salt if desired.
  • Black pepper: We did not find the steaks needed black pepper since it changes the flavor of the meat. It also tends to burn during the last few minutes of searing. However, if you want, you can season your reverse-seared filet steak with black pepper right before serving.
  • Charcoal Grill: If you’re using a charcoal grill, start by lighting the charcoal and letting it burn until it’s covered in white ash. Then, create two zones—an indirect heat side for cooking and a direct heat side for searing—by arranging the coals to one side of the grill, leaving the other side empty.
  • Storage and reheating: Store leftover steak (after it comes to room temperature) in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low heat (300 F) oven until warmed to your liking, about 10 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 498kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 119mg | Sodium: 1208mg | Potassium: 524mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 175IU | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/reverse-sear-filet-mignon/feed/ 0
Herb Roasted Turkey https://foolproofliving.com/herb-roasted-turkey/ https://foolproofliving.com/herb-roasted-turkey/#comments Sat, 09 Nov 2024 15:49:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78821 Ingredients Let’s break down the ingredients we need to make this herb turkey recipe, including the best herbs for turkey,…]]>
Aysegul

Growing up in Turkiye, the idea of roasting a massive turkey for Thanksgiving wasn’t part of our holiday traditions. I only learned the art of turkey-roasting much later, after moving to the U.S. over two decades ago. After countless holiday dinners and plenty of trial and error, I can confidently say I’ve mastered a truly foolproof method.

This Herb Roasted Turkey recipe is now my absolute go-to. I wrote the recipe so that even if you didn’t grow up cooking or eating turkey, you’ll end up with a perfectly roasted, juicy bird every time.

It follows a classic roasting technique but is elevated by a personal touch: a potent, homemade turkey rub that completely infuses the meat with incredible flavor.

And because the meal isn’t complete without the final essential ingredient, I’ve also included my rich, foolproof gravy recipe. Because let’s face it, what’s roasted turkey without a rich, delicious gravy on the side?

Roasted turkey with herbs and fruit around it from the top view.

Ingredients

Let’s break down the ingredients we need to make this herb turkey recipe, including the best herbs for turkey, whether using fresh or dried. Here’s what you’ll need:

The ingredients for the recipe including the best herbs for turkey from the top view with text on the image.
  • Whole Turkey: Most grocery stores sell frozen turkeys throughout the year. As we were testing this recipe, we used a 12-pound bird, but as long as it is somewhere between 12-16 pounds, you would be fine. The most important thing is to make sure that it is fully thawed before the seasoning and roasting process.
  • Unsalted butter: I like to use unsalted butter to control the salt, taking a little inspiration from our Turkey Compound Butter and Turkey Injection Recipe, but salted butter can be used. With that said, ½ cup olive oil can be substituted.
  • Sugar: A small amount of brown sugar (or coconut sugar for a refined sugar-free alternative) helps with browning and caramelization of the skin.
  • Herbs for turkey: For a classic and aromatic flavor, we recommend using a blend of rosemary, thyme, and sage, which we think are the best fresh herbs for turkey. These herbs infuse your bird with a fragrant, savory taste, perfect for the holidays. You can use fresh or dried herbs. If you are using fresh herbs, be sure to chop them finely. For dried herbs, substitute 1 teaspoon of dried herbs for every 1 tablespoon of fresh. And if you want a done-for-you dried herbs blend, use our Turkey Seasoning Rub.
  • Other seasonings and spices: Besides the herb blend, we added more flavor with paprika (sweet or smoked), garlic powder, onion powder, Kosher salt, and black pepper. We found garlic powder blends better with the butter, but freshly minced garlic cloves can be used instead.
  • Vegetables: Our aromatics include a classic mirepoix (onions, carrots, celery) that adds flavor to the turkey and the pan juices.
  • Lemon: A whole lemon is used to flavor the turkey itself. Adhering the lemon half to the turkey skin is a technique we learned to keep the turkey skin in place during roasting. Just like we did in our roasted turkey breasts recipe, using a half lemon in the neck of the bird will help the skin remain in place without shrinking.
  • Stock: Use Turkey Stock or Chicken Stock, whichever you have on hand.

How to Make Herb-Roasted Turkey

Now, the fun begins! This recipe for herb roasted turkey is all about using fresh ingredients and the right technique to build delicious layers of flavor in the oven. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to prepare turkey for roasting.
  1. Prep turkey: Remove the turkey from the fridge an hour beforehand. Place it on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper (for easy cleanup and to prevent cross-contamination). Pat turkey dry with paper towels on all sides.
  2. Preheat oven: Remove the top rack from the oven and place the other rack in the lowest position. Thirty minutes before roasting, preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. (232 C).
  3. Prepare the herbed butter: In a small bowl, combine the softened butter, brown sugar, fresh thyme leaves, fresh sage leaves, fresh rosemary, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, one tablespoon of Kosher salt, and 1 teaspoon of black pepper.
  4. Season turkey with herbs: Season the turkey’s cavity with the remaining Kosher salt and black pepper.
  5. Loosen the skin: Gently separate the top skin from the meat with your fingers. It is best to take your time as you are doing this while being careful not to tear the skin.
A person seasoning the skin of turkey with fresh herbed butter mixture.
  1. Add butter under skin: Evenly spread 2 tablespoons of the butter and herb mixture underneath the skin.
  2. Spread butter over the skin: Distribute the remaining herb butter evenly throughout the turkey, including drumsticks, thighs, and breasts.
  3. Add vegetables: Place half of the celery, carrots, onion, half lemon, and fresh sprigs of thyme, sage, and rosemary inside the bird’s cavity.
Herb butter turkey neck filled with half lemon.
  1. Finish with lemon: Place the other half of the lemon in the neck of the bird, round-cut, and side up. Pull the skin over and secure it with a toothpick.
  2. Prepare a large roasting pan: Add the remaining vegetables and pour one cup of stock into the bottom of the roasting pan.
A collage of photos showing the steps for preparing herb roasted turkey.
  1. Add turkey to V rack: Transfer the turkey to a V-rack fitted inside the roasting pan (please read notes for what to do if you do not have a V-rack).
  2. Position wings and drumsticks: Tuck wing tips under and tie the legs with butcher twine.
  3. Add temperature probe: Insert the probe in the thickest part of the breast without touching the bone. (Please read the notes about what to do if you do not own a meat thermometer probe.)
A collage of images showing how to roast Thanksgiving herbed turkey in the oven.
  1. Set temperature: Set the temperature to 155 degrees F (68 C) (more on this below).
  2. Roast turkey: Place the turkey in the oven and roast for 30 minutes. Then, reduce the oven temperature to 325 degrees F (163 C). Roast for 2 – 2 ½ hours, or until it reaches 155 degrees F. (see times, temp below)
  3. Baste turkey: Place the remaining two cups of stock in a small saucepan over low heat to keep it warm. Baste turkey every 30-45 minutes with a baster or large spoon.
  4. Tent with foil (if needed): If the turkey seems like it’s getting too brown during cooking, cover it with aluminum foil.
  5. Rest the turkey: When the turkey reaches temperature, remove it from the oven and tent it with foil for 30 minutes. Do not remove the temperature probe until you are ready to carve. It should reach the safe 165 degrees F (74 C) as it sits, which should happen in about 15-20 minutes. Transfer it to a cutting board and let it rest.
  6. Prepare gravy: While the turkey is resting, prepare your favorite gravy. The juices in the roasting pan will be a perfect addition to flavor! If you want a good recipe, follow our Turkey Gravy from Drippings.
  7. Serve: Garnish with colorful fruits (optional) or carve and serve to wow all your guests at the table!
A woman serving roasted herb turkey in a roasting pan from the front view.

How to Store and Reheat Leftovers?

We all love Thanksgiving turkey leftovers and we don’t want all our efforts going to waste. Here are my best storage and reheating instructions:

  • Storage: Bring the leftovers of your herb rubbed turkey to room temperature. Transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat the leftover turkey slices in a skillet over medium-low heat and splash in some chicken or turkey broth. Cover and gently simmer until warm, about 5-8 minutes. Alternatively, place them in a casserole dish along with a splash of broth and reheat them in a preheated low heat oven (300 degrees F) until warmed thoroughly.

Serving Suggestions

Need some menu inspiration to serve this perfectly roasted herbed turkey? You can pick from my collection of Thanksgiving Vegetable Sides or Holiday Potato Side Dishes or try one of the recipes I hand-picked below:

More Roasted Turkey Recipes

While the full roasted turkey is perfect for a big holiday feast, sometimes you’re hosting a smaller crowd or simply don’t want a ton of leftovers. The good news is, you don’t have to skip the turkey!

  • My Baked Turkey Wings recipe requires only 10 minutes of hands-on time. Cooking the wings low and slow in the oven makes all the difference, resulting in tender, fall-off-the-bone meat-perfect for a smaller gathering.
  • The Roasted Turkey Breast with Gravy is the perfect choice when you want holiday flavor without the hassle of carving a whole bird. It cooks quickly, stays incredibly juicy, and ensures maximum meat with minimum fuss. We include a quick pan gravy made with the drippings to complete the meal.
  • The Turkey Tenderloin recipe is much faster to cook, uses a simple marinade to lock in moisture, and is your perfect starting point if you’ve never cooked turkey before.
  • My Roasted Turkey Drumsticks recipe delivers tender, dark meat with crispy skin. And let’s face it, it is the best part of the whole bird.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Herb crusted turkey roast garnished with fruit and placed on a table.
Print

Herb Roasted Turkey Recipe

Seasoned with the best herbs for turkey, this Herb Roasted Turkey recipe is simple yet flavorful. Follow our step by step instructions for the best Thanksgiving turkey recipe anyone can make.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 2 hours
Resting time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 3 hours 45 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 620kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 Whole Turkey 12-16 pounds – fully thawed if frozen
  • 4 ounces unsalted butter at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon brown sugar or coconut sugar
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped plus two sprigs for cavity
  • 1 tablespoon fresh sage chopped plus one small sprig for cavity
  • 2 teaspoons fresh rosemary chopped plus one small sprig for cavity
  • 1 tablespoon paprika
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 2 tablespoons kosher salt divided
  • 2 teaspoons ground black pepper divided
  • 2 stalks celery roughly chopped
  • 2 carrots roughly chopped
  • 1 onion roughly chopped
  • 1 lemon cut in half
  • 3 cups chicken stock or turkey stock, more as needed – divided

Instructions

  • Remove the turkey from the fridge an hour before roasting. Place it on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and use a few sheets of paper towels to dry it as much as possible.
  • Thirty minutes before roasting, preheat your oven to 450 degrees F. (232 C). Remove the top rack from the oven and place the other rack in the lowest position.
  • To make the butter herb mixture, place softened butter, brown sugar, fresh thyme, fresh sage, fresh rosemary, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, one tablespoon of kosher salt, and 1 teaspoon of black pepper in a bowl. Mix well to combine. Set it aside.
  • Season the turkey’s cavity with the remaining one tablespoon of kosher salt and one teaspoon of ground black pepper.
  • Using your fingers, gently separate the breast meat from the skin, being careful not to tear the skin. Do not rush this process.
  • Using your fingers, evenly spread two tablespoons of the butter and herb mixture underneath the skin.
  • Distribute the remaining butter herb mixture evenly throughout the turkey, including drumsticks, thighs, and breasts.
  • Place half of the celery, carrots, onion, half lemon, and fresh sprigs of thyme, sage, and rosemary inside the bird’s cavity.
  • Place the other half of the lemon in the neck of the bird round cut side up, pull skin over, and secure with a toothpick. This will help the skin remain in place without shrinking.
  • Add the veggies and one cup of the stock at the bottom of the roasting pack.
  • Transfer the turkey (breast side up) to a V-rack fitted in a roasting pan (please read notes as to what to do if you do not have a V-rack).
  • Tuck the wings under and tie the drumsticks with kitchen twine.
  • If you have a temperature probe for continuous monitoring, insert the probe in the thickest part of the breast, making sure that it does not touch the bone. (Please read the notes about what to do if you do not own a meat thermometer probe.)
  • Set the probe temperature to 155 degrees F. (68 C).
  • Place the turkey in the preheated oven and roast for 30 minutes. Then reduce the heat to 325 degrees F (163 C) and roast for 2 to 2 ½ hours or until it reaches 155 degrees F. (see times, temp below)
  • While the turkey is roasting, place the remaining two cups of chicken (or turkey) stock in a small saucepan over low heat and keep it warm. Baste turkey every 30-45 minutes.
  • If the turkey seems like it’s getting overly browned during the cooking process, cover it with aluminum foil.
  • Once the internal temperature is achieved, remove from the oven and tent with foil for 30 minutes. Do not remove the temperature probe until you are ready to carve. It should reach the safe 165 degrees F (74 C) as it sits, which should happen in about 15-20 minutes. Transfer it to a cutting board and let it rest.
  • While the turkey is resting, prepare your favorite gravy. The juices in the roasting pan will be a perfect addition to flavor!
  • Carve and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: When serving turkey the general rule of thumb is to serve 1 1/2 pounds per person. Our turkey was just over 12 lbs which serves comfortably for 8 servings. However, this recipe would work for a turkey that is up to 16 pounds. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Remove from fridge: It’s important to remove the fully-thawed turkey from the refrigerator at least 1 hour before roasting. This not only helps to prevent overcooking the turkey, but it makes the butter much easier to spread.
  • Check doneness: Nowadays most turkeys come inserted with a pop up timer, which pops when it reaches a preset temperature. If you do not have thermometer you can rely on that, but a better way measure doneness is a Probe Thermometer (affiliate link). We think that it works best because it takes the guesswork out of knowing when the turkey reaches the optimal temperature. With that said, you can use an instant read thermometer (affiliate link). If you do so, do not stick the breast multiple times. Instead, follow the timing listed on the recipe and check once or twice measuring both the breast and thigh. Also, as you are measuring, avoid touching a bone.
  • Leave the pop up timer in: Even if you have a thermometer, leave the pop up timer in and remove it after the roasting process is complete.
  • Roasting vessel: A Roasting Rack (affiliate link) elevates the turkey, allowing hot air in the oven to circulate. If you don’t have a rack, you can lay the turkey on top of the vegetables, which helps lift them a bit for the air to circulate throughout the bird. It also helps infuse flavor into the vegetables and makes an excellent base for gravy.
  • Basting: Basting is a wonderful method to prevent the herb-crusted turkey roast from drying out. Do so every 30 – 45 minutes with a turkey baster or large spoon.
  • Roasting temperature: If you have ever roasted turkey, you know that it can go from perfectly moist to terribly dry very quickly. While the FDA recommends roasting turkey to 165 degrees F, we intentionally take it out when it reach 155 degrees F. because the roasting process continues even after you take your bird out of the oven. During our testing, we found that it should reach to the safe temperature (165 F.) within 20-30 minutes of resting while proving a super moist and juicy turkey.
  • Garnish for presentation: Although optional, feel free to get creative and impress your guests with a beautiful presentation. We finished the turkey with an assortment of in-season produce, like pomegranate, blood orange, black grapes, and plenty of those flavorful fresh herbs for roasted turkey.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature. Transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (330 F.) with a splash of chicken stock.

Nutrition

Calories: 620kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 73g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 265mg | Sodium: 2256mg | Potassium: 982mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 3609IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/herb-roasted-turkey/feed/ 4
Turkey Gravy with Drippings https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-gravy-with-drippings/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-gravy-with-drippings/#comments Sat, 09 Nov 2024 15:46:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78843 Ingredients All you need is 4 ingredients, along with the turkey drippings for gravy. Here are the ingredients we need…]]>
Homemade turkey gravy in a gravy boat with a spoon.

Ingredients

All you need is 4 ingredients, along with the turkey drippings for gravy. Here are the ingredients we need to make turkey gravy out of drippings:

Ingredients for quick turkey gravy from the top view with text on the photo.
  • Juices leftover (aka liquid gold): Use the drippings from the pan after roasting your turkey. Since we used aromatics in our herb-roasted turkey, these drippings are super flavorful. However, you can use the drippings from any turkey recipe by following this recipe.
  • Chicken or turkey stock: I recommend Homemade Chicken Stock (or store bought) instead of turkey stock since it is lighter and provides a cleaner flavor. However, both options would work.
  • Unsalted butter: I prefer to use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt in the gravy. However, you can use salted butter as well. Just be sure to taste it and salt it (if needed) after the gravy is thickened.
  • All-purpose flour: All-purpose flour is the thickening agent. If you want a gluten-free gravy, use a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend.
  • Turkey Gravy Seasoning: The best way to season turkey gravy is with fresh herbs, including fresh thyme and parsley. You can add additional herbs like fresh rosemary or fresh sage as well. If you prefer dried spices, use 1 teaspoon of dried herbs for every 1 tablespoon of fresh herbs.

How to Make Turkey Gravy From Drippings?

This gravy with turkey drippings recipe comes together in a few steps. I assure you, you’ll have a flavorful, smooth gravy that enhances your turkey and adds a delicious touch to everything on your Thanksgiving plate. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to make turkey gravy from drippings.
  1. Remove the veggies:  While the turkey rests, remove the large pieces of vegetables (onions, celery, carrots) in the roasting pan with a slotted spoon.
  2. Strain the juices: Strain the juices from the pan into a gravy separator or through a fine mesh strainer into a glass measuring cup. 
  3. Remove the fat: Using a spoon, remove the top fat layer as much as possible.  You should end up with about 1 to 2 cups of liquid. Add chicken stock to ensure you have 3 cups of liquid.
A collage of images showing how to make gravy from turkey juice.
  1. Make the roux: Set the now empty roasting pan over medium heat. Melt the butter, then add the flour, mixing with a wooden spoon until the flour is cooked and lightly browned, about 3-5 minutes.
  2. Add the turkey drippings: Slowly pour the separated juices into the flour mixture while constantly whisking. Bring to a boil and continue whisking constantly until thick, about 7-10 minutes. If needed, add more stock to adjust to your desired consistency.
  3. Add seasonings: Sprinkle in thyme, parsley, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. If you have one, place it in a gravy boat and serve with turkey on the side.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Leftovers?

Turkey pan gravy is one of those Thanksgiving must-haves you will want the day of, as well as to enjoy all your leftovers. Since we don’t want any of this delicious brown turkey gravy going to waste, here are my best storage, freezing, and reheating instructions:

  • Storage: Cool the gravy to room temperature. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: Make sure the gravy is at room temperature. Transfer to a freezer-safe container or freezer bag, label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month. Thaw overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan over medium heat, stirring regularly. Or, microwave in 30-second increments, stirring each time in between. Please note that when you reheat, it will start as a congealed texture. For lack of a better term, it will be a blub. But as it heats, the gravy will return to its original consistency. 

FAQs

How to make thick gravy?

Cook the gravy longer to evaporate excess water. You can thicken the sauce with a cornstarch slurry (by mixing an equal amount of cornstarch with an equal amount of liquid) if it’s not thickening.

Can you make turkey gravy without drippings?

Yes, you can. Start with a good chicken broth bouillon, but start with a small amount, as it can be salty. Add fresh herbs and use butter to make it silky smooth. Let it simmer to thicken.

What to Serve with Turkey Gravy?

If you are making this Thanksgiving gravy recipe with drippings for the holidays, here are my favorite serving suggestions:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Easy Homemade Turkey Gravy with Drippings recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Turkey gravy made with pan drippings in a gravy boat.
Print

Turkey Gravy with Pan Drippings Recipe

Learn how to make rich, creamy Turkey Gravy with drippings! This easy homemade recipe is the perfect finishing touch to complement your Thanksgiving turkey.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 3 cups
Calories 261kcal

Ingredients

  • Juices leftover from the roasting pan
  • Chicken or turkey stock as needed to yield 3 cups gravy
  • ¼ cup unsalted butter
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 2 teaspoons fresh thyme chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped
  • Kosher salt to taste
  • Ground black pepper to taste

Instructions

  • Using a slotted spoon, remove the large pieces of cooked vegetables and strain the juices from the pan into a gravy separator or glass measuring cup.
  • Let it sit for 10 minutes for the fat to separate*. Remove as much fat on top as you can with a spoon.
  • You will likely end up with 1 to 2 cups of drippings. Use chicken stock to bring it to 3 cups. Set it aside.
  • Melt the butter in the now-empty roasting pan over medium heat. Add the flour and whisk constantly until the flour is cooked and lightly browned, about 3-5 minutes.
  • Gradually pour the liquid into the roasting pan and boil while constantly whisking until thick, about 7-10 minutes. Add more stock to adjust to your desired consistency.
  • Stir in the thyme, parsley, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
  • Serve with turkey on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 ½ to 3 cups of gravy, ideal for eight servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and approximate based on the amount of drippings.
  • Removing the fat on top: A fat separator will provide the best results. However, if you do not have a fat separator, strain the drippings into a glass measuring cup, then place it in the fridge for 10 minutes. The fat will slowly rise to the top. At this point, you can use a turkey baster to suck the fat off or slowly skim the fat off with a spoon. This step is crucial to prevent your gravy from separating.
  • Be sure to brown the flour: It’s important to cook the flour to diminish the raw flour taste. The flour is ready when it is golden brown and smells like popcorn.
  • Constantly whisk to avoid lumps: Whisking constantly when adding the liquid is key to a smooth gravy. If lumps do form, no worries. Strain it through a fine mesh strainer or use an immersion blender to make it silky.
  • Cooking pan matters: The cooking time will vary depending on the pan. If you use the same roasting pan you used to cook the turkey, the gravy will thicken faster since the water evaporates faster. If you use a saucepan, it will take longer. Bring the mixture to a gentle simmer, stirring often, until it thickens to your desired consistency.
  • Adjust for consistency: Cooking the gravy longer will reduce and thicken it. Remember gravy thickens as it cools, so make it a little thinner than you think if it will be sitting for a while. If you went too far and the turkey sauce is too thick, add more stock to thin it to your desired consistency.

Nutrition

Calories: 261kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 48mg | Sodium: 343mg | Potassium: 281mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 656IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-gravy-with-drippings/feed/ 2
Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/#comments Mon, 28 Oct 2024 16:10:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78662 Our current cultural craze is all about getting more protein. Knowing what a protein powerhouse cottage cheese is, it got…]]>

Our current cultural craze is all about getting more protein. Knowing what a protein powerhouse cottage cheese is, it got me wondering: Can you put cottage cheese in mac and cheese? Great news: Not only can you add protein to mac and cheese with cottage cheese, the actual cottage cheese cheese sauce comes together quickly in a blender and is ready in less than 30 minutes.

While the main instructions you’ll find below are for a stovetop version of this recipe, this cottage cheese macaroni and cheese can also be prepped ahead of time to be baked later in a casserole dish if you’d like to add it to your holiday menu. Not to worry—the baked version of this recipe is also included below.

Cottage cheese macaroni and cheese in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients and Substitutions

This homemade mac and cheese with cottage cheese has an impressive depth of flavor for a dish with just a few simple ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Pasta: For our version of macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese, we selected the fun & familiar macaroni noodle that we all grew up eating. However, all pasta shapes are welcome as long as they’ll hold the sauce. And, if you have specific dietary needs/preferences, feel free to substitute gluten-free pasta (GF), chickpea pasta, or whole wheat pasta—they all adapt well to this recipe.
  • Cottage cheese: When adding cottage cheese to mac and cheese, I recommend that you go with the full 4% milkfat version. You can use a lower-fat version, but if you are like us and prefer a creamier dish, go for the 4% version.
  • Milk: The same goes here with the milk—I recommend choosing full fat regular milk for a luscious finished pasta. However, an equal amount of alternative dairy-free milk, like almond milk, can also be used.
  • Cheddar cheese: We used sharp cheddar cheese when testing this recipe. If you’d prefer a milder cheese flavor for your cottage mac and cheese, feel free to swap in gouda cheese in its place. 
  • Parmesan cheese: Take it from me—shredded parmesan cheese is essential to this cottage cheese mac and cheese recipe. Without it, the mac and cheese sauce with cottage cheese tasted a bit bland. The parmesan gives it the umami punch that will keep everyone reaching for second helpings.
  • Cornstarch: This helps to thicken your cottage cheese sauce. If you prefer arrowroot powder, you can swap that in instead.
  • Garlic: Garlic powder blends into the sauce evenly, which is what we used in our recipe trials. If you prefer the more intense flavor of fresh or roasted garlic, just be sure to mince or press it well before adding it to your blender. While it is not traditional, ½ teaspoon of onion powder can also be added if preferred.
  • Spices: Our cottage cheese mac and cheese recipe gets its traditional flavor with these three classic mac and cheese spices—paprika, nutmeg, and a touch of cayenne pepper. 
  • Veggies (optional): If you’d like to elevate your cottage cheese mac and cheese, feel free to mix in some cooked vegetables once the dish is complete, such as steamed broccoli, peas, or a handful of fresh baby spinach leaves.

How to Make Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese?

This mac and cheese recipe with cottage cheese comes together in three simple steps: First, you cook the pasta. Then, you make your high-protein cheese sauce with cottage cheese. Finally, you mix the two components together. And, voilà! It’s just that easy in under 30 minutes. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

Steps showing how to cook pasta and make the cottage cheese mac and cheese sauce in a blender.
  1. Cook the pasta: Fill a medium saucepan with water and season generously with salt. Bring it to a boil and add the pasta to the boiling water. Cook until your noodles are al dente, following the timing on the package’s directions.
  2. Drain the water: First, reserve ½ cup of the pasta water, then drain the pasta into a strainer and set aside. Return the pot to the stove (no need to wash it.)
  3. Blend your cheese mixture: Next, blend cottage cheese, milk, cheddar cheese, Parmesan cheese, cornstarch, garlic powder, paprika, black pepper, nutmeg, and cayenne pepper in a high-speed blender or a food processor until smooth for about 30 to 40 seconds.
A collage of images showing how to cook mac n cheese with cottage cheese sauce.
  1. Cook your cottage cheese cheese sauce: Pour the blended sauce into the pot over medium-low heat. Using a wooden spoon, stir your sauce until it is slightly thickened, for about 1 to 1 ½  minutes. You will know that it’s ready when it coats the back of a spoon. Taste for seasoning, adding more flavor if you desire it. 
  2. Combine your pasta and sauce: Add the drained pasta back into the pot with the cottage cheese cheese sauce and stir to combine. Cook until the pasta is thoroughly warmed and coated with the cottage cheese mixture. Serve while still warm.

How to Bake it?

If you’re looking for a baked mac and cheese with cottage cheese recipe, then look no further. The baked version is a crowd-pleasing side dish for Thanksgiving, Christmas, or really any holiday potluck that you’re invited to. It can easily be adjusted as a baked version, and I’m going to show you how:

  1. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 375 degrees F/190 degrees C. 
  2. Prepare your baking dish: Brush an 8X8 baking dish with 1 TBSP of butter.
A collage of images showing how to make baked mac and cheese cottage cheese.
  1. Pour in your cooked cottage cheese mac n cheese: Put the cooked pasta and sauce mixture into the buttered 8×8 baking dish. Add an extra 3 tablespoons of pasta water into the mix.
  2. Top your pasta: Sprinkle the top of the cottage cheese macaroni with an additional ½ cup of parmesan cheese first, then ½ cup of panko breadcrumbs (or regular bread crumbs).
  3. Bake: Put the baking dish in the oven for 15 minutes, or until the breadcrumbs have toasted. 
  4. Brown the top, if preferred: If you’d like the top of your baked pasta to have a crunchier texture, switch the oven to broil and leave in the oven for an additional two minutes.
Mac n cheese with cottage cheese in the pot being stirred by a person from the top view.

How To Make Ahead and Store and Reheat Leftovers?

  • Make Ahead: If you’re looking to make this recipe in advance of an event or holiday dinner, we recommend that you prepare the baked version that you see above. Just pour the pasta mixture into your baked dish, allow it to cool to room temperature, and then cover and refrigerate. On the day of, remove the covering and add the toppings before baking. 
  • Storage: If you made the stovetop version of this mac & cheese recipe with cottage cheese, you can store any leftovers in an airtight container and keep it in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
  • Reheating: To reheat macaroni and cottage cheese leftovers, place the pasta in a saucepan and warm it on low heat on the stovetop. If the sauce is too thick, you may have to add some water to get it back to its creamy texture.

What to Serve This Recipe?

Our mac n cheese recipe with cottage cheese is adaptable and satisfying as either a side dish or vegetarian main dish: 

Expert Tips

Thankfully, the process of making this high protein cottage cheese macaroni and cheese recipe is a straightforward one without much room for error. However, there are a few things that I’d like to mention for the best results:

  • Don’t leave the cottage cheese mac and cheese sauce unattended while it’s cooking: The sauce comes together quickly—truly, within minutes. Once your pasta is cooked and you start to warm your sauce, it will thicken and be ready for the macaroni to be stirred in shortly.
  • Use full-fat dairy products: For the ultimate creamy, dreamy, high-protein mac n cheese, you’ll need to use full-fat regular milk and 4% cottage cheese. Trust me on this one. Skim just doesn’t cut it in this recipe. 
  • Cooking the cottage cheese cheese sauce in the saucepan before adding the pasta is very important: Because the cottage cheese mixture contains cornstarch as a thickening agent, it needs a few minutes to cook so that it blends in, thickens, and becomes “invisible,” flavor-wise. You don’t want to be able to taste the cornstarch!
  • Use water to adjust your sauce’s texture: If your blended cottage cheese mac and cheese is too thick, adding a small bit of the reserved pasta water to the mix will thin it out. 
  • Mind your salt: Because we are adding salt to our pasta water and using salty cheeses such as sharp cheddar and parmesan, you will notice that we did not include any additional salt in the recipe for our homemade protein mac and cheese. Please adjust and add salt according to your own taste.
  • Broiling browns the top of the baked macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese: We noticed in our testing of the baked version of this recipe that simply baking didn’t brown the breadcrumbs sufficiently. If you’d like that crunchy, browned top, be sure to broil it for 1 minute once it has finished baking.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Cottage cheese macaroni and cheese in a pot from the top view.
Print

Cottage Cheese Macaroni and Cheese Recipe

This Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese Recipe is our guilt-free alternative to traditional mac and cheese that is lower in calories, higher in protein, and doesn’t sacrifice the signature creamy deliciousness of the original dish. The cottage cheese sauce comes together easily in a blender and the whole dish is ready in less than 30 minutes. This recipe can be made on the stovetop, or as a baked version by following a few additional instructions below.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 461kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces pasta elbow macaroni
  • 1 cup cottage cheese 4% milk fat
  • ½ cup regular whole milk
  • 4 ounces sharp cheddar cheese shredded
  • 2 ounces Parmesan cheese shredded
  • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • pinch nutmeg
  • pinch cayenne pepper optional

Instructions

  • Bring a pot of generously salted water to a boil in a medium-sized pot. Add the pasta and cook according to package directions until al dente. Reserve ½ cup of the pasta water, then drain the pasta. Return the pot to the stove (no need to wash it.)
  • Meanwhile, place the cottage cheese, milk, cheddar cheese, Parmesan cheese, cornstarch, garlic powder, paprika, black pepper, nutmeg, and cayenne pepper in a blender or a food processor. Blend until smooth for about 30 to 40 seconds.
  • Pour the cottage cheese mixture into the pot and turn the heat to medium-low. Using a wooden spoon, stir until slightly thickened, for about 1 to 1 ½ minutes. It should be ready if it coats the back of a spoon. The sauce thickens very fast so do not leave it unattended. If it thickens too much you can thin it out using the reserved pasta water.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more salt and pepper, if needed.
  • Add the now-drained pasta into the pot and stir to combine. Cook until pasta is thoroughly warmed and coated with the cottage cheese mixture.
  • Serve while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 cups of macaroni and cottage cheese ideal for 4 generous servings. The nutritional values are per serving.
  • Baked Version: To make baked macaroni and cheese with cottage cheese, you will need 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, 1/2 cup of panko breadcrumbs, and 1/2 cup (additional) shredded parmesan cheese. Below are the step by step instructions:
    • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F/190 degrees C.
    • Brush a 8X8 baking dish with butter.
    • Follow the recipe as written. Instead of serving, incorporate three tablespoons of the pasta water into the mac and cheese mixture.
    • Place the cottage cheese mac and cheese into the buttered dish.
    • Sprinkle with parmesan cheese and then panko breadcrumbs. Bake for 15 minutes or until breadcrumbs have toasted.
  • Make Ahead: If you’re planning to make this recipe in advance of an event or holiday dinner, we recommend that you prepare the baked version. Simply pour the pasta mixture into your baked dish, bring it to room temperature, and then cover and refrigerate. On the day of, remove the covering and add the toppings before baking as written above.
  • Storage and reheating instructions for the stovetop version: Any leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. You can reheat in a sauce pan with a splash of water over medium-low heat until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 461kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 593mg | Potassium: 271mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 580IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 462mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-mac-and-cheese/feed/ 2
Roasted Turkey Breast With Gravy https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-turkey-breast-with-gravy/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-turkey-breast-with-gravy/#comments Sat, 12 Oct 2024 15:11:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78380 Ingredients You’ll Need You’ll need three sets of ingredients to make this baked turkey breast recipe: The seasoning, the vegetables…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

For years, my husband and I have celebrated Thanksgiving with close friends who, like us, don’t have big families. I used to make a whole turkey, but over time, I realized that roasting just the breast makes so much more sense for a smaller table.

If I am being honest, I am always most excited about the gravy. I think we can all agree that it is what ties the whole meal together: the turkey, the mashed potatoes, even the stuffing. So, when I began developing this recipe, I wanted it to be simple, dependable, and complete.

Here is what makes this recipe special for me:

  • Great for intimate gatherings: Ideal when you want the comfort of a Thanksgiving feast without the work of roasting a whole turkey.
  • It is quicker than roasting a whole turkey: It cooks faster, it is easier to carve, and with the right butter and herbs, it turns out just as juicy and satisfying.
  • No need to brine: The herb butter keeps the turkey juicy without any advance prep.
  • Everything in one pan: While the turkey rests, you can make the gravy right in the same roasting pan.
  • Tested for reliability: After four rounds of testing, I found the ideal timing, seasoning, and temperature for consistent results.
  • Beginner-friendly: I wrote the instructions in a clear, step-by-step way so even if you have never roasted a turkey breast before, you can do it with confidence.
Roasted turkey breast served with gravy, mashed potatoes, green beans and cranberry sauce on a plate.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need three sets of ingredients to make this baked turkey breast recipe: The seasoning, the vegetables and turkey breast, and the gravy ingredients.

You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below; however, I’ve included some notes from my recipe testing:

For The Compound Butter

To season my turkey breast, I opted for my trusty Thanksgiving turkey compound butter, not only because it flavors the turkey beautifully but also makes the drippings delicious for gravy later on.

Now, you can certainly use the whole recipe (with one stick of butter), but I thought that the halved recipe was just the right amount for a 6-pound turkey breast.

Seasoning ingredients for roasted turkey breast.

Unsalted butter: I prefer unsalted butter to control the salt, but you can use salted butter. I would reduce the salt to ¼ teaspoon.

Fresh herbs (or dried herbs): Hearty herbs like fresh rosemary, thyme, and sage make it feel like fall and hold up well during cooking. If you want to use dried herbs, reduce the quantity to ½ teaspoon per herb.

Garlic: One fresh garlic clove gives us a delicious bite, but ¼ teaspoon of garlic powder would be a great substitute.

Lemon zest: Do not skip this, as the zest from a fresh lemon balances and brightens all the earthy flavors of the herbs.

Seasonings: Stick to a simple seasoning of Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper. It is optional, but if preferred, a teaspoon of paprika can be added to the mixture.

Need more seasoning ideals? Try my Turkey Dry Rub or Turkey Injection Method. Both options give the meat and the gravy a rich, perfectly seasoned finish.

For The Turkey Breast and Vegetables

You do not need much when roasting a turkey breast, just a few basic staples:

Ingredients for the recipe.

Turkey breast: I use a bone-in, skin-on-whole turkey breast, also known as a hotel-style turkey breast. A whole turkey breast consists of two breasts joined at the breastbone. If you prefer a half breast (only one breast), ask the butcher to cut the whole breast in half.

Aromatics: A classic mirepoix blend of onions, carrots, and celery, along with garlic, provides the base. Even more so, the vegetables elevate the turkey breast, creating enough circulation so you don’t need to use a V rack (or a wire rack) if you don’t have one.

Lemon: One of my secrets in this recipe is to tuck a whole lemon into the cavity and secure it with a toothpick. It adds a subtle citrus note and helps keep the skin around the neck in place during roasting.

Liquid: Dry white wine, such as a Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Gris, keeps the turkey breast meat moist while cooking. If you prefer an alcohol-free recipe, use Chicken Stock, Vegetable Stock, or turkey stock instead.

For The Gravy

My favorite part of this recipe might just be the homemade gravy, made with the drippings from the roasted turkey. Here is what you will need:

Ingredients to make the gravy from the top view.

Unsalted butter: Again, I prefer unsalted butter to control the salt. Salted butter can also be used, but you’d have to adjust the salt accordingly.

Flour: Regular all-purpose flour thickens the gravy to the right consistency. If you are following a gluten-free diet, use 1:1 gluten free flour such as Cup 4Cup.

Drippings from roasting pan: A small amount of the pan drippings adds depth and meaty flavor.

Stock: Use chicken stock, turkey stock, or vegetable stock, depending on what you have on hand. I recommend using homemade stock if possible, but store-bought works perfectly fine. If you go that route, choose a low-sodium option so you can better control the seasoning.

Seasonings: I recommend tasting the gravy near the end of cooking before adding any more seasoning, as the pan drippings may already be salty. After tasting, add more salt and black pepper if needed.

How to Roast a Turkey Breast in the Oven?

This turkey breast with gravy recipe has become my go-to for whenever I host a smaller holiday gathering. And the best part, you ask? It is ready in just a couple of hours.

Here are the step-by-step instructions:

Step 1 – Preheat oven: Preheat your oven to 450°F (232°C). I recommend removing the turkey breast from the fridge about 30-60 minutes before cooking so it comes closer to room temperature. I’ve found that this small step helps it cook more evenly.

A collage of images showing how to prepare turkey breast (and seasoning) for roasting.

Step 2 – Prepare the herbed butter: In a small bowl, mix the butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, salt, and pepper.

Pro tip: The important thing when making the butter mixture is to have your butter at room temperature, as it not only mixes easily but also spreads better on the meat.

Step 3 – Pat dry: Pat dry the turkey breast and the cavity with paper towels as much as you can. Do not skip this step. Otherwise, it will be hard to spread the butter on top.

Step 4 – Loosen turkey skin: To butter your turkey, gently separate the skin from the meat with your fingers, being careful not to tear it. I find it easier to start at the bottom and slowly work my way up the breast.

Person showing how to spread butter over and under the skin of turkey breast.

Step 5 – Add butter under skin: Lift the skin and place 3 tablespoons of the softened herb butter (about 1 ½ tablespoons on each turkey breast) underneath the skin on both sides.

Step 6 – Spread butter over the skin: Spread the remaining herb butter on the top and sides of the turkey skin, then massage it underneath the skin into an even layer.

Pro Tip: As you distribute the butter under the skin, be as gentle as possible and go slow. You don’t want to tear the turkey skin as it will expose too much flesh while cooking.

Step 7 – Finish with lemon: Place the whole lemon in the neck cavity and secure it with a toothpick (this holds the lemon in place and prevents the skin around the neck from shrinking).

Step 8 – Add vegetables: Spread the onions, carrots, celery, and garlic in one even layer in a large roasting pan or a casserole dish. Pour in the wine (or stock).

A collage of images showing how to roast turkey breast in the oven.

Step 9 – Position turkey: Place the turkey breast on top of the vegetables, skin side up, ensuring it is elevated, so hot air can circulate underneath and keep the meat tender without needing a wire rack. Feel free to rearrange the veggies a bit to help the turkey sit upright.

Step 10 – Insert meat thermometer: If using a temperature probe, place it in the thickest part of the breast, being careful not to touch the bone. If you hit the bone, pull back by approximately ½ inch. Set it to alert at 155°F (68°C). (If you do not have a meat thermometer for the oven, skip this step.)

Step 11 – Reduce oven temperature: Once the turkey goes in, immediately lower the oven temperature to 325°F (163°C).

This was a turning point in my recipe testing, because lowering the oven temperature from very hot to medium helped the skin crisp beautifully while cooking the turkey gently, without drying it out.

Step 12 – Roast the turkey: Cook for 1 ½ -2 hours, or until the internal temperature reaches 155°F (68°C).  If you do not have a temperature probe, check the turkey with an instant-read thermometer.

Step 13 – Rest the turkey: Remove the turkey breast from the oven. Place it on a cutting board and lightly tent with aluminum foil. Do not remove the temperature probe. Let it rest for 30 minutes. Trust me when I say this is when the magic happens. All of the juices redistribute, and the carryover heat brings the internal temperature up to a perfect 165°F (74°C).

Baked turkey breast fresh out of the oven.

How to Make Gravy from Turkey Breast?

While the turkey breast is resting, I make the homemade gravy. I always say this is where all those golden drippings come to life. It’s rich, silky, and full of that roasted flavor no one should ever waste.

Here’s how I do it step by step:

Step 1 – Remove vegetables: Remove the vegetables from the roasting pan and set them aside.

Step 2 – Separate fat from drippings: Pour the pan drippings into a large glass measuring cup or a fat separator. Let it sit for about 10-15 minutes so the fat rises to the top. I use a small spoon to scoop off the excess fat. At that point, you will be left with all the rich liquid. You’ll need about 3 tablespoons of drippings for the gravy.

Step 3 – Preheat the pan or saucepan: If you use an oven-safe roasting pan, you can use it to make the gravy. Place the roasting pan directly on the stove over medium-high heat. Otherwise, a medium saucepan would work just as well.

A collage of images showing how to make gravy for turkey breast.

Step 4 – Make the roux: Add the butter to the pan and let it melt for a minute. Then whisk in the flour, stirring constantly until it turns a light golden color, about 6-8 minutes. It will start to darken quickly, so keep an eye on the heat and lower the heat if needed.

Pro Tip: The 6-8 minutes of stirring time might seem like a lot, but it is important for the final product’s taste. If you don’t cook the flour long enough, your gravy will have a noticeable floury taste that won’t go away no matter how long you cook it.

Step 5 – Add pan drippings and stock: Add the reserved turkey drippings and stir, scraping up any “brown bits” from the bottom of the pan (that’s where all the flavor is). Gradually add the stock in a steady stream.

Bring to a boil, then lower the heat to a simmer and cook, stirring frequently, until thickened to your desired consistency, about 10-15 minutes. 

Step 6 – Add seasonings (if needed): I always recommend tasting the gravy before adding any extra salt, as those drippings can already be quite flavorful. Adjust with salt and black pepper only if needed. 

Gravy Troubleshooting

You can learn more about this in my Turkey Gravy with Drippings post, but if you feel like your gravy isn’t quite right, here are a few ways to fix it:

  • Too thick? Whisk in a splash (in 1-2 tablespoon increments) of warm stock until it loosens up.
  • Too thin? Let it simmer a few more minutes, keeping a close eye on it and stirring often; it will naturally thicken as it reduces.
  • Too salty? Stir in a bit of unsalted stock or a splash of heavy cream to balance the flavor.
Images showing gravy strained and in a gravy boat.

Step 7 – Strain: Place a fine mesh strainer over your serving bowl. Pour the gravy through the strainer. Use the back of a spoon or spatula to press out any residual “lumps.” Transfer it to a gravy bowl.

Step 8 – Carve and serve: Use a sharp knife to slice the turkey breast into thin slices. Arrange them on a platter, and serve with warm gravy on the side, or, as I like to do, drizzle a little over the top.

Person serving sliced roasted turkey breast with gravy on the side.

Timetable for Cooking Turkey Breast in the Oven

If you are wondering how long to cook a turkey breast in the oven, I have a foolproof timetable for you!

However, there are a few essential factors to keep in mind. The cooking time will depend on your turkey’s weight.

Additionally, the turkey must be thoroughly thawed. I always remove it from the fridge 30 to 60 minutes before cooking because the herbed butter spreads more easily, and the turkey is not cold.

Following these guidelines, a bone-in turkey breast will take approximately 22-24 minutes per pound at 325°F (163°C).

The internal temperature goal is 155°F (68°C) at the thickest part of the breast, as the carry-over heat will help raise it to the safe 165°F (74°C) as it rests.

Turkey Breast WeightBone-In Turkey Breast Roast Time (325°F (163°C))
2-3 pounds45 – 75 minutes
4-6 pounds90 – 150 minutes
7-8 pounds154 – 200 minutes

How to Store and Reheat?

We all love Thanksgiving leftovers, and I don’t want any of that gorgeous baked turkey breast and gravy to go to waste. Also, while roasting a turkey breast is typically associated with Thanksgiving, having some fresh turkey on hand is a great way to stock your fridge with some lean protein for lunch or dinner.

Here are my best storage and reheating instructions:

Storage: To store any leftovers, let the turkey breast and gravy cool to room temperature, then store them in separate airtight containers in the fridge for up to 3 days.
To Reheat:

  • Turkey: I like to reheat turkey slices in a skillet with a splash of chicken or turkey broth, then cover and let them simmer gently over medium-low heat for 5-8 minutes. This will keep the meat moist and tender every time.
  • Gravy: Reheat in a small pot over medium heat until bubbly and warm, about 5 minutes. Your gravy will naturally thicken as it cools, so if it feels too thick, you can whisk in a little warm stock (in 2-tablespoon increments, depending on the amount you are reheating ) until it reaches a smooth texture.

Expert Tips From My Recipe Testing

Like with any turkey recipe, a few small details can make the difference between a dry turkey and one that’s juicy, tender, and golden brown. Below, I’m sharing what I’ve learned through years and years to make the best roasted turkey breast with gravy:

Thaw your turkey: If your turkey breast is frozen, thaw it safely and completely in the fridge. Place the turkey (while it is still in its packaging) on a baking sheet (to catch any juices) and thaw in the fridge. It takes about 24 hours to thaw every 4 pounds of turkey, so your turkey breast can take anywhere from 36 – 48 hours, depending on the weight. Once thawed, the turkey should be cooked within 1-2 days.

Remove the turkey from the fridge before cooking: I always let the turkey sit out for 30-60 minutes before roasting. I know it might sound like a small step, but it makes a big difference in helping the turkey cook evenly and stay juicy.

Make the compound butter in advance: The herbed butter can be made 3-5 days ahead. Having it ready cuts down the prep time in half.

Thickness of the turkey gravy: The gravy will thicken as it sits and even more so when stored in the fridge. You can thin it out with more stock (¼ cup at a time), just make sure to check the seasoning after each addition.

Equipment you need: While you can bake the turkey breast in a large casserole dish, I had even greater success with a roasting pan (affiliate link) because you can easily roast the turkey and then make the gravy on the stove while it rests. You can prop the turkey up on the included V-Rack, but the veggies are enough to prop it straight if you do not have one.

Use a meat thermometer: During my recipe testing, I used Digital Meat Thermometer with a probe. I especially liked that it lets you set a temperature alarm, so there is no guessing or opening and closing the oven.
That said, you can use a regular instant-read thermometer. I would recommend checking at the 1 ½-hour mark, then every 10 minutes thereafter until the turkey reaches 155°F (68°C) at the thickest part of the breast.

Don’t skip resting: Allowing the turkey to rest for at least 30 minutes helps redistribute the juices, resulting in a juicy, succulent turkey.

Also, if you use a digital probe thermometer, do not remove it until after the turkey has rested. You don’t want all the good juices to escape! Letting the turkey rest with the thermometer still in place prevents any openings that could cause those flavorful juices to leak out, ensuring every bite is moist and delicious.

Roasted turkey breast with gravy served on a plate with mashed potatoes and green beans.

FAQs

Should turkey breast be covered or uncovered when roasting?

I did not think covering the turkey breast was necessary as we roasted it in a low-heat (325 degrees F) oven. The gentle heat cooks the turkey evenly and promotes a crispy, golden-brown skin; however, if you feel the breasts are browning too quickly (i.e., your oven is hotter than the recommended temperature), you can use a piece of foil to cover them.

How do you keep turkey breast moist when reheating?

I have found the best way to reheat turkey is to do so in a large skillet over medium heat with a splash of stock, either chicken broth, vegetable, or turkey. The added liquid helps retain moisture and flavor.

How much turkey breast do I need per person?

About ¾ lb of turkey breast per person is ideal. If you want leftovers, however, I would increase that to 1 pound of turkey breast per person. A 6-pound turkey breast will feed 6 people with some leftovers.

Can I make the gravy ahead of time?

Since this recipe relies on the drippings from the roasted turkey breast, it is best to make it right before serving. The good news is that it takes no more than 10 minutes from start to finish.

What to Serve with Turkey Breast Roast

Nothing beats the simplicity of this simple turkey breast recipe. It is easy and show-stopping at the same time. If you are serving a small gathering, I keep it simple with Maple Cranberry Sauce.

But when I am making this roasted turkey breast for Thanksgiving or an elegant fall gathering, I make sure to have all the classic vegetable side dishes. My favorites include:

More Turkey Recipes You Might Like

This roasted turkey breast is one of my go-to recipes when I want something elegant but approachable. That said, I have a few other tested and trusted turkey recipes and techniques that I make every year, whether it’s for Thanksgiving or to bring to a smaller holiday party:

  • Whenever I crave a turkey recipe that cooks as quickly as chicken, I turn to my Roasted Turkey Loin recipe. I use my turkey tenderloin marinade, which doubles as a delicious sauce for drizzling later on.
  • If you’re feeling a little intimidated by cooking a whole bird, my Herb Roasted Turkey recipe will change that. It’s a beginner-friendly Thanksgiving classic that turns out tender, juicy, and golden brown every single time.
  • For something cozy and a little more casual, try my Roasted Turkey Legs. They’re prefectly crispy on the outside on juicy on the inside.
  • When I’m craving something simple yet satisfying, I make my Baked Turkey Wings. With just 10 minutes of prep, you’ll have tender and crisp wings that pair well with any vegetable sides.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post contains affiliate links. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases.

Turkey breast roast served with gravy, potatoes, and green beans on a plate.
Print

Roasted Turkey Breast with Gravy Recipe

Here's an easy recipe for Roasted Turkey Breast served with gravy on the side! Whether you are serving a smaller crowd for Thanksgiving or need a simple turkey dinner, this foolproof recipe will guide you through the process of making the turkey breast roast.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 2 hours
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 3 hours
Servings 6 servings
Calories 658kcal

Ingredients

For The Turkey Breast:

  • 6 pound turkey breast skin and bone-in
  • ½ cup herb compound butter recipe below
  • 1 large onion sliced into thick rounds
  • 1 large carrot sliced in large chunks
  • 2 celery ribs sliced in large pieces
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled and rough chop
  • 1 lemon
  • ½ cup dry white wine such as sauvignon blanc or pinot gris (or chicken stock for an alcohol-free option)

For The Herb Compound Butter:

  • 2 oz unsalted butter ½ stick – at room temperature
  • 1 ½ teaspoons fresh rosemary finely minced or ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 ½ teaspoons fresh thyme finely minced or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon fresh sage finely minced or ¼ teaspoon dried sage
  • 1 clove fresh garlic finely minced or pressed
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the turkey gravy:

  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 4 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 3 tablespoons drippings from roasting pan fat separated * it can be a little bit more or less
  • 3 cups chicken stock or turkey or vegetable stock
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Instructions

For The Turkey Breast:

  • Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F/232 degrees C.
  • Remove the turkey breast from the fridge 30 minutes or an hour before you are ready to roast it.
  • Meanwhile, make the herbed butter by mixing together butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, salt and pepper in a bowl until well combined.
  • Pat dry the turkey breast with paper towels on all sides.
  • Using your fingers, gently separate the top skin from the meat, being careful not to tear the skin.
  • Place three tablespoons of the softened herb butter underneath the skin on both sides.
  • Spread the remaining herb butter on the top and sides of the turkey skin.
  • Place one half of the lemon in the neck cavity rounded side up and secure the turkey skin with a toothpick*.
  • Spread onions, carrots, celery, and garlic in an even layer in a large roasting pan or a casserole dish. Pour in the wine (or chicken stock.)
  • Place the turkey breast on top of the vegetables. You may have to arrange the vegetables to “prop” the breast to stay upright.
  • If using a temperature probe, place it in the thickest part of the breast, being careful not to touch the bone. If you hit the bone, pull back by approximately ½ inch. Set it to alarm at 155 F/ 68 C. (see notes if you do not have a thermometer probe).
  • Place in the oven and immediately reduce the heat to 325 F/ 163 C.
  • Roast for 1 ½ -2 hours or until the internal temperature reaches 155 F/ 68 C.
  • Remove the turkey breast from the oven, place it on a cutting board, and lightly tent with foil. Do not remove the temperature probe if using it. Let it rest for 30 minutes. As it sits, it should reach 165 F/74 C with the help of the residual heat.

To Make The Turkey Gravy:

  • Remove the vegetables from the roasting pan.
  • Pour the pan drippings into a glass measuring cup. Set aside so that the fat can separate, for about 10-15 minutes. Skim the fat off and discard. You should end up with three tablespoons of drippings. If you have more, you can discard the rest.
  • Place the roasting pan on top of the stove at medium-high heat. If you use an oven- and stove-safe roasting pan, you can use it to make the gravy. Otherwise, you can use a medium saucepan.
  • Melt the butter and then sprinkle the flour. Cook, stirring constantly with a whisk, until the flour is lightly browned, about 6-8 minutes. Keep a close eye on it and adjust the heat accordingly to prevent burning.
  • Add the drippings and stir, scraping up any “brown bits” from the bottom of the roasting pan.
  • Add the stock and bring to a boil, then lower the heat to a simmer and cook, stirring frequently, for 10-15 minutes until thickened to your desired consistency.
  • Taste the gravy and season with salt and pepper, if desired.
  • You can serve it as it is or if you prefer a smooth and silky gravy, you can strain it. To do that, place a mesh strainer over your serving bowl. Pour the now-cooked gravy into the strainer, and use the back of a spoon or spatula to press “lumps.”

To Serve:

  • Remove the temperature prope.
  • Carve your turkey breast and transfer the slices onto a serving platter.
  • Serve with gravy on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 6 people (¾ lbs turkey breast) per person comfortably. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the calories coming from the gravy as well.
  • High and low temperature: We intentionally started with a high temperature to crisp up the skin and turned it down to a lower temperature to cook the breasts in a gentle heat. Also, because of the mild heat, we did not think that covering it with foil was necessary.
  • Lemon hack: Placing a whole lemon in the cavity helps prevent the turkey skin in the neck area from sinking, but it is an optional step.
  • Check doneness: A meat thermometer is the best tool for the most accurate results when cooking turkey. If you don’t have a probe thermometer, we recommend using a digital thermometer and following the time and temperature guide provided in the blog post above. Based on the weight of your turkey breast, it’s best to check doneness closer to the end of the cooking time.
  • Residual heat: We intentionally cooked the turkey to 155 degrees F, as the residual heat continued to cook it during the resting process. During our recipe testing, it took about 20 minutes of resting time for the roasted turkey breast to reach 165 degrees F.
  • Storage & serving leftovers: Leftover turkey breast and gravy can be refrigerated in airtight containers for up to 3 days. A foolproof method to reheat turkey is to slice the meat and place it in a pan or skillet. Add chicken or turkey broth, cover, and simmer over medium-low heat for 5-8 minutes. While the turkey breast is reheating, you can warm the leftover gravy in a small saucepan. 
  • Quantity of the gravy: The quantity will depend on the pan you use. When we used the roasting pan, there was a lot of evaporation because of the wide opening, resulting in 1 ½ cups of gravy. If you use a medium saucepan, you should end up with approximately 2 cups of sauce.

Nutrition

Calories: 658kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 102g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 279mg | Sodium: 1312mg | Potassium: 1348mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 2181IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-turkey-breast-with-gravy/feed/ 4
CAVA Bowl Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/cava-bowl-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/cava-bowl-recipe/#comments Fri, 20 Sep 2024 13:04:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78063 I still remember the first time I walked into a CAVA. I felt like someone had stolen my idea. While…]]>

I still remember the first time I walked into a CAVA. I felt like someone had stolen my idea. While I’ve never had dreams of opening a restaurant, if I were to start one, it would look a lot like what the folks at CAVA are doing. Bowls made with real-deal Mediterranean ingredients, full of the things I grew up eating.

So, you can imagine my surprise when I saw their menu filled with all the things I love. It felt familiar in the best way. And since I’m not in the restaurant business, the next best thing was to bring it home and create my own homemade CAVA bowl.

This copycat CAVA bowl is now a regular in our meal prep rotation. I’m showing you exactly how I make it at home and how you can adapt it based on what you have on hand. Whether you make everything from scratch or pick up a few shortcuts from the store, it’s still going to taste fresh, delicious, and satisfying.

And the best part? You’ll have enough for several meals, all for less than the price of dinner for two at CAVA.

Homemade CAVA bowl from the top view.

What is a CAVA bowl?

CAVA is a restaurant chain that features Mediterranean meals mainly served in bowls. Some people call it “the Mediterranean version of Chipotle”. A CAVA bowl is made by assembling various ingredients, starting with a base like grains or greens, adding protein, and finishing with a variety of toppings and dressings. 

As someone who grew up in Turkey and now shares Mediterranean recipes for a living, I instantly recognized the ingredients and format as something I’ve known all my life. This kind of meal, which is built around grains, greens, legumes, vegetables, and sauces, is how we naturally eat back home. It’s balanced, colorful, and meant to be customized.

Customers can mix and match the ingredients to their liking or choose from various premade bowls on the restaurant’s menu.

CAVA Bowl Ingredients

If you’ve ever been to CAVA, you know you can either choose one of the bowls featured on their menu or create your own by selecting ingredients from four categories: the base, protein, toppings, and dressing.

As you can imagine, with so many options, the combinations are endless. I made sure to include a full list of ingredients in the recipe card below.

In this section, I am sharing my ingredient notes from testing the recipe in my kitchen to make my version of the copycat CAVA bowl recipe. This way, you can make it your own and customize it with whatever you have on hand.

The Base:

You can combine rice and salad greens or choose one as the base of your bowl. I prefer to use both because I like the variety.

The base ingredients for the recipe on a white marble backdrop.

Brown Rice: In classic CAVA fashion, I use brown rice for my copycat recipe. I love the nutty flavors of brown Jasmine rice, which you can cook on the stove or in a pressure cooker. However, brown basmati rice would also work.

I know that this is a pretty controversial subject to many, but I prefer rinsing my rice until it runs clear before cooking. Still, feel free to cook in any way you like.

You can cook the rice in water or use chicken stock or vegetable broth to make it even more flavorful.

Salad greens: Use spring mix, chopped romaine lettuce, or baby spinach. Or, if you want to follow in the footsteps of CAVA, mix them all up and make your own “SuperGreens” mix. 

The Protein:

I chose their fan favorite, Honey Harissa Chicken, for the protein in my CAVA copycat bowl recipe. You’ll need:

CAVA Harissa chicken ingredients from the top view.

Chicken thighs or breasts: Using thighs or breasts is a personal choice here. I usually go for skinless, boneless chicken thighs for extra juiciness, but for a leaner option, chicken breasts would also work.

Harissa paste: This bold and spicy North African condiment is the star of this CAVA harissa chicken bowls recipe, providing its signature smoky heat and bold flavors. You can make harissa from scratch, use a shortcut by making it with harissa powder, or simply buy it from the store. Trader Joe’s and Mina (affiliate link) are two nationwide brands that I recommend. 

Fresh Garlic: I prefer fresh garlic for its rich flavors, but you can use garlic powder in a pinch. In my recipe testing, fresh garlic gave the marinade a deeper, more authentic Mediterranean taste that reminded me of meals I grew up with in Turkey.

Lemon juice: A small amount of freshly squeezed lemon juice adds a bright, tangy note to balance the spiciness of the harissa. In a pinch, you can use bottled juice, but the flavors coming from freshly squeezed juice are more vibrant.

Honey: Adding honey does not make the recipe sweeter. Instead, it helps balance the heat coming from harissa and adds a unique layer of flavor. I tested this recipe with and without honey, and even a small amount made the chicken taste more well-rounded.

The Toppings:

You can add as many toppings as you like! These toppings remind me of the way we eat in the Mediterranean, where every meal is built around small bites of vegetables, sauces, and spreads. It’s about variety as much as it is about taste.

Below are the ones I used in my CAVA bowl at home, but feel free to customize with as many or as few as you’d prefer. 

Toppings for the recipe from the top view.

The Dressing Ingredients:

While CAVA offers several different dressing options, I always choose their hot harissa vinaigrette because it is truly delicious. Growing up with Mediterranean food, I learned that a good dressing can tie an entire meal together, and this one is no exception.

You can adjust the spiciness based on your taste buds. You’ll need:

Ingredients for Cava harissa dressing.
  • Extra virgin olive oil: A mild-flavored extra virgin olive oil works best here. I have been loving Garcia Del Cruise (affiliate link) for its smooth finish without any bitterness.
  • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed juice is the best here, as bottled juice will not deliver the fresh, tart flavors this dressing needs.
  • Harissa powder: You can make your own harissa seasoning or buy it from the store. I recommend Whole Foods’ Harissa seasoning (affiliate link), which is mildly spicy and perfectly balanced.
  • Honey or maple syrup: This helps balance the heat from the harissa. I tested both options, and while honey adds a subtle depth, maple syrup is a great vegan swap.
  • Fresh garlic: I almost always use freshly minced garlic when I make my salad dressing, and this one is no exception. That being said, if you are after a milder garlic taste, feel free use garlic powder instead.
  • Kosher salt and black pepper

How To Make CAVA Bowls At Home?

Making your own CAVA bowl at home is straightforward. I’ve tested this recipe many times, and the key is prepping the components ahead so assembly feels effortless. It usually comes down to four parts: prepping the chicken, cooking the rice, whipping up the dressing, and adding your favorite toppings.

Below is a step-by-step breakdown of how I do it:

To Make the Harissa Honey Chicken:

A collage of images showing how to make CAVA harissa honey chicken.
  1. Prep the chicken: Pat the chicken dry and season with salt and pepper. I like to season it beforehand so the chicken is properly seasoned before it is marinated. While the marinade will also “season” it, I find that salt and pepper first helps the flavor soak in more evenly and ensures the chicken is well seasoned all the way through once it’s cooked.
  2. Make the marinade: Into a large bowl (one that will accommodate all of the chicken) add harissa, minced garlic, lemon juice, and honey. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
  3. Marinate: Add the chicken and give it a big toss to ensure all of the chicken thighs are coated with the marinade. Cover with stretch film (or a lid) and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors soak in. 
    You can also use a sealable plastic bag, which makes cleanup easier. The key is making sure the chicken is fully coated in the harissa mixture. From testing this recipe multiple times, I’ve found that when the chicken is well covered, the marinade seeps into every nook and cranny, giving you the juiciest, most flavorful result.
  4. Bake: Preheat your oven to 400°F and bake the marinated chicken for 13-15 minutes, or until it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F. Let it rest, then cut it into small pieces.
    I always use a digital meat thermometer to check doneness, since oven temperatures can vary and this ensures the chicken is cooked safely without drying out. After baking, let the chicken rest for about 5 minutes so the juices redistribute. This small step makes a noticeable difference in keeping the chicken tender and juicy before cutting it into small pieces.

To Cook the Rice

A collage of images showing how to cook rice for CAVA bowls.
  1. Rinse: This is a personal preference, but I’d like to start with washing my rice.
  2. Boil the liquid: Over medium-high heat, bring water or stock, olive oil, and salt to a boil in a small saucepan.
  3. Simmer the rice: Add the rinsed rice, cover, and reduce the heat to low. Simmer for 30 minutes or until all the water is absorbed. Do your best not to open the lid too often to trap in all the moisture.
  4. Rest and fluff: After the liquid is absorbed, let the rice rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Sprinkle with black pepper and garnish with parsley if preferred.

To Make the Dressing

A collage of images showing how to make CAVA harissa dressing.
  1. Prep the ingredients: Add olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce, honey, garlic, salt, and black pepper in a mason jar. You can use a small bowl and a whisk as well, but I find that the mason jar is easier when it comes to making salad dressings.
  2. Shake: Put the lid on and shake until emulsified. If you are planning ahead, you can prep the dressing a few days in advance and keep it in the fridge.

To Assemble the Bowls

Photos showing how to assemble CAVA chicken bowls.
  1. Build your base: Place ½ cup brown rice and a handful of salad greens in a bowl. I like using both grains and greens for variety and balance, much like the traditional Mediterranean meals I grew up with, which were always built around multiple components to make them satisfying and well-rounded.
  2. Add the chicken: Pile on the cubed CAVA harissa chicken. I tested both bite-sized cubes and shredded chicken, and the cubes hold the marinade flavor better while keeping the texture juicy.
  3. Add the condiments: Using a spoon or a small cookie scoop – affiliate link (just like they do at CAVA), add a scoop of hummus, tzatziki, and Crazy feta. The scoop ensures a clean presentation and consistent portions, something I picked up after visiting CAVA multiple times and recreating the process at home. Then, continue adding chopped cucumbers, tomatoes, corn, and pickled onions for crunch and brightness.
  4. Drizzle with vinaigrette: Finish with a light drizzle of harissa vinaigrette. I recommend starting with a smaller amount, tasting, and then adding more if needed. The heat can build, and this way, you can adjust to your preference.
  5. Serve: Treat yourself to a delicious Mediterranean-inspired meal. Oh and if you have the time, be sure to make a batch of my copycat recipe for CAVA’s Cucumber Mint Lime drink. I promise you there is no better pairing than these two.

How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

The best way to make a CAVA bowl at home is to prepare some components in advance, saving time and making it an excellent meal-prep option. This way, the bowls can be assembled in minutes once the chicken is cooked. The good news is the leftovers store well, too. Here’s how I do it:

  • To Make ahead:
    • Marinade the chicken and store it in the fridge a day before.
    • Cook the rice ahead of time and refrigerate it for up to 3 days. To keep it from drying out when reheating, I like to sprinkle a little water over it before microwaving or gently reheating on the stovetop.
    • The CAVA harissa vinaigrette can be made up to a week in advance and stored in the fridge. Give it a good shake before using it.
    • Prep all the toppings (cucumbers, tomatoes, salad greens, hummus, tzatziki, etc.) and place them in separate containers to maintain their freshness for up to 2 days in advance.
    • Wash and chop vegetables, and store them in separate containers. I keep delicate greens like spinach or romaine wrapped in a paper towel inside an airtight container to help absorb excess moisture and keep them crisp.
    • On the day you plan to serve, bake the chicken, warm the rice, and assemble the bowl according to the recipe.
  • To store leftovers:
    • Store the cooked components (chicken, rice, and toppings) in separate airtight containers in the refrigerator to keep their texture and flavors fresh.
    • Warm the chicken and rice right before you assemble your CAVA bowls. You can warm them in the microwave or a low-heat (300°F – 149 °C) oven until warmed thoroughly, 4-5 minutes.
    • Assemble the bowls just before serving to avoid soggy greens.
    • Leftover bowls can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 days, but keep the vinaigrette on the side and drizzle just before serving.

Recipe Variations

The good news is that you can take this CAVA copycat recipe as a starting point and turn it into your own masterpiece. Below are a few recipe variations to help you make it your own:

Person drizzling CAVA chicken recipe with harissa vinaigrette.

Expert Tips

While this CAVA recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things I’d like to mention to save time and help you get the best results on your first try:

  • Store-bought condiments: If you are short on time, there is nothing wrong with buying some condiments from the grocery store. I’ve tested this with both homemade and store-bought versions, and nowadays many brands carry excellent hummus, tzatziki, and even pickled onions. Trader Joe’s and Whole Foods are two places I often shop for these shortcuts.
  • Prewashed salad greens: Most restaurants use triple-washed (and dried) salad greens. You can, too. It is a big-time saver. I do the same at home when I know I’ll be assembling several bowls during the week. It makes meal prep much easier and keeps the greens crisp.
  • Buffet Style: This is a fantastic recipe for serving a crowd. I like to serve it buffet style by placing all the ingredients in bowls and having my guests assemble their own Cava bowls. It reminds me of the mezze-style meals I grew up with in Turkey, where everyone customizes their plate from a variety of small dishes.
  • Serve warm or cold: While you can warm up the leftovers in the oven (or microwave), I usually eat them cold or at room temperature. Since the chicken is fully cooked, serving it without warming up is perfectly fine.

FAQs

Can you keep CAVA bowl in the fridge?

Yes, you can. For best results, store all the components in separate air-tight containers in the fridge. They should store well for up to 3 days, but it is best to keep any dressings separately and use them right before serving to avoid sogginess. 

What type of rice does CAVA use?

CAVA used to use a brand called Rightrice, but that brand is no longer available. Nowadays, they offer brown rice or saffron Basmati rice. 

What is in Emma Chamberlain’s CAVA bowl?

Emma Chamberlain’s CAVA bowl has a base of super greens and it is topped with falafel, pickled onions, Kalamata olives, cubed avocado, crumbled feta, spicy hummus, and schug (Yemeni green chili and herb sauce).

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
A bowl of food from the top view pita bread on the side.
Print

Copycat CAVA Bowl Recipe

If you are a fan of Mediterranean flavors, this copycat CAVA bowl recipe is for you. Healthy, filling, and satisfying, these bowls feature rice, salad greens, spicy harissa honey chicken, and toppings like tzatziki, hummus, feta cheese, tomatoes, cucumbers, and more. Drizzled with harissa vinaigrette, they are a restaurant-quality meal you can make in your own kitchen.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 40 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Marinating Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 786kcal

Ingredients

For the Harissa Honey Chicken:

  • 2 pounds chicken thighs skinless and boneless
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup harissa
  • 5 cloves garlic finely minced or grated
  • 1/2 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ¼ cup honey

For The Rice

  • 2 cups water or vegetable or chicken stock
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 cup brown jasmine rice thoroughly rinsed – or basmati rice
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon parsley chopped, optional

For The Harissa Vinaigrette:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or white wine vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons harissa or 1 tablespoon harissa powder
  • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup for a vegan option
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Toppings

  • 6 cups salad greens washed and spin dried
  • 1 cup cucumbers diced
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes halved
  • ½ cup Pickled red onions
  • 1 cup hummus
  • ½ cup Crazy Feta or crumbled feta cheese
  • 1 cup Kalamata olives
  • 1 cup Tzatziki
  • 1 cup corn grilled or canned (and drained)
  • Pita bread chips optional

Instructions

  • To Make The Harissa Honey Chicken: Pat dry chicken thighs with paper towels and season them with salt and pepper on both sides. Set aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the harissa sauce, garlic, lemon zest, lemon juice, and honey until fully combined.
  • Add the chicken thighs and toss to ensure that they are fully coated with the harissa mixture. Cover and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes. If preferred, you can do this a day in advance.
  • Place an oven rack in the center of the oven. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees Celsius. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Arrange the chicken thighs evenly on top. Brush any leftover sauce over the chicken.
  • Bake for 13- 15 minutes or until the internal temperature of a chicken thigh is 165 degrees F when a meat thermometer is inserted into the thickest part of it.
  • Cover with foil and rest for 10 minutes. Cut the chicken into bite-sized cubes and set aside.
  • To Cook The Rice: Place your cooking liquid, olive oil, and salt in a medium-sized saucepan over high heat. Cover and bring it to a boil.
  • Add the rice and bring it to a boil. As soon as it reaches a boil, put the lid on and turn the heat down to low. Simmer for 30 minutes without peaking.
  • At the end of 30 minutes of simmering, open the lid and check whether the liquid has been fully absorbed. If it hasn’t, continue to simmer at 5-minute increments until no liquid is left.
  • Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  • When ready to serve, gently fluff it with a fork. Season with black pepper and garnish with chopped parsley.
  • For the harissa vinaigrette: In a mason jar, combine the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa, honey, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper.
  • Cover and shake until emulsified, about 30 seconds. Adjust seasoning to your desired taste. Keep it in the refrigerator until ready to use, and shake well before using.
  • To assemble the Cava Bowls: Divide cooked rice among 6 bowls, followed by a handful of spring mix, harissa chicken, and your preferred toppings.
  • Using a cookie scoop or a serving spoon, top each bowl with a dollop of tzatziki, hummus, and Crazy Feta (or crumbled feta). Add tomatoes, cucumbers, pickled red onions, olives, and corn.
  • Drizzle each bowl lightly with harissa vinaigrette and serve with pita bread or pita chips on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 servings, but it could be a little more or less based on the toppings you use. The nutritional values below are per serving, but keep in mind that they are estimates and can change based on the toppings you use.
  • Prep and cook time: The abovementioned timing does not include the time needed to prepare the toppings. I would recommend checking the individual recipe and plan accordingly based on the toppings you plan to use in your grain bowl.
  • Save on time: I highly recommend prepping the toppings and marinating the chicken a day in advance to make it a quick and easy meal.
  • Storage: When storing leftovers, it is best to place them in individual containers and store them in the fridge. Most components of this DIY CAVA bowl recipe should store well for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 786kcal | Carbohydrates: 65g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 47g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 133mg | Sodium: 2161mg | Potassium: 807mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 23g | Vitamin A: 1238IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 127mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cava-bowl-recipe/feed/ 8
Harissa Honey Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-honey-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-honey-chicken/#comments Fri, 20 Sep 2024 13:02:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78045 If you’ve never tried using harissa to marinate chicken, this is your sign to start! A harissa marinade brings a…]]>

If you’ve never tried using harissa to marinate chicken, this is your sign to start! A harissa marinade brings a perfect balance of spice, heat, smoke, and sweetness, while the oils tenderize the chicken, and the spices infuse it with rich, aromatic flavor. If you are a fan of harissa chicken recipes, be sure to check out our simple grilled harissa chicken as well.

Freshly cooked harissa paste and chicken on a plate from the top view.

What is Harissa Honey Chicken?

Harissa honey chicken is an easy dinner in which chicken is marinated in a mix of harissa, garlic, lemon juice, and honey. The star ingredient of this recipe, harissa, is a North African chili paste made from hot chili peppers, garlic, olive oil, lemon juice and various spices, such as cumin, coriander, and caraway seeds.

A short 30 minutes of marinating turns an otherwise bland chicken into a smoky, spicy, and subtly sweet, truly unique dish. Honey harissa chicken can be baked in the oven or grilled, with each cooking method resulting in deeply caramelized, juicy meat. The dish has been famous recently thanks to the popular restaurant chain CAVA.

Ingredients You’ll Need:

This harissa honey chicken recipe requires a handful of simple ingredients, all of which you can get from your local grocery store:

Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image.
  • Chicken: We love extra rich and juicy boneless, skinless chicken thighs, but skinless and boneless chicken breasts can also be used as a leaner option.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper allows the harissa and honey to shine.
  • Harissa: You have a few options when it comes to Harissa. You can make your own Harissa Sauce at home, which allows you to control the heat level and ingredients. If you are short on time, you can use Harissa Powder and make Harissa Paste from Powder. Or, you can save yourself a few steps in the kitchen and purchase a jar from grocery stores. Different brands have varying spice levels, ranging from moderately spicy to intensely hot, so I always like to taste the harissa before making the marinade. My favorite store-bought brand of harissa is Mina Harissa (affiliate link) (also available at Whole Foods), which is mild. There is also New York Shuk Harissa (affiliate link), which is a little more potent, or Trader Joe’s Tunisian Harissa, which is the least expensive.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: While we think fresh garlic delivers the best flavors, you can use garlic powder (¼ teaspoon of garlic powder per 1 clove of garlic) if you prefer a milder garlic flavor. 
  • Fresh lemon juice & lemon zest: We used freshly squeezed lemon juice in the recipe, but apple cider vinegar can be substituted. 
  • Honey: Honey and harissa are a delicious combination because the sweetness of the honey balances and enriches the spicy chilis in the harissa without making it sweet. We felt that ¼ cup honey was a good amount for two pounds of chicken but feel free to add more or less depending on how spicy you want the chicken.

How to Make Harissa Honey Chicken?

This honey harissa chicken recipe is easy to make with just a few basic steps.
Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to prep harissa chicken marinade.
  1. Season chicken: Pat the chicken thighs dry with a paper towel. Season both sides with Kosher salt and black pepper.
  2. Make the harissa chicken marinade: In a large bowl, combine harissa, garlic, lemon juice, and honey.
  3. Marinate the chicken: Add the seasoned chicken thighs to the harissa marinade. Toss to coat them fully. Cover and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes, or a couple of hours.
  4. Preheat the oven: Place an oven rack in the center. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees Celsius. Line a large sheet pan with parchment paper.
Hot honey harissa chicken on a sheet pan before and after it is cooked.
  1. Arrange chicken thighs: Place the chicken on the baking sheet, spacing them apart evenly. Brush any leftover sauce on top of the chicken thighs.
  2. Bake: Bake for 13-15 minutes, or until the internal temperature of the thickest chicken thigh reaches 165 degrees F when inserted with a meat thermometer.
  3. Rest, then serve: Tent the chicken with aluminum foil and let it rest for 10 minutes. Serve the chicken thighs whole, or transfer them to a cutting board and cut (or shred) as desired. Drizzle the remaining delicious honey harissa sauce left on the sheet tray over the chicken before serving.

How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

Harissa baked chicken is an easy recipe to make ahead of time and store for later. Here are my storage tips so none of this bold and delicious chicken goes to waste:

  • Make Ahead: You can marinate the chicken a day in advance. Simply make the marinade, add the chicken, cover it tightly, and refrigerate until ready to bake.
  • Storage: Cool the chicken to room temperature. Then, store the leftover chicken in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: Depending on your preference, you can freeze harissa honey chicken cooked or uncooked.
    • Freezing cooked chicken: Allow the cooked chicken to come to room temperature. Transfer to a freezer-safe container and freeze for up to 3 months.
    • Freezing raw chicken: To get ahead for meal prep, place the raw chicken thighs and harissa marinade in a freezer-safe plastic storage bag, portioning as desired. Push out as much air as possible, seal, label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Whether cooked or uncooked, thaw the frozen chicken overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: If reheating cooked chicken, reheat in a low oven (~300 degrees F) until warm, about 10 minutes. If cooking the raw chicken, remove it from the fridge 30 minutes beforehand, then bake as instructed in the recipe below.

What to Serve with Harissa Chicken?

Chicken with harissa and honey is a highly versatile meat that pairs beautifully with various dishes. The good news is that you can prepare a side dish while the chicken cooks and have dinner in no time. Here are a few ideas to help you with your menu:

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

  • Pay attention to spice level: We recommend making your harissa from scratch, as this allows you to control the spice level, especially if you are serving kids or are spice-sensitive. If you use a storebought brand to save time, taste it before making the marinade and adjust the quantity as necessary.
  • Broil for 2 minutes: While we didn’t find it necessary, if preferred, you can broil the chicken on high during the last 1-2 minutes of cooking to intensify those char-grilled flavors. However, keep a close eye on it to prevent it from burning.
  • Don’t forget the juices: After the chicken is done cooking, there will be plenty of juice on the sheet pan. For best results, baste the chicken with these juices as soon as it comes out of the oven and drizzle the remaining juices over the chicken when serving.

FAQs

Is harissa honey chicken spicy?

This depends on the spice of the harissa. If you are using a homemade harissa, then you can adjust the spice level. If you use a store-bought harissa, taste it before making the marinade and adjust the spice level to your liking.

Can I use tomato paste instead of harissa?

We do not recommend it. Tomato paste is not a one-to-one substitution for harissa because one is tomato-based while the other has a base of hot chili peppers. If you do need a substitute for harissa, I’d recommend another chili-based sauce, such as sriracha, sambal oelek, or chipotle in adobo sauce. Keep in mind that this will alter the taste and flavor profile.


If you make your own Harissa Honey Chicken following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Honey harissa chicken on a plate served with tzatziki on the side.
Print

Harissa Honey Chicken Recipe

Harissa honey chicken makes a delicious savory, spicy and sweet weeknight meal inspired by CAVA’s harissa chicken. It’s a quick and easy chicken dinner that comes together with only 6 basic ingredients.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 404kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds boneless skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
  • ½ cup harissa homemade or storebought
  • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil *please see note
  • 5 cloves garlic finely minced or grated
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ¼ cup honey

Instructions

  • Pat the chicken thighs dry with paper towels and season them with salt and pepper on both sides. Set aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the harissa sauce, garlic, lemon juice, and honey until fully combined.
  • Add the chicken thighs and toss to coat them fully with the sauce. Cover and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes.
  • Place an oven rack in the center of the oven. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees Celsius. Line the sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Arrange the chicken thighs on the baking sheet. Brush any leftover sauce on top of the chicken thighs.
  • Bake for 13-15 minutes, or until the internal temperature of the chicken thigh, when a probe is inserted into the thickest part, reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Cover with foil and let it rest for 10 minutes. Drizzle the remaining liquid on the baking sheet over the chicken before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: Depending on the size of your chicken, this recipe makes 5-6 harissa chicken thighs ideal for serving 4-6 people. I listed the serving as 4, but the portions would be large. The nutritional values below are per serving (of 4 servings)
  • Olive oil: If you are making your own harissa you will not need this, but if you are buying it from the store, I recommend adding 1 tablespoon of extra virgin olive oil into the harissa chicken marinade. The storebought harissa tends to be thicker (with a paste-like texture) and could benefit from a small amount oil.
  • Marinading time: While we thought that a 30-minute marinating time was necessary, you can marinade your chicken for upto 8 hours if you prefer to make it ahead of time.
  • Tzatziki sauce: The sauce on the side of my harissa honey chicken in pictures is a bowl of tzatziki.
  • Alternative cooking methods: While we love the hands-off cooking method of roasting the chicken in the oven, you can cook it on the stovetop or a grill. 
    • If cooking on the stovetop, preheat a cast iron skillet or large skillet over medium-high heat until it is very hot. Lightly grease with oil and cook the chicken in a single layer for 4-5 minutes per side. 
    • If you want to cook the chicken on an outdoor grill, preheat the grill to 400 degrees F. Grease the grates and cook for 5-6 minutes per side. The spicy honey harissa chicken is done when the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F with a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the chicken.

Nutrition

Calories: 404kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 45g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Cholesterol: 215mg | Sodium: 1242mg | Potassium: 716mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 287IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 36mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-honey-chicken/feed/ 6
Grilled Harissa Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-harissa-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-harissa-chicken/#comments Tue, 23 Jul 2024 16:02:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77199 What is Harissa Chicken? Harissa chicken is a hot, smoky dish that gets its primary flavors from harissa, a hot…]]>

What is Harissa Chicken?

Harissa chicken is a hot, smoky dish that gets its primary flavors from harissa, a hot chili pepper paste native to Tunisia. Harissa—used as a marinade or sauce in this recipe—comes from a blend of chili peppers, roasted red peppers, garlic, olive oil, and warm spices like caraway seeds, cumin, and coriander.

After infusing the meat with harissa’s spicy, aromatic flavors, you can then grill, bake, or pan-fry the chicken and (most often) serve it with a side of grains or veggies. You can also make it a dinner by making our Copycat CAVA bowl.

Harissa grilled chicken on a bed of vermicelli rice from the top view.

Ingredients for Harissa Grilled Chicken

You only need a handful of ingredients to make this grilled chicken harissa recipe. Hot, smoky, and oh-so-juicy, these simple ingredients will ensure your dish comes out delicious every time.

Chicken and harissa paste ingredients from the top view.
  • Chicken thighs: I used two pounds of boneless, skinless chicken thighs to make this dish, as dark meat tends to be juicier and more flavorful when grilled. If preferred, you can also make a harissa chicken breast recipe using boneless skinless chicken breasts. However, keep in mind that the grilling times might be longer depending on the thickness of your breasts.
  • Onion: Thinly sliced yellow onion (or red onion) is a great option to give your chicken a sweet yet robust finish. 
  • Garlic: Press or grate your fresh garlic cloves before adding them to your marinade to achieve the most potent, even infusion of flavors.
  • Seasoning: Kosher salt, ground black pepper, and paprika are perfect for lending harissa chicken thighs savory, warm notes. Though I used Spanish paprika, smoked paprika would also work.
  • Lemon juice: Vibrant and bright, fresh lemon juice is my go-to when making this harissa marinade. If you don’t have lemon juice, use red wine vinegar or balsamic vinegar instead.
  • Harissa: Because it’s one of the main ingredients in this recipe, I recommend making your harissa sauce from scratch. If you need a shortcut, you can also make Harissa Paste from Powder. Though the homemade version offers greater customization and a deeper flavor, you can also use store-bought harissa to reduce kitchen time. (My favorite brands are NY Shuk and Mina. Trader Joe’s also has one if you want a cheaper harissa.)
  • Olive oil
  • Garnish: To add a touch of color to your final plate, try serving your harissa chicken with quartered lemon wedges and a sprinkle of fresh parsley (or other fresh herbs like chopped cilantro or oregano.)
  • Greek yogurt: Though optional, ¼ cup of Greek yogurt can add a delicious tang and creaminess to your harissa marinade for chicken.

How to Make Harissa Chicken?

With an irresistible marinade and super-easy grilling technique, this harissa chicken thighs recipe is a cinch to make. Plus, it only takes ten to twenty minutes of hands-on prep!

A collage of images showing how to marinade chicken in harissa.
  1. Dry the chicken: Use a paper towel to pat dry the chicken on both sides. Then, season both sides with salt and pepper and set the thighs aside.
  2. Make the marinade: Add the garlic, onion, paprika, lemon juice, and harissa to a large mixing bowl and stir until combined.
  3. Marinate the chicken: Add the chicken thighs to the harissa mixture and toss them until thoroughly covered. Then, cover the bowl with plastic wrap and refrigerate it for an hour (or up to overnight). Remove the chicken from the fridge 30 minutes before grilling.
  4. Prepare the grill:
    1. Gas grill: Preheat the outdoor grill to 400 degrees F. When hot, scrape the grates to remove unwanted debris and coat them generously with olive oil. 
    2. Charcoal grill: Light the charcoal and let it burn until white ash covers it (20-30 minutes). When ready, spread the coals in an even layer across the bottom.
A collage of images showing how to grill harissa chicken.
  1. Grill the chicken: Place the harissa-marinated chicken in a single layer on the grate and top it with some onions. Then, cover the grill and cook the chicken for six minutes on each side or until the thickest part of the meat reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees F.
  2. Let the chicken rest: Transfer the grilled chicken to a serving plate, loosely cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for ten minutes.
  3. Serve: Garnish your grilled harissa chicken with fresh parsley and a side of lemon wedges if preferred.

How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

Here, you’ll learn how to maximize the freshness of your harissa sauce chicken, whether you want to enjoy it the next day or the next month.

  • Store: Let your harissa chicken thighs come to room temperature before storing them. Then, transfer them to an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator for up to 4-5 days.
  • Freeze: There are two ways to freeze harissa chicken for long-term storage: cooked and uncooked.
    • Freezing cooked meat: If you’ve already cooked the meat, let it reach room temperature, transfer it to an airtight container, and freeze for up to three months.
    • Freezing raw meat: For advance meal prep, place the raw chicken and harissa paste marinade into a freezer-safe Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. You can then store the raw meat in the freezer for three months.
  • Thaw: To thaw your frozen harissa chicken, transfer it to the fridge and let it defrost overnight.
  • Reheat: You can reheat your chicken thighs with harissa in a low-heat oven (~300 degrees F.) until warmed thoroughly, about 10 minutes.

What to Serve with Harissa Chicken?

It goes without saying that this recipe for chicken harissa is delicious on its own. However, it also makes an incomparable pair with dozens of other tasty dishes—just a few of which I’ve listed below.

  • Grains: Looking for an easy dinner that’s as delicious as it is filling? Add this spicy chicken recipe to your favorite rice bowls (such as our CAVA Copycat Recipe), and you have an easily customizable option that will tantalize your taste buds any day of the week. I recommend whipping up a serving of Rice with Vermicelli or Turkish Bulgur Pilaf for a rich, savory base. Or, for a lighter, zestier option, you can try serving your chicken with dishes like couscous and Lemon Quinoa.
  • Salads: Chicken thighs and harissa make a fantastic, protein-packed addition to salads. I love adding this recipe to fresh classics, like my Greek Cucumber Tomato Salad, tender Eggplant Caprese, Caprese Pasta Salad, and tangy Spring Mix Salad—especially with a crumble of fresh feta cheese on top!
  • Grilled veggies: Smoky, fresh, and nutritious, grilled vegetables are a no-brainer for harissa chicken. Serve this Middle Eastern dish with Grilled Corn on the Cob or Grilled Eggplant, and you can cut your cooking time in half.
  • Sauces: Serving this spicy chicken recipe with your favorite sauces is an easy way to add layers of flavor. For a creamy, cool accompaniment, I recommend adding a side of plain Greek yogurt, Tahini and Yogurt Sauce, or a refreshing Mint Yogurt Sauce. Or, if you want a spicier accompaniment, you can whip up a delicious Harissa Aioli in a matter of minutes!

Expert Tips

With these chef-approved tips, tender chicken, bold flavor, and authentic North African flavors are at your fingertips. Below are a few helpful tips to help you make the best-grilled harissa chicken on your first try:

  • Spice levels: Want to adjust the heat level of this harissa recipe for chicken? I highly recommend making your harissa from scratch so you can control your seasoning levels and pick what kinds of hot chiles you use (some are spicier than others). If you opt for a store-bought brand, remember that some are spicier than others, and you can always make a hotter marinade by adding cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to the mix.
  • Overnight marinade: Marinating your chicken for one hour perfectly suits achieving a total infusion of flavors. During our recipe testing (and research), we found some recipes warning against marinating overnight. We tested it and found nothing wrong with letting your chicken marinate overnight. It is an excellent option for advanced meal prep!—if you want a deeper, richer taste.
  • Grilling with onions: When grilling with onions, remember that some of the onions will likely fall through the grates and cause a minor flare-up. Though this effect is nothing to worry about, it’s a good idea to shift the chicken away from the flames when this happens to avoid unwanted scorching.
  • Adjust the grill’s temperature: When cooking with a grill, keep in mind that closing the lid will increase the cooking temperature. Therefore, it’s important to open and close the lid to maintain an appropriate temperature.
  • Avoid overcooking: The best way to avoid overcooking harissa spiced chicken is to use an instant-read thermometer. When you think your chicken is ready, insert the meat thermometer into the thickest part of the meat. Once it reaches 165 degrees F., remove the chicken from the grill.
  • Thread it in skewers: Another way to make this recipe is to transform it into harissa chicken skewers. Simply cut the meat into small cubes, marinate them, and thread them onto skewers. Then, grill them as-is or add other tasty veggies—like bell peppers, onions, and cherry tomatoes—for a lighter, more colorful dish. Remember that the cooking time might be slightly shorter as the chicken is cut into smaller pieces.
  • Bring the meat to room temperature before grilling: If you can plan ahead, it is a good practice to remove the chicken from the refrigerator 30 minutes before grilling. Doing so will ensure the meat cooks evenly and doesn’t become tough.

Other Chicken Dinners You Might Like

If you make your own Grilled Harissa Chicken following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Grilled harissa spiced chicken on a bed of rice from the top view.
Print

Grilled Harissa Chicken Recipe

Grilled harissa chicken is a spicy, easy-to-make dish that requires just a few minutes of prep time to get the juiciest, most flavorful results. Serve it with grilled vegetables, rice or a green salad for a filling chicken dinner.
Course Chicken Recipes, Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Marinading Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 32 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 590kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds chicken thighs boneless and skinless*
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 5 garlic cloves pressed or grated
  • 1 small yellow onion thinly sliced
  • 1 teaspoon paprika we used Spanish paprika but smoked paprika would also work
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice plus 1 lemon quartered for serving
  • ½ cup harissa
  • ¼ cup olive oil more or less for greasing the grill grates
  • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Pat dry the chicken on both sides. Season with salt and pepper on both sides. Set aside.
  • In a large bowl, combine the garlic, onion, paprika, lemon juice, and harissa. Add the chicken and toss to combine.
  • Cover the bowl with stretch film and refrigerate for an hour or overnight if you have the time.
  • Remove from the refrigerator 30 minutes before you are ready to grill.
  • If cooking on a gas grill: Preheat the grill to 400 degrees F. Once hot, scrape the grates and generously coat them with olive oil.
  • If cooking on a charcoal grill: Light the charcoal and let it burn until the coals are covered with white ash for about 20-30 minutes. Spread the coals evenly at the bottom. Right before grilling, grease the grill grates with olive oil.
  • Place the chicken thighs, topped with some onions, on the grate without overlapping.
  • Cover and grill for 6 minutes on each side (for a total of 12 minutes) or until the internal temperature in the thickest part of the chicken thigh reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Remove and place on a clean plate or platter, loosely tenting with foil. Let rest for 10 minutes.
  • If preferred, garnish with fresh parsley and lemon wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes eight harissa chicken thighs ideal for four servings. However, the number of chicken thighs may change depending on the weight of your thighs. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Chicken Breasts*: You can use chicken breasts if preferred. However, the grilling time might be longer depending on the thickness of your chicken. We recommend using a meat thermometer to check doneness.
  • Harissa: We used homemade harissa, but this recipe would also work with any store-bought harissa. If you have harissa powder, follow our harissa from powder recipe for a quick homemade harissa.
  • Grill pan: If you don’t have a grill, you can also use a grill pan to cook (over medium-high heat) this chicken and harissa paste recipe on the stove. 
  • Store: Let the chicken come to room temperature and then, transfer them to an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator for up to 4-5 days.
  • Freeze: You can freeze this harissa chicken in two ways: cooked and uncooked. 
    • Freezing cooked meat: If you’ve already cooked it, let it come to room temperature, transfer it to an airtight container, and freeze for up to three months.
    • Freezing raw meat: Place the raw chicken and harissa marinade into a freezer-safe plastic bag with as much air removed as possible. You can then store the raw meat in the freezer for three months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.
  • Oven baking instructions:
    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Place the marinated chicken thighs (with some onions) on the prepared pan without overlapping.
    • Roast for 25 minutes or until the internal temperature in the thickest part of the chicken thigh reaches 165 degrees F. Cover with foil and let chicken rest for 10 minutes before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 590kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 46g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 23g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 189mg | Sodium: 1191mg | Potassium: 601mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 884IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-harissa-chicken/feed/ 5
Mediterranean Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/#comments Thu, 20 Jun 2024 13:13:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14175 You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re…]]>

You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re the perfect combination of fresh ingredients and crispy pita chips, and they’ll keep you coming back for more.

Vegan Greek nachos on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Mediterranean-style nachos require a mix of fresh produce and pantry staples. While the topping has a medley of fresh vegetables, you can simplify it even more with Greek Cucumber Salad. But to make it as I did here, we will need:

Pita chips and oil for the base of the recipe.

For The Pita Chips:

  • Pita: I used whole wheat pita, but you can use regular pita if that is all that’s available at the grocery store. Alternatively, you can make our homemade pita recipe using a DIY approach. If you are short on time, store-bought baked pita chips can be used in a pinch.
  • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the most fruity flavor.
  • Kosher Salt
Topping ingredients for Greek nachos.

For The Topping:

  • Chickpeas: Chickpeas (or garbanzo beans) give it that Mediterranean style, but you can also use white cannellini beans or navy beans.
  • Tomatoes: Small and juicy cherry tomatoes provide both acidity and sweetness. Grape tomatoes, Roma tomatoes, or heirloom tomatoes all work too.
  • Cucumbers: I love small, thin-skinned Persian cucumbers, which you don’t need to peel. If you are using regular cucumbers or English cucumbers, be sure to peel and remove the watery seeds.
  • Green Onions: Mild scallions give it a savory bite. Red onion is another good option.
  • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives provide a delicious briny bite. Black olives or green olives will also work, or a mix of all three for a more complex flavor. Not a fan of olives? Omit them altogether.
  • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice offers the best citrus flavor. We will need it for the topping and the tahini sauce.
  • Garlic: Garlic gives the salad an extra bite. Use one fresh garlic clove for the best flavor.
  • Seasonings: Kosher salt and black pepper are all we need, just make sure to season the pita chips, salad topping, and tahini sauce and taste as you go.
Tahini dressing for nachos.

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh parsley keeps it simple, but you can amp up the flavor even more with fresh dill, fresh basil, or fresh mint. Don’t have any fresh herbs on hand? Make this Lemon Tahini Sauce instead.
  • Tahini: Look for a runny tahini, and make sure to mix it well before using.
  • Fresh Garlic
  • Water: Water helps thin out the tahini dressing to the right consistency. Start with 2 tablespoons, then add more water, one tablespoon at a time, until a dressing-like consistency is reached.

Optional Add-Ins

For a few twists and different variations, add one, two, or all of the following:

How to Make Mediterranean Nachos?

If you think that you can not make nachos without cheese, think again! Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this Greek nachos recipe:

  1. Prep: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to prep Mediterranean nachos pita bread and topping.
  1. Prepare pita: Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 triangles. If it is hard to cut it, you can do it in two batches.
  2. Bake pita chips: Spread the pita wedges into one single layer on the prepared sheet pan. Season with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. Remove from the oven and set aside while you prepare the topping.
  3. Make the topping: In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
A collage of images showing how to make the tahini dressing and assemble the nachos.
  1. Make the tahini sauce: In the bowl of a food processor with the blade attachment, add the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt. Process until smooth and creamy. If the sauce is too thick, add water, one tablespoon at a time.
  2. Assemble nachos: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large platter. With a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce. Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Enjoy!
Vegan Turkish nachos drizzled with tahini dressing from the top view.

FAQs

Can Mediterranean nachos be prepared ahead of time?

If you want to get ahead, components of the nachos can be prepared and stored separately. Dice the vegetables and make the tahini sauce up to 3 days in advance. Store all components separately. I recommend baking the pita chips right before assembling the nachos. 

How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

Start with a base of thick pita chips and layer evenly so that the toppings and sauce are evenly distributed. Also, use a slotted spoon for the salad topping, as we don’t want the extra juices.

Similar Appetizer / Party Food You Might Like:

Reprinted (with minimal changes) from the Love Real Food by Kathryne Taylor, Vegan Nachos Recipe by permission of Rodale Books.

Mediterranean Nachos recipe on a plate drizzled with herbed tahini sauce.
Print

Mediterranean Nachos Recipe

This Mediterranean Nachos recipe is a 20-minute vegan appetizer made by layering toasted pita chips with a quick tomato chickpea salad. Drizzled with homemade herbed tahini dressing, this is an easy recipe that is not only delicious but also visually impressive.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 9 minutes
Total Time 19 minutes
Servings 6 Servings
Calories 246kcal

Ingredients

For the toasted pita chips:

  • 4 whole wheat pitas 7-inch
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Toppings:

  • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed (15-ounce can)
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 Persian cucumber peeled (or not peeled), sliced thinly or half of an English cucumber
  • 2 stalks green onions chopped
  • ¼ cup black olives pitted and sliced (such as Kalamata olives)
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • cup tahini shaken well
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley leaves plus more as garnish
  • 2 tablespoons water plus more as needed
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • To make the pita chips, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 small wedges. If it is hard to cut them at the same time, you can do it in two batches.
  • Spread the pita wedges in an even layer on the prepared sheet pan and sprinkle them with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. You want them to be crispy, but they burn quickly, so keep a close eye on them as they bake. Remove them from the oven and set aside to cool for a few minutes.
  • Meanwhile, prepare the topping. In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine and set aside.
  • To make the herbed tahini sauce, place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the blade attachment. Blend* until smooth. It should have a creamy consistency, so if needed, add more water in one-tablespoon increments.
  • To assemble: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large plate in an even layer. Using a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce.
  • Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 8-10 (loose) cups of nachos which is ideal for serving 6 people in appetizer portions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Not a fan of olives? You can omit them.
  • No food processor?* You can make the tahini sauce by hand by finely chopping the parsley and vigorously whisking it until smooth.
  • Evenly distribute all the toppings: Make sure the toppings are scattered throughout the entire layer of pita chips. This way, each bite is just as delicious as the last.
  • Storage: While the nachos are best enjoyed the moment they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for an additional day. 

Nutrition

Calories: 246kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 749mg | Potassium: 290mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/feed/ 15
Turkish Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/#comments Wed, 19 Jun 2024 13:57:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6266 There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply…]]>

There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply put, it is seasonal vegetables like green beans, zucchini, or leeks are cooked in a good amount of olive oil along with summer tomatoes and onion and served at room temperature when their flavor is most prominent.

This Turkish beans recipe is essentially stewed string beans cooked in a warm skillet until soft, juicy, and melt-in-your-mouth tender. The result is very satisfactory as the low and slow cooking time produces super flavorful beans.

Turkish stewed green beans drizzled with yogurt sauce in a bowl.

I know many people enjoy making classic green bean dishes like Air Fryer Green Beans and Garlic Butter Green Beans, but I hope you give this version a try.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Turkish style braised green beans require just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  • Fresh Green Beans: I used regular green beans you can easily find at the grocery store. However, the most popular green beans in Turkey are runner beans (çalı fasulye) and romano beans or flat beans (Ayşekadın fasulye). If you are lucky, you may be able to spot them at your local farmer’s market during the summer months. But you can use any green bean, including long beans, string beans, or Haricots Verts (French beans), in this recipe.
  • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a rich, fruity flavor.
  • Onion: Diced onion adds a delicious savory flavor. Feel free to replace the onion with washed and diced leeks instead.
  • Tomato Paste: This is optional, but tomato paste adds a depth of flavor, and it’s how my mom always made them.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves give these string beans an extra punchy bite.
  • Tomatoes: I used canned diced tomatoes with their own juices, which is why this recipe doesn’t include any water. However, if you are using fresh tomatoes (about 2 medium-sized tomatoes), add about ¼ cup water.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper keeps the green beans front and center.
  • Sugar: Do not skip the sugar. This is the secret ingredient that brightens all the flavors and balances the bitterness in the vegetables.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh dill is classic, but fresh mint or parsley can be used instead.
  • Lemon Juice: A squeeze of lemon juice right before serving is optional but a welcome addition to brighten up the dish.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Meat: If you prefer more of a warm one-pot summer meal, you can brown ½ pound ground beef along with the onion and follow the rest of the recipe as written. Alternatively, you can use stew meat. If you go in that direction, be sure to dry the meat thoroughly, season it with salt and pepper, and sear it in the pot using a few tablespoons of olive oil until lightly browned but not fully cooked, 7-8 minutes. Remove onto a platter and follow the recipe as written. Add the browned stew meat back in after adding the green beans, and cook as directed.
  • Beans: It is not traditional, but you can toss in a can of drained and rinsed chickpeas (garbanzo beans) or white beans for an extra dose of plant protein.
  • Spices: You can add additional spices like cumin, red pepper flakes, Aleppo pepper, or paprika.
  • Cinnamon: Some variations of this Turkish bean dish include cinnamon, about ¼ teaspoon or so. My mom never added cinnamon, but I think a small amount would be a welcome addition.
  • Cheese: There is a similar recipe in Greece called fasolakia, which is often served with salty and tangy crumbles of feta cheese. We mostly serve it with a side of thick yogurt, but if you want to follow in the footsteps of the Greeks, you can crumble some feta on top.

How to Make Turkish Green Beans?

If you are ready to try something new, I can not imagine a better dish than this stewed green beans recipe. Luckily, it comes together in one pot in just a few easy steps. Simply:

A collage of images showing how to make Turkish style green beans recipe.
  1. Saute onion: In a medium saute pan or heavy pot (such as a Dutch Oven), heat olive oil over medium-high heat until warm but not smoking. Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, about 5-6 minutes.
  2. Add aromatics: Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for 1 minute.
  3. Add tomatoes and green beans: Next, stir in the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar. Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed.
  4. Cook low and slow: Cover and bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times while cooking.
Two images showing the finished dish.
  1. Garnish: Stir in the dill. Serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

Serving Suggestions

In Turkish tradition, braised green beans and accompanying vegetable dishes are served as a course themselves, before or after a meaty main dish. However, the rich and luxurious textures and flavors from this green bean dish can be served with any of the following:

Turkish Green Beans served on an oval plate.

FAQs

What are Turkish green beans?

Turkish green beans, also known as zeytinyağlı taze fasulye, are fresh green beans cooked in a tomato sauce made of tomatoes, onions, garlic, and olive oil and slow-simmered until tender.

What type of green beans should I use?

Fresh, tender green beans are ideal, but any variety will work, such as string beans, haricots verts, runner beans, or flat beans. For this recipe, avoid frozen and canned green beans.

Is this dish vegan?

Yes, Turkish green beans are naturally vegan and vegetarian as they are made with extra virgin olive oil, green beans, tomatoes, onions, garlic, fresh herbs, and seasonings.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Also Like

If you try this Turkish Style Green Beans recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Turkish green beans on a plate garnished with dill.
Print

Turkish Green Beans Recipe

This Turkish-style green beans recipe (Zeytinyagli Taze Fasulye) is a classic Turkish summer dish made by braising green beans with onions, tomatoes, and garlic in plenty of olive oil. It can be served as a side dish with meat or as a light meal by itself.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 226kcal

Ingredients

  • 5 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium-sized onion chopped (~1 cup)
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cab diced tomatoes (15-ounce can) or 2 medium tomatoes cut into small cubes
  • 1 pound fresh green beans trimmed and cut in half
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar or coconut sugar
  • ¼ cup fresh dill or parsley

For Serving (Optional)

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a medium-size saute pan or a heavy bottom pan (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat.
  • Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, 5-6 minutes.
  • Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for another minute or so.
  • Add the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar.
  • Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed in the pan. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn the heat to medium-low, and cook until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times during the cooking process.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Stir in the dill and serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This dish makes 6-7 cups of braised green beans, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Preparing the green beans: We used fresh string beans from supermarkets. To prepare them for cooking, simply cut the stem ends off first, then cut them in half, making sure all the beans are roughly the same size. If you are lucky enough to find romano beans or flat beans, you will need to remove the string from the bean. First, snap one end off and pull it all the way down to remove the string. Then repeat on the other side.
  • Cooking times may vary: Keep in mind that the cooking duration may be different depending on the type of green beans you use. Start checking around 25-30 minutes. If they are still crisp, keep cooking until tender.
  • The best part of this recipe is that it stores well and can be made ahead making it ideal for your summer meal prep. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:
    • Make Ahead: The dish can be made up to 2 days in advance and stored, covered, in the fridge. They often taste better the next day. Simply remove from the refrigerator 30 – 45 minutes before serving.
    • Storage: Leftover green beans will keep for up to 4 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Enjoy them cold as a salad or at room temperature.
    • Reheat: If you prefer the green beans warm, reheat them in a skillet over medium heat until warm.

Nutrition

Calories: 226kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 622mg | Potassium: 366mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 851IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/feed/ 12
Beef Shawarma https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/#comments Wed, 12 Jun 2024 21:27:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75914 What is Beef Shawarma? Flavorful, tender, and rich, shawarma beef is a popular street food in the Middle East. It…]]>

What is Beef Shawarma?

Flavorful, tender, and rich, shawarma beef is a popular street food in the Middle East. It comes from slow-cooking layers of marinated steak on a vertical rotisserie or spit, then shaving the beef’s outer layer into thin slices. Usually, chefs serve the meat on breads like pita or lavash, topped with fresh veggies and drizzled with tahini sauce. However, it’s also common to see this dish as part of a grain bowl or beef shawarma platter.

Steak shawarma on a plate with pickles, tahini sauce, tomatoes and salad greens.

Though less traditional, you might also find a layered mixture of chicken and beef shawarma in some Middle Eastern countries.

Beef Shawarma Ingredients

Selecting the right ingredients is key to making the tastiest homemade shawarma. This ingredient list has everything you need, from the best meat to expert seasoning suggestions.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Beef: Flank steak and skirt steak are my favorite meats for shawarma due to their tender consistency and easy marination. You can also use ribeye steak for a more decadent finish, though this cut tends to be more expensive. No matter which cut you choose, just be sure to salt it before marinating to help break down its proteins and free up space for the juices to fill.
  • Shawarma beef seasoning: You can make homemade beef shawarma seasoning by combining ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, ground turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom. Otherwise, you can simplify your meal prep by trying out a store-bought brand. Sadaf’s and NYShuk are my favorite brands.
  • Marinade: To make a marinade for beef shawarma, you’ll need:
    • Olive oil 
    • Fresh lemon juice 
    • Finely minced garlic
    • White vinegar: While it is not traditional, you can also use white or red wine vinegar as a substitute, depending on what you have on hand.
  • Onion: A thinly sliced onion helps make the meat more tender by breaking down its proteins. Additionally, onions have natural sugars that add a rich, savory flavor to the meat as it marinates.
  • Sauces: This recipe’s heartier flavors can easily be balanced by topping the meat with fresh condiments like my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, Lemon Tahini Sauce, Tzatziki, or even Hummus.
  • Vegetables: Traditionally, beef shawarma is served with fresh vegetables (such as sliced tomatoes, cucumbers, and curly green lettuce) and pickled vegetables like dill Gherkins, red onions, or pickled turnips. However, this is where you can make it your own with whatever fresh or pickled vegetable you have on hand.

How to Make Beef Shawarma

This easy beef shawarma recipe is a great way to enjoy authentic Mediterranean eats any night of the week. These simple instructions will ensure you come out with a perfectly tender, tasty meal—all without a vertical spit!

A collage of images showing how to prepare shawarma meat.
  1. Prepare the shawarma meat: Pat dry the steak on both sides with paper towels, then slice it against the grain into thin strips (¼-inch wide, three inches long). Sprinkle the steak pieces with one teaspoon salt and set it aside. 
  2. Combine the beef shawarma spices: Add the cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamon to a medium mixing bowl. Blend the seasonings until thoroughly combined. Alternatively, you can use 3 tablespoons of store-bought shawarma seasoning.
  3. Marinate: Add the olive oil, white vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, and shawarma spice mix to a large bowl and whisk them together until fully incorporated. Then, add the beef strips and onions to the bowl, toss to coat, and cover the bowl. Refrigerate the mixture for a minimum of four hours or up to overnight.
A collage of images showing how to cook and serve shawarma beef.
  1. Prepare the Lemon Tahini Sauce: Right before serving, in a small bowl, whisk together the tahini paste, lemon juice, garlic, and kosher salt until blended. Stirring constantly, slowly add in the water until you reach your desired consistency. Taste for seasoning, adding more if necessary, and then set the sauce aside until ready to serve.
  2. Cook beef: Remove the flank steak from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking to let it reach room temperature. Then, heat a large skillet, such as a cast iron skillet, on medium high heat and add the marinated steak and onions to the pan. Reduce the heat to medium and stir the mix occasionally as it browns, remembering not to overcrowd the skillet. Continue cooking until you achieve your desired doneness (4-6 minutes), then place the meat and onions on a plate. Cover the mix with a loose aluminum foil tent and let it rest for ten minutes.
  3. Serve: Transfer the now-rested meat to a large platter and serve it with tomatoes, cucumbers, pickles, and tahini sauce. If you plan on making shawarma wraps, spread the Tahini Sauce on the bread, layer it with your favorite accompaniments, and finish it with the cooked steak.

How to Serve Beef Shawarma? 

My favorite part about this homemade beef shawarma recipe is its versatility. Below, you’ll find countless ways to make this dish yours, whether you want to serve it by itself or turn it into a crowd-ready platter or a delicious meat shawarma sandwich.

  • Platter: Equal parts filling and flavorful, a beef shawarma plate is the ultimate weeknight dinner. Serve your meat with a helping of zesty Tabbouleh, flatbread, pickled veggies, and toum (Lebanese garlic sauce), and you’re guaranteed to get a five-star review from all your dinner guests (kids included!).
  • Sandwich: In the mood for a beef shawarma sandwich or pita pocket? Spread a piece of pita with my Tahini Yogurt Sauce, then add your steak slices, sliced tomatoes, pickles, and lettuce. If you want to feel like you are at a Lebanese restaurant, serve this dish alongside a plate of French fries for an authentic Middle Eastern dinner.
  • Wrap: You can quickly transform this dish into a delectable beef shawarma wrap by placing your meat, Pickled Red Onions, tomatoes, and green curly lettuce onto a slice of lavash. Then, drizzle your toppings with Lemon Tahini Sauce and wrap it tightly.
  • Bowl: Easy to eat and deliciously customizable, steak shawarma dinner bowls make meal planning a cinch. All you have to do is serve your shawarma beef, veggies, and fresh parsley atop a bowl of grains (Bulgur Pilaf and Rice with Vermicelli are my favorites!). You can even give your recipe an extra creamy finish by serving it with a side of Hummus, Baba Ganoush, or plain yogurt.
  • Salad: You can get your fill of fiber and protein by topping a bowl of fresh vegetables with this succulent beef shawarma recipe. In particular, this warmly-spiced beef makes a great pair with Lebanese fattoush and my Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad.
Beef shawarma sandwich drizzled with tahini sauce in someones hands.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Anyone can learn how to cook shawarma beef that’s worthy of being in a Middle Eastern restaurant. Below are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Cut meat against the grain: To prevent your shawarma from becoming chewy, I highly recommend cutting your beef against the grain. Doing so shortens the muscle fibers, making the meat more tender and easier to chew.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan: When cooking steak shawarma, it’s best to avoid overcrowding your skillet to ensure that the meat is cooked evenly. Furthermore, basting the beef with the pan’s juices throughout the cooking process will ensure that the meat won’t dry out.
  • Let it rest: Do not skip the resting time, as it gives the meat time to reabsorb and equally distribute its flavorful juices. For the best results, I recommend letting this steak shawarma recipe rest for at least ten minutes before serving.

FAQs

What’s the difference between a gyro and shawarma?

Both shawarma and gyros come from slow-cooking layers of meat on a vertical roasting spit and shaving it into thin slices. However, the primary difference lies in their flavor profiles, as they use different spices during the marination process. For instance, the Greek gyro—often made of pork, lamb, or chicken—offers a brighter, more herby Mediterranean flavor, and you’ll usually find it served alongside light, creamy sauces like Tzatziki. By contrast, Middle Eastern shawarma—primarily made from beef and chicken—tends to have a warmer, more aromatic finish and is often accompanied by earthier, nuttier recipes, like Tahini Sauce and Hummus.

What is the best cut of beef for shawarma?

I recommend using flank steak, skirt steak, or sirloin tip (also known as beef flap steak) when making shawarma because they’re tender and easy to marinate. You may also use ribeye—a richer, more expensive cut—if it’s in your budget. While it is not traditional, you can use the shawarma seasoning to saute ground beef for an easy weeknight meal, introducing the flavors of shawarma in a simpler way.

What nationality is shawarma?

Shawarma originates from the Middle East, including countries like Turkey, Israel, and other Arabic areas. Because of the dish’s broad popularity, it’s also known by many other area-specific names, such as “Lebanese shawarma” and “Mediterranean beef shawarma.”

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Beef Shawarma following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Beef shawarma on a platter with tahini sauce and vegetables.
Print

Beef Shawarma Recipe

Learn how to make the best beef shawarma at home with tender, juicy marinated beef, aromatic shawarma spices, and delicious toppings. Perfect for shawarma platters or stuffing into warm pita pockets for an authentic Middle Eastern experience!
Course Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinading Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 668kcal

Ingredients

For The Beef

  • 2 pounds flank steak or skirt steak
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

For The Shawarma Seasoning

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cardamom

For The Marinade

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup white vinegar
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
  • 1 small onion thinly sliced

Tahini Sauce

  • ½ cup Tahini paste
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 2 garlic cloves pressed or grated
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4-6 tablespoons water

Optional Wraps

  • 4 Pita bread or Lavash (or more)
  • ½ cup Pickled red onions
  • 2 fresh tomatoes sliced
  • 1 cucumber peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 cup pickles sliced
  • 2 cups green curly lettuce roughly chopped
  • Slices of a lemon optional

Instructions

  • Pat dry the flank steak on both sides and cut it into 1/4-inch strips, each measuring 3 inches long (lengthwise), against the grain. Sprinkle with the kosher salt and set it aside.
  • Make the shawarma seasoning: In a medium bowl, mix the cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamon until thoroughly combined.
  • Make the marinade: In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, white vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, and shawarma seasoning until incorporated.
  • Add the flank steak strips and onions to the bowl and toss to fully coat.
  • Cover and refrigerate for at least 4 hours or overnight.
  • Make the lemon tahini sauce: In a bowl, whisk together the tahini paste, lemon juice, garlic, and kosher salt until blended. Slowly add the water while whisking until you reach your desired consistency. Adjust seasoning to taste. Set aside until ready to serve.
  • Cook the meat: Remove the flank steak from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking. Heat a large skillet (a cast iron skillet works best) on medium-high. Remove the flank steak and onions from the bowl and place on the skillet. Reduce heat to medium and stir occasionally as it browns. Cook for 4-6 minutes or until you achieve your desired doneness. Do not overcrowd the skillet. You may have to cook in 2-3 batches. Once cooked, place it on a plate or platter, loosely tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10 minutes before serving.
  • To serve as a wrap: Spread the tahini sauce on the bread (or inside of a pita pocket) and layer it with sliced tomatoes, pickles, cucumbers, lettuce and beef shawarma. Drizzle with more tahini sauce and if preferred with a squeeze of lemon juice right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 people if you serve it with the toppings/veggies, but if you decide to turn it into sandwiches/wraps, it will be enough for 6 servings.
  • Shawarma Seasoning: We used our own homemade shawarma seasoning mix, but if you prefer to use a storebought brand, I recommend using 3 tablespoons of seasoning.
  • The longer you marinate, the better: Technically, you can cook it after it has marinated for an hour, but like most meat recipes, the longer the beef stays in the marinade, the more delicious it becomes. If you have the time, I recommend marinating your meat overnight for the most profound flavor. This is one of those recipes where planning ahead pays dividends.
  • Store: You can store leftover steak shawarma in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 2-3 days.
  • Freeze: If you plan on preparing a few batches in advance, I highly recommend freezing the raw marinated meat (with the marinade) in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag until ready to use. However, you can also freeze the cooked meat in an airtight container for 2-3 months.
  • Thaw: To thaw your shawarma steak, place it in the fridge overnight and cook as directed in the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 668kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 56g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 136mg | Sodium: 1300mg | Potassium: 1273mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 529IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 155mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/feed/ 1
Slow Baked Salmon https://foolproofliving.com/slow-baked-salmon-butter-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/slow-baked-salmon-butter-beans/#comments Tue, 04 Jun 2024 17:50:30 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9807 We’ve already shown you how to cook sockeye salmon in the oven (wrapped in foil) and how to achieve perfect…]]>

We’ve already shown you how to cook sockeye salmon in the oven (wrapped in foil) and how to achieve perfect grilled salmon. Now, we’re excited to introduce another foolproof technique: Slow Baked Salmon. 

Let’s face it: there is nothing worse than overcooked salmon. If you have never tried it, slow-cooking salmon in the oven at a low temperature (aka low and slow) ensures a perfectly moist and flavorful fish with minimal effort. The best part, you ask? This is a fantastic dinner you can make in less than 30 minutes.

Slow baked salmon served with veggies on the side from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This salmon slow bake is made with just a few basic ingredients. The key is to get the freshest salmon you can find, whether that’s at grocery stores or your favorite fish market. Here’s a bit more information about what we need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Salmon: I prefer wild-caught Pacific salmon fillets (King or Coho salmon), but you can use farm-raised Atlantic salmon as well, depending on availability and budget. You can use a whole fillet like I did or portion it into 4-6 ounce salmon fillets. 
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: I used extra virgin olive oil, but unsalted butter can also be used. Alternatively, you can take it up a notch by using softened Roasted Garlic Butter or Butter Garlic Sauce.
  • Dijon Mustard: Dijon mustard is optional, but it gives an additional pop of flavor.
  • Fresh Garlic Cloves: While we prefer a few cloves of minced fresh garlic, in a pinch, you can use garlic powder.
  • Onion: I love sliced shallots, but use any type of onion you have on hand like yellow onion, red onion, or even chopped green onions.
  • Lemon Slices: Lemon slices add visual appeal and bright citrus flavor. A medley of citrus slices would be gorgeous as well.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper keeps the salmon the star. You can add other seasonings if you prefer.
  • Garnish: We kept it simple with fresh parsley, but you could also garnish with different fresh herbs like fresh dill, mint, cilantro, basil, or fresh chives. If preferred, a final sprinkle of lemon zest wouldn’t hurt either.

How to Slow Cook Salmon in The Oven?

Slow-roasted salmon is easier than you think. Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this flaky slow roasted salmon:

  1. Prep: Preheat the oven to 275 degrees F/135 C. Line a large-rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
A collage of images showing how to slow cook salmon in the oven.
  1. Make marinade: In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil, Dijon mustard, garlic, Kosher salt, and black pepper.
  2. Season salmon: Pat the salmon dry with a paper towel. Then, brush the entire surface of the fillet with the olive oil mixture. 
  3. Finish with toppings: Place the salmon fillet on the prepared baking sheet. Scatter the shallots over the salmon and finish with a single layer of lemon slices.
  4. Bake: Roast in the oven for 18-20 minutes until the fish flakes easily with a fork or until an instant-read thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the fish reaches 125 degrees F.
  5. Garnish: Rest the salmon for 5 minutes. Sprinkle with parsley and squeeze lemon juice right before serving.

How to Store and Reheat?

This slow-roasted salmon recipe is perfect for weekly meal prep, as it can be enjoyed warm or cold, on top of salads, in sandwiches or wraps, tossed into pasta recipes, or layered into tacos. It’s such an exquisite piece of seafood that you won’t want any of it to go to waste. Here are my best storage and reheating tips for this slow-cooked oven salmon recipe:

  • Storage: Cool the leftover salmon to room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Reheat: Place the salmon fillet in a low-temperature oven (250 – 275 degrees F) for 5 minutes or until heated through.

How to Serve Cooked Salmon?

Low and slow salmon is an elegant meal that can be served as a healthy weeknight dinner or jazzed up for family and friends as an ideal dinner party trick. Some of my favorite side dishes include:

Slow baked salmon with lemon slices and shallots from the top view.

FAQs

Can you cook salmon at a lower temperature?

Yes, cooking salmon in a low heat source (250 – 300 degrees F oven) ensures that the salmon cooks evenly and gently, resulting in a melt-in-your-mouth texture.

Should I bake salmon covered or uncovered?

If you are baking the salmon low and slow, between 250 – 300 degrees F., you can cook it uncovered. However, if you are cooking it in a hotter oven, we recommend either covering it with aluminum foil or baking it for a shorter amount of time.

How long to cook salmon at 275 degrees F?

Depending on the thickness of your salmon, it should be medium-rare (125 degrees F) in about 18-22 minutes. 

Other Salmon Recipes You Might Like:

If you make this Slow Cooked Salmon recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Slow baked salmon served with utensils on the side from the top view.
Print

Slow Baked Salmon Recipe

Enjoy incredibly tender, flaky, and buttery salmon with this foolproof slow-baked recipe. With fresh lemon, shallots, and herbs, you can enjoy perfectly cooked salmon every time!
Course Seafood
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 430kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 lb whole salmon fillet or 6 fillets of salmon (4-5 ounces each)
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 teaspoons Dijon mustard optional
  • 3 garlic cloves finely minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 small shallot thinly sliced (or you can use white or red onion as well)
  • ½ lemon thinly sliced
  • 2 tablespoons parsley finely chopped – optional garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 275 degrees F/135 C. Line the sheet pan with the parchment paper.
  • In a bowl, combine the olive oil, Dijon mustard, minced garlic, kosher salt, and black pepper. Whisk until all ingredients are incorporated.
  • Pat dry the salmon and brush it with the olive oil mixture.
  • Place the salmon on the prepared baking sheet. Scatter the shallots over the top of the salmon. Finish with a single layer of lemon slices.
  • Bake for 18-20 minutes until the fish flakes or until a instant read thermometer inserted in the thickest part of the fish registers 125 degrees F.
  • Let it rest for 5 minutes, and then serve with chopped parsley, if desired.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one large fillet of salmon, which is usually ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Salmon to buy: I prefer wild-caught Pacific salmon, such as King or Coho Salmon, but you can also use farm-raised Atlantic salmon, depending on availability and your budget. You can use a whole fillet like I did or buy six fillets (4-5 ounces each) of salmon.
  • Leave the salmon skin on or remove it: You can either leave the salmon skin intact, have the fishmonger remove it for you, or do it yourself at home. If you decide to leave the skin on, bake the skin side down for best results (the skin will fall right off once baked). Also, make sure to check for any lingering pin bones before cooking.
  • The thickness of the salmon matters: Keep in mind that the thicker the salmon, the longer the cooking time. My salmon was roughly 1 inch thick with a cooking time of 18 minutes (plus 5-minute carryover cooking) for medium-rare (125-130 degrees F.)
  • Cook to the desired temperature: I love medium rare salmon, so I take it out of the oven when the internal temperature reaches 125 degrees F. If you prefer your salmon a little more well done, bake a few more minutes until the temperature reaches 140-145 degrees F, depending on how well you want it done.
  • Storage: Cool the leftovers to room temperature. Then, transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.
  • Reheat: Place the salmon fillet in a low-temperature oven (250 – 275 degrees F) for 5 minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 430kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 46g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 125mg | Sodium: 711mg | Potassium: 1178mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 266IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/slow-baked-salmon-butter-beans/feed/ 16
Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/#comments Sun, 02 Jun 2024 17:12:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25252 If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have…]]>

If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have come to the right place! We have already shared Mexican Street Corn On The Cob, Mexican Street Corn Salad with Avocado, Air Fryer Elotes, Mexican Street Corn Soup and Elote Dip. This Mexican street corn pasta recipe is the newest addition to the collection.

A person is drizzling the elote pasta salad with chili lime dressing.

While I usually make this street corn macaroni salad during the summer months when sweet corn is in season, you can also make it using canned or frozen corn during the cooler months (i.e., during the football season and Cinco de Mayo celebrations). In this post, we cover everything you need to know, including ingredient substitutions, variations, making it with grilled (or sauteed) corn, and expert tips to guide you through the process.

Ingredients for Mexican Pasta Salad with Chili Lime Dressing:

The ingredients list for this pasta corn salad consists of a mix of fresh and store-bought ingredients. You will need two sets of ingredients: First, for the salad and second, for the chili lime dressing: 

For The Salad:

  • Sweet corn on the cob: You can make this salad by cooking the corn on the grill (or using a grill pan), sauteeing it in a skillet, or even cooking it in an air fryer. Our recipe below covers both methods of cooking. However, during the cooler months, when corn is not in season, you can use canned or frozen corn as well. 
  • Oil: You can use any vegetable oil, like olive oil or avocado oil, but unsalted butter would also work.
  • Pasta: When making pasta salads, my favorite pasta shapes are fusilli, farfalle(bow-tie pasta), or cellentani. However, any pasta shape that can hold onto the dressing and mix well with other ingredients in the recipe would work here. If you are following a gluten-free diet, you can also use your favorite gluten-free pasta.
  • Jalapeno pepper: If you like the heat, keep the seeds on. If not, remove them before chopping the pepper into small pieces. Alternatively, you can use bell peppers if you prefer a milder flavor.
  • Onion: I used red onion, but green onions would also work for a lighter flavor. If you have them on hand, my Mexican pickled onions would also be a great addition.
  • Cilantro: Chopped fresh cilantro is a classic ingredient in any Mexican corn recipe, but if you are not a fan, you can use other fresh herbs like parsley or omit using it.
  • Cheese: The authentic elote recipe uses cotija cheese, so we used that, but you can also use queso fresco, shredded cheddar, or even crumbled feta cheese in a pinch.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For The Dressing:

  • Mayonnaise: Use a brand you like or make it at home
  • Sour cream: If you can find it, you can use Mexican crema (aka Mexican sour cream) instead of sour cream. 
  • Seasonings: I used a small amount of chili powder to complement the smoky and charred flavors of the corn, but it is optional. You will also need salt and pepper to season the recipe. If preferred, a cayenne pepper can also be added for some heat.
  • Lime zest and Lime Juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for the freshest flavors.

Optional Additions:

  • Cherry tomatoes: While it is not traditional, a handful of cherry tomatoes would be a lovely addition and make this grilled corn pasta salad a true summer salad. 
  • Garlic: A clove of minced garlic can be added to the creamy dressing, if preferred. If you prefer a lighter (less pungent) alternative, you can use a teaspoon of garlic powder as well.
  • Black Beans: Again, it is not traditional, but adding a can of drained and rinsed black beans would make this even more wholesome and filling.
  • Avocado: If you are an avocado lover, add a cubed ripe avocado to take this  Mexican corn pasta salad to the next level.
  • Grilled chicken: You can turn this sweet corn pasta salad into a delicious summer meal by adding some grilled chicken on top.

How To Make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad?

While I prefer using grilled corn, you can make this street corn macaroni salad by sauteeing corn kernels in a skillet. Below are the steps to making it both ways:

Steps showing how to make elote pasta salad.
  1. Cook corn:
    1. Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
    2. In a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
  2. Cook the pasta: Meanwhile, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. You can reserve some pasta water just in case, but during our recipe testing, we didn’t think that it was necessary. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl. Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
  3. Make the chili lime dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust your seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty!
Steps showing how to assemble Mexican pasta salad with corn recipe.
  1. Assemble the salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Serving Suggestions:

You can serve this grilled corn pasta salad by itself for a delicious pasta lunch or as a side dish with many of your vegetarian and meat dishes. Below are a few of my favorite dishes that you can pair it with:

  • Grilled seafood: The light and smokey flavors of Grilled Shrimp complement the creamy, spicy flavors of the salad. However, if you are feeding a crowd, you can also try my Grilled Sockeye Salmon for a well-rounded meal.
  • Tacos: The robust flavors of Grilled Flank Steak Tacos pair beautifully with this Mexican corn side dish, making it a summer feast. But if I am serving this salad during the cooler months, I pair it with my Slow Cooker Brisket Tacos for a meal that is perfect for a crowd.

Other Mexican recipes you might like:

If you make this Easy Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad recipe, I would appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Mexican street corn pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is bursting with the flavors of fresh summer corn, jalapenos, red onion, and a creamy chili lime dressing. Ready in just 30 minutes, it's the perfect dish for feeding a crowd!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 353kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn:

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil or melted butter
  • 6 ears corn – Husks removed – approximately 4 ½ to 5 cups of corn kernels or frozen or canned corn (see notes below)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Pasta:

  • 8 oz. dry uncooked pasta such as fusilli and farfalle (bowtie pasta)

For The Creamy Dressing:

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Mexican crema
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime (optional)
  • ¼ cup lime juice freshly squeezed from 1 ½ to 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 2 medium jalapeno seeded and sliced/chopped
  • ½ cup red onion chopped finely
  • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped – more to use as garnish
  • ½ cup cotija cheese crumbled

Instructions

  • When it comes to cooking the corn, you have two options:
    Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
    Cook it in a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
  • Cook the pasta: While the corn is cooling, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl.
  • Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
  • Make the Mexican Corn Dressing (Chili Lime Dressing): In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, lime zest, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty.
  • Assemble the roasted corn pasta salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 cups of pasta salad (the shape of the pasta you are using will change the volume), which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • What if I don’t have fresh corn? While I am a big fan of any pasta salad with fresh corn, to make this recipe year-round and still get that sweet corn flavor, you can use canned or frozen corn in place of the fresh. If you decide to do so, you can use:
    • Canned corn: For this recipe, you will need 3 (15 oz) cans of drained and rinsed corn.
    • Frozen corn kernels: You will need three (10 oz) bags. I like this option because the corn kernels are already off the cob, which saves you a step. Even better, there is no need to thaw. Simply add 1-2 minutes extra cooking time when sauteing the frozen corn in a skillet.
  • Be sure to salt the pasta water: Salting the cooking water allows the pasta to absorb some salt as it cooks, enhancing its flavor from the inside out so do not skip this step.
  • Toss while it is still warm: I know it’s tempting to add everything to the bowl and simply drizzle with dressing, but we’ve discovered that tossing the dressing with the corn and pasta while they’re still slightly warm allows them to better absorb the tangy, spicy flavors.
  • Serve it cold or warm: Like most pasta salads, this Mexican corn pasta salad can be served at room temperature, warm or cold. 
  • Make-Ahead: You can make this fresh corn pasta salad a day in advance. Simply assemble the pasta salad, but do not garnish with the cotija cheese or cilantro. Bring it to room temperature and store it in an airtight container. On the day you are going to serve, give it another gentle toss and let it come to room temperature. Add the cotija cheese and cilantro right before serving.
  • To Store Leftovers: Bring your Mexican pasta salad to room temperature and transfer it to an airtight container. As long as it is kept in the fridge, it should be good for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 605mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/feed/ 26
Easy Ratatouille Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-ratatouille-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-ratatouille-recipe/#comments Wed, 22 May 2024 21:14:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75569 Vegetarian eggplant recipes for dinner are a no-brainer for quick, healthy meal ideas. Whip up my simple ratatouille recipe for…]]>

Vegetarian eggplant recipes for dinner are a no-brainer for quick, healthy meal ideas. Whip up my simple ratatouille recipe for an effortless main course that’s the epitome of French cooking. Or, try out my Easy Eggplant Parmesan and savory Eggplant Baked Ziti for cheesy goodness and a rich tomato sauce you won’t be able to resist.

A plate of my easy ratatouille recipe garnished with basil from the top view.

Ratatouille Ingredients List

Garden-fresh and flavorful, the main ingredients in ratatouille combine all the light, nutritious tastes of summer into a single bowl. Below, you’ll find my go-to ingredients to make an easy recipe worthy of a French restaurant.

Ingredients for ratatouille from the top view.
  • Olive oil: Olive oil is a classic choice for sauteing this recipe’s veggies. However, you can use any other neutral-flavored oil—such as avocado oil—if you prefer a different cooking base.
  • Yellow Onion
  • Bell peppers: Most recipes for ratatouille achieve their vibrant presentation by using a colorful assortment of bell peppers. I used a combination of red and yellow peppers, but any color would work.
  • Tomato paste
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Eggplant: Of all the eggplant varieties available, I prefer globe eggplants due to their versatility and year-round availability at most U.S. grocery stores. You can even check out my beginner-friendly guide on how to dice eggplant for more tips on cutting this veggie for your ratatouille stew recipe.
  • Zucchini: Tender and mildly sweet, zucchini is a classic summer vegetable guaranteed to elevate any ratatouille recipe. Due to their similar flavor profiles, you can also mix and match zucchini with yellow squash if desired.
  • Tomatoes: During the summer, I love to use fresh tomatoes—such as grape, Roma, beefsteak, or any other vine-ripened variety—in this recipe. However, you can also make this easy ratatouille recipe with canned tomatoes if you’re short on time or don’t have access to fresh produce.
  • Seasoning: I prefer a herby, bright mixture of fresh thyme, basil, salt, and pepper as my seasoning for ratatouille. Depending on what you have on hand, you may also use fresh parsley instead of basil.
  • Vinegar: The best way to brighten a ratatouille stew is to add a tablespoon of apple cider vinegar just before serving. However, if you prefer a more traditional flavoring, you may instead add ¼ cup of red wine to the mixture at the beginning of the recipe.
  • Sugar: Adding a teaspoon of sugar is a great way to create a delicious contrast with this dish’s crisper, more earthy flavors. Though I prefer granulated sugar, you can also use brown sugar, coconut sugar, or cane sugar to help remove any bitterness in your ratatouille.

How to Make Ratatouille Food?

This vegan ratatouille recipe requires zero expertise and little time to make. These no-fuss instructions will walk you through every step to make this classic French dish like a pro.

A collage of images showing how to cook this recipe in a Dutch oven.
  1. Saute the onion and peppers: Heat the olive oil in a large, heavy-bottom pot (like a large Dutch oven) over medium-high heat. Once hot, add the onion and peppers to the pot and saute them for 8-10 minutes or until softened.
  2. Cook the garlic: Add the tomato paste and garlic to the pot, stir, and cook for an additional minute.
  3. Add the remaining veggies: Add the eggplant, zucchini, tomatoes, thyme, salt, pepper, and sugar to the mixture. Give it a big stir. Put the lid on and cook for 20-25 minutes (or until fully cooked) over medium heat, stirring them once or twice during the process.
Person showing the last steps of making the recipe in a collage of images.
  1. Add the vinegar: Remove the veggies from the heat and stir in the apple cider vinegar. Taste the ratatouille for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  2. Garnish and serve: Garnish the ratatouille dish with basil and a pinch of red pepper flakes. If desired, drizzle the stew with a little bit of olive oil right before serving.

What to Serve with Ratatouille?

Savory, tender, and tasty, homemade ratatouille is an unbelievably versatile meal-planning solution. Below, you’ll find all my favorite pairings, from a delicious side to a hearty main dish.

  • Bread: If you want a side dish as easy to make as this quick ratatouille recipe, look no further than these crusty bread recipes. My No Knead Bread and Olive Bread will astound you with their rustic, artisanal taste—with less than five ingredients! Or, if you’re looking for a richer variation, you can enjoy a slice of Garlic Bread in Air Fryer for a robust, toasty accompaniment.
  • Pasta: Bursting with luscious, complex flavors, pasta recipes are a must when you make this French vegetable stew. Ricotta Lemon Pasta strikes a delectable balance between smooth and citrusy flavors, while my Garlic Butter Spaghetti has impeccably bold, sumptuous notes. You can even spoon your ratatouille over a bowl of creamy polenta for a sweet, buttery base to your veggie stew.
  • Meat: Nothing pairs better with a light zucchini ratatouille than a savory cut of meat. I especially love to eat this Mediterranean ratatouille recipe alongside a rosemary-crusted Roasted Rack of Lamb or juicy Oven Beef Kabobs for the most robust, mouthwatering flavors.
One pot ratatouille from the top view.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to making this vegetable ratatouille recipe as tasty and full-bodied as possible. Using these master-level tips, you can make a delectably tender, flavorful summer stew every time.

  • Cut vegetables in equal sizes: When you prepare ratatouille, it’s vital that you cut your vegetables in equal sizes. This way, all your chunky pieces will cook at the same rate, ensuring no piece comes out over- or under-cooked.
  • Salting eggplant: Though an optional step, salting eggplant (also known as sweating eggplant) isn’t necessary when making ratatouille. In the past, eggplants had a bitter flavor, which the salting process could tamp down. However, new agricultural technology has eliminated most of the bitter taste from commercial eggplants, so salting is no longer necessary unless you’re growing eggplants yourself.
  • It gets better as it sits: As odd as it may sound, the best ratatouille recipe is one that has time to sit after cooking. The stew’s flavors will continue to develop and mix as it rests, so if you have time, I highly encourage giving the stew time to sit before serving—even if you wait until the next day to eat it.

FAQs

Want to know more about cooking ratatouille? This basic FAQ will ensure no questions go unanswered, whether you’re curious about flavor profiles or alternate preparation methods.

What does ratatouille taste like?

Savory, fresh, and mildly sweet, ratatouille gets its flavors from tender, sauteed veggies and Mediterranean seasonings. However, its final flavor profile might differ, depending on the balance of fresh herbs and spices you use, so you can prepare a tangier, richer, or earthier finish, depending on your personal preference.

How is your recipe different than Ratatouille’s ratatouille recipe?

There are many different ways to make this iconic dish. The traditional way of preparing ratatouille is to individually saute each vegetable before adding it to the final dish. However, my method makes this traditional French ratatouille recipe easy by simultaneously cooking all its ingredients in a single pot. Furthermore, the version popularized by the animated Disney movie Ratatouille does something different by layering each sliced veggie in a casserole dish—a variation often called “ratatouille casserole.”

How long does it take to make ratatouille?

Though other preparation methods may take longer, my easy French ratatouille recipe takes about 30 minutes to make—the perfect way to make weeknight dinners easy. 

If you make your own Easy Ratatouille Recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Easy ratatouille in a Dutch oven with a wooden spoon on the side.
Print

Easy Ratatouille Recipe

Whip up a vibrant and delicious vegetable stew with this easy ratatouille recipe! In just 40 minutes and one pot, enjoy a medley of eggplant, zucchini, peppers, and tomatoes—a perfect taste of summer. Vegan and gluten-free too!
Course Vegetarian Main Dish
Cuisine French
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 244kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons olive oil plus more for drizzling
  • 1 yellow onion chopped
  • 1 red bell pepper chopped
  • 1 yellow bell pepper chopped
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 5 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 lb. globe eggplant 1 large or two medium- cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 lb. zucchini 2 medium-sized – peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 ½ lbs. tomatoes or three 14-ounce cans of diced tomatoes, cut into small pieces
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme chopped
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sugar brown sugar, coconut sugar, granulated or cane sugar would also work
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
  • 1/4 cup fresh basil leaves loosely packed
  • Pinch red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a large, heavy-bottom pot (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat. Add onion and peppers and saute until softened (8-10 minutes).
  • Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for one more minute.
  • Add eggplant, zucchini, tomatoes, thyme, salt, pepper, and sugar. Bring it to a boil, turn the heat down to medium-low, put the lid on and cook, stirring once or twice, for 20-25 minutes or until the vegetables are fully cooked.
  • Off the heat, stir in the apple cider vinegar. Taste for seasoning and adjust accordingly.
  • Garnish with basil, a pinch of red pepper flakes, and an optional drizzle of extra virgin olive oil right before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of vegetable stew, which is good for 4 servings as a main dish and 6 servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving (of 4).
  • Cutting vegetables: When cutting veggies, make sure that they are equal in size to ensure even cooking.
  • Salting the eggplant: If you are buying your eggplant from a grocery store and in season, you do not need to salt it. Because eggplant that’s freshly picked, harvested before it’s full of seeds, and eaten within a few days is naturally sweet and doesn’t need salting. However, if you are making this recipe using eggplant you harvest yourself (or purchase from farmer’s market), you can salt it before cooking to remove its bitter taste. For reference, check out our detailed post on how to salt eggplant.
  • Storage: To store your ratatouille, place it in an airtight container and transfer it to the refrigerator. Your stew will then stay fresh for 4-5 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers in two easy ways: microwaving them in 30-second increments or heating them on the stovetop until warmed to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 244kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 1218mg | Potassium: 1194mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 2827IU | Vitamin C: 144mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-ratatouille-recipe/feed/ 4
Easy Chicken Shawarma Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-recipe/#comments Fri, 10 May 2024 16:36:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75223 Middle Eastern chicken recipes are essential for anyone who loves savory, aromatic, and juicy flavors. After you try out this…]]>

Middle Eastern chicken recipes are essential for anyone who loves savory, aromatic, and juicy flavors. After you try out this homemade chicken shawarma, you can take your cooking to the next level by making other iconic Middle Eastern recipes, like my tender Shish Tawook and tangy Greek Yogurt Marinade.

Can’t get enough of the shawarma goodness? Also, try our Beef Shawarma recipe.

Mediterranean chicken shawarma served with pickles, lettuce, onion and tomatoes on a plate.

What is Chicken Shawarma?

Chicken shawarma is a quintessential Middle Eastern dish and popular street food made by slow-cooking a large cut of meat on a vertical spit. Chefs then shave off thin slices of meat from the outer edge and add it to the final recipe, whether a chicken shawarma wrap, pita pocket, or bowl.

Technically, shawarma is an Arabic food native to countries like Syria and Lebanon. However, this slow-cooked vertical rotisserie technique has many other versions based on the country of origin. 

For example, I grew up in Turkey eating doner kebabs, which are similar to shawarma except with less seasoning, emphasizing the meat’s natural flavors. Another popular variation is the Greek gyro, which uses a more herbaceous seasoning mix and often includes other meats like pork, lamb, and chicken.

Chicken Shawarma Ingredients

You don’t need to be an expert in Arabic cuisine to make shawarma worthy of a restaurant. Below, I’ve outlined all the ingredients you’ll need to make this simple dish, whether you want to make a marinade for chicken shawarma or are looking for expert topping ideas.

  • Seasoning: When it comes to shawarma chicken seasoning, you have two options: If you’re in a time crunch, you can buy it at the store for an easy, premade mix (my favorite store-bought brand is New York Shuk (affiliate link). Or, you can follow in my footsteps and make your own by following my Shawarma Spice Mix Recipe. If you choose the latter, you’ll need the following ingredients:
    • Ground cumin
    • Ground coriander
    • Paprika
    • Garlic powder
    • Black pepper
    • Ground turmeric
    • Ground cloves
    • Ground cinnamon
    • Ground nutmeg
    • Ground cardamom
Shawarma chicken spices and marinade ingredients from the top view with text on the image.
  • Chicken: I prefer boneless, skinless chicken thighs for this recipe, as they tend to be more flavorful than other cuts. However, depending on your preference, you could also use skinless chicken breasts or a combination of breasts and thighs.
  • Marinade: To make a chicken shawarma marinade, you’ll need a simple mixture of:
    • Kosher salt
    • Fresh lemon juice
    • Olive oil
    • Fresh cloves of garlic: Though it’s optional (the seasoning already has garlic powder), I’d like to add a few cloves of garlic to the marinade.
  • Toppings: One of the best things about this recipe is its easy customization with your favorite chicken shawarma toppings. Of course, you can choose whatever toppings you prefer. Still, if you want to serve your shawarma like I do, I recommend beginning with a sauce (like my favorite Yogurt Garlic Sauce or a classic Tzatziki), then adding tomato, lettuce, and turnip pickles. Furthermore, I also recommend using Middle Eastern bread—such as lavash, pita, or naan—as the dish’s base.

How to Make Shawarma Chicken?

True, a traditional chicken shawarma recipe usually involves slow-roasting the meat on a vertical spit. However, if you don’t have a rotisserie skewer on hand, don’t worry!

Below, you’ll find out how to make a homemade version of traditional shawarma in three easy ways (baked, grilled, and pan-seared)—all without sacrificing an ounce of delicious flavor.

A collage of images showing how to make chicken shawarma marinade.
  1. Make the chicken shawarma seasoning: Place the ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, ground turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom in a large bowl. Mix the spices until thoroughly combined, then set them aside. 
  2. Dry the chicken: Use paper towels to pat dry the chicken thighs, then sprinkle both sides with salt.
  3. Marinate: Place the chicken in a large bowl. Then, add the shawarma seasoning, lemon juice, olive oil, and garlic (if used) and combine. Cover the bowl with stretch film and let the meat marinate for three hours or overnight.
A collage of images showing how to cook shawarma chicken in the oven, on the stove and on the grill.
  1. Cook the meat: You have three choices when it’s time to cook your chicken:
    • To make an oven-roasted chicken shawarma, preheat your oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.), and arrange the marinated chicken on a baking sheet. Place the pan in the middle rack and bake the chicken for 18-20 minutes or until the thickest part of the meat registers 165 degrees F. with a digital thermometer. If you want more thoroughly browned chicken, move the pan to the top rack and broil it for 2-3 minutes, ensuring you keep a close eye on the meat.
    • To make chicken shawarma on the stovetop, heat a large skillet over medium-high heat until hot (cast-iron, stainless steel, or non-stick pans would all work in this variation). Place the marinated thighs on the hot skillet and cook the first side for 4-5 minutes or until lightly charred. Then, turn the chicken to their other side and cook for another three minutes or until the meat reaches 165 degrees F. Depending on the size of your skillet, it may be best to cook your chicken in two batches to avoid overcrowding.
    • To make grilled shawarma chicken, begin by preheating your grill to 450 degrees F. Then, scrape the grill grates to remove any food residue and brush them generously with vegetable oil. Once the grill is heated, place the chicken on the grates, close the cover, and cook the thighs for five minutes on one side. Finish the cooking process by turning the chicken pieces to the other side and continue grilling for 3-4 minutes or until your chicken is cooked.
Freshly cooked chicken shawarma recipe on a plate.
  1. Rest and serve: Transfer the cooked chicken shawarma onto a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for five minutes. Once rested, serve the meat with your favorite toppings and enjoy.

How to Serve Chicken Shawarma?

Want to make the most of this Lebanese chicken shawarma recipe? Not only can you customize your shawarma toppings, but you can also choose how you want to eat it—in a wrap, pocket, bowl, or beyond!

Chicken Shawarma wrap made two ways, one with flatbread and one in a pita pocket.
  • Make it a wrap: One of the most iconic ways to enjoy this chicken dish is to turn it into a Middle Eastern wrap. Simply place the chicken slices on a flatbread, like lavash or naan bread, or sliced pita bread to make a shawarma pocket. To lend it creamy, nutty notes, you can also spread your bread with tahini sauce, like my tangy Yogurt Tahini Sauce. For a zesty and herby twist, try my Schug Sauce or Lemon Tahini Sauce. Finally, top the wrap with fresh ingredients, such as tomatoes, lettuce, pink turnip pickles, and pickled red onion, and enjoy.
  • Chicken Shawarma Bowl: If you’re not looking to make a handheld meal, this chicken shawarma couldn’t be easier to transform into a fork-ready meal. Serve your chicken pieces atop a base of savory Bulgur Pilaf or tender vermicelli rice, then top it with sliced tomatoes, cucumbers, and a dollop of Hummus. Voila! A complete, hassle-free meal.

What to Serve with Chicken Shawarma?

There are countless ways to enjoy this quick chicken shawarma recipe. Whether you’re in the mood for a chicken shawarma pita wrap or a hearty bowl of greens, these ideas will take your basic recipe to the next level.

  • Tzatziki Sauce: Want a classic chicken shawarma sauce to serve with your succulent main? I’ve got you covered. Tzatziki strikes a delectable balance between light and tangy flavors, perfectly balancing the chicken’s savory, well-spiced flavors.
  • Tabbouleh: Flavorful yet filling, tabbouleh is a delicious grain that transforms your protein into a complete meal. Try your chicken shawarma alongside my Turkish Tabbouleh Recipe or Quinoa Tabbouleh for an irresistibly bright, Mediterranean taste. 
  • Salad: You don’t need a grain to turn this Greek shawarma into a tasty meal. Try using your chicken to top a crispy-fresh Greek salad or a juicy tomato salad, like my ten-minute Piyaz, and you’ll never be at a loss for quick lunch ideas again.
  • Drink: If you want to do it as they do it in the Middle East, skip the soda and serve it with the popular salted yogurt drink (aka ayran). This refreshing drink cools it down and helps balance the flavors of the spicy chicken.

How to Store and Freeze?

After trying this home shawarma, you won’t want to let a single bite go to waste. These foolproof storage tips will keep your chicken as fresh and flavorful as possible—just what you need for easy meal prep!

  • Storage: Planning to store this dish from the get-go? I highly encourage storing each shawarma ingredient—such as the meat, toppings, and bread—in separate containers to ensure the utmost freshness. Then, you can store your cooked shawarma chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. When ready to eat, reheat the slices and assemble your final dish just before serving.
  • Freezing: The best way to freeze this dish is to place your raw chicken and its marinade in an airtight container in the freezer. That way, you have a ready-made meal whenever the craving strikes. However, if you want to freeze leftovers, bring your chicken to room temperature and place it in an airtight container or freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. Then, store it in the freezer until ready to thaw. 
  • Thawing & reheating: To thaw your frozen shawarma, begin by placing it in the fridge overnight. Then, reheat it in a preheated 350-degree F. oven for at least five minutes or until warmed to your liking. Once heated through, your chicken is ready to eat!

FAQs

Want to know more about this Arabic chicken shawarma recipe? Below, you’ll find answers to any remaining questions, from taste profiles to regional variations.

What does chicken shawarma taste like?

Rich, complex, and savory, chicken shawarma gets its big flavors from a warm and mildly spicy mix of traditional Middle Eastern ingredients, such as cumin, cloves, and cardamom. Furthermore, it’s traditionally cooked using a vertical spit, giving each slice a tender yet crisp finish that tastes amazing when added to dishes like Mediterranean wraps, bowls, and pita pockets.

What is the difference between shawarma and gyros?

In essence, the cooking process for shawarma and gyros is the same, as both use a vertical spit to slowly cook a large cut of meat in a rotisserie-like fashion. However, these two street foods call for slightly different seasoning mixes. For instance, Middle Eastern shawarma usually has a chicken base and a bolder mix of warm, fragrant spices. By contrast, gyros have a Grecian background and, as a result, have a lighter, more herby seasoning mix.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Easy Chicken Shawarma following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Chicken shawarma served with lettuce, tomatoes, pickles and garlic yogurt sauce on a plate.
Print

Easy Chicken Shawarma Recipe

Bring the Middle East home with this Easy Chicken Shawarma recipe. Boneless chicken thighs marinated with shawarma seasoning cooked to perfection and then served in warm pita pockets (or flatbread.) This is a feast anyone can make with this foolproof recipe.
Course Chicken, Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 35 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 492kcal

Ingredients

For The Shawarma Seasoning

  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon ground cardamom

For The Marinade:

  • 2 lbs. Boneless skinless chicken thighs about 8 chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic minced (optional)

To Serve (optional):

Instructions

  • Add ground cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamom in a large bowl. Mix until thoroughly combined. Set it aside.
  • Pat dry chicken thighs with paper towels and sprinkle them with salt on both sides.
  • Transfer them into the bowl with the spices.
  • Add lemon juice, olive oil, and garlic if using. Stir to combine.
  • Cover it with stretch film and marinate it for 1 hour or overnight.

To bake in the oven:

  • Preheat your oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.). Arrange the marinated chicken on the sheet pan and place it in the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of a chicken registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes (while watching it closely).

To cook on the stovetop:

  • Heat a large skillet (cast iron, stainless steel, or non-stick would all work) over medium-high heat until hot. Place chicken thighs on the skillet. Cook the first side for 4-5 minutes or until lightly charred. Turn and cook the other side for another 3 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked (until it reaches 165 degrees F.) Depending on the size of your skillet, it is best to do this in two batches instead of overcrowding the pan.

To grill:

  • Preheat your grill to 450 degrees Fahrenheit. Clean grill grates and brush them generously with vegetable oil. Place the chicken on the grill, close it with the cover, and cook for 5 minutes on the first side. Turn the chicken and cook for another 3-4 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F. when an instant-read thermometer is inserted in the thickest part of the meat.

Cooking it on a vertical skewer pan (or the make shift version*)

  • Assemble a vertical skewer pan according to the packaging instructions. Prepare the chicken as directed in the recipe.
  • Preheat oven to 375 degrees F. Thread the marinated chicken onto the skewer, stacking the pieces tightly, and rotating each one as you go. This helps the stack hold together and ensures even cooking. If there’s any marinade left in the bowl, spoon it over the stack.
  • Transfer it onto a baking sheet and pop it in the oven. Bake for 1 ¼ to 1 ½ hours or until the thickest part of the stack registers 165 degrees F, basting it with a spoon halfway through the baking process.
  • Remove from the oven, let it rest, and slice before serving.

To serve:

  • Transfer the cooked chicken shawarma onto a plate. Cover with foil and let it rest for 5 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, prepare your garnishes. Make a batch of our yogurt tahini sauce (or tzatziki), slice a few tomatoes, and chop some lettuce.
  • Slice chicken into ½-inch strips, reserving the juices.
  • To make a shawarma wrap, spread your bread with a generous amount of tahini sauce and top it off with shawarma chicken, tomatoes, and lettuce. Alternatively, use pita bread: slice it in half to use the pocket, filling it with the sauce, meat, and vegetables. Drizzle the wrap with the leftover juices and more tahini sauce over the top, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 6 people generously with about 1 ¼ chicken thighs per person. The nutritional values below include the toppings and they are per serving.
  • Shawarma Seasoning: If you prefer not to make your own shawarma seasoning, you can buy it from the store. Our favorite brand is NYShuk (affiliate link) and we recommend using 2 tablespoons of shawarma spice per pound of meat.
  • Marinating time: While it requires some advance prep, I highly recommend marinating your meat in shawarma chicken spices before cooking. This is the secret to making the best chicken shawarma recipe. The marination process allows the seasoning to fully infuse the meat with smoky, savory flavors, ensuring each bite has the same depth and complexity. For best results, marinate your chicken for at least one hour or overnight before cooking.
  • High-heat cooking: High heat is a must in this recipe, whether baking, grilling, or cooking your chicken on the stovetop. Properly heating your cooking vessel helps sear the outside of the meat, create a crispy edge, and lock in the juices—a similar taste to what a traditional roasting spit would make. 
  • Let the meat rest: Another great way to get the most flavorful chicken shawarma is to rest 10-15 minutes after cooking. Doing so allows the meat reabsorb and evenly distribute its juices, giving each slice a succulent, bold flavor.
  • Storage: You can store your cooked shawarma chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. 
  • Make-shift vertical spit: Alternatively, you can make your own “make-shift” vertical skewer pan. To do so, take a large onion, cut it in half, and run a skewer through the flat side, creating a sturdy base. Transfer it onto the baking sheet, and then thread the marinated chicken onto the skewer, just like you would with the vertical skewer pan. Please watch the how-to video for a visual.

Nutrition

Calories: 492kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 150mg | Sodium: 1316mg | Potassium: 579mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1420IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 142mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-recipe/feed/ 3
Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/#comments Thu, 09 May 2024 15:35:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75139 Ingredients You’ll Need While you’ll find the full ingredient list and exact measurements in the recipe card below, here are…]]>

The Art of Using Greek Yogurt in Savory Recipes

Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

When I first moved to the US over 20 years ago, my friends would tease me for adding plain yogurt to almost everything. Growing up in Türkiye, that was just how we ate. 

I still can’t imagine a savory meal without a scoop of yogurt on the side.

While the US has finally embraced yogurt as a breakfast staple, there is a whole world of savory possibilities for this ingredient. And let me tell you, we haven’t even scratched the surface of what it can do.

This Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce is the perfect place to start.

Here is why this recipe works where others fail:

  • Room-temperature ingredients are key: I know it’s tempting to grab the yogurt right out of the fridge when you’re in a hurry, but please take the chill off first! If you drop ice-cold yogurt into a hot pan, it basically “panics” and seizes up, which is how you end up with that grainy, separated mess. Just let all your ingredients sit on the counter for 10-15 minutes while the water boils. Giving it a little head start at room temperature is the easiest way to guarantee your sauce stays nice and silky.
  • Low & controlled heat is key to preventing curdling: Many creamy sauces require a rolling boil to thicken and become creamy. Yogurt, however, is prone to curdling because it has a lower fat-to-protein ratio than heavy cream. The “secret” here is to keep the heat low and only warm the sauce until it’s silky and combined.
  • The Umami Balance: While you can mimic the texture, you often run into a taste issue. Greek yogurt is naturally tangy, and it can be overwhelming on its own. My solution here is Parmesan cheese. I use it not only to tame the tangy flavor of yogurt but also to round out its acidity with its salty umami notes. This is why I can confidently say this sauce is a good alternative to a rich, creamy traditional Alfredo.
  • Starch as the Emulsifier: Instead of using a roux or flour, we use starchy pasta water to bind the yogurt and cheese. This way, the sauce won’t slide off the pasta or separate.
  • A “Lighter” Decadence: You get a similar, satisfying mouthfeel to a traditional cream sauce, with a protein boost and none of the heavy feeling afterward.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Ingredients You’ll Need

While you’ll find the full ingredient list and exact measurements in the recipe card below, here are a few helpful notes to keep in mind as you gather everything.

Flat lay of ingredients for Greek yogurt pasta sauce including fettuccine, a bowl of yogurt, garlic cloves, and fresh parsley on a marble surface.

Pasta: I usually reach for a long pasta (like fettuccine and spaghetti), as it pairs well with creamy sauces, but any pasta you enjoy will work.

However, penne or similar shapes work just as well. If you are following a gluten-free diet, feel free to use your favorite gluten-free pasta. And for a veggie-packed option, my zucchini noodles are also a great alternative.

Greek yogurt: Be sure to use plain, full-fat Greek yogurt and let it come to room temperature before starting. Low-fat or nonfat yogurt is more likely to curdle and doesn’t have the same silky consistency because it doesn’t have enough fat.

Short on time? I get it, if you are making it for a quick weeknight dinner, it is likely that you won’t have the time to take out the yogurt in advance. A good shortcut is to put the yogurt in a jar and soak it in a bowl of warm water for 5 minutes.

Butter: I use unsalted butter so I can control the seasoning more precisely. Olive oil can also be used, but I prefer the depth of flavor you get with butter.

Garlic: Fresh garlic is best for this recipe. Peel and mince it finely so it softens quickly without browning. For a lighter garlic flavor, you can use ¾ to 1 teaspoon garlic powder.

Parmesan cheese: Pick up a block of Parmigiana Reggiano (and grate it yourself) or buy the grated cheese containers near the cheese section. Pecorino Romano can be a great substitute if need be.

Red pepper flakes (optional): A small pinch adds a gentle heat; you can leave them out if you prefer a milder dish.

Nutmeg (optional): If you are making this as an Alfredo sauce alternative, add a pinch of nutmeg to mimic the classic Alfredo sauce.

How to Make Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce

Making this pasta sauce with Greek yogurt recipe is simple and takes no more than 20 minutes from start to finish. 

The key is gentle heat and a little patience when warming the yogurt. Here’s how I make it:

Side by side image showing fettuccine boiling in a pot and a hand reserving a cup of starchy pasta water for the sauce.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: Start by bringing a large pot of generously salted water to a boil. Add the pasta and cook according to the package directions until al dente, about 12 to 14 minutes. 

Pro Tip: Your pasta should have a slight bite. If you cook it too long, it will likely get mushy when mixed with the sauce.

Step 2 – Reserve the pasta water: Before draining, carefully reserve 1 cup of the pasta cooking water (you won’t need all of it, but it’s good to have extra). 

This starchy water is essential for loosening the sauce later and helping it coat the pasta smoothly. Drain the cooked pasta and set it aside.

Two-panel image showing garlic sautéing in butter and shredded Parmesan cheese being whisked into a creamy Greek yogurt base.

Step 3 – Sauté the garlic: Return the now-empty pot to the stove and melt the butter over medium-low heat. Add the minced garlic and cook for about 1-2 minutes, just until fragrant. Adjust the heat as needed to avoid burning the butter or garlic.

Step 4 – Make the yogurt sauce: Reduce the heat to very low. Add the full-fat, room-temperature Greek yogurt and Parmesan cheese. Stir constantly for 1-2 minutes, just until the yogurt is gently warmed and the cheese has fully melted.

Do not let the sauce simmer, boil, or bubble. The yogurt should warm slowly. Add the reserved pasta water gradually, 1 tablespoon at a time, stirring continuously, until the sauce loosens and reaches your desired consistency. This starchy water is what helps emulsify the yogurt and cheese into a velvety sauce that clings to the noodles.

Pro Tip: This process, adding warm pasta water gradually into cool yogurt, is called tempering, and it is critical to making this recipe work. If you add it in large quantities without whisking, the proteins in the sauce will “panic,” and your yogurt pasta sauce will likely curdle.

This is also a good time to season with salt and black pepper to taste.

A collage of images showing cooked fettuccine being tossed in yogurt sauce and the final garnished pasta in the pot.

Step 5 – Add the pasta to the yogurt sauce: Add the drained pasta to the pot and gently toss with kitchen tongs until all the noodles are evenly coated with the sauce.

Step 6 – Garnish and serve: Transfer the pasta to a serving bowl and finish with chopped fresh parsley, red pepper flakes (if using), and extra Parmesan cheese. Serve while it is still warm.

A large bowl of creamy fettuccine made with a Greek yogurt pasta sauce, topped with fresh parsley and red pepper flakes.

Troubleshooting Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce

If you follow this yogurt sauce for pasta recipe as written, you should not run into any issues. That said, if something looks off, here are a few ways to fix things:

How to fix a broken sauce?: Remove the pan from the heat and whisk in a small amount of additional Greek yogurt, about 1 tablespoon, until the sauce comes back together.

Sauce looks grainy: This usually means the heat was too high. Lower the heat and continue stirring gently. The sauce should be warmed through, not cooked for a long time or allowed to bubble.

It’s too thick. How do I thin it out?: Add more reserved pasta water, no more than 1 tablespoon at a time, stirring well between each addition until the sauce loosens to your liking.

Greek yogurt alfredo sauce mixed with cooked noodles in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce Recipe

This creamless Greek yogurt pasta sauce is silky-smooth and ready in just 20 minutes. It's a protein-packed alternative to Alfredo that uses a simple trick; slowly whisking in warm pasta water-to keep the yogurt from curdling at low heat. A budget-friendly, five-ingredient meal that feels fancy but is easy enough for a busy weeknight.
Course Dinner, Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 375kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces fettuccine pasta or other pasta, such as spaghetti
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled and minced
  • 1 cup plain whole milk Greek yogurt at room temperature
  • cup shredded parmesan cheese plus more as garnish
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt plus more for the pasta cooking water
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup parsley roughly chopped
  • 1/8 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of generously salted water to a boil and cook the pasta according to the package directions to al dente, about 12-14 minutes.
  • Reserve 1 cup pasta water then drain the pasta. We won't need all of it, but it is good to have enough. Set aside.
  • Place the now-empty pot on the stove. Add the butter and melt over medium heat.
  • Whisk in the garlic and cook for 1 minute or until translucent. Lower the heat, if needed, to avoid browning.
  • While still on low heat, add in the Greek yogurt and parmesan cheese. Cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or two just until the yogurt is warmed through and the cheese is melted. Add the reserved pasta water as needed, 1 tablespoon at a time, to thin and smooth out the sauce.
  • Season the sauce with salt and pepper. Taste and adjust seasoning.
  • Add the drained pasta to the pot and gently toss to ensure all the pasta is coated with the sauce.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and top with parsley, parmesan cheese and red pepper flakes, if preferred. Serve!

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of pasta sauce, which, when mixed with cooked pasta, serves 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving. 
  • Use full-fat yogurt: This recipe requires thick, whole-milk Greek yogurt, so I do not recommend substituting it with regular yogurt. The proper fat-to-protein ratio and warming it over low heat prevent the sauce from curdling.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Gently warm it in a large skillet or pan on the stovetop over low heat, stirring frequently. The sauce will thicken as it sits in the fridge, so add a splash of water to restore it to a smooth consistency.
  • Optional mix-ins: This sauce is a great base for added vegetables. To keep it quick, sauté a handful of baby spinach or sliced mushrooms in a bit of olive oil in the pot before starting Step 3, then set them aside. Once your pasta and sauce are combined, simply fold the veggies back in for an easy veggie-packed pasta dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 375kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 80mg | Sodium: 909mg | Potassium: 295mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1007IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 240mg | Iron: 2mg

How to Store and Reheat

Here are my best tips for storing and reheating this creamy yogurt-based pasta sauce:

  • Storage: Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
  • Reheating: Gently reheat the pasta on the stovetop over low heat, stirring frequently. Add a splash of water as needed to loosen the sauce and restore its smooth consistency. Do your best to avoid letting it simmer for too long or boil.
  • Microwave: I do not recommend reheating this sauce in the microwave on high heat, as it can cause the yogurt to separate. If you do use the microwave, reheat in short 15-20 second intervals at low power, stirring in between.
  • Freezing: You can technically freeze Greek yogurt sauces, but I do not recommend it. If you have to, then be sure to store the pasta sauce separately, as cooked pasta loses its texture when thawed.

What to Serve With This Recipe

So you made this Greek yogurt pasta sauce and mixed it with some spaghetti, and now you want to turn it into a whole meal? Well, I am glad you asked because I have a few great suggestions:

Other Savory Yogurt Recipes

If you enjoy cooking with yogurt in savory dishes, there are so many delicious ways to use it beyond pasta sauce.

Below are a few yogurt-based recipes that I think you’ll enjoy:

  • Five-minute Creamy Salad Dressing (or Sauce): This Greek Yogurt Dressing is creamy, easy to make, and comes together in less than 5 minutes. It tastes better than store-bought dressing and is delicious drizzled over salads, grain bowls, or roasted vegetables.
  • The most loved Turkish Breakfast: If there is one dish that instantly takes me back to my childhood, it’s Turkish Eggs. Silky poached eggs are served over garlicky yogurt and finished with a warm chili butter sauce.
  • Tangy Meal Prep Solution: This Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade is bright, tangy, and incredibly versatile. Made with Greek yogurt, lemon, and fresh herbs, it works beautifully whether you grill, bake, or pan-cook the chicken.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/feed/ 9
Grilled Rack Of Lamb https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-rack-of-lamb/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-rack-of-lamb/#comments Wed, 24 Apr 2024 20:06:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74881 In this foolproof guide, I’ll show you how to cook a rack of lamb on a grill, tasty seasoning ideas,…]]>

In this foolproof guide, I’ll show you how to cook a rack of lamb on a grill, tasty seasoning ideas, and the ideal temperature and grilling time to ensure your grilled lamb comes out as flavorful and juicy as possible.

Barbecue rack of lamb on a plate garnished with thyme and mint sauce.

Ingredients

This grilled rack of lamb recipe requires only two simple sets of ingredients: the meat and the seasoning. Even better, this five-minute seasoning recipe also doubles as an easy marinade!

These simple ingredients can probably be found in your kitchen pantry, making this grilled dish a must-have for outdoor BBQs, weeknight dinners, and summer get-togethers.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Rack of Lamb

  • Frenched racks of lamb: I used two Frenched racks of lamb—each weighing 1 – 1½ lbs.—to make this grilling recipe. “Frenched” refers to the preparation method in which butchers remove excess meat, fat, and cartilage from the exterior bones of the lamb rack, giving the meat a gorgeous presentation and ensuring easy carving after you cook it. You should be able to buy Frenched lamb chops from your local grocery store, but—if they don’t have any on hand—you can also ask your butcher to French the lamb for you, or you can French the meat at home if you need a quick homemade solution. Whether you purchase this cut Frenched or not, remember to select racks that are similar in weight and size to ensure even cooking.

Seasoning

  • Olive oil: I use regular olive oil for this recipe, but extra virgin olive oil would also work, depending on your taste preferences and what you have at home.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: I recommend using finely minced or pressed garlic cloves in your grilled rack of lamb seasoning. This fine processing allows the garlic to better release its flavor, more evenly coat the meat, and avoid burning during the grilling process.
  • Fresh herbs: My favorite herbs to use when grilling a rack of lamb are fresh rosemary or thyme, as their piney, earthy notes perfectly complement the lamb’s natural richness. However, I also used parsley to cut the potency of these other herbs while still giving my meat a garden-fresh finish.
  • Lemon zest and juice: The bright citrus flavor and mild sweetness of lemon are just what you need to help tamp down lamb’s (sometimes) gamey flavor. Plus, depending on how long you let your lamb marinate, the lemon juice’s acidity also helps tenderize the meat while it rests, breaking down its fibers and giving it a melt-in-your-mouth texture after grilling.
  • Dijon mustard: This ingredient is optional, but it lends a deliciously tangy, sharp taste to this BBQ rack of lamb recipe. You only need one teaspoon of Dijon mustard to give your meat an extra complex flavor.
  • Kosher salt and pepper

How to Grill Rack of Lamb?

With my no-fuss cooking method, learning how to grill a lamb rack is a cinch. These step-by-step instructions ensure your meat reaches the perfect temperature and has a savory, zesty, and herbaceous finish.

A collage of images showing a person preparing rack of lamb to cook it on gas grill.
  1. Prepare the meat: Remove any excess fat and silver skin from your racks of lamb. Too much fat might lead to flare-ups during the grilling process, so doing so will keep your grill’s flames as tame as possible. Then, pat dry the meat on all sides and sprinkle them with kosher salt and pepper.
  2. Make the lamb marinade: In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil, garlic, thyme parsley, lemon zest, and lemon juice. 
  3. Marinate the lamb: Once thoroughly mixed, spread the herb rub over the top and sides of the lamb racks, cover them with stretch film, and let them come to room temperature (30-60 minutes).
A collage of images showing how to barbecue rack of lamb.
  1. Prep the grill:
    1. Gas grill: Turn the grill burners to “high,” cover the grill, and let it preheat to 450 degrees F. (230 degrees C.). As the grill heats, scrape the grates of any food residue and wipe them down with a paper towel dipped in olive oil to generously coat the grates. Then, right before searing your lamb, turn off all the burners except for the primary one, then close its cover until it reaches 450 degrees F. again.
    2. Charcoal grill: Light up your grill, being sure that you create a “hot zone”—an area directly over the hot coals—and a “cool zone” (i.e., an area that’s not directly over the coals). Then, just as you would for a gas grill, scrape and oil the grates and wait until the coals ash over.
  2. Sear the meat: Place each rack of lamb over the hot side of the grill/primary burner, ensuring that their fat side down. Cover the grill and let the meat sear for five minutes.
  3. Grill the lamb rack over low heat: Turn over the lamb racks and reposition them, bone side down, over the cooler end of the grill (i.e., over the secondary burner that you turned off earlier). While keeping the primary burner on, cover the grill and cook the lamb for 15-17 minutes or until you reach your preferred level of doneness (be sure to check the temperature and doneness guide below.)
Person cutting grilled rack of lamb.
  1. Let the meat rest: Transfer the grilled frenched lamb rack to a cutting board, tent it loosely with aluminum foil, and rest for ten minutes.
  2. Carve and serve: Hold the rack vertically so its exposed ribs point toward the ceiling. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the lamb between the ribs, place the individual lamb chops on a serving platter, and enjoy!

Grilled Rack of Lamb Time & Temperature Guide

Below is a simple guide that will walk you through all the details about temperature, timing, and resting so that your racks come out as succulent, smoky, and perfectly cooked as possible.

  • Weight of the lamb: Before considering how long to grill your meat, you should assess the weight of your cut. There’s a direct correlation between the weight of the meat and how long it takes to cook, so if you have racks of lamb that are lighter or heavier than 1 – 1 ½ lbs., you’ll have to adjust your grill time accordingly.
  • Direct and indirect heat: I found that the best way to grill a rack of lamb is by getting the grill’s temperature up to 450 degrees F., then alternating the meat between the hot and cool sides of the grates. More specifically, I began by searing my racks of lamb over direct heat (AKA the “hot zone”) for five minutes, then flipping them to cook over indirect heat (AKA the “cool zone”) until done. That being said, how long it takes to grill a rack of lamb on a gas grill or charcoal grill depends on your preferred level of doneness. After the initial five minutes of searing time, your lamb must grill for an additional 14-20 minutes before it’s ready to remove from the heat.
  • Carry-over cooking: Due to carry-over heat, your meat will continue to cook even after you take it off the grill. Therefore, your lamb’s final temperature will increase by 5 degrees F. (or so) during the resting period.
  • Instant-read thermometer: Because grilling can be technical, a digital meat thermometer will be your best friend when trying to gauge the temperature of your grilled rack of lamb. Simply insert the probe into the thickest part of the meat, avoiding contact with the bones, to get an accurate reading.

Below, I’ve included a table showing precisely what temperatures and cooking times you should aim for to achieve your ideal level of doneness. Remember, too, that the approximate grilling time listed refers to the lamb’s cooking time over indirect heat—in other words, the additional grilling time necessary after its five-minute sear.

(Note: While you can cook your lamb anywhere from medium-rare to medium-well, I should also mention that the USDA recommends cooking lamb to a minimum of 145 degrees F. (63 degrees C.) to ensure the meat is as safe as possible to eat, as this heat eliminates any harmful bacteria.)

Level of DonenessApproximate Grilling Time at 450 degrees F. (After Initial Searing)Internal Temperature at Which to Remove the Meat From the GrillFinal Serving Temperature
Medium-rare12-14 minutes120-125 degrees F. (49-51 degrees C.)130 degrees F. (54 degrees C.)
Medium15-17 minutes130-135 degrees F. (54-57 degrees C.)140 degrees F. (60 degrees C.)
Medium-well18-20 minutes140-145 degrees F. (60-63 degrees C.)150 degrees F. (66 degrees C.)

How to Make Ahead, Store Leftovers, & Reheat

This barbecue lamb rack is a great recipe for easy meal prep, whether you want to prepare it beforehand or enjoy your leftovers throughout the week. 

  • Make ahead: You can prepare your racks of lamb up to one day in advance. To do so, cut and trim your lamb, pat it dry, season it with salt and pepper, and cover its top and sides with marinade. Then, cover the lamb with stretch film and store it in the refrigerator overnight. Just be sure to remove your lamb from the fridge 30-60 minutes before grilling, as this resting time will allow the meat to come to room temperature.
  • Storage: You can store your lamb in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days after grilling. I recommend storing your grilled lamb unsliced, as the whole cut will retain its juices better during reheating. However, you may store the individual chops if you’ve already sliced the rack. 
  • Reheating: To reheat your lamb, I highly recommend placing it in a low-heat oven (275-300 degrees F.) for 5-10 minutes or until heated through. Though others may opt to reheat their meat in the microwave, I find that reheating it in the oven results in much more succulent, evenly heated lamb chops.
  • Freezing: For longer storage, you may store your grilled lamb—sliced or whole—in the freezer for 2-3 months. Just be sure to place your meat in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible, and thaw the frozen lamb in the refrigerator overnight when ready to eat.
Grilled Frenched rack of lamb on a cutting board.

What to Serve with Grilled Rack of Lamb?

Want to build a menu fit for the ultimate backyard barbecue or weeknight dinner? When you cook a rack of lamb on the grill, the sky’s the limit! Below are all my favorite menu ideas, from luscious sauces to veggie-packed sides.

  • Sauces: I love serving my grilled lamb rack with a classic British Mint Sauce, adding brilliantly fresh notes to this savory main. However, if you’re looking for a creamier option, my Tzatziki Sauce and Mint Yogurt Sauce offer a tangy, cool finish perfect for lamb dishes.
  • Barbecue season sides: No cookout is complete without show-stopping side dishes. If you’re hankering for fresh, Mexican fare, my Black Bean Corn Salad and Mexican Street Corn strike a delectable balance between zesty, herby, and garden-fresh taste. For an even more decadent dish, Deviled Egg Potato Salad has all the tender, creamy, and tangy flavor you need to satisfy everyone in your party. Or, if you’re short on time but still want to treat your guests to an iconic menu, you can whip up a Classic Caesar Salad in less than twenty minutes.

FAQs

Want to know more about how to grill a rack of lamb? In this beginner-friendly FAQ, I’ve included all the must-have information about this mouthwatering recipe, including grill temperatures, nutritional information, and ideal cooking times.

What temperature do you grill lamb at?

I found that the ideal rack of lamb grill temperature is 450 degrees F., as this high heat gives the meat a delectably crisp exterior while trapping its succulent juices inside. Depending on your desired level of doneness, you’ll need to cook your meat for 17-25 minutes at this temperature, alternating between direct and indirect heat.

How long does it take to grill a rack of lamb?

How long it takes to grill a rack of lamb on a gas grill or charcoal grill depends on your desired doneness. As a rule, you should begin by searing your lamb over direct high heat for five minutes at 450 degrees F. Then, after transferring the lamb to the cooler side of the grill, you’ll need to continue grilling for an additional 12-20 minutes.

If you try this Grilled Rack of Lamb recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Grilled rack of lamb sliced on a cutting board.
Print

Grilled Rack of Lamb Recipe

Enjoy tender, juicy grilled rack of lamb, flavored with a garlic and herb rub, for a perfect, easy-to-follow recipe that delivers robust taste perfect for the BBQ season.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 533kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 Frenched racks of lamb 1 to 1 ½ pounds each (approximately the same weight) 16 ribs in total
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 4 tablespoons olive oil plus more to coat the grill grates
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced (~2 tablespoons)
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme or rosemary – minced
  • 2 cups fresh parsley loosely packed & finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice

Instructions

  • To prepare the rack of lamb, remove any excessive fat and “silver skin” from the fat cap. Pat the lamb dry on all sides. Sprinkle each rack with kosher salt and pepper on both sides.
  • Combine olive oil, garlic, thyme, parsley, lemon zest, and juice in a small bowl to make the herb rub.
  • Spread the prepared herb rub on the top and sides of the lamb.
  • Cover with stretch film and let the racks come to room temperature for 30-60 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, turn all the grill’s burners high, then cover and preheat the grill to 450 degrees F. (230 C.). Scrape the grates of any possible food residue, then generously coat them with olive oil using a soaked paper towel.
  • Right before searing the meat, turn off all burners except for the primary one. Close the grill’s cover, making sure it reaches 450 degrees F.
  • Place the racks of lamb on the primary burner with their fat caps facing down. Cover and grill for 5 minutes. This will sear the meat and lock in its juices.
  • Turn the racks over and transfer them bone-side down on the secondary burner/cool side (that was shut off), keeping the primary one on. Cover the grill and cook for 15-17 minutes or until you achieve your preferred doneness.
  • Remove the racks from the grill, place them on a cutting board, and loosely tent them with aluminum foil. Let the racks rest for 10 minutes.
  • When ready to serve, hold the lamb vertically so its exposed rib bones point toward the ceiling, then use a sharp chef’s knife to cut between the ribs to separate the chops.
  • Transfer onto a serving platter and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 16 ribs, which is ideal for four servings (4 ribs per person). The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Take the time to remove the excess fat and silver skin: If you don’t want your grill’s flames to flare up while cooking your lamb, I highly encourage you to remove its excess fat before grilling. Of course, some fat is essential to giving lamb its signature richness. However, too much fat will lead to drippings that attract and fuel flames, thereby scorching your meat. Furthermore, removing the lamb’s silver skin—the connective tissue that holds the muscles together—will help reduce the lamb’s gamey flavor.
  • Take the rack of lamb out 30-60 min. before grilling: Be sure to let your meat reach room temperature before grilling. This way, the lamb will cook evenly throughout its body and better align with optimal cooking times.
  • Don’t skip scraping and oiling the grill grates: Before barbecuing a rack of lamb, you must scrape and oil your grill’s grates. Doing so will remove debris and residue from the grilling surface and ensure the meat doesn’t stick while cooking.
  • Maintaining the temperature: The key to getting the most reliable, evenly cooked meat is maintaining a steady grill temperature—in this case, 450 degrees. If your grill’s temperature drops, try covering it until the heat returns to your desired temperature.
  • Covering the rib bones: If you’ve seen other chefs prepare a barbecue rack of lamb, you might have seen them cover the lamb’s exposed ribs with aluminum foil to avoid burning. Though this step is optional, I found it unnecessary when putting a lamb rack on the BBQ, as the bones didn’t scorch during the short grilling time.
  • Let the lamb rest: After cooking a rack of lamb on the barbecue, you must let it rest for a minimum of 10-15 minutes. This resting time will allow the meat to reach its final desired temperature.
  • Storage: Leftover grilled lamb can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. I recommend storing it unsliced, as the whole cut will retain its juices better during reheating. However, you may store the chops if you’ve already sliced the rack. 

Nutrition

Calories: 533kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 100g | Saturated Fat: 40g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 45g | Cholesterol: 189mg | Sodium: 738mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 2613IU | Vitamin C: 47mg | Calcium: 94mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-rack-of-lamb/feed/ 3
Raw Carrot Salad https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/#comments Thu, 18 Apr 2024 17:31:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74840 The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s…]]>

The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s research, raw carrots contain a unique fiber that, when mixed with a touch of healthy fats (like coconut oil) and vinegar, can bind to excess estrogen and safely eliminate it from the body. This is good for hormone balance and gut health. And with this raw carrot salad recipe, it’s so easy to incorporate this health trend into your diet.

If you are wondering what to do with grated carrots, check out a few of our other raw carrot recipes, including Kale and Apple Slaw and Yogurt Coleslaw.

A bowl of shaved raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

The good news is that this vegan carrot salad uses just a handful of ingredients you probably already have on hand:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Carrots: If possible, use organic carrots, as these will provide the highest nutritional content and a good source of fiber. You will need about 3 large carrots (or 10 oz total). I simply cut off the ends, remove the outer layer, and slice them lengthwise with a vegetable peeler. You can also slice your carrots with a julienne peeler, grate them on a box grater, or use the large grating attachment on your food processor.
  • Fresh herbs: I love a ton of fresh parsley in this carrot vinegar salad, but you can also try any of your favorite soft herbs, such as fresh cilantro, mint, or dill.
  • Oil: I use extra-virgin olive oil, but you can also use coconut oil or avocado oil.
  • Vinegar: I love the slightly sweet tang of apple cider vinegar, but other options include rice vinegar, white wine vinegar, or red wine vinegar. The flavor profile will change based on what type of vinegar you use.
  • Sweetener: I like to use maple syrup to keep it vegan, but a touch of honey or agave could also work.
  • Seasonings: Go for a simple blend of ground cumin, sea salt, and black pepper.
  • Nuts and Seeds: I like a final sprinkle of sesame seeds, which I find adds a subtle crunch and nutty flavor. Other options include sunflower seeds, sliced almonds, or pumpkin seeds (raw pepitas).

Optional Add-Ins

  • Lemon juice or lime juice: A squeeze of fresh citrus juice is an easy way to brighten up this peeled carrot salad recipe. You can use this addition in place of the vinegar or in addition to vinegar.
  • Dijon mustard: To give the salad a little kick, add a very small amount, maybe about ½ teaspoons.
  • Soy sauce: To give this carrot salad an Asian twist, you can use soy sauce instead of salt.
  • Green onions: If you can’t imagine a salad without onions, a small amount of (¼ cup) chopped scallions would be a great addition.

How to Make Raw Carrot Salad?

This healthy carrot salad comes together in a few easy steps. Here’s how I like to make it:

A collage of images showing how to make raw carrot salad.
  1. Shred carrots: Cut off the ends of your carrots, then peel the outer skin with a vegetable peeler. Then, continue to slice them into carrot ribbons as evenly as possible. Transfer the sliced carrots to a large bowl.
  2. Make the dressing: Add the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper to a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake until combined.
  3. Toss: Drizzle the dressing over the shaved carrots and give it a gentle toss.
  4. Garnish: If using, sprinkle with chopped fresh parsley and sesame seeds. Serve cold or at room temperature.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

After testing the carrot salad with vinegar several times, we found the salad was better the next day, making it a great make-ahead recipe. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips for this raw carrot recipe:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the salad up to 1 day in advance and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. This gives a chance for all the flavors to marry together.
  • Storage: The dressed carrot salad will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Give it a good toss just before serving.
Person sprinkling fresh carrot salad with sesame seeds.

Serving Suggestions

According to dieticians, it is best to eat this cold carrot salad on an empty stomach to reap its benefits, which is why I usually eat it as a light lunch. That being said, it makes a great side dish with any of the following:

Aysegul’s Recipe Tips

If you look at the recipe below, you’ll see that this shaved carrot salad recipe is easy to make with minimal ingredients. However, we learned a few tips as we were testing this recipe.

  • Best way to slice carrots: I prefer to shred carrots lengthwise using a vegetable peeler to make this simple carrot salad. However, you can also use a julienne peeler for a more French-style salad, the large holes of a box grater, or the shredding blade on your food processor to achieve different textures.
  • Let it rest before serving: The natural sweetness of the carrots and dressing tastes better the longer they have a chance to mingle together, so I recommend making this grated carrot salad for at least a few hours, or up to two days, ahead of time.
  • Taste for seasoning: Start with the recommended amount of salt, pepper, and cumin, and then add more to your liking. I added a good dose of salt right before serving.

FAQs

How do you cut carrots for raw carrot salad?

First, cut off the ends, then peel away the outer skin. Then, slice evenly but thinly with a vegetable peeler, julienne peeler, large holes of a box grater, or the grating attachment on your food processor.

What are the benefits of raw carrot salad?

According to Dr. Ray Peat, the benefits of eating raw carrot salad regularly include improved digestive health and optimal liver and thyroid function. The fiber in raw carrots promotes bowel regularity and enhances digestion. Additionally, by aiding in the removal of excess estrogens and endotoxins, consuming this salad regularly helps reduce the burden on the liver, thereby supporting both liver and thyroid health.

If you make this Raw Carrot Salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a wonderful way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Raw Carrot Salad Recipe

Here's a Raw Carrot Salad that you can make in under 10 minutes. Vegan and gluten-free, this healthy salad is perfect for a light lunch or side dish with any of your main dishes.
Course Lunch, Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 72kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized carrots washed, ends trimmed (10 oz/287 g)
  • ½ cup parsley roughly chopped (can substitute with cilantro or mint)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil or coconut oil
  • 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or rice vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon sea salt or kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sesame seeds optional

Instructions

  • Using a vegetable peeler, peel the outer skin of your carrots. Then continue to to grate them into ribbons. Transfer them to a large salad bowl.
  • Add the parsley to the bowl.
  • Prepare the dressing: Place the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper in a mason jar. Put the lid on and shake. Set aside.
  • Drizzle the shaved carrots with the dressing and give it a gentle toss using tongs.
  • Sprinkle with sesame seeds, if using. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 3-4 cups of carrot salad, which is ideal for 4 servings as a side dish and 2 servings as a light meal. The nutritional values below are per serving (of 4.)
  • Slicing carrots: While I shave the carrots into ribbons, you can shred it using a box grater or a food processor.
  • Let it rest: If you have the time, let the salad rest in the fridge for a few hours before serving. Resting time allows the flavors to meld together and make it even more delicious.
  • Storage: You can store leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 72kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 619mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 8279IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/feed/ 3
Baked Ziti With Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/baked-ziti-roasted-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-ziti-roasted-eggplant/#comments Mon, 08 Apr 2024 13:27:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=13594 If you have been following me for a while, you know my love for eggplant. Over the years of writing…]]>

If you have been following me for a while, you know my love for eggplant. Over the years of writing recipes for this website, I have shared plenty of delicious and Simple Eggplant Recipes. This easy eggplant-baked ziti is the newest to the collection. It takes cues from my Baked Eggplant Parm, and it is just as comforting.  So, if you are a fan of Italian classics with eggplant, read on.

And if you are in need of more vegetarian eggplant recipes for dinner, also check out my Easy Ratatouille recipe.

Baked ziti with eggplant garnished with basil from the top view.

Ingredients

This pasta recipe is made with simple ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store but most of which you probably already have on hand. Gather together:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: When selecting eggplants for this recipe, prioritize finding medium-sized ones with a shiny, dark purple exterior. Among the various types of eggplants available, I think globe, Italian, or graffiti eggplants are best suited for this eggplant ziti bake. You’d want to cut them into 1 to 1 ½ inch cubes for best results. If you are new to using eggplant in your cooking, be sure to check out my detailed post on How to Cut Eggplant for more information.
  • Olive oil: Go for extra-virgin olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Seasonings: A simple mix of Kosher salt, black pepper, and red pepper flakes allows the eggplant to shine.
  • Pasta: Stick to tradition with ziti, or try any short-cut tubular pasta like penne or rigatoni. Opt for your favorite gluten-free pasta to keep it gluten-free friendly.
  • Tomato sauce: I used my Homemade Tomato Basil Sauce, which I always have in the freezer, but any jarred tomato sauce or marinara sauce will do.
  • Ricotta cheese: If you are feeling ambitious, you can make Homemade Ricotta Cheese, or simply buy it from the store or your local Italian market. I prefer full-fat, whole-milk ricotta cheese, but low-fat will also work.
  • Fresh basil: I used basil in both the ricotta mixture and for garnish. Fresh parsley would be a nice addition, too.
  • Mozzarella cheese: You can buy pre-shredded mozzarella cheese or shred a block of low-moisture mozzarella at home. If you want even more depth of flavor, experiment with other cheeses like provolone, fontina, or Asiago. A sprinkle of grated Parmigiano-Reggiano cheese would also be a welcome addition.

How to Make Eggplant Ziti Bake?

While this baked ziti with roasted eggplant recipe uses eggplant cubes instead of slices, I used my Baked Eggplant Recipe to make the eggplant portion of this recipe. Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line two large baking sheets with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to roast eggplants and mix cooked pasta with tomato sauce.
  1. Prepare eggplant: Dice the eggplant and divide the eggplant cubes between the baking sheets. Drizzle with olive oil and season with salt, black pepper, and red pepper flakes (if using). Toss well and distribute into a single layer on the baking sheet.
  2. Bake eggplant: Roast the eggplant pieces in the oven for 30-35 minutes, turning the eggplant halfway through for even roasting. Set aside to cool. Do not turn the oven off. 
  3. Cook the pasta: When there are about 10-15 minutes left on the eggplant cooking time, place a large pot of water over high heat and bring to a boil. Generously season the boiling water with salt. Add the pasta to the large pot of boiling water and cook until al dente. Be sure to check the package directions, as the timing might differ depending on the brand. Mine took about 9-10 minutes.
  4. Mix pasta and sauce: When the pasta is ready, reserve 1 cup of the pasta water and drain. Place the hot pasta in a large bowl, add the tomato sauce, and toss, ensuring that the pasta is fully coated with the sauce. If needed, stir in some of the reserved pasta water to prevent it from sticking.
Person showing how to layer pasta with roasted aubergine and ricotta mixture.
  1. Make ricotta basil mix: In a small bowl, mix the ricotta and chopped basil. Season with salt and pepper.
  2. Begin to assemble: Spray a large oven-proof baking dish (9×13 inch) with vegetable oil cooking spray. Place half of the ziti and tomato sauce mixture at the bottom of the casserole dish. Then, spread half of the eggplant cubes evenly on top.
  3. Add cheese: Add half of the ricotta-basil mixture in dollops and sprinkle the whole thing with half of the shredded mozzarella.
  4. Finish the second layer: Repeat the same steps, starting with the remaining pasta mixture, remaining eggplant cubes, and ricotta. Finish it off with a final layer of cheese.
  5. Bake: Bake for 30-35 minutes, or until bubbly and the cheese on top is lightly golden brown.
  6. Serve: Rest for 10 minutes. When ready to serve, sprinkle it with fresh basil leaves, parmesan cheese, and a drizzle of olive oil, if desired. Enjoy!

How to Make Ahead, Store, & Freeze?

Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips to ensure all your efforts don’t go to waste when making this eggplant ziti recipe:

  • Make Ahead: Follow the recipe as written and make ahead up to 2 days in advance. Just make sure to bring it to room temperature, cover it tightly with plastic wrap or aluminum foil, and store it in the refrigerator.
  • Storage: Leftover eggplant baked ziti will keep in an airtight container in the fridge, either stored as a whole or cut into individual servings for easy serving, for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: While I don’t necessarily recommend freezing, you can freeze the baked pasta in a freezer-safe container for up to 1 month. But for best results, I recommend making a batch and freezing before baking. Keep in mind that the pasta will lose some of its texture and become mushy once thawed.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen baked eggplant ziti (either baked or unbaked) overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: If you are reheating leftovers, reheat in a 350-degree F oven for 15-20 minutes. If reheating frozen then thawed, follow the recipe instructions as written and bake in a 350-degree F oven for 30-35 minutes.

What to Serve it With?

Roasted eggplant with ziti is delicious all on its own, but there are plenty of ways to serve it that complement the comforting, cheesy Italian flavors. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things to keep in mind. Here are some of my expert tips on how to make the best-baked ziti with eggplant:

  • Cooking eggplant: While I love roasting eggplant in the oven, you can use other cooking methods. If you have an air fryer, cooking Eggplant in Air Fryer is quicker. If you don’t, try my Pan Fried Eggplant. All you need is a skillet and 15 minutes of your time.
  • Don’t overcook the pasta: Cook the pasta according to the package directions, just until al dente, since the pasta is going to absorb moisture from the sauce and continue to cook in the oven.
  • Mix the pasta with the sauce: A key step in outstanding baked ziti is to mix the pasta with the tomato sauce in a large bowl before layering. You might think of it as an extra step but I promise it makes a difference in the overall taste, texture, and creaminess.
  • Season as you go: As with most layered baked pasta recipes, this recipe has multiple steps and components, so it is important to season the eggplant, sauce, pasta, and ricotta cheese as you go. Feel free to use the recipe below as a starting place and adjust the seasoning based on your taste buds and dietary restrictions.

FAQs

Should you bake ziti covered or uncovered?

I love baking ziti uncovered, as this helps some of the moisture evaporate in the oven, resulting in crispy pasta edges and a golden brown color.

What’s the difference between lasagna and baked pasta?

Lasagna is made with full lasagna sheets and sometimes a bechamel sauce, which is a bit more labor intensive as you have to be deliberate about layering the pasta, sauce, and cheese in equal amounts. Baked ziti, on the other hand, is the easier approach that requires a simple toss of the pasta with the sauce, then a quick addition of ricotta and mozzarella cheese.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Baked Ziti with Eggplant recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Baked Ziti with Eggplant fresh out of the oven from the top view.
Print

Baked Ziti with Eggplant Recipe

This baked ziti with eggplant recipe is a vegetarian weeknight pasta dish layered with roasted eggplant, homemade tomato basil sauce, and ricotta cheese. The definition of comfort food, this pasta dinner is perfect with a green salad on the side or a side dish with any of your meat dishes.
Course Main Dish
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 445kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Eggplant:

  • 2 medium-sized globe eggplants cut into 1-inch cubes – 1 lbs each
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon dried red pepper flakes optional

For the Baked Ziti:

  • 16 ounces ziti pasta or any other tubular pasta
  • vegetable spray
  • 2 cups homemade tomato-basil sauce* divided
  • 1 ½ cups whole milk ricotta
  • ½ cup fresh basil leaves chopped – plus more as garnish
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups shredded mozzarella

Instructions

  • For the Roasted Eggplant: Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
  • Divide the eggplant cubes among the baking sheets. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle them with salt, black pepper, and red pepper flakes (if using). Toss them well to ensure that they are distributed evenly and in a single layer.
  • Roast in the oven for 30-35 minutes, turning the eggplant halfway through for even roasting. Set aside to cool. Do not turn the oven off.
  • Meanwhile, cook the pasta. Ten to fifteen minutes before the eggplant is ready, bring a large pot of water to a boil. Season the pasta water generously with salt. Add the pasta and cook until it is al dente. Timing might differ depending on the brand you use, so be sure to check the instructions on the packaging. Mine took about 9-10 minutes.
  • Reserve 1 cup of the pasta water. Then drain the pasta, and place it in a large bowl. Pour the tomato sauce into the bowl and toss to combine, ensuring that the pasta is fully coated with the sauce. If the pasta sticks, feel free to use some of the reserved pasta water to keep it moist.
  • In a separate small bowl, mix together the ricotta and chopped basil. Season with kosher salt and black pepper.
  • To assemble, spray a large oven-proof casserole dish (9X13 is ideal) with vegetable spray and oil on the sides of the dish.
  • Place half of the ziti and tomato sauce mixture at the bottom of the casserole dish. Spread half of the baked eggplant cubes evenly on top.
  • Add half of the ricotta-basil mixture on top in dollops.
  • Sprinkle the whole thing with half of the shredded mozzarella.
  • Repeat the same steps for the second layer, starting with the rest of the ziti, eggplant cubes, and ricotta. Finish it off with an even sprinkling of the remaining mozzarella cheese.
  • Bake for 30-35 minutes or until it is bubbly and the cheese on top is lightly browned.
  • When ready to serve, sprinkle it with fresh basil leaves. Serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a large casserole dish (9X13) baked ziti, which is ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Tomato Sauce: While I used homemade tomato sauce, your favorite store-bought tomato or marinara sauce would perfectly work in this recipe. 
  • Storage: Like any pasta dish, this baked ziti is best served the day it is baked. However, you can store the leftovers in the fridge in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: While I don’t necessarily recommend freezing, you can freeze the baked pasta in a freezer-safe container for up to 1 month. But for best results, I recommend making a batch and freezing before baking. Thaw the frozen baked eggplant ziti (either baked or unbaked) overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: If you are reheating leftovers, reheat in a 350-degree F oven for 15-20 minutes. If reheating frozen then thawed, follow the recipe instructions as written and bake in a 350-degree F oven for 30-35 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 445kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 759mg | Potassium: 643mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 739IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 237mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-ziti-roasted-eggplant/feed/ 17
Roast Rack of Lamb with Garlic and Rosemary https://foolproofliving.com/roast-rack-of-lamb/ https://foolproofliving.com/roast-rack-of-lamb/#comments Mon, 25 Mar 2024 17:44:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74427 This roasted rack of lamb recipe is undeniably delectable, with a succulent interior and crisp, flavorful exterior. If you want…]]>

This roasted rack of lamb recipe is undeniably delectable, with a succulent interior and crisp, flavorful exterior. If you want even more of the earthy, robust taste of lamb, you’re in luck!

Grilled Rack of Lamb brings an incomparable smokiness to this meat, giving you the ultimate cookout menu. Or, if you want a more hands-off cooking method, my Pressure Cooker Lamb Shanks will give you fall-off-the-bone meat, finished with a red wine gravy that will have everyone at the table asking for seconds.

Roasted rack of lamb garnished with rosemary.

Ingredients

This recipe for rack of lamb uses a handful of simple ingredients to achieve its bold, succulent taste. To make your cooking even easier, I’ve also created an herb crust that doubles as a quick marinade, cutting your prep time in half.

Rack of Lamb

I used two whole Frenched racks of lamb for this recipe, each weighing about 1 – 1 ½ lbs.—the perfect portion size for four people. I usually buy this cut from Costco, which tends to sell Australian racks of lamb, though you may also purchase American (AKA domestic-grown) lamb if preferred. 

Furthermore, I also used a French-trimmed rack of lamb, which refers to the removal of the excess meat and cartilage from the rack’s bones, thereby exposing their ends. Though this trimming process doesn’t affect the lamb’s overall taste or cooking, it does result in a cleaner, more professional presentation, and it makes it easier to locate where to cut during the slicing process. 

If your local butcher hasn’t already done so, they can French-trim your meat, or you can do it yourself

Person trimming the fat of Frenched rack of lamb.

When preparing the rack of lamb for roasting, consider trimming the excess fat (known as the fat cap) from the top. While this is an optional step, during our recipe testing, I’ve learned that leaving all the fat on can result in a rack of lamb that feels too greasy. 

A sharp knife will do the job nicely, allowing you to remove some of the extra fat and the silver skin. With that being said, it is important not to remove all the fat, as keeping some ensures the lamb remains juicy and flavorful.

Person scoring fat cap in crosshatch pattern with a knife.

Alternatively, you can leave the fat cap on. However, if you do so, I recommend scoring the meat using a sharp chef’s knife. To do so, gently slice through the fat to create a crosshatch pattern, being careful not to penetrate the meat itself.

This technique not only aids in the adherence of the marinade but also facilitates the rendering of fat during cooking. As a result, your roasted rack of lamb remains juicy and succulent.

Marinade Ingredients

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Vegetable oil: Because this recipe requires you to roast your lamb at high temperatures, select an oil with a high smoke point, such as olive oil (you can use extra virgin olive oil if that is all you have) or ghee.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: To give your roast lamb rack a deliciously robust, buttery taste, you’ll need about two tablespoons of pressed garlic, which is about 4 medium-sized cloves of garlic. However, be sure to use either pressed or extra-finely minced garlic, as larger chunks will burn in the high-heat oven. In a pinch, you may use garlic powder instead, but I found that fresh varieties had a deeper, more complex flavor.
  • Fresh rosemary: One tablespoon of fresh rosemary is all you need to ensure your lamb’s crust has an aromatic infusion of woodsy, herbaceous flavors. I recommend finely chopping your rosemary before adding it to your seasoning mixture. This way, it can better release its flavor and coat your lamb rack more evenly.
  • Fresh parsley: Colorful, fresh, and light, fresh parsley is one of my favorite ways to balance the stronger flavors of this lamb marinade. You’ll need one cup of loosely packed fresh parsley, which yields about ¼ cup of finely chopped parsley.
  • Lemon zest and juice: These citrusy ingredients lend this garlic-crusted rack of lamb bright, zesty undertones—but that’s not all! Lemon also does wonders for tamping down any gamey flavor in your lamb, leaving it with a fresh yet savory finish.
  • Kosher salt and black pepper

Other Seasoning Options

Though I use a garlic-rosemary marinade to season my lamb rack, there are many other flavor combinations to try! Below are a few foolproof flavorings that will give your recipe a smoky, spicy, or zesty finish.

  • Dry rub: Looking for a tasty dry rub for your rack of lamb? You can easily make a Mediterranean rack of lamb using my Mediterranean Spice Blend, which expertly balances bright and earthy flavors of natural ingredients like oregano, dill weed, and basil. Or, if you’re in the mood for a spicy-sweet profile, Middle Eastern 7 Spice comes together in just five minutes with delicious additions like cumin, nutmeg, and ground cinnamon.
  • Other fresh herbs: If you can’t get fresh rosemary, feel free to experiment with other fresh herbs. I also like fresh thyme in this recipe.
  • Mustard: Tangy with a spicy finish, mustard is a great addition to the basic marinade we are using here. If you prefer to make your rack of lamb recipe with mustard, add one tablespoon of Dijon mustard to the marinade for a bold burst of flavor.

How to Roast Rack of Lamb in Oven?

If you want to look like a gourmet chef without spending hours in the kitchen, roasting a rack of lamb in the oven is the way to go! These step-by-step instructions will guide you through this super-easy recipe, ensuring your lamb is as flavorful, tender, and juicy as possible.

Person showing how to prepare and marinade rack of lamb for roasting.
  1. Prepare the rack of lamb: Use paper towels to pat dry all sides of the meat, then season the lamb rack by sprinkling its entire surface with kosher salt and pepper. (Please note, too, that washing your lamb before cooking is unnecessary, as the rinsing process may spread unwanted bacteria, and the oven’s high heat will kill off the meat’s bacteria naturally.)
  2. Prepare the marinade: In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil, garlic, rosemary, parsley, lemon zest, and lemon juice. Set the mixture aside.
  3. Marinate the rack of lamb: Spread the wet rub over the lamb’s top “fat cap” and sides, then cover it loosely with stretch film. Let the coated rack sit on the counter for 30-60 minutes. Alternatively, transfer the coated meat to an airtight container, place it in the refrigerator, and let it marinate overnight.
  4. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. (230 degrees C.). Then, line a baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
Marinated rack of lamb before and after it is baked in the oven in a collage of images.
  1. Arrange the lamb: Place the marinated rack of lamb on the baking sheet with the fat cap facing up.
  2. Roast: Bake the marinated rack of lamb for 18-20 minutes until the internal temperature at the thickest part of the meat reaches 125 degrees F. for medium rare, 21-24 minutes for 135 degrees F. for medium, or 25-27 minutes for 145 degrees F. for medium-well. Keep in mind that—as the meat rests—it will continue cooking, usually increasing the internal temperature by 4-5 degrees F.
  3. Let the lamb rest: Remove the meat from the oven and let it rest under a loose tent of tin foil for 10-15 minutes.
Person cutting roasted rosemary garlic rack of lamb into lamb chops.
  1. Slice and serve: For slicing your herb-crusted rack of lamb with ease, it’s best to begin cutting from the backside. Cutting from the front often meets with resistance. Place the roasted rack on a cutting board with the meat side down and the ribs pointing up. Make a preliminary cut in between the bases of the rib bones using a sharp knife. When you flip the rack over and stand it vertically for slicing, you will find your knife glides through the ribs effortlessly without any resistance. As a result, you end up with smooth and clean cuts for beautifully presented lamb chops. Once sliced, transfer the baked lamb rack to a serving platter and enjoy!

Rack of Lamb Oven Cooking Times and Temperature Chart

Wondering how long to roast a rack of lamb in the oven? You’re not alone! Cooking meat in the oven might seem tricky, given the carry-over cooking, resting time, and temperature-gauging techniques necessary. Follow our pointers below to cook the perfect rack of lamb regardless of your doneness level.

Before we talk about the ideal cooking time and temperature, there are three important things to keep in mind:

  • Weight of the cut: As you begin thinking about your ideal rack of lamb cooking time, I encourage you to consider the weight of your cut first. For this recipe, I used two racks of lamb, each weighing about 1 – 1 ½  lbs., and I roasted them for 18-25 minutes at 450 degrees F. (depending on the level of doneness.) However, because there’s a direct correlation between cooking time and weight, if you have a lighter or heavier cut, you should adjust your timing accordingly.
  • Carry-over cooking: Keep in mind that your meat will continue to cook once you remove it from the oven. This process, often called “carry-over cooking,” will raise your lamb’s internal temperature by 4-5 degrees F. after it’s out of the oven. Therefore, I recommend removing the rack of lamb from the oven when its internal temperature reaches 4-5 degrees F. below your ideal final temperature.
  • Oven temperature: In terms of what temperature to cook a rack of lamb, I found that a high-heat oven—450 degrees F.—is the way to go. This high heat ensures that the outer edge of the lamb cooks to a crisp crust while also thoroughly roasting the body of the meat.

Below, you’ll find a chart in which I detail the rack of lamb cooking temperatures and times to achieve your ideal level of doneness. The USDA recommends cooking lamb to a minimum of 145 degrees F. (63 degrees C.) to ensure maximum food safety. However, you may adjust this temperature depending on how you like your meat, whether it be medium-rare, medium, or medium-well. 

No matter what level of doneness you’re aiming for, I highly encourage you to use an instant-read thermometer inserted into the center of the meat to get the most accurate gauge.

Level of DonenessApproximate Cooking Time at 450 degrees F.Pull Out When the Internal Temperature ReachesFinal Serving Temperature
Medium-rare18-20 minutes120-125 degrees F. (49-51 degrees C.)130 degrees F. (54 degrees F.)
Medium21-24 minutes130-135 degrees F. (54-57 degrees C.)140 degrees F. (60 degrees C.)
Medium-well25-27 minutes140-145 degrees F. (60-63 degrees C.)150 degrees F. (66 degrees C.)

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

This rosemary garlic lamb rack is a weeknight must, given its delicious flavor and effortless prep. However, if you want to save this tasty dish for later, these storage tips will ensure your meal prep game is on point.

  • Make ahead: To get a headstart on this recipe, start by seasoning and marinating the meat up to 24 hours in advance. You can then store your lamb in the refrigerator in either an airtight container or a Ziplock bag with as much air removed as possible. Then, all you need to do is remove the meat from the fridge 30-60 minutes before cooking and roast the rack of lamb once it reaches near-room temperature.
  • Store: When storing the leftovers of this herb-crusted roast rack of lamb, I recommend keeping it unsliced to retain as much juice as possible—especially while reheating. However, if you’ve already cut your meat, that’s completely fine! Whether whole or sliced, you can store your meat in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: Some people prefer using a microwave to reheat the leftovers of a roast lamb rib rack. However, to ensure the most even, ideal temperature throughout your meat, I recommend heating it in a low-heat oven (275-300 degrees F.) for 5-10 minutes or until warmed to your liking.
  • Freeze: If you want to store your baked rack of lamb for longer, you can freeze it for 2-3 months. You can freeze it either whole or sliced, as long as you store it in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Then, thaw the frozen lamb overnight in the fridge and reheat it when you’re ready to eat.
Person cutting a garlic and herb crusted lamb rib rack with a knife.

What to Serve with Roasted Rack of Lamb?

The best rack of lamb recipe is one you can pair with dozens of other delicious sides and accompaniments. This tasty list contains all my favorites, from creamy dips to nutritious veggies.

  • Yogurt-based sauces: Creamy, light, and flavorful, yogurt-based sauces expertly counter the more robust, meatier base of this roasted lamb rack. Tzatziki and Yogurt Dill Sauce both offer a tangy, garden-fresh taste. Or, if you’re looking for more robust flavors, Mint Yogurt Sauce and Horseradish Yogurt Sauce have a bolder profile, offering fresh, spicy, and even tart undertones—with minimal prep time!
  • Mint sauce: British mint sauce is a classic pairing with a rack of lamb. This iconic combination helps cut through the richness of the lamb, cleansing the palate and enhancing the overall taste of the dish. Alternatively, you can also serve it with Mint Chimichurri Sauce for another herby twist.
  • Butter sauces: If you want to take this easy recipe for a rack of lamb to the next level, the solution is clear: butter! Rich, creamy, and decadent, my Baked Garlic Butter offers a delectable spread you’ll want to spread on everything from roasted meats to crusty breads. If you’re in the mood for a saucier recipe, my Butter Garlic Sauce takes less than ten minutes to make and infuses each bite with a full-bodied, herby-yet-sumptuous taste.
  • Potatoes: One of the greatest ways to transform this lamb rib roast recipe into a full menu is by serving it alongside a hearty plate of potatoes. Air Fryer Baby Red Potatoes are a rustic and savory side that makes for a highly servable, picture-perfect spread. Otherwise, my Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are a no-brainer for anyone in the mood for a luscious, smooth, and buttery side you’ll want to spoon right out of the pot.
  • Vegetables: If you prefer a lighter side dish, Roasted Asparagus offers a tender, garlicky side bursting with fresh green color, while Sauteed Eggplant is a simple, twenty-minute side that you can customize with cheesy, herby, or oniony additions. In fact, any of my eggplant recipes would compliment this rosemary garlic rack of lamb, whether you’re looking for a fresh, savory, crispy, or gooey dish.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this Frenched lamb rack is pretty straightforward, during our recipe testing, I learned a few things that I think will help you as you make your own and get perfect results on your first try. 

  • Remove meat from the fridge 30 minutes before cooking: Whenever you’re cooking meat, it’s a best practice to let it come closer to room temperature before putting it in the oven. This pre-roast resting time ensures the entire cut warms evenly so the colder insides aren’t undercooked. If you add my rack of lamb marinade to the meat and let it sit on the counter for 30-60 minutes before cooking, you don’t need to worry about this step. However, if you let your lamb marinate overnight in the refrigerator, I recommend removing it from the fridge at least 30 to 60 minutes in advance.
  • Chop herbs and garlic finely: During the recipe testing, as I tried to create the perfect marinade for a rack of lamb, I learned that it is important to chop everything as finely as possible. This is especially important when it comes to garlic. If you leave big pieces of garlic in the marinade, they can burn easily when cooked in a very hot oven. Therefore, I recommend chopping both the herbs and garlic as finely as possible before mixing them with oil and spreading them on the lamb rack. If chopping by hand sounds like too much work, and if you own one, you can use a mini food processor instead.
  • Use a meat thermometer: The best way to tell a rack of lamb’s doneness is to use a meat thermometer, as it will accurately and precisely tell you your meat’s internal temperature. To effectively use a meat thermometer on a rack of lamb, slide the probe deep into the center of the meat, being sure to avoid touching the bones.
  • Let it rest: As with other high-end cuts like Prime Rib and Beef Tenderloin, resting time is critical to getting the best temperature, flavor, and juiciness from your oven-baked rack of lamb. After you remove the meat from the oven, cover it loosely with a tent of aluminum foil for 10-15 minutes. Firstly, this time will allow the lamb’s juices to redistribute throughout the meat, ensuring maximum succulence. Plus, resting will ensure the meat reaches your desired temperature, as the carry-over heat from the oven will continue cooking the meat, raising its temperature to your preferred doneness.
  • Searing rack of lamb: If you’ve looked at other recipes for lamb, you might have noticed that some people suggest first searing the rack of lamb on the stove and then finishing it in the oven. Some even do it the other way around, using a reverse-sear method. While those are good ways to cook lamb, I found that pan-searing was an unnecessary step. Roasting the room-temperature lamb in a high-temperature oven for a short period of time worked well and delivered a perfectly cooked herb-crusted rack of lamb.
  • Broiling: When testing this recipe, I didn’t find broiling the rack of lamb necessary, as the lamb’s fat cap already results in a nice crust when baked in a high-heat oven. However, if you want to make this crust even more pronounced, you may broil your roast during the final 1-2 minutes of its roasting time.

FAQs

Should a rack of lamb be roasted fat side up or down?

I recommend cooking a rack of lamb in the oven with the fat side facing up. This way, the fat has greater exposure to the oven’s heat, resulting in a crispier, more luscious crust, and the top fat cap will also help protect the meat from overcooking.

How long to cook a rack of lamb at 450 degrees F.?

When baking a rack of lamb, it’s important to note how large your cut is, as cooking time depends upon how much meat is on each rack. That said, I roasted my two racks of lamb for 20-25 minutes at 450 degrees F., as they were about 1 – 1¼ lbs. each. However, this time may also change depending on whether you want your lamb medium-rare, medium, or medium-well.

Other Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this garlic-crusted roasted rack of lamb recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roast rack of lamb cut into chops and placed on a serving platter.
Print

Roast Rack of Lamb Recipe with Garlic and Rosemary

Make this Garlic and herb-crusted roasted rack of lamb recipe for a show-stopping Easter dinner, Christmas feast, or a simple Tuesday meal. First, marinate Frenched lamb racks with a garlic and rosemary marinade and then roast them in the oven. With only 20 minutes of hands-on time, this recipe is surprisingly easy to make.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 412kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 racks lamb Frenched – 1 to 1 ½ pounds each – trimmed off fat*
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed (~ 2 tablespoons)
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary minced
  • 1 cup parsley finely chopped, loosely packed
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice

Instructions

  • Pat dry all sides of the racks of lamb. Sprinkle the kosher salt and pepper over all sides of the lamb meat.
  • To make the marinade, combine olive oil, garlic, rosemary, parsley, lemon zest, and juice in a small bowl.
  • Spread the herb mixture on the top and sides of the frenched lamb racks. There is no need to put any marinade on the back side.
  • Cover loosely with stretch film and let it sit on the counter for 30 to 60 minutes. Alternatively, you can place the rack of lamb in an airtight container and let it marinate overnight.
  • When ready to roast, preheat the oven to 450 degrees F (230 C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
  • Place the racks of lamb with the fat cap up on the baking sheet.
  • Roast until it reaches your desired level of doneness. For medium rare, cook it until the internal temperature of the thickest part of the meat registers 125 degrees F. for 18-20 minutes. For medium, cook it until it registers 135 degrees F, 21-24 minutes. And for medium-well, roast it until it registers 145 degrees F, 25-27 degrees F. Keep in mind that there will be 4-5 degrees carryover cooking while resting, which will help the lamb reach its ideal temperature based on your doneness preference.
  • Loosely tent with foil and let it rest for 10-15 minutes.
  • When ready to slice, it’s best to begin cutting from the backside. Cutting from the front often meets with resistance. To do so, position the rack with the meat side down and the ribs pointing up. Make a preliminary cut in between the bases of the rib bones. Flip the rack over and stand it vertically. Your knife should glide through the ribs without any resistance.
  • Transfer the lamb chops onto a serving platter and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: Each lamb rack includes eight chops, which is ideal for four adults, each having four chops. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Trimming: I recommend trimming some of the fat on the fat cap using a sharp knife. The blog post contains more information and how-to photos about this, should you need them.
  • The weight of the lamb racks: For best results, purchase a Frenched rack of lambs that are equal in size (as much as possible.) Also, keep in mind that you’ll lose some of the weight after trimming it.
  • Make ahead: To get a headstart on this recipe, start by seasoning and marinating the meat up to 24 hours in advance. You can then store your lamb in the refrigerator in either an airtight container or a Ziplock bag with as much air removed as possible. Then, all you need to do is remove the meat from the fridge 30-60 minutes before cooking and roast the rack of lamb once it reaches near-room temperature.
  • Store: When storing the leftovers, I recommend keeping them unsliced to retain as much juice as possible—especially while reheating. However, if you’ve already cut your meat, that’s okay. Whether whole or sliced, you can store your meat in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: I recommend heating the leftovers in a low-heat oven (275-300 degrees F.) for 5-10 minutes or until warmed to your liking.
  • Freeze: You can freeze the leftovers either as a whole or sliced. Place them in a freezer bag, remove as much air as possible and store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Then, thaw the frozen lamb overnight in the fridge and reheat it when you’re ready to eat.

Nutrition

Calories: 412kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 93g | Saturated Fat: 39g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 40g | Cholesterol: 189mg | Sodium: 730mg | Potassium: 578mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 1280IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roast-rack-of-lamb/feed/ 4